HP LaserJet 8100, 8150 Series Service Manual. Www.s Manuals.com. Manual

User Manual: Laser Printer HP LaserJet 8100 - Service manuals and Schematics, Disassembly / Assembly. Free.

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 844 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

copyright © 2000
Hewlett-Packard Company
printed in USA
english
service manual
hp
print systems and paper
handling devices
LaserJet
8100 and 8150
printed on at least 50% total recycled fiber
with at least 10% post-consumer paper
*C4265-90907*
*C4265-90907*
C4265-90907
HP LaserJet 8150 and 8100
Series Print Systems and Paper
Handling Devices
Service Manual _____________
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Company, 2000
All Rights Reserved.
Reproduction, adaptation, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except
as allowed under the copyright
laws.
Part number: C4265-90907
First Edition, November 2000
Warranty
The information contained in
this document is subject to
change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no
warranty of any kind with
respect to this information.
HEWLETT-PACKARD
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, or
other damage alleged in
connection with the furnishing or
use of this information.
Trademark Credits
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe
Systems Incorporated which
may be registered in certain
jurisdictions.
Arial is a U.S. registered
trademark of the Monotype
Corporation.
CompuServeTM is a U.S.
trademark of CompuServe, Inc.
ENERGY STAR is a U.S.
registered service mark of the
United States Environmental
Protection Agency.
Microsoft® is a U.S. registered
trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
PA N TO N E ® Pantone, Inc.’s
check-standard trademark for
color.
PostScript is a trademark of
Adobe Systems, Incorporated,
which may be registered in
certain jurisdictions.
TrueType is a U.S. trademark of
Apple Computer, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark
in the United States and other
countries, licensed exclusively
through X/Open Company
Limited.
Windows, MS Windows, and
Windows NT are U.S. registered
trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
C4265-90907 iii
Conventions
This is a combined Service Manual for both the HP LaserJet 8100 series printer and
the HP LaserJet 8150 series printer. The HP LaserJet 8150 series printer shares most
characteristics of the HP LaserJet 8100 series printer, except where stated.
This manual uses the following conventions:
Color is used to emphasize items that are important to the material under discussion.
Bold is used for emphasis, particularly in situations where italic type would be
confusing.
Italic type is used to indicate related documents or emphasis.
DISPLAY type indicates text as seen on the printer control panel display.
Commands you use on a computer keyboard or on the printer control panel are
shown in KEYCAP. Two examples are SELECT, and - VALUE +.
COURIER type indicates text that you type on a computer keyboard exactly as shown.
Hint Hints are used to suggest an action that might simplify the process.
Note Notes contain important information set off from the text.
CAUTION Caution messages alert you to the possibility of damage to equipment
or loss of data.
WARNING! Warning messages alert you to the possibility of personal injury.
iv C4265-90907
C4265-90907 Table of Contents i
Table of Contents
.1 Product Information
Printer Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Features of the HP Digital Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
External View of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
External View of HP Digital Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Model and Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Determining Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Paper Capacities and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Printer and Paper-handling Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Media Selection Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Printer Media Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Service Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Ordering Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Exchange Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Toner Cartridge Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Refilled Toner Cartridges and Non-HP Staple Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Recycling Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
World Wide Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line (US Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Other Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
FCC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Environmental Product Stewardship. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Material Safety Data Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Environmental Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Declarations of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safety Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ii Table of Contents C4265-90907
2 Site Requirements
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Printer and Paper-handling Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Copy Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3 Operating Overview
Using the Printer Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Control Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Settings and Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Printer Driver Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Paper Source Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Performing a Cold Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Setting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Printer Control Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
HP LaserJet 8100 Series Quick Copy Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
HP LaserJet 8150 Series Quick Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
HP LaserJet 8150 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Paper Handling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Print Quality Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Configuration of MBM Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
EIO Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Duplex Registration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Resets Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
HP Digital Copier Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
HP Digital Copier Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Loading Documents into the ADF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Loading Documents onto the Flatbed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Printer Service Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Setting Page Count, Maintenance Count,
and Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
HP Digital Copier Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
HP Digital Copier Administrator Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Remote Upgrade of the Printer Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
C4265-90907 iii
Testing the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Paper Path Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4 Maintenance and Adjustments
Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Cleaning Spilled Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cleaning the HP Digital Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Vacuum Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cleaning ADF and Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass . . . 162
Cleaning the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Copy Module Optics Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Cleaning the ADF Lamp and Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Lubricating the ADF Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Cleaning the Carrier Unit and Mechanical Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Lubricating the Carrier Unit Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Lubricating the Top of the Carrier Guide Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Lubricating the Flatbed Motor Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Cleaning the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Maintaining the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Maintaining the Copy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
HP Digital Copier Maintenance Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Adjusting Printer Input Trays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Adjusting for Edge-to-Edge Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Adjusting Input Trays for Normal Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Adjusting the 2000-sheet Printer Input Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Adjusting Duplex Registration of the Paper Trays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Adjusting the Copy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Types of Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
When to Calibrate or Adjust the Copy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Calibration Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Entering the Calibration Menu in Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
How to Perform an Offset Adjustment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
How to Perform a Density Calibration Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
How to Perform an ADF Vertical Magnification Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
iv Table of Contents C4265-90907
5 Functional Overview
Printer Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Power Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
AC Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Overcurrent/Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
High Voltage Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Formatter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
DC Controller System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Laser and Scanner Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Paper Motion Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Engine Test Microswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Image Formation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Drum Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Drum Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Image Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Image Developing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Image Transferring and Media Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Image Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Paper Paths and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Printer, Duplexer, and Envelope Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Paper Size Switches (Trays 2 and 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Printing from Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Printing from Trays 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Printing from the Envelope Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Printing with the Duplexer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
2000-Sheet Input Tray Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
8-bin Mailbox Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8-bin Mailbox Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Finisher Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Stapler Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Main Functional Cycles of the Stapler (Internal Paper Path) . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Communication Link (Daisy Chain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Paper Jam Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Printer Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Copy Module Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Copy Module System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Function and Layout of the Copy Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
C4265-90907 v
Copy Module Power Up Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Copy Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Copy Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Printer components of copy module power up process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Notes About the MFP Printer Product ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
ADF Simplex Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
ADF Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Flatbed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Copy Module Image Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Communication with the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Communication Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Print Job Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Paper Path and Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6 Removal and Replacement
Removal and Replacement Strategy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
User Installable Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Hardware Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Delivery Unit (for Face-down Bin). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Diverter Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Diverter Door Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Lower Right Door Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fan 1, Laser/Scanner and Housing (Exhaust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply (Exhaust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Fan 3, Formatter Fan and Housing (Intake) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Fan 4, Delivery Unit (Exhaust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Fan 5, Tray 1 (Intake) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Feeder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Formatter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Fusing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Laser/Scanner Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Main Gear Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Main Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Paper Input Unit (PIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
PCA, DC Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Output Paper Sensor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Registration Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
vi Table of Contents C4265-90907
Tray 1 Feed Roller and Separation Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Tray 2 and 3 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Registration Sensor (PS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Face-up Solenoid Assembly (SL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Transfer Roller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Left Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Right Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Main Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Main Cable Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Front LED PCA Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Pickup Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Paper Quantity Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Paper Size Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Tension Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Locating Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Casters and Stabilizing Feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Adjustable Foot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Orientation of the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Left Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Right Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Front Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Trays 4 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Pickup Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Paper Deck Drive Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Tray-Size Sensing PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Main Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Storage Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Front Door (Storage Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip (Stabilizing Feet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
C4265-90907 vii
Locating Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Front LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Envelope Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Face-down Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Empty Bin Sensor PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Face-up Sensors PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Reversing Mechanism Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Short Tray 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Solenoid Reversing Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Flipper Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Latching Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Cover Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Front and Back Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Paper Bins and Blind Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Flipper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Delivery Head Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Transport Belt Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Input Paper Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Metal Tape and Housing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Anticurl Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Delivery Head Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Interlock Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Diagnostic LED PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
User Status LED PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Adjustable and Fixed Casters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Attachment Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Back Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Stapler Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
viii Table of Contents C4265-90907
Top Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Stapler Bed Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Hinges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
HP Digital Copier Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Installing the HP Digital Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Install the Optional Output Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Install the Copy Connect EIO Board into the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Install the Copy Connect Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Hardware Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Orientation of the HP Digital Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Copy Module Maintenance Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Separation Pad Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Pick Roller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Copy Module Skins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Document Holding Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Paper Chute Flip-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Output Tray Flip-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Output Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Flatbed (FB) Cover Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
ADF Latch Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
ADF Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Front Panel Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Upper Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Copy Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Power Supply and Main Board Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
RFI Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Control PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Back PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Optical Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
ADF Lamp PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
ADF Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Sensor Unit Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
ADF Motor Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
ADF Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
LED Assembly PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
ADF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Front Panel Frame Ground Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Output Tray Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Glass Plate Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
C4265-90907 ix
Home Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Carrier Unit Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Carrier Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Felt Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Frame Ground Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Front Lamp PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Junction PCA and Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Front Panel Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Carrier Belt and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
7 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Printer System Troubleshooting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Printer/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Copy Module Troubleshooting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Troubleshooting the Print System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Preliminary Operating Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Interface Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Verify Host System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Verify Network and Server Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
General Troubleshooting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Paper Curl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Troubleshooting the Printer and Paper-handling Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Engine Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Event Log Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Printer Message Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Engine Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Input Device Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Output Device Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Finisher Devices Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Paper Handling Controller Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Paper Path Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Menu Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Configuration Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
File Directory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Usage Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Check the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Image Quality Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Repetitive Defect Ruler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Image System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
High-Voltage Power Supply Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
x Table of Contents C4265-90907
Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
2000-sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
8-bin Mailbox Standalone Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Troubleshooting the Copy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Testing the Copy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Copy Processor LED Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Copy Module Offline Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Other Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Service Mode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
8 Parts and Diagrams
How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Ordering Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Common Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Illustrations and Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Printer and paper-handling components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Printer Parts and Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Index
C4265-90907 List of Tables xi
List of Tables
Table 1-1. Common features of the HP LaserJet 8100 Series and the
HP LaserJet 8150 Series - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 26
Table 1-2. Comparison of HP LaserJet 8100 Series Printer Features - - - - 27
Table 1-3. Comparison of HP LaserJet 8150 Series Printer Features - - - - 28
Table 1-4. Accessories and Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40
Table 1-5. Minimum Memory Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 49
Table 1-6. Paper Capacities and Sizes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
Table 1-7. Paper Weight Equivalence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55
Table 1-8. Declaration of Conformity (HP LaserJet 8100 series and
HP LaserJet 8150 series) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 72
Table 2-1. Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions - - - - - - 84
Table 2-2. Dimensions of printer and Paper-handling Devices - - - - - - - 85
Table 2-3. Dimensions of Output Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 86
Table 2-4. Electrical Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 87
Table 2-5. Acoustic Emissions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 88
Table 2-6. Specifications for Copy Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 89
Table 3-1. Control Panel Keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 92
Table 3-2. Indicator Lights - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 93
Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 97
Table 3-4. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Quick Copy Jobs Menu - - - - - - - - 101
Table 3-5. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu - - - - - - - 101
Table 3-6. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Job Retention Menu - - - - - - - - - - 102
Table 3-7. Information Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 104
Table 3-8. Paper Handling Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 105
Table 3-9. Print Quality Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 108
Table 3-10. Printing Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 110
Table 3-11. Configuration Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 113
Table 3-12. MBM Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 118
Table 3-13. I/O Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 119
Table 3-14. EIO Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 121
Table 3-15. Duplex Registration Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 123
Table 3-16. Resets Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 125
Table 3-17. Status Bar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127
Table 3-18. Menu Tabs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 128
Table 3-19. Context-sensitive Help - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 133
Table 3-20. Default Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 133
Table 3-21. Functions of Buttons and LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 134
Table 3-22. Start Button LED States- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 135
Table 3-23. Default Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136
Table 3-24. Service Mode Menu Items - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 141
Table 3-25. Key to Figure 3-5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 154
xii List of Tables C4265-90907
Table 3-26. Key to Figure 3-6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 155
Table 4-1. Cleaning the Printer- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 160
Table 4-2. Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and
Flatbed Glass- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 162
Table 4-3. Cleaning the ADF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 163
Table 5-1. Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans - - - - - 201
Table 5-2. Paper Size Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 203
Table 5-3. 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches
and Motors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 206
Table 5-4. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Quantity Switches - - - - - - - - - 208
Table 5-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size Switches - - - - - - - - - - - 208
Table 5-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, and Motors- - - - - 211
Table 5-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Switches- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 212
Table 5-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensors, Switches, and Motors - - - - - 215
Table 5-9. 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and
Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 221
Table 5-10. Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - 227
Table 5-11. Printer Timing- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 232
Table 5-12. Parallel Cable Pin Assignments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 234
Table 6-1. Hardware Table- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 262
Table 6-2. Hardware Table- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 487
Table 7-1. Paper Curl - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 581
Table 7-2. Power On Defects or Blank Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 582
Table 7-3. Fans - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 584
Table 7-4. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Event Log Page 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 587
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 596
Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - 608
Table 7-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - 612
Table 7-8. Envelope Feeder Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 615
Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - 617
Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 622
Table 7-11. Stapler Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 628
Table 7-12. Duplexer Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 631
Table 7-13. Paper Handling Controller Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - 632
Table 7-14. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions - - - - - - - - - 633
Table 7-15. Key to Figure 7-16 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 640
Table 7-16. Printer Devices Troubleshooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 648
Table 7-17. Image Quality- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 649
Table 7-18. Blank (White) Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 651
Table 7-19. Black Pages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 651
Table 7-20. Fading Print - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 652
Table 7-21. Dropout- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 654
Table 7-22. Black Lines (parallel or perpendicular to path) - - - - - - - - - - 654
Table 7-23. Toner Smear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 655
Table 7-24. Background Scatter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 656
Table 7-25. Repetitive Defects - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 657
Table 7-26. Line at Edge of Paper- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 658
C4265-90907 xiii
Table 7-27. Misshapen Characters, Voids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 659
Table 7-28. Faulty Registration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 660
Table 7-29. Image Skew - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 660
Table 7-30. Bubble Print - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 661
Table 7-31. White Stripes Parallel to Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 662
Table 7-32. Partial Blank Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 662
Table 7-33. Compressed Print- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 663
Table 7-34. Blank Portion in the Middle of the Page (Tray 4 Input only) - - - - 663
Table 7-35. DIP Switch Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 671
Table 7-36. 2000-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation- - - - - - - - - 672
Table 7-37. DIP Switch Settings for troubleshooting test procedures - - - - - 674
Table 7-38. Patterns of LED flashing (2-second pause between
each pattern) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 676
Table 7-39. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test - - - - - - - - - - - 677
Table 7-40. Patterns of Flashing LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 679
Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation - - - - - - - - - - - - - 685
Table 7-42. Power On Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 704
Table 7-43. Display and Communication Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 705
Table 7-44. Boot Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 707
Table 7-45. Equipment Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 708
Table 7-46. Temporary Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 710
Table 7-47. Error Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 713
Table 7-48. Copy Processor LED Test Results - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 717
Table 7-49. Icon Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 718
Table 7-50. Other Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 721
Table 8-1. Printer and Paper-Handling Components - - - - - - - - - - - - 728
Table 8-2. Printer Covers and Doors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 731
Table 8-3. Printer Internal Components (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 733
Table 8-4. Printer Internal Components (2 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 735
Table 8-5. Printer internal Components (3 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 737
Table 8-6. Printer Internal Components (4 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 739
Table 8-7. Detail of Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 741
Table 8-8. PCB Assembly Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 742
Table 8-9. Face-up Solenoid Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 743
Table 8-10. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 745
Table 8-11. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 747
Table 8-12. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components- - - - - - - - - - 749
Table 8-13. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - 752
Table 8-14. 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 755
Table 8-15. 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 757
Table 8-16. 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 759
Table 8-17. Stapler Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 761
Table 8-18. Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 764
Table 8-19. Flatbed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 765
Table 8-20. Glass Plate and PCA Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 767
Table 8-21. Carrier Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 769
Table 8-22. ADF Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 770
xiv List of Tables C4265-90907
Table 8-23. Optical Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 773
Table 8-24. Document Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 774
Table 8-25. Screws (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 775
Table 8-26. Screws (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 775
Table 8-27. Screws (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 776
Table 8-28. Screws (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 776
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices - - 777
Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 787
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices - - - 791
Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 801
C4265-90907 List of Figures xv
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Copy System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 29
Figure 1-2 Printer - Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open - - - - - - - - - - 31
Figure 1-3 Rear and Left Side View - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 33
Figure 1-4 Front view of HP Digital Copier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 34
Figure 1-5 Rear view of HP Digital Copier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 34
Figure 1-6 Preferred Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 35
Figure 1-7 Digital Copier Tabletop Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 36
Figure 1-8 Sample Model and Serial Number Label for the printer - - - - - - - - - 37
Figure 1-9 Paper Handling Devices and Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 38
Figure 1-10 Paper size specification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56
Figure 1-11 Paper orientation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 59
Figure 1-12 Areas of the Paper that Should Not Be Perforated - - - - - - - - - - - - 60
Figure 1-13 Sample 5% Page Coverage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62
Figure 2-1 Printer Space Requirements (Top view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
Figure 2-2 Printer Space Requirements (Side view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
Figure 2-3 Printer Space Requirements (with Mailbox and Input Device) - - - - 82
Figure 2-4 Printer and Copy Module Space requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 83
Figure 2-5 Dimensions of Paper Handling Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 87
Figure 3-1 Control Panel Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 92
Figure 3-2 Front Panel Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127
Figure 3-3 Button/LED Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 134
Figure 3-4 Copy Module Service Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 145
Figure 3-5 Configuration Page (varies with installed options)- - - - - - - - - - - - 154
Figure 3-6 Menu Map Page (varies with printer models and
installed options) 155
Figure 4-1 Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and
Flatbed Glass - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 162
Figure 4-2 Parts of the ADF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 163
Figure 4-3 Image Area Margins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 170
Figure 4-4 Tray Position Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 171
Figure 4-5 Tray 4 Position Adjustment- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 172
Figure 4-6 Creating an Offset Target- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 176
Figure 5-1 Printer Functional Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 180
Figure 5-2 Low Voltage Power Distribution System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 181
Figure 5-3 Low Voltage Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 182
Figure 5-4 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 184
Figure 5-5 Normal Mode vs. EconoMode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 187
Figure 5-6 Image Formation Block Diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 190
Figure 5-7 Photosensitive Drum - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 192
Figure 5-8 Drum Cleaning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 193
Figure 5-9 Primary Charging Roller- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 194
xvi List of Figures C4265-90907
Figure 5-10 Image Writing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 195
Figure 5-11 Image Development - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 198
Figure 5-12 Image Transferring and Media Separation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 199
Figure 5-13 Image Fusing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 200
Figure 5-14 Printer Paper Paths - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 201
Figure 5-15 Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans - - - - - - - 204
Figure 5-16 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 207
Figure 5-17 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches, and Motors - 209
Figure 5-18 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Paper Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 212
Figure 5-19 2 x 500-sheet input Tray Sensors and Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - 213
Figure 5-20 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 216
Figure 5-21 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 217
Figure 5-22 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 221
Figure 5-23 8-bin Mailbox Paper Path- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 222
Figure 5-24 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA- - - 224
Figure 5-25 Finisher Paper Path- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 228
Figure 5-26 Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 229
Figure 5-27 Stapler Cycles- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 232
Figure 5-28 Recommended C-link Configuration (Daisy Chain) - - - - - - - - - - - 234
Figure 5-29 General Timing Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 236
Figure 5-30 Copy Module System Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 238
Figure 5-31 Copy Processor and key components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 240
Figure 5-32 Image path (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 249
Figure 5-33 Locations of ADF Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 252
Figure 5-34 ADF Sensors functional diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 253
Figure 6-1 Phillips vs. Posidriv Screwdrivers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 257
Figure 6-2 Disk Drive- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 259
Figure 6-3 Control Panel (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 269
Figure 6-4 Control Panel (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 270
Figure 6-5 AC Access Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 272
Figure 6-6 Back Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 273
Figure 6-7 Front Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 274
Figure 6-8 Front Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 275
Figure 6-9 Left Lower Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 276
Figure 6-10 Top Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 277
Figure 6-11 Top Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 278
Figure 6-12 Delivery Unit (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 280
Figure 6-13 Delivery Unit (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 281
Figure 6-14 Diverter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 283
Figure 6-15 Diverter Door Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 284
Figure 6-16 Lower Right Door Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 285
Figure 6-17 Right Lower Door Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 286
Figure 6-18 Right Lower Door Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 287
Figure 6-19 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 288
Figure 6-20 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 289
Figure 6-21 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 290
Figure 6-22 Fan 3, Formatter Fan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 291
C4265-90907 xvii
Figure 6-23 Fan 4, Delivery Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 292
Figure 6-24 Fan 5 Removal (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 293
Figure 6-25 Fan 5 Removal (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 294
Figure 6-26 Tray 1 Removal (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 295
Figure 6-27 Tray 1 Removal (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 296
Figure 6-28 Tray 1 Removal (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 297
Figure 6-29 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 298
Figure 6-30 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 299
Figure 6-31 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 300
Figure 6-32 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 301
Figure 6-33 Feeder Assembly (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 302
Figure 6-34 Feeder Assembly (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 303
Figure 6-35 Formatter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 305
Figure 6-36 Fusing Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 306
Figure 6-37 Laser/Scanner Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 308
Figure 6-38 Main Gear Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 310
Figure 6-39 Main Gear Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 311
Figure 6-40 Main Gear Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 312
Figure 6-41 Main Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 313
Figure 6-42 Paper Input Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 314
Figure 6-43 DC Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 315
Figure 6-44 Output Paper Sensor PCA (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 316
Figure 6-45 Output Paper Sensor PCA (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 317
Figure 6-46 Output Paper Sensor PCA (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 318
Figure 6-47 Output Paper Sensor PCA (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 319
Figure 6-48 Paper Size PCA (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 320
Figure 6-49 Paper Size PCA (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 321
Figure 6-50 Paper Size PCA (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 322
Figure 6-51 High Voltage Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 323
Figure 6-52 Low Voltage Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 324
Figure 6-53 Registration Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 325
Figure 6-54 Registration Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 326
Figure 6-55 Registration Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 327
Figure 6-56 Tray 1 Feed Roller- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 328
Figure 6-57 Tray 1 Separation Pad- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 329
Figure 6-58 Tray 2 and 3, Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers - - - - - - - - - - 330
Figure 6-59 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 333
Figure 6-60 Registration Sensor (PS1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 335
Figure 6-61 Face-up Solenoid Assembly, SL3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 336
Figure 6-62 Transfer Roller Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 337
Figure 6-63 2000-sheet Input Tray Orientation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 342
Figure 6-64 2000-sheet Input Tray Front Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 343
Figure 6-65 2000-sheet Input Tray Back Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 344
Figure 6-66 2000-sheet Input Tray Left Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 345
Figure 6-67 2000-sheet Input Tray Right Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 346
Figure 6-68 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 347
Figure 6-69 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 349
xviii List of Figures C4265-90907
Figure 6-70 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Cable Harness - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 351
Figure 6-71 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 352
Figure 6-72 2000-sheet Input Tray Front LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 355
Figure 6-73 2000-sheet Input Tray Pickup Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 356
Figure 6-74 2000-sheet Input Tray Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 358
Figure 6-75 2000-sheet Input Tray Rollers: Pickup, Feed, and Separation - - - 361
Figure 6-76 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity
Switch (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 364
Figure 6-77 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch
Assemblies (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 365
Figure 6-78 2000-sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) - - - - - - - - - - 366
Figure 6-79 2000-sheet Input Tray Tension Springs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 368
Figure 6-80 2000-sheet Input Tray Locating Pins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 369
Figure 6-81 2000-sheet Input Tray Casters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 370
Figure 6-82 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustable Foot - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 371
Figure 6-83 Orientation of the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 373
Figure 6-84 Back Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 374
Figure 6-85 Left Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 375
Figure 6-86 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 376
Figure 6-87 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 377
Figure 6-88 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 378
Figure 6-89 Right Cover (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 379
Figure 6-90 Right Cover (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 380
Figure 6-91 Right Cover (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 381
Figure 6-92 Front Top Cover (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 382
Figure 6-93 Front Top Cover (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 383
Figure 6-94 Front Top Cover (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 384
Figure 6-95 Trays 4 and 5 (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 385
Figure 6-96 Trays 4 and 5 (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 386
Figure 6-97 Pickup Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 387
Figure 6-98 Pickup Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 388
Figure 6-99 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 389
Figure 6-100 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 390
Figure 6-101 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 391
Figure 6-102 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 392
Figure 6-103 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 393
Figure 6-104 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 394
Figure 6-105 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 395
Figure 6-106 Main Cable (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 396
Figure 6-107 Main Cable (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 397
Figure 6-108 Storage Paper Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 398
Figure 6-109 Front Door (Storage Area) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 399
Figure 6-110 Casters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 400
Figure 6-111 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 401
Figure 6-112 Locating Pins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 402
Figure 6-113 Front LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 403
Figure 6-114 Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 406
C4265-90907 xix
Figure 6-115 Front Cover (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 407
Figure 6-116 Front Cover (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 408
Figure 6-117 Front Cover (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 409
Figure 6-118 Back Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 410
Figure 6-119 Back Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 411
Figure 6-120 Top Cover (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 412
Figure 6-121 Top Cover (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 413
Figure 6-122 Top Cover (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 414
Figure 6-123 Top Cover (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 415
Figure 6-124 Mailbox Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 416
Figure 6-125 Mailbox Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 417
Figure 6-126 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (1 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 418
Figure 6-127 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (2 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 419
Figure 6-128 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (3 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 420
Figure 6-129 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (4 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 421
Figure 6-130 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (5 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 422
Figure 6-131 Face-down Bins (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 423
Figure 6-132 Face-down Bins (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 424
Figure 6-133 Face-down Bins (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 425
Figure 6-134 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 426
Figure 6-135 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 427
Figure 6-136 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 428
Figure 6-137 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 429
Figure 6-138 LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 430
Figure 6-139 Face-up Sensors PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 431
Figure 6-140 Reversing Mechanism Motor (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 432
Figure 6-141 Reversing Mechanism Motor (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 433
Figure 6-142 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 434
Figure 6-143 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 435
Figure 6-144 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 436
Figure 6-145 Short Tray 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 437
Figure 6-146 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 438
Figure 6-147 Flipper Solenoid - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 439
Figure 6-148 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 440
Figure 6-149 Latching Mechanism - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 441
Figure 6-150 Cover Latch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 442
Figure 6-151 Orientation of the 8-bin Mailbox - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 444
Figure 6-152 8-bin Mailbox Covers (Front and Back) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 445
Figure 6-153 8-bin Mailbox Top Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 447
Figure 6-154 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 448
Figure 6-155 8-bin Mailbox Paper Bins and Blind Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 449
Figure 6-156 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 450
Figure 6-157 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 451
Figure 6-158 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 452
Figure 6-159 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 453
Figure 6-160 8-bin Mailbox Transport Belt Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 454
Figure 6-161 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 456
xx List of Figures C4265-90907
Figure 6-162 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 457
Figure 6-163 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - 458
Figure 6-164 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - 459
Figure 6-165 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 460
Figure 6-166 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 461
Figure 6-167 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 462
Figure 6-168 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 463
Figure 6-169 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 464
Figure 6-170 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 465
Figure 6-171 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 466
Figure 6-172 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 467
Figure 6-173 8-bin Mailbox Interlock Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 469
Figure 6-174 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 470
Figure 6-175 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 471
Figure 6-176 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 472
Figure 6-177 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 473
Figure 6-178 8-bin Mailbox Adjustable and Fixed Casters- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 474
Figure 6-179 8-bin Mailbox Attachment Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 475
Figure 6-180 Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation - - - - - - - - - 477
Figure 6-181 C-link Cable on Mailbox with Stapler - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 478
Figure 6-182 Back Plate (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 479
Figure 6-183 Back Plate (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 480
Figure 6-184 Stapler Controller PCA (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 481
Figure 6-185 Stapler Controller PCA (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 482
Figure 6-186 Stapler Controller PCA (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 483
Figure 6-187 Top Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 484
Figure 6-188 Stapler Bed Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 485
Figure 6-189 Hinges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 487
Figure 6-190 Optional Output Accessory- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 493
Figure 6-191 Copy Connect EIO Board (slot 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 494
Figure 6-192 View with HP Digital Copier Stand (preferred configuration) - - - - 495
Figure 6-193 View with HP Digital Copier on Tabletop - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 495
Figure 6-194 Orientation of the HP Digital Copier- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 499
Figure 6-195 Separation Pad Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 500
Figure 6-196 Pick Roller Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 501
Figure 6-197 Pick Rollers (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 502
Figure 6-198 Pick Rollers (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 503
Figure 6-199 Document Holding Pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 505
Figure 6-200 Paper Chute Flip-out - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 506
Figure 6-201 Output Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 507
Figure 6-202 FB Cover Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 508
Figure 6-203 Thumb Screw for Document Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 509
Figure 6-204 Removing the Cover from the Posts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 510
Figure 6-205 ADF Latch Cap - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 511
Figure 6-206 ADF Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 512
Figure 6-207 ADF Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 513
Figure 6-208 Front Panel (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 514
C4265-90907 xxi
Figure 6-209 Front Panel (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 515
Figure 6-210 Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate - 516
Figure 6-211 Front Panel Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 517
Figure 6-212 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 518
Figure 6-213 Panel Cover (bottom view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 519
Figure 6-214 Front Panel Brackets (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 520
Figure 6-215 Front Panel Brackets (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 521
Figure 6-216 Upper Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 522
Figure 6-217 Upper Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 523
Figure 6-218 Copy Processor Board- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 524
Figure 6-219 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 525
Figure 6-220 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 526
Figure 6-221 RFI Cover (inside/rear view)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 527
Figure 6-222 RFI Cover (outside/front view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 528
Figure 6-223 Control PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 529
Figure 6-224 Card Cage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 530
Figure 6-225 EEPROM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 531
Figure 6-226 Fan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 532
Figure 6-227 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 533
Figure 6-228 Back PCA- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 534
Figure 6-229 Optical Unit (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 535
Figure 6-230 Optical Unit (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 536
Figure 6-231 ADF Lamp PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 537
Figure 6-232 ADF Lamp PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 538
Figure 6-233 ADF Lamp - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 539
Figure 6-234 Sensor Unit Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 540
Figure 6-235 Sensor Unit Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 541
Figure 6-236 Sensor Unit Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 542
Figure 6-237 ADF Motor Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 543
Figure 6-238 ADF Belt- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 544
Figure 6-239 LED Assembly PCA- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 546
Figure 6-240 ADF Unit (shown without Optical Unit)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 547
Figure 6-241 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 549
Figure 6-242 Output Tray Brackets- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 550
Figure 6-243 Glass Plate Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 551
Figure 6-244 Idle Roller Coil Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 552
Figure 6-245 Home Position Sensor (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 553
Figure 6-246 Home Position Sensor (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 554
Figure 6-247 Dust Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 555
Figure 6-248 Lamp (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 556
Figure 6-249 Lamp (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 557
Figure 6-250 Carrier Unit (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 558
Figure 6-251 Carrier Unit (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 559
Figure 6-252 Carrier Belt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 560
Figure 6-253 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 561
Figure 6-254 Felt Pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 562
Figure 6-255 Feet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 563
xxii List of Figures C4265-90907
Figure 6-256 Frame Ground Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 564
Figure 6-257 Front Lamp PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 565
Figure 6-258 Junction PCA Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 566
Figure 6-259 Junction PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 567
Figure 6-260 Front Panel Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 568
Figure 6-261 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 569
Figure 6-262 Carrier Belt and Motor (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 570
Figure 6-263 Carrier Belt and Motor (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 571
Figure 7-1 Troubleshooting Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 575
Figure 7-2 Print System Troubleshooting Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 577
Figure 7-3 Printer and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) - - - 578
Figure 7-4 Printer and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) - - - 579
Figure 7-5 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 580
Figure 7-6 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 581
Figure 7-7 Communications Link (C-link) Cables, Supported Daisy Chain
Connections583
Figure 7-8 Sample JetDirect Configuration Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 586
Figure 7-9 Fan Location and Airflow- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 596
Figure 7-10 Engine Test Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 597
Figure 7-11 Sample Event Log, page one - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 600
Figure 7-12 HP LaserJet 8150 Series Sample Event Log, page two- - - - - - - - 601
Figure 7-13 Error Format for Paper Handling- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 606
Figure 7-14 Paper Path Jam Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 648
Figure 7-15 Paper Path Test Source and Output Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 650
Figure 7-16 Sample Menu Map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 653
Figure 7-17 Sample printer Configuration Page (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 655
Figure 7-18 Sample Copy Module Configuration Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 656
Figure 7-19 Sample File Directory Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 657
Figure 7-20 Sample Usage Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 659
Figure 7-21 Repetitive Defect Ruler - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 678
Figure 7-22 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 681
Figure 7-23 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 695
Figure 7-24 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply Test Mode Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - 696
Figure 7-25 Printer Sensors and Switches- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 704
Figure 7-26 Printer Motor, Clutches, and Solenoids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 705
Figure 7-27 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (1 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 706
Figure 7-28 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (2 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 707
Figure 7-29 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (3 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 708
Figure 7-30 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (4 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 709
Figure 7-31 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (5 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 710
Figure 7-32 Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 711
Figure 7-33 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Inputs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 712
Figure 7-34 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Outputs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 713
Figure 7-35 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Wiring Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 714
Figure 7-36 8-bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 715
Figure 7-37 Copy Processor LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 730
Figure 7-38 Locations of ADF Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 733
C4265-90907 xxiii
Figure 8-1 HP LaserJet 8150 MFP Paper-Handling Components- - - - - - - - - 742
Figure 8-2 Printer Covers and Doors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 744
Figure 8-3 Printer Internal Components (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 746
Figure 8-4 Printer Internal Components (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 748
Figure 8-5 Printer Internal Components (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 750
Figure 8-6 Printer Internal Components (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 752
Figure 8-7 Detail of Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 754
Figure 8-8 PCB Assembly Location Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 756
Figure 8-9 Face-up Solenoid Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 757
Figure 8-10 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 758
Figure 8-11 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 760
Figure 8-12 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 762
Figure 8-13 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 765
Figure 8-14 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 768
Figure 8-15 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 770
Figure 8-16 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 772
Figure 8-17 Stapler Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 774
Figure 8-18 Assembly Location Diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 776
Figure 8-19 Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 777
Figure 8-20 Flatbed- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 779
Figure 8-21 Glass Plate and PCA Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 781
Figure 8-22 Carrier Unit- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 783
Figure 8-23 ADF Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 784
Figure 8-24 Optical Unit- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 787
Figure 8-25 Document Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 788
Figure 8-26 Screws (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 789
Figure 8-27 Screws (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 789
Figure 8-28 Screws (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 790
Figure 8-29 Screws (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 790
xxiv List of Figures C4265-90907
C4265-90907 Chapter Contents 25
1Product Information
Chapter Contents
Printer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Features of the HP Digital Copier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options. . . . . . . . . 38
Paper Capacities and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Media Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Service Approach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Regulatory Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
26 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Printer Features
Table 1-1. Common features of the HP LaserJet 8100 Series and
the HP LaserJet 8150 Series
Feature HP LaserJet 8100 Series
Description HP LaserJet 8150 Series
Description
Print Speed 32 ppm letter or A4
17 ppm ledger (11 by 17)
18 ppm A3
20 ppm legal
20.5 ppm B4
32 ppm letter or A4
17 ppm ledger (11 by 17)
18 ppm A3
20 ppm legal
20.5 ppm B4
Custom Tray 12 ppm 12 ppm
Tray 1 12 ppm 12 ppm
Duplex Speed 12 ppm letter or A4
8.4 ppm ledger (11 by 17) or
A3
9 ppm legal or B4
12 ppm letter or A4
8.4 ppm ledger (11 by 17) or
A3
9 ppm legal or B4
Text and Graphics
Resolution
600 dpi with FastRes
FastRes 1200 provides
1200 dpi quality at full
speed
plus Resolution
Enhancement technology
(REt)
600 dpi with FastRes
FastRes 1200 provides
1200 dpi quality at full
speed
plus Resolution
Enhancement technology
(REt)
Standard Printer
Languages:
Enhanced PCL 6
PCL 5e for compatibility
PostScript™ Level 2
emulation
Enhanced PCL 6
PCL 5e for compatibility
PostScript™ Level 3
emulation
Duty Cycle
(Monthly Usage)
Up to 150,000 images Up to 150,000 images
Internal Typefaces 45 PCL, 35 PostScript 45 PCL, 35 PostScript
Cartridge Slots None None
C4265-90907 Printer Features 27
Power Control PowerSave Mode PowerSave Mode
Control Panel 6 Keys, 3 LEDs, LCD Display
(2-line, 16 characters per
line)
6 Keys, 3 LEDs, LCD Display
(2-line, 16 characters per
line)
EconoMode
(draft quality)
Ye s Ye s
Table 1-2. Comparison of HP LaserJet 8100 Series Printer
Features
Features HP LaserJet
8100
(C4214A)
HP LaserJet
8100 N
(C4215A)
HP LaserJet
8100 DN
(C4216A)
HP LaserJet
8100 MFP
(C4217A)
Memory:1
1. Printer memory is optimized with Memory Enhancement technology (MEt).
Printer has 16 MB RAM onboard. DIMMs available for use include 4, 8, 16,
and 64 MB modules. See Chapter 8 for option product numbers. SDRAM
available includes 4, 8, 16, and 64 MB modules. EDO RAM available in-
cludes 4, 8, and 16 MB modules. 32 MB SDRAM modules are compatible,
but not available from HP. A maximum of 192 MB RAM can be configured.
16 MB 16 MB 24 MB2
2. 16 MB on-board RAM, and one 8 MB DIMM.
3. To upgrade an HP LaserJet 8100 printer to MFP, the firmware date code
must end with 5.44 or higher. Otherwise, you will have to update the firm-
ware.
48 MB3
Standard
Interfaces
IEEE-1284 ECP
Parallel A to C
connector
IEEE-1284 ECP
Parallel A to C
connector
JetDirect EIO
IEEE-1284 ECP
Parallel A to C
connector
JetDirect EIO
IEEE-1284 ECP
Parallel A to C
connector
JetDirect EIO
Duplexer Optional Optional Standard Standard
Hard Disk Optional Optional Optional Standard
Table 1-1. Common features of the HP LaserJet 8100 Series and
the HP LaserJet 8150 Series
Feature HP LaserJet 8100 Series
Description HP LaserJet 8150 Series
Description
28 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Table 1-3. Comparison of HP LaserJet 8150 Series Printer Features
Features HP LaserJet
8150
(C4265A)
HP LaserJet
8150N
(C4266A)
HP LaserJet
8150DN
(C4267A)
HP LaserJet
8150HN
(C4269A)
HP LaserJet
8150MFP
(C4268A)
Memory:132 MB 32 MB 32 MB 32 MB 64 MB
Standard
Inter-faces
IEEE-1284
ECP
Parallel A to
C connector
IEEE-1284
ECP
Parallel A to
C connector
JetDirect EIO
IEEE-1284
ECP
Parallel A to
C connector
JetDirect EIO
IEEE-1284
ECP
Parallel A to
C connector
JetDirect EIO
IEEE-1284
ECP
Parallel A to
C connector
JetDirect
EIO
Duplexer Optional Optional Standard Standard Standard
Hard Disk Optional Optional Optional Optional Standard
1. Printer memory is optimized with Memory Enhancement. SDRAM DIMMs
available for use include 8, 16, 32, and 64 MB modules. See Chapter 8 for op-
tion product numbers. Flash DIMMS available in 2, 4, and 8 MB modules. A
maximum of 160 MB RAM can be configured.
C4265-90907 Features of the HP Digital Copier 29
Features of the HP Digital Copier
Figure 1-1 Copy System
●Straight-through paper path
●Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)—load original facedown
●One pass duplex scanning/2 complete optical systems
●32 images per minute letter/A4 and 16 images per minute 11 by
17/A3
●Touch screen LED panel with keypad
●Copy module’s 400 by 300 and 400 by 600 8-bit grayscale is
converted to the printer’s 600 by 600 dithered black and white
(FastRes is sideband, 2-bit grayscale)
●Auto/Photo/Text modes
●IEEE-1394 high speed serial connection (Copy Processor Board
to Copy Connect EIO)
●Job Interrupt at (printing) boundary
●N-up layout (printing multiple pages per sheet)
●Auto-configure to printer settings
●Copy books
30 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
●Power Save
●Copy module firmware is stored on the printer’s hard disk for easy
upgrades
●Copy module can be placed on an optional copy stand
C4265-90907 Product Overview 31
Product Overview
External View of the Printer
Figure 1-2 Printer - Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open
(Views may vary with different models and accessories)
1Left Output Bin (face up)
2Control Panel
3Standard Output Bin (face down)
4Adjustable Paper Stop
5Top Cover
6Envelope Feeder (optional)
7Tray 1 (multipurpose)
32 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
8Tray 1 Extensions
9Tray 1 Paper Width Guides
10 Front Door
11 Tray 2
12 Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)
13 Tray 3
14 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (0ptional)
15 On/Off Switch
16 Optional Duplexer (internal)
17 Optional Stapler
C4265-90907 Product Overview 33
Formatter Assemblies
Figure 1-3 Rear and Left Side View
1Formatter Assembly
2Parallel IEEE-1284 Interface Port
3EIO Slot 3 Location
4EIO Slot 2 Location (Hard Disk Location)
5External Paper Handling Controller Port (behind EIO Slot 2/Hard
Disk Accessory Location)
6EIO Slot 1 Location
7Firmware DIMM
8DIMM Slots (3)
9AC Power Connector
10 Model and Serial Number Label
34 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
External View of HP Digital Copier
Figure 1-4 Front view of HP Digital Copier
Figure 1-5 Rear view of HP Digital Copier
Flatbed
Automatic
document feeder
input tray
Automatic
document feeder
output bin
Extension
Extension
Graphical display panel
ADF lever
Front panel
Document cover
and holding pad
Automatic document
feeder (ADF) Paper guides
Power switch
(back right)
Paper
loaded
LED
Power switch
Interface connector
Power inlet
Copy processor board
Power supply
and main board
tray handle
C4265-90907 Product Overview 35
Configurations
Figure 1-6 Preferred Configuration
Optional HP Digital Copier
Optional HP Digital
Copier Stand
HP printer
Optional Input
Devices (B):
2000-sheet Input Tray
or
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
Optional Output
Devices (A):
5-bin Mailbox with
Stapler
or
8-bin Mailbox
or
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
on Stand
or
3000-sheet Stacker
or
3000-sheet Stapler/
Stacker
A
B
36 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Figure 1-7 Digital Copier Tabletop Configuration
Optional HP Digital Copier
HP printer
Optional Input
Devices (D):
2000-sheet Input Tray
or
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
or
Printer Stand
Optional Output
Devices (C):
5-bin Mailbox with
Stapler
or
8-bin Mailbox
or
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
on Stand
or
3000-sheet Stacker
or
3000-sheet Stapler/
Stacker Table
C
D
C4265-90907 Identification 37
Identification
Model and Serial Numbers
The model and serial numbers are listed on identification labels
located on the rear of the printer. The model number is alphanumeric,
such as C4214A.
The serial number contains information about the Country of Origin,
the Revision Level, the Production Code, and production number of
the printer.
The label also contains power rating and regulatory information as
shown in figure 1-8.
Figure 1-8 Sample Model and Serial Number Label for the printer
Note The locations of the labels may change.
The identification labels for the copy module are located on the back
cover, below the ADF.
The identification labels for the 2000-sheet Input Tray and
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray are located on the back panel, directly below
the identification labels on the printer.
To locate the identification labels for the 8-bin Mailbox and 5-bin
Mailbox with Stapler, detach the paper-handling device from the
printer. The identification labels are located on the bottom right of the
front side (side that attaches to printer).
To locate the identification labels for the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox,
detach the paper-handling device from the printer. The identification
label is located on the bottom side of the back cover.
38 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and
Options
The accessories and optional equipment for the printer are shown in
figure 1-9 and described in table 1-4. All the paper-handling devices
in figure 1-9 and in table 1-4 are optional.
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
Figure 1-9 Paper Handling Devices and Accessories
HP Digital Copy
Stand
2,000 Input Tray
(Tray 4) Printer Stand
2x500-sheet Input Tray
(Trays 4 and 5)
HP LaserJet MFP
Upgrade Kit Custom Paper
Tray
C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 39
5-bin Mailbox
with Stapler 3000-sheet Stapler/Stacker
or 3000-sheet Stacker 8-bin Mailbox
7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox
Duplexer HP Fast
InfraRed
Connect
Envelope
Feeder
40 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Ordering Information
Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. To order an
accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Table 1-4. Accessories and Options
Item Description or Use HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Part Number
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Part Number
Paper
Handling 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray Two 500-sheet Input
Trays. C4780A C4780A
2000-sheet Input
Tray 2000-sheet Input Tray. C4781A C4781A
Envelope Feeder Automatically feeds up to
100 envelopes. C3765B C3765B
Custom Paper
Tray Allows printing on
custom-sized paper.
Replaces Tray 3 or
Tray 5.
C4184A C4184A
Duplex Printing
Accessory
(duplexer -
standard on DN,
HN and MFP
bundles)
Allows automatic printing
on both sides of paper. C4782A C4782A
7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox Each face-down output
bins holds 120 sheets of
paper. One Face-up Bin
holds 100 sheets of
paper. Designed for
tabletop use.
C4783A C4783A
8-bin Mailbox Each of the 8 output bins
holds 250 sheets of
paper.
C4785A C4785A
C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 41
5-bin Mailbox with
Stapler Each of the 5 output bins
holds 250 sheets of
paper. Provides job
separation by stapling
jobs.
C4787A C4787A
3,000-sheet
stacker One 3000-sheet stacking
device. C4779A C4779A
3,000-sheet
Stacker/Stapler One 3000-sheet stacking
device provides stapling
for up to 50 sheets of
paper per document.
C4788A C4788A
MFP Upgrade Kit Copy module, copy
connect card, hard disk,
cables.
C4166A C4166B
Printer
Stands Printer Stand Used in place of the
2000-sheet Input Tray or
the 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray when an 8-bin
Mailbox or a 5-bin Mailbox
with Stapler is attached.
Cannot be used with the
HP Digital Copy.
C2975A C2975A
Stand for 7-bin
Tabletop Mailbox Allows 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox to be used when
printer is mounted on
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray,
2000-sheet Input Tray, or
printer stand.
C4239A C4239A
Copy module
stand Allows copy module to be
placed above the printer
(must have paper
handling input device).
C4231A C4231A
Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued)
Item Description or Use HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Part Number
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Part Number
42 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Printing
Supplies HP Multipurpose
Paper
(Other HP media
is available where
office products are
sold.)
HP brand paper for a
variety of uses (1 box of
10 reams, 500 sheets
each). To order a sample
in the U.S. call
(800) 471-4701.
HPM1120 HPM1120
HP LaserJet Paper
(Other HP media
is available where
office products are
sold.)
Premium HP brand paper
for use with HP LaserJet
printers (1 box of 10
reams, 500 sheets each).
To order a sample in the
U.S. call (800) 471-4701.
HPJ1124 HPJ1124
Toner Cartridge
(20,000 images) Replacement HP
Microfine toner cartridge. C4182X C4182X
Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued)
Item Description or Use HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Part Number
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Part Number
C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 43
Memory,
Fonts, and
Mass
Storage
Dual In-line
Memory Module
(DIMM)
(100-pin)
Boosts the ability of the
printer to handle large
print jobs (HP LaserJet
8100 Series maximum
192 MB with HP brand
DIMMs; HP LaserJet
8150 Series maximum
160 MB with HP brand
DIMMs).
EDO DIMMs
(100-pin) 4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
C4135A
C4136A
C4137A
Not Supported
Not Supported
Not Supported
SDRAM DIMMs
(100-pin) 4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
64 MB
C4140A
C4141A
C4142A
C4143A
C3913A
Not Supported
C7842A
C7843A
C7845A
C7846A
Flash DIMM
(100-pin) Permanent storage for
fonts and forms:
2 MB
4 MB
8 MB (firmware)
C4286A
C4287A
Not Supported
C4286A
C4287A
C8530A
Font DIMM
(100-pin) 8 MB Asian ROM:
traditional Chinese
simplified Chinese C4292A
C4293A C4292A
C4293A
Hard Disk Permanent storage for
fonts and forms, copying
and digital sending.
Enables Raster Image
Processor (RIP) ONCE
multiple printing and Job
Retention.
C2985B
C2985-69002
(exchange)
C2985B
C2985-69002
(exchange)
Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued)
Item Description or Use HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Part Number
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Part Number
44 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Cable and
Interface
Accessories
Parallel Cables 3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
10 Meter IEEE-1284
cable
C2946A
C2947A C2946A
C2947A
Macintosh
Network Cable Kit For PhoneNET or
LocalTalk connection. 92215N 92215N
(Requires EIO
card) 1-to-1 connection
(Macintosh DIN-8 cable
male-male).
92215S 92215S
Cable and
Interface
Accessories
Enhanced I/O
Cards HP JetDirect print server
multi-protocol EIO
network cards:
Ethernet (RJ-45 only)
Ethernet (RJ-45 and
BNC) an LocalTalk
Token Ring (RJ-45 and
DB-9)
Fast Ethernet
10/100Base-TX
(RJ-45 only)
USB, Serial, LocalTalk.
J3110A
J3111A
J3112A
J3113A
N/A
N/A
J3110A
J3111A
J3112A
J3113A
J4169A
J4135A
HP Fast InfraRed
Connect Enables wireless printing
from any IRDA-compliant
device (such as a laptop
computer).
C4103A C4103A
Power Box For connecting an 8-bin
Mailbox to the printer
when the printer is on a
printer stand. This item is
included with the
2000-sheet Input Tray and
the 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray.
C4789A C4789A
Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued)
Item Description or Use HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Part Number
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Part Number
C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 45
Maintenance
Accessory Preventive
Maintenance Kit For 110V units.
For 220V units.
C3914A
C3914-69001
C3915A
C3915-69001
C3914A
C3914-69001
C3915A
C3915-69001
Documen-
tation HP LaserJet
Printer Family
Print Media Guide
A guide to using paper
and other print media with
HP LaserJet printers.
5963-7863 5963-7863
HP JetDirect Print
Server Software
Installation Guide
A guide to installing and
using the JetDirect Print
Server software with HP
LaserJet printers.
Contains information for
multiple operating
systems.
5967-2244
(English) 5967-2244
(English)
PCL 5/PJL
Te ch ni c al
Reference
Documentation
Package
A guide to using printer
commands with
HP LaserJet printers.
5021-0377 5021-0377
HP LaserJet 8100
User Guide This is an online user
guide provided on the
printing system software
CD-ROM.
C4214-60103 N/A
HP LaserJet 8150,
8150N, 8150DN,
8150HN, and
8150MFP Printers
User Guide
This is an online user
guide provided on
compact disc. This CD-
ROM contains all
supported languages.
N/A Included with
software CD-
ROM:
C4265-60601
(Americas)
C4265-60102
(Europe)
C4265-60103
(Asia)
Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued)
Item Description or Use HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Part Number
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Part Number
46 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
HP LaserJet 8150
Getting Started
Guide
An additional copy of the
getting started guide. N/A C4265-90901
(English
version)
User
Documentation
Bundle
An additional copy of the
getting started guide and
the ready reference guide.
Available in all supported
languages.
C4214-99001
(English
version)
C4265-99001
(English
version)
HP LaserJet 8100/
8150 Service
Manual
Service Manual C4265-90907 C4265-90907
HP 3000-sheet
Stacker and HP
3000-sheet
Stapler/Stacker
(C4779x and
C4788x)
Installation Guide
Instructions for installing
the 3000-sheet Stacker
and 3000-sheet
Stapler/Stacker
C4788- 90900 C4788- 90900
HP 3,000-sheet
Stacker, HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/
Stacker Service
Manual
Supplement
3,000-sheet Stapler/
Stacker Service Manual C4788-90904 C4788-90904
Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued)
Item Description or Use HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Part Number
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Part Number
C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 47
Hard Disk
An optional hard disk can be installed to permanently store
downloaded fonts and forms in the printer. Unlike the standard printer
memory, permanently downloaded items remain on the hard disk
even when the printer is powered off. Fonts downloaded to the hard
disk are available to all users of the printer. The hard disk is also used
with the HP Digital Copy and for some Job Retention features. The
HP LaserJet 8100 Series printers must have a hard disk for accessing
Job Retention, but the HP LaserJet 8150 Series have two of the four
Job Retention features without a hard disk.
To initialize the hard disk: With the printer turned off, hold down
CANCEL JOB and SELECT and turn on the printer. Then press MENU
and -VALUE, then SELECT.
Job Retention
There are four job retention features: Quick Copy, Proof and Hold,
Private Job, and Stored Job (all are available with a hard disk
installed). Proof and Hold and Private Job are also available without a
hard disk installed for the HP LaserJet 8150 Series only.
To access each of the features, first follow the steps below, then
continue to the section that describes the feature you wish to use.
For Windows only:
1Select Print from the application’s menu.
2Click Properties to display the properties dialog box.
3Click the Destination tab to display the destination options.
4Click Options under Destination Features to display Job
Retention Options.
For Macintosh only:
Select Job Retention from the pull-down menu in the print dialog box
for newer drivers. For older drivers, select Printer Specific Options.
HP LaserJet Resource Manager
The HP LaserJet Resource Manager allows you to control hard disk
and flash memory features not found in the drivers. Use the
HP LaserJet Resource Manager to initialize disk and flash memory
and to download, delete, and manage fonts to disk, across networks.
It is also used to update firmware for the HP Digital Copier. HP
LaserJet Resource Manager is not available for the Macintosh.
48 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Macintosh users can use the HP LaserJet Utility, and Windows®
users can use the HP printer driver to download fonts. The printer
hard disk can also be write-protected through software for additional
security. See the online help associated with your HP software for
more information.
For the Macintosh environment, see the online help in the HP
LaserJet Utility Guide included with the HP LaserJet Utility software.
For the Windows environment, see your HP Windows driver online
help.
Determining Memory Requirements
The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents
you print. With the PCL printer language, the printer can print most
text and graphics at 300 or 600 dpi without additional memory.
Add memory to your printer if you:
●Commonly print complex graphics
●Use many downloaded fonts
●Print complex documents
●Use advanced functions (such as I/O Buffering and Resource
Saving)
Note In the HP LaserJet 8100 printer, you can remove the 16 MB DIMM and
add up to three 64 MB DIMMs for a total of 192 MB of usable memory.
Note In the HP LaserJet 8150 printer, you can add up to two 64 MB DIMMs
for a total of 160 MB of usable memory.
Note In the HP LaserJet 8150 series, the original 32 MB DIMM must remain
in slot designator J-10 of the formatter board for the printer to start up
and operate properly.
C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 49
Table 1-5 presents the amount of memory required for the most
common print jobs performed with the HP printer using 600-dpi
printing.
Table 1-5. Minimum Memory Requirements
Print Job Paper Size PCL Minimum
Memory
Requirements
PostScript
Emulation
Minimum Memory
Requirements
single-sided printing Letter, A4, Legal 16 MB 16 MB
11 by 17 in, A3 16 MB 16 MB
two-sided printing Letter, A4 16 MB 16 MB
Legal 16 MB 16 MB
11 by 17 in, A3 24 MB 24 MB
MFP printing and
copying Letter, A4, Legal 40 MB 40 MB
11 by 17 in, A3 40 MB 40 MB
50 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Paper Capacities and Sizes
Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Table 1-6. Paper Capacities and Sizes
Tray or Bin Capacity Paper Weight
Tray 1
(multipurpose) Up to 100
sheets
Up to 10
envelopes
●Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Executive, A5, Legal, 11 by
17, ISO A3, JIS B5, JIS B4,
JPostD
●Custom sizes:
Minimum: 3.9 by 7.5 in.
(98 by 191 mm)
Maximum: 11.7 by 17.7 in.
(297 by 450 mm)
●Other media types:
transparencies and labels
●Envelope sizes:
Com 10, C5, DL Monarch and
B5
Note: Envelopes, transparencies,
and labels are supported only
from Tray 1.
16 to 53 lb Bond
(60 to 199 g/m2)
Two-sided:
16 to 28 lb Bond
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Tray 2 Up to 500
sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Legal, JIS B4 16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Tray 3 Up to 500
sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 by 17 16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Face-down
(Output bin) Up to 500
sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, A5,
Executive, Legal, 11 by 17, ISO
A3, JIS B5, JIS B4
Face-up
(Output bin) Up to 100
sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, A5,
Executive, Legal, 11 by 17, ISO
A3, JIS B5, JIS B4
Optional
2000-sheet
Input Tray
(Tray 4)
Up to 2,000
sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 by 17 16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Optional Tray 4
(2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray)
Up to 500
sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Legal, JIS B4 16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
C4265-90907 Paper Capacities and Sizes 51
Optional Tray 5
(2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray)
Up to 500
sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 by 17 16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Optional Custom
Paper Trays (Tray
3 or 5)
Up to 500
sheets
●Typical paper sizes: Letter,
ISO A4, Legal, JIS B4, ISO
A3, 11 by 17, 8K, 16K, JIS
EXEC, Executive
●Custom sizes: Minimum: 3.9
by 7.5 in (98 by 191 mm)
Maximum: 11.7 by 17.7 in
(297 by 450 mm)
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/ m2)
5-bin Mailbox
with Stapler and
8-bin Mailbox
Up to 250
sheets per
bin
Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 by 17,
envelopes, transparencies, and
labels
Note: Envelopes, transparencies,
and labels are only supported in
the Face-up (left) output bin.
The staple bin only supports A4
and Letter paper sizes.
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox Up to 120
sheets per
bin
Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, Legal
Note: B5, JIS B4, 11by 17, ISO
A3, envelopes, transparencies,
and labels are only supported in
the Face-up Bin.
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Envelope Feeder Up to 100
envelopes Envelope sizes: Commercial #28,
C5, DL, Monarch, ISO B5, JPostD 16 to 24 lb
(60 to 90 g/m2)
Duplexer Paper sizes: Letter, Legal,
11 by 17, A3, A4, B4 16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Table 1-6. Paper Capacities and Sizes (continued)
Tray or Bin Capacity Paper Weight
52 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Media Selection Guidelines
Printer Media Selection Guidelines
Note More detailed specifications are in the HP LaserJet 8150 User Guide
and the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. See
Documentation in Accessories and Options on page 40.
Paper
To achieve the best possible print quality and avoid paper jams, follow
these guidelines for selecting paper:
●Use only copier grade paper that meets all specifications in the
Print Media guide. Avoid paper with embossed lettering,
perforations, or texture that is too smooth or too rough.
●Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white
photocopy paper. The pigments must withstand the fusing
temperature of 392° F (200° C) for 0.1 second without
deterioration. Do not use paper with a colored coating that was
added after the paper was produced.
●Pre-printed forms must be printed with non-flammable, heat-
resistant inks that do not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous
emissions when subjected to the fusing temperature of 392° F
(200° C) for 0.1 second.
●A small sample of a new print media should be tested before
purchasing large quantities.
Envelopes
CAUTION To prevent severe damage to the printer, do not use envelopes that
have windows, clasps, snaps, or any non-paper materials.
Print Envelopes to the Face-up Bin ONLY.
Envelopes can be printed from Tray 1 and from the optional Envelope
Feeder. Choose envelopes that are well-constructed. They should lie
flat and be sharply creased. They should not be wrinkled, nicked, or
otherwise damaged. Envelope adhesive must be compatible with the
heat and pressure of the fusing process.
C4265-90907 Media Selection Guidelines 53
Adhesive Labels
Use the following guidelines when selecting labels:
CAUTION Tray 1 is required for printing adhesive labels.
Print labels to the Face-up Bin ONLY.
This printer does not support use of labels with any exposed spaces.
Do not attempt to print on label sheets after any of the labels have been
removed from the sheet. Damage to the printer may result.
●Labels must be arranged on the carrier sheet so there are no
exposed spaces on the sheet. Using label stock with spaces
between rows or columns of labels can often result in labels
peeling off during printing, causing serious jamming and possible
damage to the printer.
●The top sheet (printing surface) must be of copier quality and
provide good toner adhesion.
●The carrier sheet (backing sheet) must be compatible with the
temperature and pressure of the fusing process, and must be
coated for easy release of the top sheet.
●The adhesive must be stable at the 392° F (200° C) temperature
encountered for 0.1 second in the fusing process, and must not
produce emissions that exceed exposure levels or threshold limits
established by OSHA and other safety agencies. Adhesives must
not come into direct contact with any part of the printer.
A wide selection of suitable labels may be ordered through Hewlett-
Packard. Available sizes are listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Print Media Guide.
54 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Transparencies
CAUTION Tray 1 is required for printing transparencies.
Print transparencies to the Face-up Bin ONLY.
Transparencies used in HP LaserJet printers must be able to
withstand the 392° F (200° C) temperature encountered in the
printer's fusing process for 0.1 second. Suitable transparency film is
available through Hewlett-Packard. See the HP LaserJet Printer
Family Print Media Guide for details.
Storing Print Media
Follow these guidelines when stacking and storing print media:
●Store paper in its wrapper until ready to use.
●Re-wrap partially used packages of media before storing.
●Stack each carton upright and squarely on top of the other.
●Store envelopes in a protective box to avoid damaging the edges
of the envelopes.
●Keep stored media away from temperature and humidity
extremes.
●DO NOT store cartons or reams directly on the floor where they
will absorb a higher moisture content. Instead, place cartons on a
pallet or on shelves.
●DO NOT store individual reams in a manner that causes them to
curl or warp along the edges.
●DO NOT stack more than six cartons on top of each other.
●DO NOT place anything on top of media, regardless of whether
the paper is packaged or unpackaged.
●DO NOT store printed documents in vinyl folders (which may
contain plasticizers) or expose the documents to petroleum-
based solvents.
Shipping Print Media
When shipping print media through different environments, plastic
wrap all cartons on the shipping pallet. When shipping media across
bodies of water, wrap individual cartons as well. Packaging must
protect the media from physical damage.
C4265-90907 Media Selection Guidelines 55
Paper Weight Equivalence Table
Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight
specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine
the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight,
locate the bond weight (in row 3, second column) and scan across the
row to the cover weight (in the fourth column). The equivalent is 28 lb.
Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade.
Table 1-7. Paper Weight Equivalence
U.S.
Post
Card1
thick-
ness
(mm)
U.S.
Bond
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Text/
Book
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Cover
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Bristol
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Index
Weight
(lb)
U.S. Tag
Weight
(lb)
Europe
Metric
Weight
(g/m2)
Japan
Metric
Weight
(g/m2)
116 41 22 27 33 37 60 60
2 1743242935396464
320 50 28 34 42 46 75 75
4 21543036444980 80
5 2256313846518181
624 60 33 41 50 55 90 90
7 276837455561100 100
828 70 39 49 58 65 105 105
932 80 44 55 67 74 120 120
10 34 86 47 58 71 79 128 128
11 36 90 50 62 75 83 135 135
12 .18 39 100 55 67 82 91 148 148
13 .19 42 107 58 72 87 97 157 157
14 .20 43 110 60 74 90 100 163 163
15 .23 47 119 65 80 97 108 176 176
16 53 134 74 90 110 122 199 199
1. U.S. Post Card measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
56 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines
Paper Specifications
This section explains specifications of paper that can be used for the
ADF unit. Any type of paper can be used on the flatbed.
Paper Size
Figure 1-10 shows the acceptable paper sizes.
Figure 1-10 Paper size specification
A
B
Paper feeding direction
A
B
letter/A4
11x17/A3
Maximum Minimum
ABAB
12 in (297 mm) 17 in (432 mm) 8 in (210 mm) 6 in (148 mm)
6 in (148 mm) 8 in (210 mm)
C4265-90907 Media Selection Guidelines 57
HP Digital Copier Supported Sizes
●Ledger - 11 by 17 in (279 by 432 mm)
●Executive - 7.3 by 10.5 in (191 by 267 mm)
●Letter - 8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm)
●Legal - 8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
●A3 - 11.7 by 16.5 in (297 by 419 mm)
●A4 - 8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm)
●A5 - 5.8 by 8.2 in (148 by 210 mm)
●B4 (JIS) - 10.1 by 14.3 in (257 by 364 mm)
●B5 (JIS) - 7 by 9.9 in (176 by 250 mm)
58 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Paper Conditions
Ream Weight
Plain paper: 16 to 34 lb (52 to 127 g/m2)
Recycled paper: 17 to 24 lb (64 to 90 g/m2)
Bond paper: 16 to 28 lb (64 to 104 g/m2)
Note The ADF holds up to 50 sheets of 24 lb paper. Capacity will be less for
thicker paper. For example, 24 lb HP LaserJet Paper has a capacity of
43, and 28 lb Xerox 4024 paper has a capacity of 32.
Document Quality
Do not load the following into the ADF:
●Carbonless paper or forms
●Paper with clips or staples
●Paper with wet ink or correction fluid
●Labels
Precautions
The following documents might be hard to feed through the ADF. If
the document slips in the ADF (Jam Error) or a double-feed occurs
often, use the HP Digital Copier’s flatbed.
●Paper of unequal thickness, such as envelopes
●Paper with folds, tears, large wrinkles, or curl
●Paper with clips or staples
●Paper with wet ink
●Mixed paper sizes
●Color copied paper
●Tracing paper
●Coated paper
●Carbon paper
●Paper smaller than 6 by 4 in (148 by 105 mm) or larger than A3 or
11 x 17 in
●Other than paper
•cloth
•metal foil
C4265-90907 Media Selection Guidelines 59
•transparency film
●Photographic paper
●Paper with notches on the side
●Paper that is not rectangular
●Thin paper
CAUTION Use the flatbed for delicate paper or paper that does not meet
specifications for the ADF.
Carbonless papers have the chemical composition which damages
the Separation Pad and Pick Roller. Therefore, note the following
remarks.
●Cleaning: If mispicks occur frequently, clean the Separation Pad
and Pick Roller more often. See “Cleaning the ADF” on page 163.
●Replacement of parts: The Separation Pad and the Pick Roller
should be replaced more often. See page 168.
Note Paper should be stacked in the chute as shown in figure 1-11.
Figure 1-11 Paper orientation
Less than
.1 in
(3 mm)
More than
1 in
(30 mm)
Feed direction
Top of the paper
Read surface Top of the paper Read surface
Less than
.2 in
(5 mm)
Feed direction
More than
1 in
(30 mm)
60 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Perforated Paper
Perforations in the areas shown in figure 1-12 may cause problems
when the paper is fed through the ADF. If so, use the flatbed to read
perforated paper.
Figure 1-12 Areas of the Paper that Should Not Be Perforated
C4265-90907 Service Approach 61
Service Approach
Repair of the printer normally begins with a three-step process:
●Step 1: Isolate the problem to the major system (the host
computer, the network and/or server, or the printer system).
●Step 2: Determine if the problem is located in the paper-handling
devices or in the printer engine.
●Step 3: Troubleshoot the problem using the procedures in
Chapter 7.
Once a faulty part is located, repair is usually accomplished by
assembly level replacement of Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). Some
mechanical assemblies may be repaired at the subassembly level.
Replacement of components on the printed circuit assemblies is not
supported by Hewlett-Packard.
Ordering Parts
Field replaceable part numbers are listed in Chapter 8 of this manual.
Replacement parts may be ordered from HP's Commercial Service
and Support Organization-Americas (CSSO-A), or Commercial
Service and Support Organization-Europe (CSSO-E).
Phone numbers
CSSO-A (Commercial Service and Support Organization-
Americas)
(800) 227-8164 (U.S. Only)
CSSOE (Commercial Service and Support Organization-Europe)
(49 7031) 142253
HP Software and Accessory Distribution Center (SADC)
(661) 257-5565
62 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Exchange Program
HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts. These are
identified in Chapter 8 and can be ordered through Parts Direct
Ordering (PDO), CSSO-A, or CSSO-E.
Consumables
The printer has two consumables; the toner cartridge and staple
cartridges, which may be ordered directly from Hewlett-Packard. See
Chapter 8 for ordering information.
Toner Cartridge Life
The toner cartridge is designed to simplify replacement of the major
“consumable” parts. The toner cartridge contains the printing
mechanism and a supply of toner.
At 5% page coverage, a toner cartridge is guaranteed to print
approximately 20,000 images (see figure 1-13).
Figure 1-13 Sample 5% Page Coverage
C4265-90907 Service Approach 63
The toner cartridge may print less than 20,000 images if routinely
printing very dense print. Conversely, when routinely printing images
with less coverage (such as short memos), or in EconoMode, the
toner cartridge may print more than 20,000 images. However,
EconoMode does not extend toner cartridge component life.
Note For best results, always use a new toner cartridge before the expiration
date stamped on the toner cartridge box.
Refilled Toner Cartridges and Non-HP Staple
Cartridges
While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled toner
cartridges and non-HP staple cartridges during the warranty period or
while under a maintenance contract, their use is not supported for the
following reasons:
●Repairs resulting from the use of refilled toner cartridges and
non-HP staple cartridges are not covered under the Hewlett-
Packard warranty or maintenance contract.
●Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a
refilled toner cartridge or non-HP staple cartridge functions at the
high level of reliability of a new HP LaserJet toner cartridge or HP
LaserJet staple cartridge. Also, Hewlett-Packard cannot predict
the long term reliability effect on the printer when using different
toner formulations found in refilled cartridges.
●The print quality of HP LaserJet toner cartridges influences the
customer's perception of the printer. Hewlett-Packard has no
control over the actual print quality of a refilled toner cartridge.
Recycling Toner Cartridges
In order to reduce waste, Hewlett-Packard uses a recycling program
for used toner cartridges. Cartridge components that do not wear out
are recycled, as are plastics and other materials. Hewlett-Packard
pays the shipping costs from the user to the recycling plant. For each
cartridge returned, HP donates one U.S. dollar to be shared by the
Nature Conservancy and the National Wildlife Federation. To join this
recycling effort, follow the instructions inside the toner cartridge box.
64 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Technical Assistance
HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) provides free
technical support information 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The
ASAP system includes HP FIRST, explained below. The ASAP
service requires a touchtone phone.
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support
Technology)
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a
phone-in fax service providing product information for HP LaserJet
users as well as service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a type 3
facsimile machine or fax card. Service related information includes:
●Product Data Sheets
●Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
HP FIRST, U.S.
Call the HP ASAP system (800) 231-9300 and follow the voice
prompts to enter HP FIRST.
HP FIRST, Europe
Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers:
For English service outside the above countries, (31) 20-681-5792.
Internet
Anonymous FTP library service is available for around-the-clock
access to drivers, software, and technical support information for HP
peripheral and computer products. Please note that paths may
change without notice. Access the Internet or FTP address and use
the menus to locate the software or support of your choice.
URL for Access HP: http://www.hp.com
URL for Software and Support: http://www.hp.com/go/cposupport
FTP address: ftp.hp.com
Login: anonymous
Password: your Internet name (or user identification)
●U.K., 0800-96-02-71 ●Netherlands, 06-02-22-420
●Belgium (Dutch), 078-11-19-0 ●Germany, 0130-810061
●Switzerland (German), 155-1527 ●Austria, 0660-8128
C4265-90907 Technical Assistance 65
FTP Path for Drive Software: /pub/printers
FTP Path for Network Software: /pub/networking
World Wide Web
Download printer driver software using www.hp.com/cposupport/
eschome.html.
HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line
(US Only)
The Hardware Technical Support Center (HTSC) is available for
technical support to assist Hewlett-Packard authorized service
technicians. The HTSC can be reached at 1-800-544-9976 between
7:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. Mountain Standard Time, Monday, Tuesday,
Thursday, and Friday. On Wednesdays the office closes at 4:00 P.M.
Other Areas
Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales
office for assistance in obtaining technical support.
66 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Regulatory Information
FCC Regulations
The HP LaserJet 8100 and 8150 Series printers have been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
●Increase separation between equipment and receiver
●Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is located
●Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician
Note Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly
approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B
limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
Note Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly
approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class
B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
Note The HP LaserJet 8100MFP, 8150MFP, or any model of HP LaserJet
8100 or 8150 printer with an HP Digital Copy attached, complies with
Class A limits.
The HP Digital Copier has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 67
The printer has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
●Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is located.
●Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
68 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Environmental Product Stewardship
Protecting the Environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products
in an environmentally-sound manner. The printer has been designed
to minimize impacts on the environment.
The printer design eliminates:
Ozone Production The printer uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic
process and therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas (03).
CFC Usage Class I U.S. Clean Air Act stratospheric ozone-depleting
chemicals (chlorofluorocarbons [CFCs], for example) have been
eliminated from the manufacturing of the printer and packaging.
The printer design reduces:
Energy Consumption For the HP LaserJet 8100 Series,
energy usage drops from 500/505
(110V/220V units) watts (W) during
printing to as little as 35/40 (110V/
220V units) W while in low-power
(Power Save) mode. For the HP
LaserJet 8150 Series, energy usage
drops from 685/685 (110V/220V units) watts (W) during printing
to as little as 37/40 (110V/220V units) W while in inactive,
PowerSave mode. This saves energy without affecting the high
performance of the printer. This product qualifies for the ENERGY
STAR program (U.S. and Japan). ENERGY STAR is a voluntary
program established to encourage the development of energy-
efficient office products. The ENERGY STAR name is a
registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency.
As an ENERGY STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has
determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines
for energy efficiency.
Toner Consumption EconoMode uses about 50% less toner. (HP does not
recommend full-time use of EconoMode.)
C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 69
Paper use The printer’s optional duplexing feature, which provides for two-
sided printing, reduces paper usage and the resulting demands
on natural resources.
The design of the printer facilitates the recycling of:
Plastics Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to
international standards, which enhance the ability to identify
plastics for proper disposition at the end of the printer’s life.
HP Toner Cartridges In many countries, this product’s toner cartridge/drum can be
returned to HP using the prepaid shipping label and instructions
included inside each new HP Toner Cartridge box. If your country
is not listed in the recycling guide, call your local HP Sales and
Service Office for further instructions.
HP Cartridge Recycling Program information:
Since 1990, the HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge Recycling Program
has collected more than twelve million cartridges that otherwise
may have been discarded into landfills. Once a cartridge is
returned, it is disassembled and reusable components are
cleaned and inspected for quality conformance. After passing
strict inspection procedures, materials such as nuts, screws, and
clips are reclaimed and used to produce new cartridges.
Remaining materials are melted down and used as raw materials
for a variety of other products. Over 95 percent (%) of the weight
of returned materials is recycled. For more information in the
U.S., call (1) (800) 340-2445 or contact the HP LaserJet Supplies
Website at http://ljsupplies.com/planetpartners. Non-US
customers can call the local HP Sales and Service Office for
further information regarding the HP Toner Cartridge Recycling
Program.
Paper The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the
paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer
Family Print Medias Guide.
To ensure printer longevity, HP provides the following:
Spare Parts and
Consumables
Availability
Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be
made available for at least five years after production has
stopped.
70 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Material Safety Data Sheet
The Toner Cartridge/Drum MSDS can be obtained by calling the U.S.
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) at
(1) (800) 231-9300. Use Index number 7 for a listing of the Toner
Cartridge/Drum Material/Chemical Safety Data Sheets. Non-U.S.
customers should refer to the HP Support pages at the front of this
user guide for appropriate phone numbers and information. For more
information in the U.S., call (1) (800) 340-2445 or contact the HP
LaserJet Supplies Website at http://ljsupplies.com/planetpartners.
C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 71
Environmental Conformity
Plastics Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to
international standards, which enhance the ability to identify
plastics for proper disposition at the end of the printer’s life. The
plastics used in the printer housing and chassis are technically
recyclable.
Printer and Parts Design for recycling has been incorporated into the printer and its
accessories. The number of materials has been kept to a
minimum while ensuring proper functionality and high product
reliability. Dissimilar materials have been designed to separate
easily. Fasteners and other connections are easy to locate,
access, and remove with common tools. High priority parts have
been designed to be accessed quickly for efficient disassembly
and repair. Plastic parts have been primarily designed in two
colors to enhance recycling options. A few small parts are colored
specifically to highlight customer access points.
HP disposes of returned products in an environmentally sound
manner. Many of the functional parts are recovered, tested, and
reused as fully-warrantied service parts. Used printer parts are
not placed into new product manufacturing. The remainder of the
product parts are recycled, if possible. For product take-back
information, contact your local HP Sales and Service Office.
Paper The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the
paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer
Family Print Media Guide. The printer is suited for the use of
recycled paper according to DIN 19 309.
Acoustics It is advisable to place printers with a sound power level of Lwad
of 6.3 Bel (A) or higher into a separate or divided up room.
72 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Declarations of Conformity
Table 1-8. Declaration of Conformity (HP LaserJet 8100 series and
HP LaserJet 8150 series)
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company
Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name: LaserJet 8100 Series and 8150 Series
Model Number C4214A, C4215A, C4216A, C4229A, C4265A, C4266A,
C4267A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety: IEC 60950:1991+A1:1992+A2:1993+A3:1995+A4:1996/
EN 60950:1992+A1:1993+A2:1993+A3:1995+A4:1997+A11:1997
IEC 60825-1:1993_A1:1997/
EN 60825-1:1994+A11:1996 Class 1 Laser/LED Product
EMC: CISPR 22;193+A1:1995+a2:1996/
EN 55022:1994+A1:1995+A2:1997 Class B
EN 6100-3-2:1995
EN 61000-3-3:1995
EN 55024:1998
FCC Title 47 CFR, part 15 Class B2,3 /ICES-002, Issue 2
As / NZS 3458:1995
C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 73
Safety Statements
Laser Safety Statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser
products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is
certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act
of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely
confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser
beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
Supplementary Information:
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and
carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
1The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-
Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any itnerference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
3Product exhibits Class A operation when connected to Local
Area Network (LAN) cables using print server accessories.
Boise, Idaho USA
July 10, 2000
European Contact: your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Serivce Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh,
Department HG-TRE /Standards Europe, Henenberger Straße 130, D71034 : +46-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160,
Boise, Idaho 83707-0015 (Phone: (208) 396-6000)
Table 1-8. Declaration of Conformity (HP LaserJet 8100 series and
HP LaserJet 8150 series)
74 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other
than those specified in this user’s guide may result in exposure to
hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC Regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
<<Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité
électromagnétiques. << CEM>>.>>
VCCI Statement (Japan)
HP LaserJet 8100 and 8150 (Model C4214A, C4215A, C4216A, C4265A, C4266A,
C4267A, C4268A, C4269A)
HP Digital Copier (Model C4166A, C4217, C4230A, C4268A)
C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 75
Korean EMI statement
Laser Statement for Finland
LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
HP LaserJet 8100, 8150-laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen
luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi
estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1
(1993) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla
saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle
näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning
specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HP
L
aser
J
e
t
8100
an
d
8150
(M
o
d
e
l
C4214A
,
C4215A
,
C4216A
,
C4265A
,
C4266A
,
C4267A, C4268A, C4269A)
HP Digital Copier (Model C4166A, C4217, C4230A, C4268A)
76 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 8100, 8150-kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän
huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa
ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista,
paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja,
käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan
suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle
lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion,
utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 770-795 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
C4265-90907 Warranty 77
Warranty
This warranty entitles you to standard warranty services for your
printer and accessories and is available from HP worldwide. However,
there may be local variations in the level of warranty service. You
should contact the local HP Service Center to check for the applicable
local warranty in your country or province.
One-Year On-Site Limited Warranty
Hewlett-Packard warrants its computer hardware products against
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from
purchase by the end user. During the warranty period, HP will, at its
option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.
The warranty period begins either on the date of delivery or, where
the purchase price includes installation by Hewlett-Packard, on the
date of installation.
Should HP be unable to repair or replace the product within a
reasonable amount of time, you will be entitled to a refund of the
purchase price if you return the product.
To have your printer serviced by HP you should contact the closest
HP Service Center.
Exclusions
The warranty on your HP LaserJet 8100 Series/8150 Series printer
shall not apply to defects resulting from:
●Improper or inadequate maintenance by customer.
●Customer supplied software or interfacing.
●Unauthorized modification or misuse.
●Operation outside of the environmental specifications for the
product.
●Operation of non-supported printing media.
●Duty cycle abuse maximum (see the note on the following page).
●Using a mechanical switchbox with the printer without a
designated surge protector.
●Improper site preparation and maintenance.
●Failure to perform key operator maintenance every 350,000
images.
●Use of non-HP toner cartridges (see the following explanation),
memory boards, interface boards, or staple cartridges.
78 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907
Note The use of non-Hewlett-Packard consumables or accessories alone
does not affect either your warranty or any maintenance contract you
may have purchased. However, if an HP LaserJet printer failure or
damage is found to be attributable directly to the use of a non-HP toner
cartridge, HP will not repair the printer free-of-charge. In this case,
standard time-and-materials charges will be applied to service your
printer for that particular failure or damage.
Operation of the printer beyond the limit of its duty cycle (printing
greater than the equivalent of 150,000 images per month) shall be
deemed printer abuse and all repairs thereafter will be billed on a time-
and-materials basis.
If you are using a mechanical switch box, ensure that it is equipped
with a surge protector. Damage to your printer could occur from the use
of unprotected mechanical switch boxes.
Warranty Limitations
The warranty set forth above is exclusive and no other warranty,
whether written or oral, is expressed or implied. Hewlett-Packard
specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose.
Service During the Warranty Period
If your hardware should fail during the warranty period, contact an
authorized HP dealer or an HP Customer Service Center.
Service After the Warranty Period
If your hardware fails after the warranty period, contact an authorized
HP dealer or your local Customer Service Center. If you have an HP
Maintenance Agreement, request service under your agreement.
C4265-90907 Chapter Contents 79
2Site Requirements
Chapter Contents
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Environmental Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
80 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907
Operating Environment
The electrical specifications listed in table 2-4 on page 87 must be
maintained to ensure proper operation of this printer. Consider the
following points before installing the printer.
●Install the printer in a well-ventilated, dust-free area, away from
any open windows.
●Install the printer and peripherals on a hard, flat, and continuous
surface, with all feet level. Do not install on carpet or other soft
surfaces. We recommend the use of the HP Digital Copier with
the HP Digital Copier Stand.
●Ensure adequate, stable power is supplied. Printer power
requirements are listed in table 2-4, “Electrical Specifications,” on
page 87.
●Install the printer where there is stable temperature and humidity,
away from water sources, humidifiers, air conditioners,
refrigerators, or other major appliances (see table 2-1 on page
84).
●Install the printer away from direct sunlight, open flames, or
chemicals. If the printer is placed near a window, make sure the
window is closed and has a curtain or blind to block any direct
sunlight.
●Install the printer with enough space around the MFP package for
proper access and ventilation (see “Space Requirements” on
page 81).
●Install the MFP package away from the direct flow of exhaust from
air ventilation, heating, or air conditioning systems.
Note Be sure to leave enough space to completely extend the optional output
accessory away from the printer.
C4265-90907 Space Requirements 81
Space Requirements
Figure 2-1 Printer Space Requirements (Top view)
Figure 2-2 Printer Space Requirements (Side view)
46.75 in (1187 mm)
35 in (889 mm)
11.5 in
(292 mm)
14.5 in
(368 mm)
13.75 in
(350 mm)
29.5 in (749 mm)
11.5 in
(292 mm)
82 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907
Figure 2-3 Printer Space Requirements (with Mailbox and Input Device)
35 in (889 mm)
14.5 in
(368 mm)
66.25 in (1683 mm)
19.5 in
(485 mm)
33 in (838 mm)
48.4 in (1229 mm)
C4265-90907 Space Requirements 83
Figure 2-4 Printer and Copy Module Space requirements
64 in (1626 mm)
33 in (838 mm)
19.5 in (495 mm)
35 in (889 mm)
73 in (1854 mm)
14.5 in
(368 mm)
11 in (279
mm)
43 in (1092 mm)
Top and Side Views
(preferred configuration)
(document
cover open)
84 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907
Environmental Requirements
Keep the printer within the following environmental conditions for
optimum performance.
For printer weights, see table 2-2, “Dimensions of printer and Paper-
handling Devices,” on page 85.
Table 2-1. Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions
Operating Storage
Temperature 10° to 32.5° C
(50° to 90.5° F) 0° to 40° C
(32° to 105° F)
Humidity 20 to 80% RH
(with no condensation) 15 to 90% RH
(with no condensation)
C4265-90907 Specifications 85
Specifications
Printer and Paper-handling Devices
This section contains information on physical and electrical
characteristics of the printer. For information on the printer site and
environmental requirements (such as operating temperature and
humidity, ventilation, etc.), see “Environmental Requirements” on
page 84.
Table 2-2. Dimensions of printer and Paper-handling Devices
Item Height Width Depth Weight
Printer only 21.30 in
(541 mm) 22.3 in
(566.42 mm) 20.50 in
(520 mm) 106 lbs. (48 kg)
(without toner
cartridge and with
paper trays)
Printer with
2 x 500-sheet or
2000-sheet Input
Tray
40.20 in
(1021 mm) 24.76 in
(629 mm) 20.50 in
(520 mm) 160-164 lbs.
(72.6-74.4 kg)
Toner cartridge n/a n/a n/a 1Full: 114.3 oz
(3,200 g)
Empty: 78.6 oz
(2,200 g)
2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray 18.89 in
(480 mm)
Incl. Transfer
Door: 25.59 in.
(650 mm)
24.76 in
(629 mm) 20.50 in
(520 mm) 61 lbs.
(27.9 kg.
without paper
2000-sheet Input
Tray 18.89 in
(480 mm)
Incl. Transfer
Door: 25.59 in
(650 mm)
24.76 in
(629 mm) 20.50 in
(520 mm) 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg)
1. Some toner will reside in the waste toner area of a toner cartridge when the toner supply is ex-
hausted. Therefore toner cartridge weight may be an unreliable indication of remaining toner sup-
ply.
86 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907
Note Information for the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker is located in the HP
3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-
Handling Accessories (C4788-90904).
Table 2-3. Dimensions of Output Devices
Item Height Width Depth Weight
8-bin Mailbox 35.23 in
(895 mm) 18.0 in
(457 mm) 20.0 in
(508 mm) 42.32 lb
(19.2 kg)
Stapler 14.17 in
(360 mm) 19.68 in
(500 mm) 14.56 in
(370 mm) 10.50 lb
(4.8 kg)
Duplexer 37.40 in
(950 mm) 15.31 in
(389 mm) 16.73 in
(425 mm) 7.93 lb
(3.6 kg)
Envelope Feeder 5.11 in
(130 mm) 15.31 in
(389 mm) 14.37 in
(365 mm) 7.71 lb
(3.5 kg)
7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox 20.87 in
(530 mm) 15.0 in
(381 mm) 18.5 in
(470 mm) 30 lb
(14 kg)
Stand (for 7-bin
Tabletop Mailbox
only)
18.9 in
(480 mm) 16.9 in
(430 mm) 18.9 in
(480 mm) 32 lb
(14.5 kg)
C4265-90907 Specifications 87
Figure 2-5 Dimensions of Paper Handling Devices
Table 2-4. Electrical Specifications
Volts Frequency Amps1Watts (average)
Printer
120 Vac ± 10%
100 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz
50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 11.2 maximum,
6.0 average printing = 710
standby = 155
PowerSave Mode = 45
220 Vac ± 10%
240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz
50 Hz ± 2 Hz 5.9 maximum,
3.0 average printing = 700
standby = 155
PowerSave Mode = 45
2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)
120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 maximum,
0.3 average 45 Watts Maximum
240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.3 maximum,
0.2 average 45 Watts Maximum
8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler
100-240 Vac 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 @ 120v
0.25 @ 240v 45 Watts Maximum
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5)
120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.9 maximum 47 Watts Maximum
240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 maximum 47 Watts Maximum
88 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907
Note Information for the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker is located in the HP
3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-
Handling Accessories (C4788-90904).
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 maximum 28 Watts Maximum
240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.3 maximum 28 Watts Maximum
1. Operating current requirements.
Table 2-4. Electrical Specifications (continued)
Volts Frequency Amps1Watts (average)
C4265-90907 Specifications 89
Note Printer system values are an estimate determined from the baseline
values.
Table 2-5. Acoustic Emissions
Operation position per ISO 9296 Printer
(stand-alone) Printer System1
Printing LPA dB(A) 59 db 62 db
Standby LPA dB(A) 41 db 44 db
Bystander 1m per ISO 9296
Printing LPA dB(A) 53 db 56 db
Standby LPA dB(A) 36 db 39 db
Sound Power per ISO 9296
Printing LWAD 6.9 bels (A) 7.2 bels (A)
Standby LWAD 5.2 bels (A) 5.5 bels (A)
1. Printer System includes the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) or 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4
and 5), 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, Duplexer, and Envelope Feeder.
90 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907
Copy Module
Table 2-6. Specifications for Copy Module
Item Specification
Dimensions (mm) Width:
43 in (1092 mm) Depth:
26 in (660 mm) Height:
22 in
(559 mm)
Weight 49 lb. (22 kg)
Electrical Voltage and
frequency 100 to 120 Volts ±10%, 50 or 60 Hz ±2 Hz
127 Volts, 60 Hz NOM or
220 to 240 Volts ± 10%, 50 Hz ± 2 Hz
220 Volts ± 10%, 60 Hz ± 2 Hz
Phases Single Phase
Power consumption approximately 30 Watts
Environmental
condition Device status Operating Not Operating
Temperature 50° F to 91° F
(10° C to 32.5° C) 32° F to 95° F
(0° C to 35° C)
Humidity (no
condensation) 20% to 80% RH 10% to 90% RH
C4265-90907 Chapter Contents 91
3Operating Overview
Chapter Contents
Using the Printer Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Performing a Cold Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Printer Control Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Printer Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
HP Digital Copier Service Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
HP Digital Copier Administrator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Remote Upgrade of the Printer Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Testing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
92 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Using the Printer Control Panel
Control Panel Layout
The control panel contains a 2-line, 16-character-per-line display
panel, six keys, and three indicator lights.
Figure 3-1 Control Panel Layout
GO
Menu
Ready
Item
Data
- Value +
Attention
Cancel
Job
Select
Table 3-1. Control Panel Keys
Key Function
GO●Places the printer either online or offline.
●Prints any data residing in the printer’s buffer.
●Allows the printer to resume printing after being offline.
Clears most printer messages and places the printer online.
●Allows the printer to continue printing with an error message
such as TRAY x LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE] or UNEXPECTED
PAPER SIZE.
●Confirms a manual feed request if Tray 1 is loaded and
TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE has been set from the Paper
Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel.
●Overrides a manual feed request from Tray 1 by selecting
paper from the next available tray.
●Exits the control panel menus. (To save a selected control
panel setting, first press SELECT.)
MENU Cycles through the control panel menus. Press the right end of
the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move
backward.
C4265-90907 Using the Printer Control Panel 93
Indicator Lights
The control panel indicator lights are described in the following table.
ITEM Cycles through the selected menu’s items. Press the right end of
the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move
backward. Menu items that appear depend on the options
installed and the configuration of other menu choices.
<ITEM>? Provides an online help tool with more details on display error
messages. Cycles through the selected menu item’s values.
Press + to move forward or - to move backward.
-VALUE+Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press + to move
forward or - to move backward.
SELECT Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk (*) appears
next to the selection, indicating that it is the new default. Default
settings remain when the printer is switched off or reset (unless
you reset all factory defaults from the Resets Menu).
Prints one of the printer information pages from the control panel.
CANCEL
JOB
Cancels the print job that the printer is processing. The time it
takes to cancel depends on the size of the print job. (Press it only
once.)
Table 3-2. Indicator Lights
Indicator= State Explanation Action
Ready On Ready to receive data. No action required.
Flashing Going offline. No action required.
Off Printer is offline. Press GO to place
printer online.
Data On Data is resident in the
printer and processed as
far as possible. More data
is expected, but no activity
on the channel at this
time.
No action required.
Flashing Data is being received or
processed. No action required.
Off No data is being received
or processed in the
printer.
No action required.
Table 3-1. Control Panel Keys (continued)
Key Function
94 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Settings and Defaults
The printer makes most printing decisions based on either temporary
settings or factory (permanent) defaults.
Note Settings you send from software applications override printer defaults.
Temporary Settings are the values set for the current print job by
your software application. Temporary settings remain in effect until
the current print job is finished.
Control Panel Defaults are the values entered by selecting a control
panel item and pressing SELECT. An asterisk (*) next to the item name
indicates that it is now the default. The printer retains default settings
even when power is turned off.
Factory Defaults are the permanent default values for each menu
item set at the factory. Factory default values are listed in table 3-3 on
page 97.
Printer Driver Information
When you change a setting from the printer control panel, the new
setting becomes the printer default value. You can override any
Printing Menu setting through most software applications and from
the printer driver.
Attention On Catastrophic error. Printer
system is halted. Turn printer off, then
on. If problem
persists, see Chapter
7.
Flashing The printer needs
attention. Read and respond to
display panel
message.
Off There are no messages
or error conditions
requiring attention.
No action required.
Table 3-2. Indicator Lights (continued)
Indicator= State Explanation Action
C4265-90907 Using the Printer Control Panel 95
Paper Source Default
The printer paper source is specified by the print job, not the printer
control panel. The following paragraphs apply when the current job
does not specify a paper source. Unless changed or not specified by
the current job, the software application, or the printer driver, the
paper source default is determined by the “Cold Reset Paper Size”
(letter or A4) set in the Service Mode Menu.
●If Tray 1 is set to cassette, it will look for the default size.
●If there is no paper in Tray 1, and Tray 4 of the 2000-sheet Input
Tray is installed and loaded with the Cold Reset Paper Size, the
printer will pull from Tray 4.
●The printer pulls paper from Tray 5 first if the Optional
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray is installed.
●If there is no paper in Tray 1, and Tray 4 is not installed, the printer
will pull from the first tray containing the Cold Reset Paper Size.
●If none of the trays contain the Cold Reset Paper Size, the printer
will prompt the user to put letter or A4 paper in Tray 1.
96 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Performing a Cold Reset
Cold Reset
Cold Reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all the
defaults back to the factory settings.
CAUTION Performing a Cold Reset resets the JetDirect configuration. To avoid
making changes to your configuration, remove the JetDirect card
before performing a Cold Reset.
If possible, print a Configuration Page prior to performing a Cold Reset.
This will document current settings for later reference.
To perform a Cold Reset:
1. Turn off the printer.
2While pressing GO, turn the printer on. COLD RESET appears briefly
on the display, then INITIALIZING appears. After a few seconds,
RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the display, followed
by OFFLINE. The Cold Reset is complete.
3. Press GO to return the printer online. READY appears on the
display.
Setting the Display Language
1Press and hold SELECT while powering on. Hold SELECT until
SELECT LANGUAGE appears.
2Release SELECT. INITIALIZING appears briefly. Wait for
LANGUAGE=ENGLISH to appear.
3Press + repeatedly until the desired language appears.
4Press SELECT to save your choice. An asterisk (*) will appear
beside your language selection.
5Press GO to return to a READY state.
Note The language that appears on the HP Digital Copier display is
customized through the language selected on the printer. If the printer
language is set to a language other than the six offered by the HP Digital
Copier, then the HP Digital Copier will default to English. (See the
printer online user guide for more information.)
C4265-90907 Performing a Cold Reset 97
Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings
Menu Item HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Default
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Default
APPEND CR TO LF NO NO
ATALK ON
AUTO CONTINUE= ON ON
BINDING LONG EDGE
CFG IPX/SPX NO
CFG LINK NO
CFG NETWORK NO NO
CFG TCP/IP NO
CLEARABLE WARNINGS JOB JOB
CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER NO NO
CONFIGURE EDGE TO EDGE NO
CONFIGURE FUSER MODE NO NO
COPIES 1 1
COURIER REGULAR REGULAR
CREATE CLEANING PAGE NO NO
CROSSFEED SIZE INCHES
DLC/LLC ON
DUPLEX= OFF OFF
ECONOMODE= OFF OFF
EDGE TO EDGE OVERRIDE OFF
FORM 60 LINES 60 LINES
I/O TIMEOUT= 15 SECONDS 15 SECONDS
IO BUFFER= AUTO AUTO
I/O BUFFER SIZE 100K
IPX/SPX ON
JAM RECOVERY= AUTO AUTO
JOB HELD TIMEOUT OFF
98 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Menu Item HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Default
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Default
MAINTENANCE MESSAGE OFF
MANUAL FEED OFF OFF
NEW TONER CARTRIDGE NO NO
OPERATION MODE MAILBOX
ORIENTATION= PORTRAIT PORTRAIT
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER NO NO
PAGE PROTECT AUTO
PAPER DEST= STANDARD
OUTPUT BIN
STANDARD
OUTPUT BIN
PAPER= LETTER LETTER
PARALLEL ADV FUNCTIONS ON ON
PARALLEL HIGH SPEED SETTING= YES YES
PCL FONT NUMBER 0 0
PCL FONT PITCH 10 10
PCL FONT POINT SIZE 12
PCL FONT SOURCE INTERNAL INTERNAL
PCL MEMORY 400 K
PCL SYMBOL SET PC-8 PC-8
PERSONALITY= AUTO AUTO
POWERSAVE ON= 1 HOUR 30 MINUTES
PRINT PS ERRORS OFF OFF
PRINT TEST PAGE TRAY ALL
PS MEMORY 400 K
QUICK COPY JOBS 32
RAM DISK AUTO AUTO
RAM DISK SIZE 800K 800K
RESOLUTION= FASTRES 1200 FASTRES 1200
RESOURCE SAVE= OFF OFF
Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings (continued)
C4265-90907 Performing a Cold Reset 99
Menu Item HP LaserJet
8100 Series
Default
HP LaserJet
8150 Series
Default
RET= MEDIUM MEDIUM
TCP/IP ON
TONER DENSITY= 3 3
TONER LOW= CONTINUE CONTINUE
TRAY 1 MODE FIRST FIRST
TRAY 2 TYPE PLAIN PLAIN
TRAY 3 TYPE PLAIN PLAIN
TRAY 4 TYPE PLAIN
TRAY 5 TYPE PLAIN
TRAY X SHIFT NONE
[TYPE] NORMAL
UNIT OF MEASURE INCHES
WIDE A4 NO NO
X-DIMENSION 11.7 INCHES
Y-DIMENSION 17.7 INCHES
Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings (continued)
100 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Printer Control Panel Menus
Press MENU to cycle through the control panel menus. Each menu is
described in a separate table in this section. Figure 7-16 on page 652
provides a map of all the menus and their associated items. Menu
items are displayed only if their associated option is installed, or their
function is activated.
All menus and their associated items are accessible when the printer
is online. In menu mode, if no keys are pressed for approximately 30
seconds, the system will automatically return to the top level and
display either an existing error, or one of the following:
●READY, if the printer was online.
●OFFLINE, if the printer was offline.
To select a menu item
1Press MENU repeatedly until the desired menu appears.
2Press ITEM repeatedly until the desired item appears.
3Press + repeatedly (or hold down + to scroll) until the desired
setting appears.
4Press SELECT to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears next to
the selection, indicating that it is now the default.
5Press MENU or GO to exit the menus.
Note Shaded items appear only if the associated option or function is
installed and activated.
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 101
HP LaserJet 8100 Series Quick Copy Jobs
Menu
There are four job retention features: Quick Copy, Proof and Hold,
Private Job, and Stored Job (all are available with a hard disk
installed).
This menu provides a list of the quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s
hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the control
panel.
Note If there are no quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk or RAM,
this menu is not displayed on the control panel.
HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs
Menu
This menu provides a list of the private and stored jobs on the
printer’s hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the
control panel.
Note If there are no private and stored jobs on the printer’s hard disk or RAM,
this menu is not displayed on the control panel.
Table 3-4. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Quick Copy Jobs Menu
Item Value Explanation
[USERNAME] The name of the person who owns the quick copy job.
COPIES=1 1 to 999
DELETE
The number of additional copies the user wants to print.
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the
job.
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk.
Table 3-5. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu
Item Value Explanation
[JOBNAME] The name of the job stored on the printer’s hard disk or
RAM.
PIN:0000 To print the job, the user must enter the Personal
Identification Number (PIN) assigned to the job in the
driver.
102 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Note The Quick Copy Jobs Menu and the Private/Stored Jobs Menu will only
appear if you have a Hard Disk, if you have selected a Job Retention
Option, and if you have sent jobs to the printer.
HP LaserJet 8150 Series Quick Copy Menu
There are four job retention features: Quick Copy, Proof and Hold,
Private Job, and Stored Job (all are available with a hard disk
installed). Proof and Hold and Private Job are available in RAM on the
HP LaserJet 8150 Series only.
HP LaserJet 8150 Series Private/Stored Jobs
Menu
This menu provides a list of the Job Retention jobs on the printer’s
hard disk or RAM. The user can print or delete these jobs from the
control panel.
Note If there are no Job Retention jobs on the printer’s hard disk or RAM,
this menu is not displayed on the control panel.
COPIES=1 1 to 999
DELETE
The number of additional copies the user wants to print.
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the
job.
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk or
RAM.
Table 3-5. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu (continued)
Item Value Explanation
Table 3-6. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Job Retention Menu
Item Value Explanation
[USERNAME] The name of the person who owns the quick copy job.
[JOBNAME] The name of the job stored on the printer’s hard disk or
RAM.
PIN:0000 To print the job, the user must enter the Personal
Identification Number (PIN) assigned to the job in the
driver.
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 103
COPIES=1 1 to 999
DELETE
The number of additional copies the user wants to print.
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the
job.
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk or
RAM.
Table 3-6. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Job Retention Menu
Item Value Explanation
104 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Information Menu
This menu contains printer information pages that give details about
the printer and its configuration. To print a page from the information
menu, scroll to the desired page and press SELECT.
Table 3-7. Information Menu
Item Explanation
PRINT
MENU MAP
The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the
control panel menu items.
PRINT
CONFIGURATION
The configuration page shows the printer’s current configuration.
If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed, a JetDirect
configuration page will print out as well.
PRINT
PCL FONT LIST
The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the
printer.
PRINT
PS FONT LIST
The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the
printer.
PRINT
FILE DIRECTORY
The file directory shows information for all of the installed mass
storage devices. It appears only when a mass storage device,
such as a flash DIMM or hard disk, is installed in the printer.
PRINT
EVENT LOG
The event log lists printer events or errors on the first page. The
second page is a manufacturing page.
SHOW
EVENT LOG
This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the
control panel display. Press - VALUE + to scroll through the event
log entries.
PRINT
PAPER PATH TEST
The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is
working properly, or to troubleshoot problems with a type of
paper.
Choose the Input Tray, output bin, duplexer (if available), and
number of copies.
Note Feeding paper from Tray 1 will not allow the
user to send paper to the Face-down output
bins during this test.
PRINT USAGE PAGE Only shown when hard disk is installed. Primarily used for printer
page tracking, could be used for cost accounting.
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 105
Paper Handling Menu
When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the
control panel, you can print by choosing the type and size of paper
from the printer driver or software application.
Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) can be
accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the
appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application
settings override control panel settings.
Table 3-8. Paper Handling Menu
Item Values Explanation
ENV FEEDER
SIZE=COM10
For supported
paper types,
see table 1-6.
This item appears only when the optional envelope
feeder is installed. Set the value to correspond with the
envelope size currently loaded in the envelope feeder.
ENV FEEDER
TYPE=PLAIN
Appears only when the optional envelope feeder is
installed. Set the value to correspond with the envelope
type currently loaded in the envelope feeder.
TRAY 1 MODE=
FIRST
FIRST
CASSETTE
Determine how the printer will use Tray 1.
FIRST: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, the printer will pull
paper from that tray first.
CASSETTE: A paper size must be assigned to Tray 1
using the TRAY 1 SIZE option (the next item in this
menu when TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE). This allows
Tray 1 to be used as a reserved tray.
TRAY 1
SIZE=LETTER
Appears only when TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE. Set the
value to correspond with the paper size currently
loaded in Tray 1.
TRAY 2 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported
paper types,
see table 1-6.
Set the value to correspond with the paper type
currently loaded in Tray 2.
TRAY 3 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported
paper types,
see table 1-6.
Set the value to correspond with the paper type
currently loaded in Tray 3.
*TRAY 4 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported
paper types,
see table 1-6.
Set the value to correspond with the paper type
currently loaded in the Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray
(Tray 4) or Tray 4 of the Optional 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray (Trays 4 and 5).
*TRAY 5 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported
paper types,
see table 1-6.
Set the value to correspond with the paper type
currently loaded in Tray 5 of the Optional 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5).
106 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
PAPER DEST=
STANDARD OUTBIN
STANDARD
OUTBIN
LEFT OUTBIN
OPTIONAL
BIN
This item appears when an output device is installed.
Set the value to correspond to the appropriate bin.
Additional output bins appear in the menu with the
installation of output devices.
MANUAL
FEED=OFF
OFF
ON
Feed the paper manually from Tray 1, rather than
automatically from a tray. When MANUAL FEED=ON and
Tray 1 is empty, the printer goes offline when it receives
a print job and displays MANUALLY FEED [PAPER
SIZE].
*DUPLEX=OFF OFF
ON
This item appears only when a duplexer is installed.
Set the value to ON to print on both sides (duplex) or
OFF to print on one side (simplex) of a sheet of paper.
BINDING=
LONG EDGE
LONG EDGE
SHORT EDGE
This item appears only when an optional duplexer is
installed and the duplex option is on. Choose the
binding edge when duplexing (printing on both sides of
paper).
OVERRIDE
A4/LETTER=NO
NO
YES
Choose YES to print on letter-size paper when an A4
job is sent, but no A4-size paper is loaded in the printer
(or to print on A4-size paper when a letter job is sent,
but no letter paper is loaded in the printer).
PRINT TEST PAGE
TRAY=ALL
ALL
1
2
3
4
HP LaserJet 8150 series only. This item appears only
when an external input paper handling device is
installed. An edge-to-edge calibration page will print for
the tray selected.
TRAY X
SHIFT=NONE
NONE
LEFT 1
LEFT 2
LEFT 3
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 3
HP LaserJet 8150 series only. This item appears only
when an external input paper handling device is
installed. Allows you to set a value that will shift the
placement of an image to the left or right on the page.
Table 3-8. Paper Handling Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 107
Note Items marked with an * only appear in the menu if the 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray, the 2000-sheet Input Tray, or the duplexer are installed.
To see the default fuser mode for each paper type, select YES, scroll
back to the Information Menu, and print a menu map.
[TYPE]=NORMAL NORMAL
LOW
HIGH1
HIGH2
HIGH3
This item appears when CONFIGURE FUSER MODE
MENU=YES. The printer speeds are for Letter or
A4.Press - VALUE + or to make your selection, and
press SELECT to save the setting.
NORMAL = 32 ppm.
LOW = slightly lower temperature at 32 ppm.
HIGH1 = slightly higher than normal at 32 ppm.
HIGH2 = slightly higher than normal at 24 ppm. This
allows more time to fuse toner for special types of
media (i.e. heavy, rough stock)
HIGH3 = slightly hotter fusing than H1 or H2 at 16 ppm,
for media needing more time in the fusing process.
Most paper types are set to NORMAL by default. The
exceptions are as follows:
TRNSPRNCY=LOW
LABELS=HIGH1
CARDSTOCK=HIGH2
ROUGH=HIGH1
Caution: If you change the fuser mode to HIGH1,
HIGH2 or HIGH3, be sure to change it back to the
default when you are done printing. Setting a paper
type to HIGH1, HIGH2 or HIGH3 may shorten the life of
the fuser or cause other failures or jams.
CONFIGURE FUSER
MODE MENU=NO
NO
YES
Default is NO. Choose YES to configure. The fuser
mode can be changed only from this menu option in
the control panel.
Note: To see the default fuser mode for each
papertype, select YES, scroll pack to the Information
Menu, and print a menu map.
CONFIGURE EDGE
TO EDGE=NO
NO
YES
HP LaserJet 8150 Series only. Configure the margin
alignment of the tray you wish to print an edge-to-edge
print job from.
NO: The edge-to-edge configuration menu items are not
accessible.
YES: Additional edge-to-edge configuration menu items
appear.
Table 3-8. Paper Handling Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
108 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Print Quality Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software
application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is
installed). Printer driver and software application settings override
control panel settings.
Table 3-9. Print Quality Menu
Item Values Explanation
RESOLUTION=
FASTRES 1200
300
600
FASTRES 1200
Select the resolution from the following values:
300: Produces draft print quality at the printer’s
maximum speed (32 ppm). 300 dpi (dots per inch) is
recommended for some bitmapped fonts and graphics,
and for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of
printers.
600: Produces high print quality at the printer’s
maximum speed.
FASTRES 1200: Produces optimum print quality
(comparable to 1200 dpi) at the printer’s maximum
speed.
Note It is best to change the resolution from
the printer driver or software
application. (Driver and software
settings override control panel
settings.)
RET=MEDIUM OFF
LIGHT
MEDIUM
DARK
Use the printer’s Resolution Enhancement technology
(REt) setting to produce print with smooth angles,
curves, and edges.
All print resolutions, including FastRes 1200, benefit
from REt.
Note It is best to change the REt setting
from the printer driver or software
application. (Driver and software
settings override control panel
settings.)
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 109
ECONOMODE=
OFF
OFF
ON
Turn EconoMode on (for draft mode) or off (for high
quality).
EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing
the amount of toner on the printed page by up to 50%.
CAUTION HP does not recommend full-time
use of EconoMode. (If
EconoMode is used full-time, it is
possible that the toner supply will
outlast the mechanical parts in the
toner cartridge.)
Note It is best to turn EconoMode on or off
from the printer driver or software
application. (Driver and software
settings override control panel
settings.)
TONER DENSITY=3 1
2
3
4
5
Lighten or darken the print on the page by changing the
toner density setting. The settings range from 1 (light) to
5 (dark), but the default setting of 3 usually produces
the best results.
Use a lower toner density setting to save toner.
Note It is best to change the toner density
from the printer driver or software
application. (Driver and software
settings override control panel
settings.)
CREATE CLEANING
PAGE
No value to
select. Press SELECT to print a cleaning page (for cleaning
excess toner from the paper path).
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the
page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper).
Follow the instructions on the cleaning page.
PROCESS
CLEANING PAGE
No value to
select. This item appears only after a cleaning page has been
generated. Press SELECT to process the cleaning page.
Table 3-9. Print Quality Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
110 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Printing Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software
application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is
installed). Printer driver and software application settings override
control panel settings.
Table 3-10. Printing Menu
Item Values Explanation
COPIES=1 1 to 999 Sets the default number of copies by selecting any
number from 1 to 999. Press - VALUE + once to change
the setting by increments of 1, or hold down - VALUE +
to scroll by increments of 10.
Note It is best to set the number of copies
from the printer driver or software
application. (Driver and software
settings override control panel
settings.)
CROSS FEED
SIZE=INCHES
INCHES
MILLIMETERS
The size of the custom paper on the cross-feed side
specified in inches or millimeters.
Note The feed direction is the direction that
paper is fed through the printer. The
cross-feed direction is perpendicular
to the feed direction.
PAPER=
LETTER For supported
paper types, see
table 1-6.
Sets the default image size for paper and envelopes.
(The item name will change from paper to envelope as
you scroll through the available sizes.)
Note The defaults indicated here are for
110V printers. The default paper size
for 220V printers is A4. The default
envelope size for 220V printers is DL.
CONFIGURE
CUSTOM PAPER=NO
NO
YES
NO: The custom paper menu items are not accessible.
YES: This menu item allows the user to configure a
custom size when printing from Tray 1. The increments
can be set to inches or millimeters.
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 111
UNIT OF
MEASURE=INCHES
INCHES
MILLIMETERS
This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM
PAPER=YES. Select the unit of measurement for the
custom paper size.
X DIMENSION=
11.7 INCHES
For supported
paper types, see
table 1-6.
This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM
PAPER=YES. Select the dimension to be fed in to the
printer (short edge).
Y DIMENION=
17.7 INCHES
For supported
paper types, see
table 1-6.
This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM
PAPER=YES. Select the other dimension (long edge).
FORM=60 LINES 5 to 128 Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default
paper size. Press - VALUE + once to change the setting
by increments of 1, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by
increments of 10.
ORIENTATION=
PORTRAIT
PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Determines the default orientation of print on the page.
Note It is best to set the page orientation
from the printer driver or software
application. (Driver and software
settings override control panel
settings.)
PCL FONT
SOURCE=INTERNAL
INTERNAL
SOFT
SLOT 1, 2, or
3
INTERNAL: Internal fonts.
SOFT: Permanent soft fonts.
SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of the three
DIMM slots.
PCL FONT
NUMBER=
0
0 to 999 The printer assigns a number to each font and lists
them on the PCL Font List. The font number appears in
the Font # column of the printout.
PCL FONT PITCH=
10.00
0.44 to 99.99 This item might not appear, depending on the font
selected. Press - VALUE + once to change setting by
increments of 0.01 for pitch, or hold down - VALUE + to
scroll by increments of 1.
Table 3-10. Printing Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
112 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
PCL FONT POINT
SIZE=12.00
4.00 to 999.75 This item may not appear, depending on the font
selected. Press - VALUE + once to change setting by
increments of 0.25 for point size, or hold down - VALUE
+ to scroll by increments of 1.
PCL SYMBOL
SET=PC-8
PC-8
many others Select any one of several available symbol sets from
the printer’s control panel. A symbol set is a unique
grouping of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850
is recommended for line draw characters.
COURIER=REGULAR REGULAR
DARK
Select the version of Courier font to use:
REGULAR: The internal Courier font available on the HP
LaserJet 4 Series printers.
DARK: The internal Courier font available on the HP
LaserJet III Series printers.
Both fonts are not available at the same time.
WIDE A4=NO NO
YES
The Wide A4 setting changes the number of
characters that can be printed on a single line of A4
paper.
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one
line.
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on
one line.
APPEND CR TO LF=
NO
NO
YES
Select YES to append a carriage return to each line
feed encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs
(pure text, no job control). Some environments, such
as UNIX, indicate a new line using only the line feed
control code. This option allows the user to append the
required carriage return to each line feed.
PRINT PS
ERRORS=OFF
OFF
ON
Select ON to print the PS error page when PS errors
occur.
EDGE TO EDGE
OVERRIDE= OFF
OFF
ON
HP LaserJet 8150 series only. Turns the edge-to-
edge mode on or off for all print jobs. This mode can be
overridden inside a print job by an edge-to-edge PJL
variable.
Table 3-10. Printing Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 113
Configuration Menu
Items in this menu affect the printer’s behavior. Configure the printer
according to your printing needs.
Table 3-11. Configuration Menu
Item Values Explanation
POWERSAVE=
Off
OFF
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
2 HOURS
3 HOURS
HP LaserJet 8100 Series only. The PowerSave feature
minimizes the amount of power consumed by the printer
when it is idle and reduces wear on the printer’s
electronic components. It also turns off the display’s
backlight.
When you send a print job, press a control panel key,
open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the printer
automatically comes out of PowerSave mode.
Note PowerSave turns off the backlight on
the display, but the display is still
readable.
POWERSAVE TIME=
30 MINUTES
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
2 HOURS
3 HOURS
HP LaserJet 8150 Series only. Set the printer to enter
PowerSave after it has been idle for a specified amount
of time. Turning PowerSave off is not recommended.
The PowerSave feature does the following:
●Minimizes the amount of power consumed by the
printer when it is idle.
●Reduces wear on the printer’s electronic
components. (Turns off the display’s backlight, but
the display is still readable.)
When you send a print job, press a control panel key,
open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the printer
automatically comes out of PowerSave mode. To turn
PowerSave off, see “Resets Menu” on page 125.
PERSONALITY=
AUTO
AUTO
PCL
PS
Select the default printer language (personality).
Normally you should not change the printer language
(the default is AUTO). If you change it to a specific printer
language, the printer will not automatically switch from
one language to another unless specific software
commands are sent to the printer.
114 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
RESOURCE SAVE=
OFF
OFF
ON
AUTO
This item dedicates printer memory to save each
language’s permanent resources. (You might need to
add memory to the printer in order for this item to
appear.) The amount of memory set aside can be
different for each installed language. Some languages
might have memory set aside for resource saving
without requiring all languages to do so. Any time the
amount of memory dedicated to a specific language is
changed, all languages will lose all saved resources,
including any unprocessed print jobs.
OFF: No language resource saving is performed, and
language-dependent resources, such as fonts and
macros, are lost when language or resolution changes.
ON: An item will appear for each installed language that
allows the user to allocate a particular amount of
memory to that language’s resource saving area. (See
the items below.)
AUTO: The printer automatically determines the amount
of memory to use for each installed language’s
resource saving area.
To reset the pages, turn the printer off, hold down the
ITEM - and the VALUE - keys while turning the printer
on. Wait for RESET MAINT/ COUNT to display on the
control panel before releasing the keys.
PCL MEMORY+
400K
0K and up
(This value
depends on
the amount of
installed
memory.)
This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON.
Select the amount of memory used for saving PCL
resources. Printer default is the minimum amount of
memory needed to perform resource saving for PCL.
Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of 10
(up to 100KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100KB).
PS MEMORY=
400K
0K and up
(This value
depends on
the amount of
installed
memory.)
This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON.
Select the amount of memory used for saving PS
resources. Printer default is the minimum amount of
memory needed to perform resource saving for PCL.
Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of 10
(up to 100KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100KB).
Table 3-11. Configuration Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 115
PAGE PROTECT=
AUTO
AUTO
ON
This item appears only after a 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX,
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE message displays. Memory
Enhancement technology (MEt) attempts to guarantee
that all pages will print. If the page does not print, turn
PAGE PROTECT to ON. This might increase chances of a
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PRESS GO TO
OONTINUE message. If this occurs, simplify the print job
or install additional memory.
CLEARABLE
WARNINGS=JOB
JOB
ON
Set the amount of time that a clearable warning is
displayed on the printer’s control panel.
JOB: Warning messages display on the control panel
until the end of the job from which they were generated.
ON: Warning messages display on the control panel
until GO is pressed.
AUTO CONTINUE=
ON
ON
OFF
This item determines how the printer reacts to errors.
ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the
message will display, and the printer will go offline for 10
seconds before returning online.
OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the
message will remain on the display and the printer will
remain offline until GO is pressed.
TONER
LOW=CONTINUE
CONTINUE
STOP
This item determines how the printer behaves when
toner is low. The TONER LOW message will first appear
when the toner cartridge is almost out of toner. (About
100 to 300 images can still be printed.)
CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print while the
TONER LOW message is displayed.
STOP: The printer will go offline and wait for further
action.
Table 3-11. Configuration Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
116 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
RAM DISK=AUTO ON
OFF
AUTO
HP LaserJet 8150 series only. This item determines
how the RAM disk is configured. This item appears only
if there is no hard disk installed and the printer has at
least 12 MB of memory.
OFF: The RAM disk is disabled.
ON: The RAM disk is enabled. Configure the amount of
memory to be used with the item RAM DISK SIZE.
Note If the setting is changed from OFF to
ON or from OFF to AUTO, the printer will
automatically reinitialize when it
becomes idle.
RAM DISK
SIZE=xxxK
0K and up. (This
value depends
on the amount of
installed
memory.)
HP LaserJet 8150 series only. This item determines
the size of the RAM disk. This item appears if RAM
DISK=ON or AUTO.
Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of
100.
Note This setting cannot be changed if RAM
DISK=AUTO. Changing this value will
cause the printer to reinitialize when it
becomes idle.
JAM RECOVERY=
AUTO
AUTO
ON
OFF
This item determines how the printer behaves when a
paper jam occurs.
AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode
for printer jam recovery (usually ON). This is the default
setting.
ON: The printer automatically reprints pages after a
paper jam is cleared.
OFF: The printer does not reprint pages following a
paper jam. Printing performance might be increased
with this setting.
Table 3-11. Configuration Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 117
MAINTENANCE
MESSAGE=OFF
OFF This item appears only after the PERFORM PRINTER
MAINTENANCE message displays.
OFF: The PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message
will be cleared. If you do not replace the maintenance
kit, the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message will
be displayed again after approximately 17,500 pages.
The message should not be turned off unless the printer
maintenance has been performed. If the required
maintenance is not performed, the printer’s
performance will degrade.
NEW TONER
CARTRIDGE=NO
NO
YES
YES: Resets the printer to recognize new cartridge, and
resets the toner gauge on the configuration page.
QUICK COPY JOBS
=32
1 to 50 Specifies the number of quick copy jobs that can be
stored on the printer’s hard disk.
JOB HELD
TIMEOUT=OFF
OFF
1 HOUR
4 HOURS
1 DAY
1 WEEK
HP LaserJet 8150 series only. Sets the amount of time
that quick copy, proof and hold, private, and stored jobs
are kept before being automatically deleted from the
queue.
Table 3-11. Configuration Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
118 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Configuration of MBM Menu
Items in the MBM menu define the operating mode for the 7-bin
Tabletop Mailbox, 8-bin Mailbox, or 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler.
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
Table 3-12. MBM Menu
Item Value Explanation
OPERATION MODE:
MAILBOX
MAILBOX
STACKER
JOB SEPARATOR
COLLATOR
Defines the operating mode for the multibin mailbox that
is installed.
MAILBOX: Each bin can be addressed individually as
the destination and can have a name assigned to it by
the network or printer administrator.
STACKER: Stacks the output from the lowest bin to the
top, regardless of job boundaries. This operating mode
takes advantage of the total capacity of the bins. The
software sees the multibin mailbox as one logical bin.
JOB SEPARATOR: Automatically separates incoming
jobs, which may have multiple copies, and assigns a bin
to each. It uses all the bins, but the software sees the
multibin mailbox as one logical bin. If a bin is full, the
printer automatically sends the job to the next available
bin.
COLLATOR: Automatically separates multiple prints of
one page. Each printout is delivered in consecutive
bins, starting with the Face-up Bin.
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 119
I/O Menu
Items in the I/O (input/output) Menu affect the communication
between the printer and the computer.
Table 3-13. I/O Menu
Item Values Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT=15 5 to 300 Select the I/O time-out period in seconds. (I/O time-out
refers to the time, measured in seconds, that the printer
waits before ending a print job.)
This setting allows you to adjust time-out for best
performance. If data from other ports appear in the
middle of your print job, increase the time-out value.
Press - VALUE + once to change settings by increments
of 1, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of
10.
I/O BUFFER=AUTO AUTO
ON
OFF
Allocate memory for I/O buffering.
AUTO: The printer automatically reserves memory for
I/O buffering. Additional configurations are not required
and the I/O BUFFER SIZE menu item does not
appear.
ON: The I/O BUFFER SIZE item appears (see below).
Specify the amount of memory to be used for I/O
buffering.
OFF: I/O buffering is not performed and the
I/O BUFFER SIZE item does not appear.
When the I/O buffer setting is changed, any downloaded
resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be
downloaded again, unless they are stored on the hard
disk or a flash DIMM.
I/O BUFFER
SIZE=100K
10K and up This item appears only when I/O BUFFER=ON. Specify
the amount of memory for I/O buffering. The maximum
amount of memory available for I/O buffering is
determined by the amount of memory installed in the
printer, the languages installed in the printer, and by
other memory allocations that must be made.
Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of 10
(up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
120 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
PARALLEL HIGH
SPEED=YES
YES
NO
Select the speed at which data is transmitted to the
printer.
YES: The printer accepts faster parallel communications
used for connections with newer computers.
NO: The printer accepts slower parallel communications
used for connections with older computers.
PARALLEL ADV
FUNCTIONS=ON
ON
OFF
Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off.
The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port
(IEEE-1284).
This setting allows the printer to send status messages
to the computer. (Turning the parallel advanced
functions on might slow language switching.)
Table 3-13. I/O Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 121
EIO Menu
EIO (enhanced input/output) Menus depend on the particular
accessory product installed in an EIO slot of the printer. If the printer
contains an HP JetDirect print server EIO card, you can configure
basic networking parameters using the EIO Menu. These and other
parameters can also be configured through HP JetAdmin.
Table 3-14. EIO Menu
Item Values Explanation
CFG IPX/SPX=NO NO
YES
NO: The IPX/SPX Menu is not accessible.
YES: The IPX/SPX Menu appears. In the IPX/SPX
Menu, you can specify the frame type parameter used
on your network. The default is AUTO, to automatically
set and limit the frame type to the one detected.
For Ethernet cards, frame type selections include
EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, EN_SNAP
.
For Token Ring cards, frame type selections include
TR_8022, TR_SNAP
.
In the IPX/SPX Menu for Token Ring cards, you can
also specify NetWare Source Routing parameters,
which include SRC RT=AUTO (default), OFF
, SINGLE R,
or ALL RT
.
CFG TCP/IP=NO NO
YES
NO: The TCP/IP Menu is not accessible.
YES: The TCP/IP Menu appears. In the TCP/IP Menu,
you can specify BOOTP=YES for TCP/IP parameters to
be automatically loaded from a bootp or DHCP server
when the printer is turned on. If you specify BOOTP=NO,
you can manually set selected TCP/IP parameters from
the control panel. You can manually set each byte of the
IP address (IP), Subnet Mask (SM), Syslog Server
(LG), and Default Gateway (GW). Also, you can
manually set the Timeout time period.
122 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
CFG LINK=NO NO
YES
NO: The 10/100Base-TX link configuration menu is not
accessible.
YES: Allows you to access and manually set 10/
100Base-TX link parameters.
Auto: (Default) The print server will automatically
configure itself to match the network’s link speed and
communication mode.
●10T HALF: Sets 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation on
the print server.
●10T FULL: Sets 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation on
the print server.
●100TX HALF: Sets 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation
on the print server.
●100TX FULL: Sets 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation
on the print server.
Table 3-14. EIO Menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 123
Duplex Registration Menu
The duplex registration menu is available in the HP LaserJet 8150
Series. The items in this menu will assist you in aligning the images
on the front and back of a duplexed page by calibrating Tray 2, 3, or 4.
This feature is not available for Tray 1. You will need to repeat the
following items for each tray.
The duplex registration feature allows precise alignment of images on
the front and back of a duplexed page. Image placement varies
slightly for each input tray. The alignment procedure must be
performed for each tray.
1Press MENU until DUPLEX REGISTRATION MENU appears on the
printer control panel display.
2Press ITEM until PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want.
3Press SELECT to print the page.
4Hold the printed page up to a light source and choose the number
on each axis where the lines on the front and back of the page
align most accurately.
5Repeat step 1.
6Press ITEM until TRAY n X= appears and use -VALUE + to enter the
number you selected from the test page in step 4. Press SELECT
to save this value.
7Repeat step 6 for the Y axis.
8Press ITEM to scroll up through the duplex registration menu until
PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want.
9Press SELECT to print the page.
Table 3-15. Duplex Registration Menu
Item Explanation
TRAY n
PRINT TEST PAGE
Print a test page for Trays 2, 3 or 4 (a test page will print for Tray 4 only
if an external input device is attached, and Tray 5 will be aligned from
performing the instructions for Tray 4 if you have the external 2x500
Input Tray installed).
TRAY n X=0 0 is the X offset for the second side of the duplexed page for pages
coming from Tray n. the registration marks range from -5 to +5.
TRAY n Y=0 0 is the Y offset for the second side of the duplexed page for pages
coming from Tray n. The registration marks range from -5 to +5.
124 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
10 Repeat step 4 to verify that the lines on the front and back of the
page are now properly aligned.
Note If the lines on the front and back of the page do not properly align, then
repeat steps 4-9 until they are properly aligned.
C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 125
Resets Menu
CAUTION Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or printer
configuration settings when you select these items. Only reset the
printer under the following circumstances:
●You want to restore the printer’s default settings.
●Communication between the printer and computer has been
interrupted.
●You are having problems with a port.
The items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory in the printer,
while CANCEL JOB clears only the current job.
Table 3-16. Resets Menu
Item Explanation
POWERSAVE=OFF HP LaserJet 8150 Series only. The PowerSave feature minimizes the
amount of power consumed by the printer when it is idle and reduces
wear on the printer’s electronic components. When you send a print
job, press a control panel key, open a paper tray, or open the top cover,
the printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode.
Note PowerSave turns off the backlight on the display, but
the display is still readable.
RESET MEMORY This item clears the printer buffer and the active I/O input buffer, and
makes the control panel defaults current.
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
RESTORE FACTORY
SETTINGS
This item performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory
(default) settings. This item also clears the input buffer for the active
I/O.
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
RESET ACTIVE I/O
CHANNEL
This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output
buffers (for the active I/Os only).
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
RESET ALL I/O
CHANNELS
This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output
buffers for all I/Os.
126 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel
Install the Front Panel Overlay
1Choose the Front Panel overlay
printed with your language.
2Press the overlay in place on the HP
Digital Copier Front Panel until it
clicks.
3To remove the Front Panel overlay,
pull it up and off.
Note
The language that appears on the HP
Digital Copier display is customized
through the language selected on the
printer. If the printer language is set to a
language other than the six offered by
the HP Digital Copier (English, French,
Italian, German, Spanish, and Dutch),
then the HP Digital Copier will default to
English. (See the printer online user
guide for more information.)
1
2
3
C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 127
HP Digital Copier Front Panel
Front Panel Layout and Display Settings
Figure 3-2 Front Panel Layout
Paper
Reduce/
Enlarge
2-sided/N-up
Output/Staple
Copy Quality
Stop
Device Status
Message Number of
Copies Context-sensitive
Help Reset Start
Numerical
Keypad
More Features
1
Table 3-17. Status Bar
The Status Bar displays the current:
●"device status message"
●"number of copies selected"
●"context-sensitive help button" (available for certain features)
device status
message The READY TO COPY
, COPYING, or ACCEPTING
COPY JOBS message is displayed. ACCEPTING
COPY JOBS indicates that the printer is busy. You
can configure the next copy job when the printer is
busy.
number of copies
selected The current number of copies selected for the
copy job is displayed. This setting defaults to 1.
context-sensitive
help button This button remains present on the Front Panel
display when available. When selected, help for
the function appears.
128 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Table 3-18. Menu Tabs
Menu Tabs allow access to any of the HP Digital Copier settings. Each tab
shows related job settings. Select OK or EXIT to make changes as you move
from tab to tab. Press OK to exit the menu tabs and start a copy job. Press
EXIT to return to the default display tab. You can also select START to begin a
copy job before exiting the menu tabs.
Menu tabs
●"paper tab"
●"reduce/enlarge tab"
●"2-sided/N-up tab"
●"output/staple tab"
●"copy quality tab"
●"book copy tab"
●"job binding tab"
●"configuration tab"
●"about tab"
paper tab Allows you to choose paper for the copy job based
on size, tray, or type.
●Size - Shows the current size selected. When a
selection is made, the Tray list will update
automatically.
●Tray - Shows the current tray selected. If the
selected paper size is currently installed in
multiple trays, the tray selection text will highlight
AUTOMATIC. This indicates that the printer will
make the tray selection based on its auto-
selection criteria. If the selected paper size is
located in only one tray, the location will be
shown by the list text. When a selection is made,
the Size and Type will update automatically.
Note
If you choose a paper type that is not already loaded
in the printer, the printer will prompt you to load
Tray 1 with the correct paper before the job is
printed.
C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 129
reduce/enlarge tab Allows you to enlarge or shrink the size of the
document.
Allows you to choose the paper size for your original
document and specify a different size for the copy.
For example, copying from A4 to letter. You may also
specify the output paper size and then choose a
scaling percent to reduce or enlarge a region of the
source document. You may choose to copy a fully
bled page onto the printable region of the output
paper.
You are presented with the following controls for
selecting the desired paper scaling percent:
●Reduce/Enlarge - Shows input-to-output paper
sizes. When a size is selected, the proper
scaling percent for the currently selected input
and output paper sizes is displayed.
●Percent - Shows the current page scaling
percent.
Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued)
130 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
reduce/enlarge tab
(continued)
●Custom Media Reduction - This setting allows
you to switch between the standard/enlargement
settings and the custom mode. This allows you
to choose your original and copy document
sizes independently.
When the Custom Media Reduction box is
checked, you can select a paper size under the
Original list for your original document and then
select the paper size in the Copy list for the size
you want to copy. The percent text box
automatically calculates page scaling percent.
When the Custom Media Reduction box is
unchecked, you may select from a list of
standard reduction or enlargement settings,
such as Letter (LTR) to Legal (LGL). Also, you
may select the Manual setting in order to adjust
the scaling percent by hand. When Manual is
selected you may increase or decrease the
scaling percent by one percent increments. You
may reduce a document by up to 25 percent or
enlarge a document by up to 200 percent. When
you have chosen Manual, you may also choose
the size of your original document. The copier
will reduce that document by the percent you
have selected.
●Shrink Page to Printable Region - This allows
you to copy a fully bled page onto the printable
region of the currently selected output paper
size. There are limits to how far out to the edge
of the page the printer can print. If you are
copying a page that has printing all the way out
to the edges (full bleed), then checking this box
will cause the image to be reduced slightly so
that the entire edge-to-edge image may print
within the printable region of the output paper.
Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued)
C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 131
2-sided/N-up tab This tab has four controls for setting up the options
and a preview image that graphically illustrates the
current settings.
●2-sided Copying - Shows the currently selected
2-sided mode. Choose the two-sided mode you
need. The preview image will update to display
your choice.
●Flip Pages Up - This setting is active if you
choose to copy onto both sides of the output
paper. By default, the pages of the two-sided
binding are flipped to the left, like a book, when
viewed from the backside of the job. When the
setting is checked, the pages are bound,
appearing flipped up when viewed from the
backside of the job. The preview image will
update to display your choice.
●N-up Copying - Shows the currently selected
number of input pages to be printed on each
output page. Choose the number of input pages
needed to print on each output page. The
preview image will update to display your choice.
●Print Page Borders - This setting is active when
you select two or more pages for each sheet.
When checked, page borders will print around
each page image on the output page. The
preview image will update to display your choice.
output/staple tab ●You can configure the output and stapling
options using the two main controls on this tab.
●Output Bin - Shows the currently selected
output bin. Choose which bin the copy job will be
delivered to. If the output bin is set to the
stapling bin and a stapling option is selected,
then changing the output bin to another location
will turn off the stapling option.
●Stapling - Allows you to choose stapling
options. The number of options displayed will
depend on the stapling device installed. If you
select an option to have the output stapled, then
the Output Bin setting will change to display that
stapling can only take place in the Staple Bin.
Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued)
132 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
copy quality tab ●Copy Mode - You may change the copy quality
settings from this tab. There are three settings to
choose from in Copy Mode:
Photo - This mode is optimized for photo clarity.
Text - This mode is optimized for text sharpness.
This is the default mode.
●Brightness - You may change the brightness
setting from this tab. Press the left or right arrow
to increase or decrease the brightness level as
indicated by the slider. There are five settings for
brightness.
book copy tab Allows you to make a copy of an open book with a
single page of output for each page of the book.
Align the spine of the book with the book markings
on the flatbed paper guides.
●Follow the prompts provided on the Front Panel
when using this mode.
●You can copy multiple pages from a book and
bind them together as one job. See the "job
binding tab" description for more information.
job binding tab Takes multiple copies from the flatbed and binds
them together as one job. This allows the user to
duplex, print n-up pages, and staple jobs from the
flatbed.
●Follow the prompts provided on the Front Panel
when using this mode.
configuration tab Provides configuration settings for the HP Digital
Copier.
For example:
●Allows you to turn on or off the audible key
feedback.
●Allows you to adjust the Front Panel display
contrast.
Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued)
C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 133
about tab Used to find available help topics.
Displays:
●system version information
●current page counts for the flatbed and ADF
●number of pages until the next required service
Table 3-19. Context-sensitive Help
Press the to enter the HP Digital Copier help system. Follow the
prompts provided in the help system to find additional descriptions of certain
features and functions.
Table 3-20. Default Configurations
If the HP Digital Copier is idle and unattended for one minute, the HP Digital
Copier settings will return to the default configuration. Press the Reset key
on the Front Panel to return all of the HP Digital Copier settings to the default
configuration.
The setting changes that you make will remain for one minute before they
reset to a default setting. For example, if you walk up to the HP Digital Copier
and press the 5 key, the number of copies selected will be set to five. If you
do not make any other setting changes and do not initiate a job by pressing
the Start key within one minute, then the number of copies selected will
automatically return to one.
After a copy job is completed, the current settings will not change until after
another minute expires. This makes it possible to set up the HP Digital
Copier settings in a particular manner only once for a number of jobs.
Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued)
134 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Button/LED Functions
Figure 3-3 Button/LED Functions
RESET START
Keys 0-9
C
Start Button LED
STOP
Paper Sensor LED
Table 3-21. Functions of Buttons and LEDs
Name of the button or LED Function
Button 0-9 Use to enter the number of copies you desire. May
also be used periodically to enter a numerical value
(for example, in service mode).
RESET Resets all of the copier settings to the default values.
START Begins a copy job or continues a copy job that has
been interrupted because of an error.
STOP Stops a copy job.
CClears the number of copies setting. (Does not clear
the other copy module settings.)
LED Paper Sensor
LED Illuminates when paper is loaded correctly in the
ADF.
Start Button LED See “Start Button LED” on page 135 for a detailed
description of this LED.
C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 135
Start Button LED
Note When the copy module is in Power Save mode, the back light of the
display panel will be turned off and the Start LED (green) will flash at
a slow rate to indicate that the system is turned on. To bring the system
out of Power Save mode, place paper in the ADF, press any key on the
numerical keypad, or touch the touch screen.
Table 3-22. Start Button LED States
LED color On Flashing Slow Flashing Fast
Green The copy module is
ready to make copies. The copy module is in
Power Save mode. The copy module is
making copies.
Amber The copy module has a
critical error. Turn the
printer and copy module
off, and then turn the
printer and copy module
on.
The copy module has an
error and requires
attention.
The copy module has an
error that requires
attention from your
service provider.
136 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
HP Digital Copier Settings
Table 3-23. Default Settings
Feature Description Default
Number of copies 1 to 999 1
Paper Source
Select Selection of paper tray
Selection by paper size
Auto-select (any tray)
Letter/A4
Plain
Collation Collated
Grouped (uncollated)
Stapled
Select output bin
Collated
Reduce/Enlarge 25% to 200% in 1%
increments
Supports standard presets,
such as Legal to Letter.
100%
Copy quality text, photo text
Duplex 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2
If the printer does not have a
duplexer installed, then 1-2
and 2-2 are not available.
1-1
N-up 1-up, 2-up, 4-up
2-up documents will be
rotated.
1-up
C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 137
Book copy Copies an open book with
a single page of output for
each page of the book.
Not selected
Brightness 5 levels (2 lighter, normal,
2darker) Normal
Job binding This allows the user to
duplex, print n-up pages,
and staple jobs from the
flatbed.
Not selected
Table 3-23. Default Settings (continued)
Feature Description Default
138 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Loading Documents into the ADF
1Pull up on the ADF Input Tray (A)
and place the bar (B) in operating
position.
2Square up and insert originals face
down into the input tray. Load to the
line indicator on the paper guide.
Note
The system will exit Power Save when
you place the document into the ADF.
The LED will light up and a tone will
sound when paper is loaded correctly.
Remove paper clips and staples.
Flatten the staple holes.
3If the document size exceeds A4 or
Letter size, extend the Input Tray and
output bin by flipping out the
extensions.
Continued on next page.
1
B
A
2
3
C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 139
4Set the guides so that there is a little
amount of clearance between the
side edges and the guides. Adjust
the guides to the document size.
Note
Squeeze the guide lever to free the
guides.
Load documents so that the thickness is
less than 0.32 inches (8 mm).
Set the guides so that they touch the
document sides.
5After a document is copied, remove
the original from the copy module
and the copy from the output bin.
Note
Letter and A4-size originals fed through
the ADF will be rotated automatically to
print correctly.
4
5
140 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Loading Documents onto the Flatbed
1Open the document cover.
2Place the document face down and
align the top left with the reference
mark. Carefully close the document
cover and press START.
1
2
C4265-90907 Printer Service Mode 141
Printer Service Mode
The Service Mode should be used only by authorized service
personnel. While in Service Mode, you can:
●Verify and set the Page Count and serial number. These are
displayed on the Configuration Page.
●Set the Cold Reset Paper Size Default. (This sets the factory
default paper size to either Letter or A4.)
●Clear the Event Log.
Initiate the Service Mode as follows:
1Hold down SELECT and JOB CANCEL while powering on the printer,
until all lights are illuminated and the Display is blank. (If the
Display Panel reads INTERNAL TEST at this point, the keys were
released too soon. Repeat this step until successful.)
2Press MENU (on the right side of the toggle switch), then SELECT.
The message SERVICE MODE is displayed briefly, then the printer
automatically begins an INTERNAL TEST. After several seconds,
both Control Panel Indicators turn off. (The printer may display
WARMING UP if it has not warmed up completely.) After the printer
has warmed up and passed the self test, SERVICE MODE is
displayed.
3Press MENU once to display SERVICE MENU.
To exit the Service Mode press GO.
Table 3-24. Service Mode Menu Items
Service Mode
Menu Items Item
Choices Actions
Required
PAGES= 0000000 Displays total number of pages printed by the printer.
Press + to step through values above cursor.
Press SELECT to activate choice. Cursor will move to next digit.
Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant
digit is selected. Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all
digits will cancel the new setting.
Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system.
Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item.
142 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
MAINTENANCE
COUNT=
0000000 Displays pages since last maintenance (maintenance should
be performed every 350,000 pages).
Press + to step through values above cursor.
Press SELECT to activate choice. Cursor will move to next digit.
Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant
digit is selected. Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all
digits will cancel the new setting.
Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system.
Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item.
MAINTENANCE
INTERVAL=
350000 Allows a service technician to change the page count when the
PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE 350,000 is the default
value.
This is provided for customers with printing environments that
require more frequent maintenance cycles.
SERIAL
NUMBER=
xxxxxxxxxx Displays printer serial number (also located on the printer back
cover).
Press + to step through values above cursor.
Press SELECT to activate choice. Cursor will move to next digit.
Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant
digit is selected. Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all
digits will cancel the new setting.
Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system.
Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item.
COLD RESET
PAPER=
LETTER *
A4
Press + to change setting.
Press SELECT to activate choice.
DIAGNOSTICS= OFF *
ON
For factory test purposes ONLY.
DO NOT change.
CLEAR EVENT
LOG
Press SELECT to activate.
Printer returns to READY when completed.
Table 3-24. Service Mode Menu Items (continued)
Service Mode
Menu Items Item
Choices Actions
Required
C4265-90907 Printer Service Mode 143
Setting Page Count, Maintenance Count,
and Serial Number
The page count, maintenance count, and printer serial numbers are
stored in Non-Volatile Memory. PAGECOUNT is the total number of
images printed by the printer, MAINTCOUNT is the pages since last
maintenance (maintenance should be performed every 350,000
images), and SERIAL NUMBER= is the printer serial number (also
located on the printer back cover).
If it is necessary to replace the Formatter PCA, these numbers should
be set to the current values to accurately reflect the age of the print
engine. The procedures for setting these values are listed in table
3-24.
Before removing the old Formatter PCA, print a Configuration
Page to verify the current values.
Note If it is not possible to print a Configuration Page, try to verify the values
before replacing the Formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3
below.
After verifying the page count, maintenance count, and printer serial
number from the old Formatter PCA, replace it with the new PCA,
then perform the following steps.
1Enter the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter.
2When SERVICE MODE is displayed, press MENU to access the
Service Menu.
3Press ITEM to display PAGECOUNT=, MAINTCOUNT=, and SERIAL
NUMBER=.
4Enter the appropriate values for each item.
5Press GO to exit Service Mode.
144 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size
When replacing a Formatter PCA with a default paper size setting of
A4, set COLD RESET PAPER= to A4.
1Enter the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter.
2Press MENU to access the Service Menu.
3Press ITEM to step through the menu until COLD RESET
PAPER=LETTER* is displayed.
4Press + to toggle between Letter and A4 paper.
5Press SELECT to activate your choice.
6Press GO to exit Service Mode.
7Perform a Cold Reset to activate new choice.
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Service Mode 145
HP Digital Copier Service Mode
Figure 3-4 Copy Module Service Mode
To enter service mode, hold down the RESET, 0, and 1 keys while you
turn on the power. The copy module skips its normal power up
self-tests.
●Reset the ADF cleaning counter and maintenance counter to zero
when you perform cleaning and maintenance procedures.
●In case of a failed EEPROM, reprogram the copy module’s serial
number from the Serial Number Management Menu.
●Use the Calibration Menu to recalibrate the copy module when
you replace the following parts:
•Lamps
•Optics
•ADF Assembly
•Carrier Unit
•Flatbed Cover Assembly
•Control PCA with EEPROM
146 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Note The EEPROM stores all calibration settings. If you replace the Control
PCA, be sure to retain the EEPROM from the bad Control PCA and
install it in the replacement Control PCA.
●Test sensors, Front Panel and the ADF from the Tests Menu.
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Administrator Mode 147
HP Digital Copier Administrator Mode
Administrator Mode is a separate mode from Service Mode. This
mode allows you to set defaults for copy jobs only. This mode does
not set defaults for print jobs or for digitally sent jobs. To set defaults
for print jobs see “HP Digital Copier Settings” on page 136.
This mode is password protected so that only administrators can
enter. To enter Administrator Mode type in 999#320* while the printer
and copy module are turned on and ready.
You will now see the Administration Menu. Press SET COPY
DEFAULTS. You will now see the end user control panel. Set each area
to the desired default state. The areas that can have defaults chosen
are:
●Paper--set defaults
●Reduce/Enlarge--cannot set defaults
●2-Sided/N-Up-Set--set defaults
●Output/Staple--set defaults
●Copy Quality--set defaults
●Book Copy--cannot set defaults
●Job Binding--cannot set defaults
●Configuration--set defaults
Make sure to press SAVE when you are finished.
Press EXIT ADMIN MODE to see the regular end-user screen.
Note There is a setting in the Administrator Mode to restore the defaults to
factory settings.
148 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Remote Upgrade of the Printer Firmware
The latest firmware is available for download from http://www.hp.com.
Once the firmware image is on your C: drive, you have two options:
●Download the file directly to your printer using the manual method
given below.
●Use WebJetAdmin to simultaneously download printer firmware
to one or more printers.
Manually Dowload Printer Firmware
1If your printer is connected via parallel port, JetDirect network
port or Standard Network port on the PC, use the following
command to upgrade the printer’s firmware:
Open a DOS command window and enter this command: Copy /b
<filename> <port name>
2If your printer is connected over the network to a server or shared
printer, use the following command to upgrade the printer’s
firmware:
Open a DOS command window and enter this command: Copy /b
<filename> \\< computername >\<printername>
For example, if your machine is jsmith-nt and you have your share
defined as LJ8150 then you could send an RFU image to the
printer with the command:
copy /b upgrade.rfu \\jsmith-nt\lj8150
C4265-90907 Remote Upgrade of the Printer Firmware 149
Download Printer Firmware Using HP WebJetAdmin
1Bring up the WebJetAdmin main page
2For a single printer, type the IP hostname or IP address of the
printer in the Quick Device Find field in the top right corner and
click Go. For multiple printer updates see the WebJetAdmin User
documentation.
3Click the right arrow right below the Go button to move to the
Update menu option.
4Select Update and "Update Printer" (rather than "Update
JetDirect") and Continue.
5Use the Browse button to locate the firmware image file you
downloaded from the Internet.
6Use the Upload button to move the firmware image file from your
C: drive to the HP WebJetAdmin server.
7Click the "refresh" icon in the top right corner (it looks like a page
with two arrows in a circle).
8Select the datecode that you want to send to the printer. The
datecode is in the format: YYYYMMDD where YYYY is 2000, and
MM and DD are the month and day of the firmware build.
9Click the "Update Firmware" button. HP Web JetAdmin will send
the selected firmware image file to the printer.
150 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware
There are three ways to update copy module firmware:
●HP Digital Sender Configuration Utility
●PJL datastream through a parallel port
●HP Resource Manager
All three types of firmware upgrades can be downloaded from the
World Wide Web, and the digital sending configuration utility is also
available on CD-ROM.
Note If digital sending is being used on the HP LaserJet 8000 Series MFP,
the Digital Sender Configuration Utility is the only method available to
upgrade firmware. Using the DOS parallel upgrade method or the HP
Resource Manager upgrade method will break the digital sending
connection.
HP Digital Sender Configuration Utility upgrade
Before using this method of upgrade, make sure that you have a
license number entered in the digital sending utility or you have the
actual license to enter into the digital sending utility.
1Locate the specific workstation that has been servicing the MFP
device and that has been administering the digital sending
capability.
2Confirm that the workstation or server has the correct driver
connection to the MFP. This connection must be in place for the
upgrade to occur.
3Open the digital sending configuration utility and go to the
configuration tab.
4Confirm that all the settings are correct.
5Click on the reinitialize button.
6The upgrade can take several minutes. This will depend on
whether there are addresses in the address book manager and
how many addresses are being downoaded. A maximum of
200,000 addresses can be downloaded.
7When the upgrade is complete, the printer and copy module will
restart.
C4265-90907 Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware 151
PJL Data stream upgrade through a parallel port
The DOS parallel port upgrade can only be used for upgrading copy
capability. If digital sending is being used on the MFP, refer to the
digital sender configuration utility upgrade method.
1Download and unzip the self-extracting CMFxxx.EXE files from
www.hp.com and copy it to the PC that will be directly connected
to the MFP to perform the upgrade.
2After expanding, locate the CMFxxx.PJL file and CMFDIR.PJL if
needed. Default directory is C:\TEMP
3Directly connect the PC to the MFP you want to upgrade, usually
with a parallel cable.
4Turn the MFP on and wait until the control panel displays READY.
5If the PC is Windows based, you may have to modify the port
settings so that MS DOS print jobs are not spooled. This is done
in Windows 95/98 by selecting Start, Settings, Printers, choose
the printer using LPT1, select File, Properties, Details, and Port
Settings.
6Open a DOS window.
7Change directories to the directory containing the CMFxxx.PJL
file, if necessary.
8If the copy module firmware directories are available, go to step 9.
If you cannot find the copy module firmware directories, type
copy/b CMFDIRS.PJL lpt1 and press the enter key.
Note This step may result in a disk error if the directories are on the MFP
hard disk. This temporary error does not indicate a problem with the
disk and will be cleared with a power cycle. The error can be cleared
by pressing the “Go” key.
9Type copy/b CMFxxx.PJL lpt1 and press the enter key.
10 The MFP control panel should display PROCESSING for about 30
seconds, then return to displaying READY without printing a page.
11 Turn the MFP and the Copy Module off and then back on to
complete the upgrade.
152 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
HP Resource Manager Upgrade
1Verify that the host PC to be used for the upgrade is a Windows
9x or NT machine and that HP Resource Manager has been
successfully installed. (If Resource Manager is not installed,
install it using a custom installation from the original HP LaserJet
8100 or 8150 driver Software CD.)
2Obtain the .mfw files from www.hp.com and copy it to the host
computer that will be used to perform the upgrade.
3Verify that the host PC is connected to the MFP(s) to be
upgraded either with a C-type parallel connector or a network.
4Start HP Resource Manager (Start, Programs, HP LaserJet).
5Select the preferred communication channel at the bottom of the
screen (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, or Local).
6Drag the icons for the printers to be updated into the Printers
folder. Multiple printers can be updated at the same time.
7Using the lower right hand window, browse to the new firmware
files (*.MFW) and drag the file icons to the firmware folder in the
top left window. (This file now appear as a ROF file.)
8The upper right hand window will be updated to reflect the MFP's
status.
9Click the upgrade button and wait for the operation to complete.
10 Verify that the MFP's status changed to “upgraded.”
11 Power the LaserJet and the Copy Module off and back on to
complete the update.
C4265-90907 Testing the Printer 153
Testing the Printer
Paper Path Test
You can test printer operation with the Paper Path Test. It will print 1,
10, 50, 100, or 500 (single or 2-sided) pages from any of the paper
trays (or the Envelope Feeder) and deliver them to a previously
specified output bin.
First, select PAPER DESTINATION and 2-SIDED printing (if a duplexer
is installed) in the Configuration Menu (table 3-11), and then run the
Paper Path Test from the Information Menu (table 3-7).
Note If feeding from Tray 1, the default output will always be the Face-up Bin.
1Press MENU.
2Press (-)ITEM twice.
3Press SELECT and continue making your desired paper path test.
4Press SELECT to execute the test.
Configuration Page
When you print a Configuration Page, the printer checks its internal
controller and I/O interface, then prints a page showing the overall
printer configuration (see figure 7-17 on page 654), and a Menu Map
showing the current menu settings (see figure 7-16 on page 652). You
can review these printouts to verify proper installation of installed
accessories, options, and personalities.
1Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears.
3Press SELECT to print the configuration pages.
For sample information pages, see “Information Pages” on page 651.
154 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
Figure 3-5 Configuration Page (varies with installed options)
Table 3-25. Key to Figure 3-5
1Printer Information lists the serial number, HP JetSend IP addresses, page counts, and
other information for the printer.
2Event Log lists the number of entries in the log, the maximum number of entries viewable,
and the last three entries.
3Installed Personalities and Options lists all printer languages that are installed (such as
PCL and PS) and lists options that are installed in each DIMM slot and EIO slot.
4Memory lists the printer memory, PCL Driver Work Space (DWS), and I/O buffering and
resource saving information.
5Security lists the status of the printer’s control panel lock, control panel password, and
disk drive.
6Paper Tray and Options lists the size settings for all trays and lists any optional paper
handling devices installed.
7Toner gauge provides a graphic representation of how much toner is left in the cartridge.
C4265-90907 Testing the Printer 155
Figure 3-6 Menu Map Page (varies with printer models and installed
options)
Note Items will only appear if options are installed.
Table 3-26. Key to Figure 3-6
Information Menu lets you print information pages and perform a paper path test.
Paper Handling Menu contains paper handling options.
Print Quality Menu lets you set print quality settings.
Printing Menu contains various print options.
Configuration Menu contains various printer settings.
I/O Menu contains communication settings.
Resets Menu shows options for resetting the printer.
156 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907
C4265-90907 Chapter Contents 157
4Maintenance and
Adjustments
Chapter Contents
Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories . . . . . 158
Cleaning the HP Digital Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cleaning ADF and Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Copy Module Optics Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Maintaining the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Maintaining the Copy Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Adjusting Printer Input Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Adjusting the 2000-sheet Printer Input Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Adjusting Duplex Registration of the Paper Trays . . . . . . . . .174
Adjusting the Copy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
158 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling
Accessories
To maintain print quality and paper performance, thoroughly clean the
printer and the paper handling devices:
●Every time you change the toner cartridge.
●After printing approximately 20,000 images.
●Whenever print quality problems occur.
●If the edge-to-edge feature is used frequently (HP LaserJet 8150
series only).
Clean the outside surfaces with a lightly dampened cloth. Clean the
inside with only a dry, lint-free cloth. Use the guidelines listed in table
4-1. Observe the warnings and cautions below.
WARNING! Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all power
cords to avoid shock hazard.
Be careful when cleaning around the Fusing Assembly area. It may be
HOT.
CAUTION To avoid permanent damage to the toner cartridge, do not use
ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer.
Do not touch the transfer roller with your fingers. This can cause print
quality problems.
C4265-90907 Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories 159
Cleaning the Printer
1Before you begin these steps, turn
the printer off and unplug all cords.
2Open the top cover of the printer and
remove the toner cartridge.
WARNING!
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area.
It may be HOT.
CAUTION
Do not touch the transfer roller (A). Oils
from your hands can contaminate the
roller and reduce print quality. If toner
gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a
dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold
water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
3With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe any
residue from the paper path area,
the registration roller (B), and the
toner cartridge cavity. Use the brush
supplied with the printer to remove
residue from tight areas.
4Replace the toner cartridge, close
the printer, reconnect all cables, and
turn the printer on.
160 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Cleaning Spilled Toner
Defective toner cartridges can develop leaks. Also, after a paper jam
has occurred, there may be some toner remaining on the rollers and
guides inside the printer. The images that print immediately after the
jam may pick up this toner.
Clean spilled toner with a cloth slightly dampened in cold water. Do
not touch the Transfer Roller with the damp cloth or with your fingers.
Do not use a vacuum cleaner unless it is equipped with a micro-fine
particle filter.
Note If toner gets on your clothing, use cold water to remove it. Hot water
sets toner stains into fabric.
Table 4-1. Cleaning the Printer
Component Cleaning Method/Notes
Outside Covers Use a water-dampened cloth. Do not use solvents or
ammonia-based cleaners.
Inside General Use a dry, lint free cloth. Remove all dust, spilled
toner, and paper particles.
Paper Pickup, Feed,
and Separation
Rollers
Use a water-dampened lint-free cloth.
Separation Pad Use a dry lint-free cloth.
Registration Roller Use a dry lint-free cloth.
Transfer Roller Use a dry, lint-free cloth. DO NOT TOUCH the
transfer roller with your fingers.
Fusing Assembly Use a water-dampened lint-free cloth.
C4265-90907 Cleaning the HP Digital Copier 161
Cleaning the HP Digital Copier
Clean the ADF Assembly, including the Rollers and Separation Pad,
every 6,000 pages, or more frequently with certain paper types. To
check the “ADF Scans Since Last Cleaning” counter, print a
Configuration Page from the Printer Information Menu. You must reset
the cleaning counter in the printer’s service mode after you clean the
copy module (see page 143).
Symptoms indicating that it is time to clean the copy module include
increasing mispicks and an optical failure.
Materials
●Dry, lint-free cloth
●Isopropyl alcohol (any concentration, including denatured
alcohol)
●Vacuum (see below)
●Blow brush
●Glass cleaner (for flatbed glass only)
●Terrace Oil 46 (light weight oil)
●Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease)
CAUTION Do not use organic solvents such as thinner.
Never use glass cleaner on any part of the copy module except the
flatbed glass.
Be sure no liquid enters the copy module from the edges of the Glass
Plate Assembly. (See page 551.)
Vacuum Specifications
Use the same type of vacuum used for printer maintenance. Be sure
to use a vacuum with adequate filtration so that microfine toner is not
released into the air. Paper dust and unfused toner particles can
accumulate in the ADF and on the Carrier Unit. The type of narrow
attachments that are used with printer and copier machine vacuums
are particularly useful for cleaning.
CAUTION When using the vacuum be careful not to damage paper sensors. Never
use the vacuum for the Carrier Unit or Optical Unit. These should be
hand cleaned only.
162 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Cleaning ADF and Glass
A quick clean takes approximately 15 minutes and should be
performed every 6,000 pages.
Cleaning the Document Cover, Document
Holder, and Flatbed Glass
Figure 4-1 Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed
Glass
Use a cloth that is either dry or dampened with a small amount of the
appropriate cleaning material listed in Table 4-2 below to remove dirt
from the Document Cover, Document Holder, and flatbed glass.
Document
Cover
Document
Holder
Flatbed Glass
Cloth
isopropyl
alcohol paint thinner -
do not use!
Table 4-2. Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and
Flatbed Glass
Part Cleaning Materials
Document Cover non-abrasive, neutral detergent or alcohol
Document Holder
Flatbed Glass alcohol or glass cleaner
DO NOT USE DETERGENT
C4265-90907 Cleaning ADF and Glass 163
Cleaning the ADF
1Unplug the copy module.
2Press the latch and lift open the ADF.
Figure 4-2 Parts of the ADF
ADF Glass
Pick Spring
ADF Latch
Paper Guide
Separation Pad
Feed Rollers
Exit Rollers Pick Rollers
Idle Rollers (Feed)
Table 4-3. Cleaning the ADF
Part Cleaning method Problem with dirty or
worn part
Separation Pad Using a cloth with isopropyl alcohol,
wipe the Separation Pad in a downward
direction. Be careful not to hook the
Pick Springs.
Double-feeds
ADF Glass Wipe the glass lightly with a cloth and
isopropyl alcohol or glass cleaner to
remove any paper dust or toner.
Vertical streaking when you
scan from the ADF
164 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Pick Rollers Remove the Pick Rollers. Using a cloth
dampened with isopropyl alcohol, firmly
and thoroughly wipe each Pick Roller in
a horizontal direction, from end to end
to remove dirt. Do not touch the rubber
part of the rollers. Skin oils can damage
the rollers.
Misfeeds, paper slippage, and
jams
Feed, Exit, and
Idler Rollers Using a cloth with isopropyl alcohol,
wipe the rollers in a horizontal direction,
making sure to remove any built-up
toner or ink. Make sure the rollers are
dry before scanning.
Paper jams
Paper Guide Gently wipe the Paper Guide area with
a soft cloth. Vertical streaking when
copying from the ADF
Table 4-3. Cleaning the ADF (continued)
Part Cleaning method Problem with dirty or
worn part
C4265-90907 Copy Module Optics Cleaning 165
Copy Module Optics Cleaning
An optics clean takes approximately 30 minutes and should be
performed every 12,000 pages.
Cleaning the ADF Lamp and Mirrors
CAUTION Use a lint free cloth with isopropyl alcohol to clean the Lamp and to
clean fingerprints, toner, or paper dust from the mirror. Be careful not
to scratch the mirror. Do not use glass cleaner.
1Open the ADF.
2Remove the ADF Latch (page 511) and ADF Cover (page 512).
3Remove the ADF Unit and ADF Lamp (pages 547 to 539).
4Clean the mirrors with a blow brush. See the Caution above.
5Clean the Lamp with a dry or alcohol-dampened, lint-free cloth.
Do not touch the Lamp with your fingers.
6Replace the Lamp, ADF Unit, ADF Cover, and ADF Latch Cap.
Lubricating the ADF Gears
If necessary, place an even coating of Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or
silicone grease) on the teeth of the ADF Gears as needed.
166 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Cleaning the Carrier Unit and Mechanical
Assemblies
1Remove the skins (starting on page 505) and the Glass Plate
Assembly (page 551).
2Clean any dirt from the back of the Glass Plate Assembly,
especially under the ADF Unit and the White Reference Strip.
3Vacuum any dirt from the inside of the Mechanical Frame.
4Remove the Lamp from the Carrier Unit (page 555).
5Remove any dirt from the Carrier Unit Mirrors with a blow brush.
CAUTION Use a lint free cloth with isopropyl alcohol to clean fingerprints, toner,
or paper dust from the mirror. Be careful not to scratch the mirror. Do
not use glass cleaner.
6If the Carrier Unit Shaft is dirty, wipe it off with a cloth, then
relubricate it (see below). Otherwise, be careful not to remove the
lubricant.
Lubricating the Carrier Unit Shaft
If necessary, or if the Carrier Unit shaft has been cleaned, place an
even coating of Terrace Oil 46 (light weight oil) on the Carrier Unit
Shaft as needed (for example, if paper dust or other material
interferes with movement of the Carrier Unit, or if you have cleaned
the shaft). See page 559.
Lubricating the Top of the Carrier Guide Rail
If necessary, or if the Carrier Guide Rail has been cleaned, place an
even coating of Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease) on the
top of the Carrier Guide Rail as needed.
Lubricating the Flatbed Motor Gears
If necessary, place an even coating of Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or
silicone grease) on the teeth of the Flatbed Motor Gears as needed.
Cleaning the Front Panel
Use a dry cloth to clean the Front Panel Display.
C4265-90907 Maintaining the Printer 167
Maintaining the Printer
The user-conducted preventive maintenance cycle for this printer is
every 350,000 images. The part numbers for the preventive
maintenance kits are C3914A for the 100V printers, and C3915A for
the 220V printers. The kits contain the following replacement parts:
one Fusing Assembly, one Transfer Roller Assembly, and eight Feed/
Separation Rollers [two each for Trays 2, 3, the 2000-sheet Input Tray
(Tray 4), and the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5)]. See
Chapter 6 of this manual, and the instructions included in the kits for
detailed replacement procedures.
The control panel message, PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE,
indicates that the 350,000 image maintenance is due. After
performing the maintenance procedures:
●Go to the control panel Configuration Menu and set the SERVICE
MESSAGE= to OFF.
●Reset PAGES SINCE LAST MAINTENANCE:
a. Turn the printer off.
b. Holding down the VALUE - and ITEM - keys, turn the printer back
on. Wait for Reset Maint/Count to display before releasing the
keys.
The default (350,000) maintenance message interval can be set to
lesser values if needed (50K, 150K, 250K), for printers requiring more
frequent maintenance. This feature is provided for customers using
heavy, rough, or generally out-of-specification media that prematurely
wears out the maintenance parts.
168 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Maintaining the Copy Module
The Separation Pad and Pick Rollers must be replaced every 60,000
pages through the ADF. To check the “ADF Scans Since Last
Maintenance” counter, print a Configuration Page from the printer’s
Information Menu. You must reset the maintenance counter in service
mode after you replace the maintenance parts (see page 143). For
removal and replacement procedures, see “Copy Module
Maintenance Parts” on page 500. The procedures take approximately
15 minutes.
Symptoms that indicate it is time to replace the maintenance parts
include increasing mispicks and visible wear or polish on the surface
of the Separation Pad or Pick Rollers.
Note If highly abrasive papers or papers high in calcium carbonate content
are used, replacement intervals may be shorter.
HP Digital Copier Maintenance Parts
●2 Pick Rollers PA03002-C120FJ
●1 Separation Pad PA03002-C122FJ
C4265-90907 Adjusting Printer Input Trays 169
Adjusting Printer Input Trays
Adjusting for Edge-to-Edge Printing
Note Edge-to-Edge printing is available in the HP LaserJet 8150 Series only.
This feature provides the user with the ability to print within
approximately 2 millimeters of all edges of the page. An internal-tray
calibration page allows the administrator to calibrate each tray. The
calibration page can be printed from each internal tray and the top
tray of an external paper- handling device. The calibration page
cannot be printed from the envelope feeder.
The edge- to- edge print mode is set from the printer driver or the
control panel. It is most common to use the printer driver when
printing individual print jobs.
When set from the control panel, the edge-to-edge feature will remain
in edge- to- edge print mode until turned off from the control panel or
from a print job.
To print a calibration page:
1Make sure that paper is loaded in the desired tray or trays and
that the trays are properly inserted into the printer
2Press MENU repeatedly until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears.
3Press ITEM repeatedly until CONFIGURE EDGE TO EDGE= NO
appears.
4Press VALUE to change the value to YES.
5Press SELECT.
6Press ITEM repeatedly until PRINT TEST PAGE TRAY= n appears.
7Press VALUE to choose the desired tray (ALL, 1, 2, 3, or 4).
8Press SELECT to print the calibration page.
9Follow the instructions on the calibration page to complete the
calibration process.
CAUTION When using edge-to-edge printing, clean the printer every time the
toner cartridge is changed.
170 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Adjusting Input Trays for Normal Printing
This procedure applies to Trays 2 and 3 (the standard paper trays in
the printer) and Trays 4 and 5 in the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray. To
adjust the 2000-sheet Input Tray see “Adjusting the 2000-sheet
Printer Input Tray” on page 172.
The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the
factory. Perform this procedure ONLY if a paper tray has been
replaced with a tray other than the original factory installed tray, or if
the top margin of the image area is off-center more than 0.5 mm
(0.02 inch). The adjustment procedure is identical for Trays 2, 3, 4,
and 5 from the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray.
Note Before performing this procedure, check that the margins in your
software application are properly set.
1Load the paper tray being tested with letter or A4 size paper.
2Perform a 1-sheet Paper Path Test from that tray (see Paper Path
Test under Test Menu in Chapter 3).
3See figure 4-3 and compare distance A to distance B.
Figure 4-3 Image Area Margins
C4265-90907 Adjusting Printer Input Trays 171
Note See figure 4-4. Each adjustment notch changes the physical position
of the tray by 0.5 mm (0.02 inch). Moving the lever counter-clockwise
moves the tray inward and increases distance A. Moving the lever
clockwise moves the tray outward and decreases distance A.
Figure 4-4 Tray Position Adjustment
1If distance A is greater than distance B by more than 0.5 mm
(0.02 inch), move the adjustment lever clockwise one notch.
2If distance A is less than distance B by more than 0.5 mm (0.02
inch), move the adjustment lever counter-clockwise one notch.
3After adjusting:
•Reinstall the tray.
•Re-run the Paper Path Test.
•Recheck the measurements.
•Re-adjust as necessary.
172 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Adjusting the 2000-sheet Printer Input Tray
This procedure applies to the 2000-sheet Input Tray. To adjust Trays 2
and 3 (the standard paper trays in the printer) and the 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5) see page 169.
In some cases, the registration from the 2000-sheet Input Tray causes
print to start too close to the edge of the paper. This situation is not a
typical occurrence. In most cases the 2000-sheet Input Tray offset is
fine. Although this may or may not be within specification, it is
unacceptable to some users. Perform the following adjustment
procedure to correct the situation.
1With the 2000-sheet Input Tray stand-alone, remove left, right and
rear covers from the tray.
2Remove the vertical transfer unit.
3Open the 2000-sheet Input Tray paper tray.
4Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket
on the right side of the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 4-5).
Figure 4-5 Tray 4 Position Adjustment
5Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (right side) (see
figure 4-5).
6Slide the bracket so that the locating pin is positioned at the
middle of the bracket hole.
C4265-90907 Adjusting the 2000-sheet Printer Input Tray 173
7Tighten both screws.
8Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket
on the left side of the 2000-sheet Input Tray.
9Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (left side).
Slide the bracket so the locating pin is positioned at the middle of
the bracket hole.
10 Tighten both screws.
11 Reassemble the vertical transfer unit.
12 Make sure all the cables (vertical transfer unit and paper deck
drive assembly) are reconnected.
13 Reinstall left, right, and rear covers to the tray.
Note The locating pin position at the middle could still be unacceptable for
some customers’ applications. If so, repeat the procedure by moving
the locating pin further back and testing the margin obtained.
174 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Adjusting Duplex Registration of the Paper Trays
The duplex registration menu is available in the HP Laserjet 8150
Series. The items in this menu will assist you in aligning the images
on the front and back of a duplexed page by calibrating Tray 2, 3 or 4.
This feature is not available for Tray 1.
1Press MENU until DUPLEX REGISTRATION MENU appears on the
printer control panel display.
2Press ITEM until PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want.
3Press SELECT to print the page.
4Hold the printed page up to a light source and choose the number
on each axis where the lines on the front and back of the page
align most accurately.
5Repeat step 1.
6Press ITEM until TRAY n X= appears and use -VALUE + to enter the
number you selected from the test page in step 4. Press SELECT
to save this value.
7Repeat step 6 for the Y axis.
8Press ITEM to scroll up through the duplex registration menu until
PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want.
9Press SELECT to print the page.
10 Repeat step 4 to verify that the lines on the front and back of the
page are now properly aligned.
Note If the lines on the front and back of the page do not properly align, then
repeat steps 4-9 until they are properly aligned.
C4265-90907 Adjusting the Copy Module 175
Adjusting the Copy Module
Types of Adjustment
●Automatic offset adjustment (Flatbed, ADF front, and ADF back)
●Density adjustment (do this when Lamps or the Optical Unit are
replaced)
●ADF vertical magnification (only do this when you replace the
ADF Assembly)
Note The value of vertical magnification is unique to every ADF Assembly
and is noted on a page included with the replacement ADF Assembly.
When to Calibrate or Adjust the Copy Module
Perform calibration after any of the following tasks:
●Removing or replacing any of the Lamps or optics
●Replacing the ADF Assembly
●Replacing the Carrier Unit
●Replacing the Flatbed Cover Assembly
●Replacing the Control PCA with EEPROM
Calibration Target
Obtain the Calibration Target Kit from HP (part number PA03002-
C261FJ)
or
Blacken a 0.4 inch (10mm) border around a standard A3 size sheet of
white paper to create an offset target. A sample offset target is shown
in figure 4-6.
176 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
Figure 4-6 Creating an Offset Target
Entering the Calibration Menu in Service
Mode
1Start the copy module in service mode (hold down RESET, 0 and
1 keys while you turn on the power).
2Select the calibration menu.
Area to be colored black
.4 in (10 mm) all around
11.7 in. ± 0.02 in
297 mm ± 0.5 mm
16.5 in ± 0.08 in
420 mm ± 2 mm
C4265-90907 Adjusting the Copy Module 177
How to Perform an Offset Adjustment Calibra-
tion
1Obtain or create a calibration target (page 175) and enter the
Calibration Menu in service mode (page 176).
2Select the appropriate offset calibration you wish to perform
(flatbed, ADF front or ADF back).
3Load the target and follow the prompts on the front panel.
Changes will be saved automatically when the adjustment is
complete.
How to Perform a Density Calibration Adjust-
ment
1Obtain a calibration target (part number PA03002-C261FJ) and
enter the Calibration Menu in service mode (page 176).
2Select Density Adjustment.
3Load the target and follow the prompts on the front panel.
Changes will be saved automatically when the adjustment is
complete.
How to Perform an ADF Vertical Magnification
Adjustment
1Locate the page that shipped with the replacement ADF unit.
2Enter the Calibration Menu in service mode (page 176).
3Select ADF Vertical Magnification.
4Enter the hexadecimal number from the page that shipped with
the replacement ADF unit.
178 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907
C4265-90907 179
5Functional
Overview
Chapter contents
Printer Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Power Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Formatter System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
DC Controller System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Image Formation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Paper Paths and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Paper Jam Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Printer Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Copy Module Functional Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Copy Module Power Up Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
ADF Simplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
ADF Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Flatbed Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Copy Module Image Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Communication with the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
180 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Printer Functional Overview
Figure 5-1 is a functional block diagram of the printer showing the
basic paths for signal, control, and media.
Figure 5-1 Printer Functional Block Diagram
C4265-90907 Power Distribution System 181
Power Distribution System
The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the Low
Voltage Power Supply (LVPS). The high voltages required for image
formation are generated by the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS).
The LVPS and Distribution System is illustrated in figure 5-2. See the
Reference Diagrams at the end of Chapter 7 for more details.
Figure 5-2 Low Voltage Power Distribution System
182 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
AC Power Distribution
The AC power circuitry supplies AC voltage whenever the power cord
is connected, and the power switch is on. A toner cartridge must be
installed and the top access door must be closed before AC voltage is
supplied to the DC power circuits or the Fusing Assembly.
Overcurrent/Overvoltage Protection
There are two overcurrent/overvoltage devices in this printer:
●The resettable circuit breaker (CB101) shuts off AC input power
to the LVPS in case of an AC overcurrent condition. To reset,
remove the LVPS and press in the circuit breaker button (figure
5-3, callout 1).
●Fuse 101 interrupts AC input power to the +24V DC and +5V DC
power circuits.
Figure 5-3 Low Voltage Power Supply
C4265-90907 Power Distribution System 183
High Voltage Power Distribution
The High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS, see figure 5-4) applies a DC-
biased AC voltage to the primary charging roller and the developing
roller, and a programmed DC voltage (depending upon the phase of
the printing process) to the Transfer Roller. See the General Timing
Diagram (figure 5-29 on page 236) for HVPS timing information.
Toner Cartridge Detection
A toner level detector inside the toner cartridge is connected to the
HVPS when the toner cartridge is installed. If the toner level drops
below a predefined level, the TONER LOW message will appear on the
display panel. If the toner cartridge is missing, INSTALL TONER
CARTRIDGE will be displayed.
Print Density Adjustment
The high voltage power supply also controls the image density by
varying the voltages applied to the developing cylinder in the toner
cartridge. These voltages determine the amount of toner applied to
the photosensitive drum. Print density is adjusted from the control
panel (Print Quality Menu) or from the driver software.
184 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Figure 5-4 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts
Drum Ground
Transfer Roller
Post Transfer Bias
Toner Registration/
Toner Sensor
Developing
Roller Bias
Primary
Charging Roller
Fuser Bias
C4265-90907 Formatter System 185
Formatter System
The Formatter PCA is responsible for the following:
●Controlling the PowerSave mode.
●Receiving and processing print data from the various printer
interfaces.
●Monitoring Control Panel inputs and relaying printer status
information (through the Control Panel and the bidirectional I/O).
●Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the
print engine.
●Storing font information.
●Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional
Interface.
The Formatter PCA receives a print job from the bidirectional parallel
port (IEEE 1284) and separates it into image information and
instructions which control the printing process. The DC Controller
synchronizes the Image Formation System with the Paper Input and
Output Systems, and then signals the Formatter to send the print
image data. The Formatter sends the print image data (dots) in the
form of a VIDEO signal to start the printing process.
The Formatter PCA also provides the electrical interface and
mounting locations for three EIO cards, additional memory DIMMs,
the Disk Accessory, the 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, the
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, and the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and
5).
PowerSave
This user-adjustable feature conserves power by shutting down the
fuser and exhaust fans after the printer has been idle for a specified
time. The default for PowerSave is “ON” and can be turned off from
the control panel (Configuration Menu for the HP LaserJet 8100
Series and in the Resets Menu for the HP LaserJet 8150 Series). The
default time setting for the HP LaserJet 8100 Series is 1 hour, and it is
30 minutes for the HP LaserJet 8150 Series. The printer retains all
printer settings, downloaded fonts, and macros while in PowerSave
mode.
The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm-up cycle
when any of the following occurs:
• A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at
the parallel port or an EIO card.
186 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
•A Control Panel key is pressed.
•Any printer door (except the front access door) is opened and
then closed.
•A paper tray is opened and then closed.
•The Engine Test microswitch is pressed.
Note Printer error messages override the PowerSave message. The printer
will enter PowerSave mode at the appropriate time, but the error
message will continue to be displayed.
Resolution Enhancement (REt)
The Formatter PCA contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement
technology (REt), which modifies the standard video dot data on its
way to the DC Controller to produce “smoothed” black-to-white
boundaries. REt is user-controllable (on or off) from the control panel,
or from some software applications. The default setting is on.
Note REt settings sent from software applications or printer drivers override
the control panel settings.
C4265-90907 Formatter System 187
EconoMode
The EconoMode setting uses less toner than the normal printing
mode by reducing the dot density. EconoMode, which is a draft-
quality printing mode, is user selectable via the control panel (Print
Quality Menu) and some software applications. The default setting is
off.
Note EconoMode does not affect print speed, memory usage, nor extend
toner cartridge life.
Figure 5-5 Normal Mode vs. EconoMode
188 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
DC Controller System
The following systems and functions are controlled by the DC
Controller PCA:
●DC Power Distribution (+3.3V DC, +5V DC, +24V DC)
●Laser and Scanner Drive
●Paper Motion Monitoring and Control (photosensors and flags)
●Clutches (registration, tray pickup, and Tray 1 feed)
●Engine Test
●Motors (Main Drive, Scanner, and Fans)
Figure 5-2 on page 181 shows the Low Voltage Power Supply and
Distribution System. See the wiring diagrams at the end of Chapter 7
for detailed listings of the DC Controller inputs and outputs.
Laser and Scanner Drive
Based on information received from the Formatter, the DC Controller
sends signals to the Laser/Scanner Assembly to modulate the laser
diode on and off and to drive the Laser/Scanner motor. See “Image
Formation System” later in this chapter for more information.
Paper Motion Monitoring and Control
The DC Controller PCA controls paper motion by continuously
monitoring the various paper sensors and coordinating paper
movement with the other print processes.
Clutches
The DC Controller PCA provides drive signals for the Registration
Assembly Clutch (CL1), Paper Input Unit Clutch (CL2), and the Tray 1
Feed Clutch. The External Paper Handling PCA mounted on the
Formatter Assembly provides the control signals for the clutches in
the 2000-sheet Input Tray, 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, 2
x 500-sheet Input Tray, and 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox.
Note Refer to figure 5-2 for details.
C4265-90907 DC Controller System 189
Engine Test Microswitch
The Engine Test Microswitch, located on the top side of the DC
Controller PCA, is activated manually through the square access hole
at the top right side of the printer (Figure 7-10). This switch causes
the print engine to perform an internal self test diagnostic which
bypasses the Formatter PCA and then prints a full page of black
parallel lines. This test is useful for troubleshooting printer problems
because it isolates the print engine from the Formatter PCA. The
engine test printout prints from Tray 3 only and can be activated with
the Formatter PCA removed. A continuous test is performed
indefinitely if the test button is held in. For more information, see
Engine Test in Figure 7-10.
Motors
See the General Timing Diagram (figure 5-29 on page 236) for
specific timing details for the printer motors.
The Main Motor, MT1, is controlled by the DC Controller PCA. The
Main Motor drives the Main Gear Assembly and rotates during the
Initial Rotation period (following power-on), the Print period, the Last
Rotation Period, or whenever the printer front door is opened and
closed.
The Scanner Motor is controlled and monitored by the DC Controller.
It rotates the laser/scanner mirror during the Initial Rotation period
and the Print period.
The Fan Motors are controlled and monitored by the DC Controller
PCA. All five fans operate at full speed during the printing modes. All
five fans turn off in the PowerSave mode after the Fuser cools down.
The drive signal for the Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Motor, SMT1, is
provided by the DC Controller PCA through the Paper Input Unit (PIU)
PCA mounted on the right side of the PIU. When the job instructions
call for paper to be supplied by Tray 2, SMT1 rotates in a forward
direction and drives the Pickup roller for Tray 2. When paper is
supplied by Tray 3, SMT1 rotates in the reverse direction and drives
the Pickup roller for Tray 3.
190 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Image Formation System
Laser printing requires the interaction of several different technologies
(such as electronics, optics, and electrophotographics) to provide a
printed page. Each process functions independently and must be
coordinated with the other printer processes. The image formation
process consists of six steps:
1Drum Cleaning
2Drum Conditioning
3Image Writing
4Image Developing
5Image Transferring and Media Separation
6Image Fusing
Figure 5-6 Image Formation Block Diagram
C4265-90907 Image Formation System 191
Toner Cartridge
The toner cartridge is the “heart” of the Image Formation System. It
houses the cleaning, conditioning, and developing steps of the
process. The toner cartridge contains the photosensitive drum,
primary charging roller, developing station, toner cavity, and cleaning
station. Including the components that wear, degrade, or are
consumed in a customer-replaceable toner cartridge eliminates the
need for a service call when replacement is required.
Toner Cartridge/High Voltage Power Supply Contacts
The toner cartridge has three contacts that route voltage from the
HVPS PCA. They are:
•Upper: Primary Charge
•Middle: Developing Bias
•Lower: Toner Sensing/Toner Recognition
192 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
The Photosensitive Drum
The image from the Laser/Scanner Assembly is written on the drum
surface, developed, and transferred to the media. The drum is an
aluminum cylinder. The aluminum base of the photosensitive drum is
electrically connected to ground potential. The outside of the cylinder
is coated with a layer of non-toxic organic-photoconductive (OPC)
material. The OPC material becomes electrically conductive when
exposed to light. The drum surface is first cleaned of excess toner,
then conditioned with a uniform negative charge. When an area on
the drum surface is exposed to the laser light beam, the negative
charge in that area is conducted to the ground potential of the drum
base and thus becomes more positive. Areas not exposed to light
remain non-conductive and maintain their negative charge.
Figure 5-7 Photosensitive Drum
C4265-90907 Image Formation System 193
Drum Cleaning
The cleaning blade inside the toner cartridge is in contact with the
surface of the drum at all times. As the drum rotates during printing,
excess toner is removed from the drum surface and stored in the
waste toner receptacle inside the toner cartridge.
Figure 5-8 Drum Cleaning
194 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Drum Conditioning
After the drum is physically cleaned, it is conditioned by applying a
uniform negative charge across the surface of the drum with the
primary charging roller, located in the toner cartridge. The primary
charging roller is coated with conductive rubber, charged with an AC
current that erases any residual charges, and produces a uniform
drum surface potential. The AC current is centered around a negative
DC bias which changes according to the Print Density setting.
Figure 5-9 Primary Charging Roller
C4265-90907 Image Formation System 195
Image Writing
During the writing process, a modulated laser diode projects a beam
onto a rotating six-sided scanning mirror. As the scanning mirror
rotates, the beam is directed through a set of focusing lenses to
another mirror that reflects it through a slot on the top of the toner
cartridge and onto the photosensitive drum. The beam sweeps
across the drum and discharges the negative potential wherever it
strikes the surface. This creates a latent (invisible) electrostatic
image, which is developed into a visible image as the drum rotates
(see figure 5-10).
Figure 5-10 Image Writing
Because the beam is sweeping the entire length of the drum and the
drum is rotating, the entire surface area of the drum can be covered.
The speed of the laser/scanner motor (which turns the scanning
mirror) and the speed of the main motor (which turns the drum) are
synchronized, and each successive sweep of the beam is offset
1/600th of an inch. The beam can be turned on and off to place a dot
of light every 1/600th of an inch. This is how the printer achieves its
600 x 600 dpi resolution. After the writing process, the drum surface
has a latent (invisible) electrostatic image.
At the end of each sweep, the beam strikes the beam detect lens,
generating the Beam Detect (BD) signal. The BD signal is sent to the
DC Controller, where it is converted to an electrical signal used to
synchronize the output of data (VDO) for one sweep (scan line) and to
diagnose problems with the laser diode or laser/scanner motor.
196 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
FastRes 1200
FastRes 1200 (PCL 6 only) is an HP developed technology that can
represent each dot space as one of four different levels of black.
However, FastRes 1200 uses only 2 data bits to store information for
the same dot space. This means that only half as much RAM is
needed to print an image.
FastRes 1200 takes advantage of HP’s new smaller toner particle
(less than 5 microns) to provide superb test and image quality.
C4265-90907 Image Formation System 197
Image Developing
The developing process changes the latent electrostatic image into a
visible image by depositing negatively charged toner particles on the
exposed areas of the drum. The developing station is located inside
the toner cartridge and consists of a metallic cylinder that rotates
around a fixed magnetic core.
The developing cylinder is charged with an AC current that is
centered around a negative DC bias. The AC current improves
density and contrast by decreasing the attraction between the toner
particles and the magnetic core of the cylinder. This increases the
repelling action of the toner against the areas of the drum not
exposed to laser light. The negative DC bias applied to the developing
cylinder is also changed according to the Print Density setting. Both
the primary charging roller and developing cylinder DC bias voltages
are changed in response to the density setting. These changes in DC
bias cause either more or less toner to be attracted to the drum, thus
increasing or decreasing print density.
The toner is a powdery substance made of black plastic resin bound
to iron particles. The toner particles are attracted to the magnetic core
of the developing cylinder. A rubber blade “brushes” the toner on the
developing cylinder to a uniform thickness.
198 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
The toner particles obtain a negative static charge by rubbing against
the developing cylinder, which is charged with a negative DC bias.
The negatively charged toner is attracted to the discharged (exposed,
more positive) areas of the drum and repelled from the negatively
charged (non-exposed) areas.
Figure 5-11 Image Development
C4265-90907 Image Formation System 199
Image Transferring and Media Separation
During the image transferring process, the toner image on the drum
surface is transferred to the media. A positive charge applied to the
back of the media by the transfer roller causes the negatively charged
toner particles on the drum surface to be attracted to the media.
The small diameter of the drum, combined with the stiffness of the
media, causes the media to separate easily from the drum. The static
eliminator teeth also help separate the paper from the drum. The
static eliminator teeth weaken the attractive forces between the
negatively charged drum surface and the positively charged paper.
This action keeps thin media from wrapping around the drum. After
separation, the drum is cleaned and conditioned for the next image.
Figure 5-12 Image Transferring and Media Separation
200 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Image Fusing
The Fusing Assembly bonds the toner particles into the media with a
heated fusing roller and a soft pressure roller. There are two levers on
the Fusing Assembly that adjust roller pressure for single sheets
(down position) or envelopes (up position). Both levers must be set to
the same position.
The fusing roller contains two quartz-halogen lamps that provide heat
for the fusing process. Fusing temperature is monitored by the DC
Controller PCA via thermistor TH1. The DC Controller maintains a
temperature of about 190° C during print mode. If the fusing system
overheats (about 230° C), TH1 opens, interrupting power to the fusing
heater, causing a 50.X FUSER ERROR. If the fusing system exceeds
230° C, the thermal fuse opens, moving power away from the fuser.
Figure 5-13 Image Fusing
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 201
Paper Paths and Components
Printer, Duplexer, and Envelope Feeder
The components of the printer paper path are illustrated in figure
5-14. Figure 5-15 and table 5-1 illustrate and describe all of the
printer sensors, solenoids, clutches, motors, and fans.
Figure 5-14 Printer Paper Paths
202 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Table 5-1. Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans
Control Device Title Location
CL1 Registration Clutch PIU (right side)
CL2 Paper Input Unit Feed Clutch PIU (right side)
CL3 Tray 1 Feed Clutch Tray 1 Drive Unit
Fan 1 Laser/Scanner Fan Under Top Cover
Fan 2 Low Voltage Power Supply LVPS
Fan 3 Formatter Fan Below Formatter
Fan 4 Face-down Delivery Unit Fan Under Top Cover
Fan 5 Tray 1 Fan Tray 1 Assembly
MT1 Main Motor Behind HVPS
PS1 Registration Paper Sensor Registration Assembly (center)
PS2 Paper Input Unit Paper Sensor Paper Input Unit (top, center)
PS1201 Tray 3 Paper Present Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA
PS1202 Tray 2 Paper Present Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA
PS1203 Tray 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 Paper Input Unit PCA
PS1204 Tray 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 Paper Input Unit PCA
PS1205 Tray 2 Paper Level Sensor 1 Paper Input Unit PCA
PS1206 Tray 2 Paper Level Sensor 2 Paper Input Unit PCA
PS1207 Tray 3 Paper Out Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA
PS1208 Tray 2 Paper Out Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA
PS1301 Tray 1 Paper Present Sensor Tray 1 Drive Unit PCA
PS1302 Tray 1 Lifting Plate Position Sensor Tray 1 Drive Unit PCA
PS1401 Face-down Bin Full Sensor Switch/Sensor PCA
PS1402 Face-down Bin Delivery Sensor Switch/Sensor PCA
PS1403 Fuser Delivery Sensor Switch/Sensor PCA
SL1 Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Solenoid PIU (right side)
SL2 Tray 1 Lifting Plate Solenoid Tray 1 Drive Unit
SL3 Face-up Bin Delivery Solenoid Left Rear Corner of Chassis
(behind diverter door)
SMT1 Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Motor PIU (right side)
SW1401 Doors Open Switch Switch/Sensor PCA
Tray 2, SW1601 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS
Tray 2, SW1602 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 203
Note See figure 5-15 for the locations of sensors, solenoids, clutches, motors
and fans in table 5-1.
Tray 2, SW1603 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS
Tray 2, SW1604 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS
Tray 3, SW1601 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS
Tray 3, SW1602 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS
Tray 3, SW1603 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS
Tray 3, SW1604 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS
Table 5-1. Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans (continued)
Control Device Title Location
204 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Figure 5-15 Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans
Paper Size Switches (Trays 2 and 3)
The paper guides in Trays 2 and 3 operate four levers at the back of
the trays that activate the size sensing switches (SW1601 through
SW1604) mounted in the printer chassis. Paper sizes are compared
to switch conditions in table 5-2.
Table 5-2. Paper Size Switches
Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604
Ledger (portrait) OFF OFF OFF OFF
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 205
Printing from Tray 1
The presence of paper in Tray 1 is detected by the Tray 1 Paper
Present Sensor (PS1301). The lifting plate pressurization solenoid
(SL2) is then activated, releasing the plate that applies upward
pressure on the paper and causing it to contact the Tray 1 pickup
roller. The Tray 1 Feed Clutch (CL3) turns on at this time and feeds
the paper from Tray 1 to the registration position.
The remainder of the Tray 1 print process is identical to the Tray 2 and
3 process, described in “Printing from Tray 1” on page 205.
Printing from Trays 2 and 3
The Pickup, Feed, and Separation rollers start rotating when the DC
Controller receives the /PRNT signal from the Formatter PCA. Then,
the DC Controller activates the Pickup Solenoid (SL1) and starts
feeding paper through the Paper Input Unit (PIU), triggering
photosensors PS2 and then PS1. These sensors inform the DC
Controller that paper has passed through the PIU and is present at
the Registration Assembly.
When the Laser/Scanner and Fuser are ready, the DC Controller
sends the /VSREQ signal to the Formatter. When the Formatter has
processed the print data, it sends the /VSYNC and /VDO signals to
the DC Controller. The paper is then released from the Registration
Assembly (by CL1) and fed to the photosensitive drum, starting the
image transfer and fusing processes. After the paper passes through
the Fuser, it triggers PS1403 and PS1402 to the specified type, size,
and destination of the paper being fed through the printer.
A3 (portrait) OFF ON OFF OFF
B4 (portrait) ON OFF OFF OFF
Legal (portrait) ON ON OFF OFF
Letter (landscape) OFF OFF OFF ON
A4 (landscape) OFF OFF ON OFF
Table 5-2. Paper Size Switches
Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604
206 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Printing from the Envelope Feeder
The Envelope Feeder mounts in slots above Tray 1. The printer can
print from Tray 1 even during the installation of the Envelope Feeder.
When the print job calls for an envelope, it is fed directly to the
Registration Assembly. From there, the print process is identical to the
Tray 2 and 3 process, described in “Printing from Tray 1” on page 205.
Printing with the Duplexer
The duplexer mounts inside the printer below the Fusing Assembly.
The back side of the paper is printed first, the paper is turned over,
and then fed back to the Registration Assembly for front side printing.
When the print job calls for 2-sided printing, a solenoid in the duplexer
operates the duplex flipper in the Diverter Assembly and routes the
paper to the duplexer. The paper does not exit the printer when being
turned over for 2-sided printing. It is routed through a slot in the back
of the duplexer, down inside the left cover and under Tray 3. When the
duplexer senses the trailing edge of the paper, it reverses direction
and feeds the paper back through the duplexer to the Registration
Assembly.
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 207
2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) Components
The HP 2000-sheet Input Tray now supports variable engine input
speeds, ranging from 6 to 32 ppm. The 2000-sheet Input Tray also
automatically senses paper size. Figure 5-16 illustrates the paper
path components in the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Table 5-3 and figure
5-17 describe and illustrate the sensors, switches, clutches, and
motors on the 2000-sheet Input Tray.
Figure 5-16 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Path
208 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Table 5-3. 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches and Motors
Control Device Description Location
CL31 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)
Clutch Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)
CL32 Main Drive Clutch VTU
MT31 Main Motor Paper Deck Drive Assembly
PS31 Paper Entry Sensor VTU
PS32 Paper Exit Sensor VTU
PS33 Paper Tray Empty Sensor Paper Pickup Assembly
PS34 Paper Tray Raised Sensor Paper Pickup Assembly
PS35 VTU Closed Sensor Paper Pickup Assembly
SW601-SW602 Paper Quantity Switches Lower Chassis
SW701-SW704 Paper Size Switches Lower Chassis
Power Supply Switch Normal/Diagnostic Mode
Switch Power Supply
VTU Motor Vertical Transfer Unit Motor for
entry and exit rollers VTU
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 209
Figure 5-17 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches, and Motors
2000-Sheet Input Tray Operation
Pickup and Feed System
When the 2000-sheet Input Tray is loaded with paper and the paper
tray is closed, the paper stack moves into position under the Pickup,
Feed, and Separation Rollers. This operation is detected by the PS34
sensor in the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s Pickup Assembly. The presence
of paper in the paper tray is detected by the PS33 sensor. The paper
level is detected by switches SW601 and SW602 in the Paper
Quantity Switch Assembly. The paper size is detected by switches
SW701 through SW704 in the Paper Size Switch Assembly. Tables
5-4 and 5-5 show the paper quantity and paper size switches on the
2000-sheet Input Tray.
210 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
When the Paper Handling Controller on the printer sends an input
command to the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray, the
Paper Deck Driver runs the Pickup Motor to rotate the Pickup, Feed,
and Separation Rollers. As the Pickup Roller turns, the paper feeds
into the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and passes through the PS31
and PS32 sensors.
If the paper fails to reach the PS31 and PS32 sensors in the VTU
within the allotted time, the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input
Tray assumes that a paper jam has occurred. The 2000-sheet Input
Tray stops the operation and reports the paper jam to the Paper
Handling Controller on the printer. A paper jam message appears on
the printer control panel display.
Hardware malfunctions are also displayed on the printer control
panel.
Table 5-4. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Quantity Switches
SW601 SW602 Remaining Paper
Off Off 100%
On Off 75%
On On 50%
Off On 25%
Table 5-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size Switches
Paper Size SW701 SW702 SW703 SW704
Ledger
(portrait) Off On Off Off
A3 (portrait) On On Off Off
B4 (portrait) Off Off On Off
Legal
(portrait) Off On On Off
Letter
(landscape) Off On Off On
A4
(landscape) On On Off On
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 211
Lifter Operation
The lifter plate in the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s paper tray is held by two
wires that are wound on four pulleys by the Lifter Motor. When the
paper tray is open, the pulley gears disengage from the motor gears,
and the Lifter lowers by its own weight. The presence or absence of
the tray is detected by switches SW701 through SW704 on the unit’s
Paper/Tray Size Switch Assembly.
After the paper tray is closed, the Lifter Motor lifts the paper stack into
position; this action is detected by the PS34 sensor. The PS34 sensor
also maintains the height of the paper stack. As paper is picked up by
the rollers, the number of sheets decreases. Once the paper stack
decreases to a certain level, the PS34 sensor registers a low
condition. Then the Paper Deck Driver turns on the Lifter Motor again
and lifts the paper stack until the PS34 sensor registers sufficient
paper in the tray.
Power Supply
The 2000-sheet Input Tray has an internal Power Supply that
activates when the printer’s power switch is turned on. The Paper
Handling Controller on the printer sends a power-on signal to the
Power Supply on the 2000-sheet Input Tray through the Controller
PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. When the signal is high, the Power
Supply provides both +24V and +5V to the Paper Deck Driver. The
+24V drives the motors, clutches, and solenoids for the lifter, feed,
and pickup systems. The +5V drives the sensors and PCA
electronics.
Printing from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) or 2 x
500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5)
Trays 4 and 5 feed the paper upward through a guide slot in the Lower
Right Door Assembly to the Paper Input Unit. Once there, the
operation is the same as printing from Trays 2 and 3, described in
“Printing from Tray 1” on page 205.
212 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
The 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray is an input paper handling device that
provides two additional input trays that hold up to 500 sheets each.
The device is designed to support different printer platforms with
variable engine input speeds, from 6 to 32 pages per minute, and
provide storage space for printer supplies or consumables. The
device has automatic paper size sensing and enhanced network
management capabilities.
The 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray paper path is shown in figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Paper Path
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 213
Figure 5-19 2 x 500-sheet input Tray Sensors and Switches
Table 5-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, and Motors
Control Device Title Location
PS1203 Lower Cassette Paper Level Sensor 1 Pickup Assembly PCA
PS1204 Lower Cassette Paper Level Sensor 2 Pickup Assembly PCA
PS1201 Lower Cassette Sensor Pickup Assembly PCA
PS 1208 Upper Cassette Paper Out Sensor Pickup Assembly PCA
PS 1206 Upper Cassette Paper Level Sensor 2 Pickup Assembly PCA
PS 1205 Upper Cassette Paper Level Sensor 1 Pickup Assembly PCA
PS2 Paper Jam Sensor Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)
CL31 VTU Clutch VTU
PS35 VTU Closed and Open Sensor Pickup Assembly
SW1601-SW1604 Paper Size Switches Back Lower Chassis
Power Supply Switch Normal/Diagnostic Mode Switch Power Supply
VTU Motor Vertical Transfer Unit for entry and exit
rollers
VTU
214 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Operation
Communication and control of the input device are made through the
Paper Handling Controller by a sequence of instructions controlled
into the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray controller PCA.
Pickup and Feed System
When each tray in the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray is loaded with paper
and the paper tray is closed, the paper stack moves into position
under the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. The trays are
detected by the PS1202 sensor in the upper tray and by the PS1201
sensor in the lower tray. The presence of paper is detected in the
upper paper tray by the PS1208 sensor, and in the lower tray by
sensor PS1207. The paper level is detected by switches SW1205 and
SW1206 in the upper tray, and by switches SW1203 and SW1204 in
the lower tray. The paper size is detected by switches SW1601
through SW1604 installed in each tray.
When the Paper Handling Controller in the printer sends an input
command to the Controller PCA on the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray, the
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray driver engages the Pickup Motor to rotate
the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. The direction of rotation of
the Pickup motor determines which set of rollers are activated. When
the motor rotates clockwise, the paper is picked up from the upper
tray, and when the motor rotates counterclockwise, the paper is
picked up from the lower tray.The 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray driver also
engages the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray motor to activate the Pickup
Solenoid, which lowers the rollers to the level of the paper. As the
Pickup Roller turns, the paper feeds into the Vertical Transfer Unit
(VTU) and passes through the PS1 and PS2 sensors.
Table 5-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Switches
Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604
Ledger (Portrait) OFF OFF OFF OFF
A3 (Portrait) OFF ON OFF OFF
B4 (Portrait ON OFF OFF OFF
Legal (Portrait) ON ON OFF OFF
Letter (Landscape) OFF OFF OFF ON
A4 (Landscape) OFF OFF ON OFF
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 215
If the paper fails to reach the PS1 and PS2 sensors in the VTU within
the allotted time, the Controller PCA on the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
assumes that a paper jam has occurred. The 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
stops the operation and reports the paper jam to the Paper Handling
Controller on the printer. A paper jam message appears on the printer
control panel display.
Hardware malfunctions are also displayed on the printer control
panel.
Lifter Operation
The 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray drive motor lifts the paper when a tray is
installed and when the pickup roller is lowered as a result of a partially
filled tray.
When a tray is installed, the Paper Pickup Solenoid SL3 is turned on.
The movements of the shaft drive arm and the lift-up release arm free
the lift-up cam. This advances the lifter gear one tooth at a time,
raising the lifting plate. When the paper on the lifting plate engages
the pickup roller, the lift-up cam is stopped from rotating, and the
lifting operation is completed.
When the paper falls below a set level, the actions are the same to lift
the plate, except the position of the pickup roller (which is lowered as
paper is used) triggers the lift-up release arm to free the lift-up cam,
advancing the lifter gear. The lifting operation terminates the same
way in both cases, triggered by contact between the paper in the tray
and the pickup roller.
Power Supply
The 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray has an internal power supply activated
when the printer power switch has been turned on. The Paper
Handling Controller sends a power-on signal to the power supply
through the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray controller. When the signal is
high, the power supply provides +24V and +5V to the paper deck
driver. The +24V is used to drive the lifter, Feed, Pickup motors,
clutches, and solenoids; +5V drives sensors and PCA electronics.
216 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components
Components of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox paper path, including
mailbox sensors, switches and motors, are illustrated in figure 5-20
and figure 5-21 and described in table below.
Figure 5-20 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (1 of 2)
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 217
Figure 5-21 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (2 of 2)
Table 5-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensors, Switches, and Motors
Control Device Title Location
M Motor Upper back side
S1 Face-up/down Diverter Solenoid Upper front side
S2 Reversing mechanism solenoid Right side of the motor
S3 Diverters solenoid (bins 1, 3, and 5) Bottom back side
S4 Diverters solenoid (bins 2, 4, and 6) Bottom back side
BES1 to 7 Bin empty sensors (1 to 7) Surface of every Face-down Bin
BFS1 to 7 Bin full sensors (1 to 7) Upper left side of every Face-down
Bin entrance
FUBFS Face-up Bin full sensor Upper center of the Face-up Bin
entrance
ES Paper entry sensor Paper entrance
FUDS Face-up Delivery Sensor Rev. assembly. (top cover)
PPS1 Paper path sensor 1 Inside the unit, down the entry
rollers.
PPS2 Paper path sensor 2 Paper path (right cover)
ILSW Interlock switch Bottom right side
218 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Operation
The 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox is a low cost output device designed to
support different printer platforms at variable engine input speeds and
to increase office productivity. The mailbox has a total capacity of 940
sheets distributed in 7x120 Face-down bins and a 1x100 Face-up Bin,
and works with four intelligent and configurable operating modes.
An additional optional product, the Stand for the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox, allows the customer to attach the mailbox in a floor stand
configuration when an input device is attached to the printer.
Power-on Sequence
During the power-on sequence, the mailbox runs an initialization
routine. The motor will perform a complete cycle and solenoid S2, S3,
and S4 will be activated in that order. At the end of this routine, the
front cover LED will display a fixed green light, but if there is a
problem, the LED will flash red.
The information from the paper handling controller is carried by the
C-link cables that connect the controller board for all of the C-link
protocol-supported devices. The C-link protocol supports up to 5
devices connected to the paper handling controller in a Daisy Chain.
Each device controller has an input and output port that provides
them the flexibility of connection in different configurations. However,
HP recommends using the configuration shown in figure 5-28 on
page 234 to avoid rearrangements in the supported device
numbering and confusion when evaluating the event log.
Receiving Paper
The engine delivers paper to the mailbox through the Face-up
Delivery Slot (input paper guide) at 107 mm/sec. The entry sensor
(ES) senses paper arrival, and then the Face-up/down Diverter
Solenoid actuates only if the paper is going to the Face-up Bin. If the
paper has to reach any Face-down Bin, this solenoid will not actuate
and the paper will go into the reversing area.
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 219
Delivering Paper
If the paper is going to the Face-up Bin, the Face-up Delivery Sensor
(FUDS) waits for the paper to reach the Face-up Bin. When the bin is
full, the paper will actuate the Face-up Bin full sensor (FUBFS).
If the paper is sent to any of the Face-down bins, the reversing
mechanism will be activated by the reversing mechanism solenoid
(S2). The paper path sensor 1 (PPS1) will wait for paper, and the
correct diverter solenoid will actuate to deliver the paper in the correct
bin (S3 if the paper is going to bin numbers 1 through 3 or S4 for bin
number 2).
If the paper has to reach other bins, then the paper path sensor 2
(PPS2) will be waiting for it. In the same way, S3 will be activated if
the paper final destination is bin number 5, and if not, then S4 will be
activated to reach bins 4 through 6. Finally, if the paper destination is
bin number 7, none of the solenoids will be actuated. When a specific
bin is full, then the paper will actuate the corresponding Face-down
Bin full sensor (BFS1 to 7). The unit can report an empty bin condition
to the engine based on the empty bin sensors (BES1 to 7).
Configuring the Operating Modes
The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an
HP network configuration utility, such as HP JetAdmin or HP LaserJet
utility. You must set up your printer driver to reflect the mode chosen
by the administrator.
Bidirectional environment: The printer automatically selects the
mode established by the network administrator.
Unidirectional environment: The mode of operation can be
changed in the driver. The method for changing the mode varies with
the driver and type of operating system. For additional information,
see the online help for the printer software.
Configurable Mailbox Mode (Default Configuration)
In this mode, each bin can be addressed individually as the output
destination and can have a name assigned to it by the network or
printer administrator. All the jobs are placed in the Face-down bins. If
the assigned bins are full, the printer halts or sends the next pages to
the overflow bin, as defined by the MIS manager.
220 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Job Separator Mode
●Print jobs are automatically sent one job per bin to the first empty
bin beginning with the top bin. Non-empty bins are skipped. If all
bins have paper, then the job will be sent to the first non-full bin
starting at the top.
●If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel
message indicates that paper needs to be removed before
delivery to that bin can continue. Delivery of the job resumes in
the same bin when paper is removed.
●To clear a device full condition, empty all bins.
Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.
Virtual Stacker Mode
In Virtual Stacker Mode, printed sheets are stacked face down in the
bins from the lowest bin to the top bin, regardless of job boundaries.
This mode of operation takes advantage of the total capacity of the
mailbox bins. The software sees the mailbox as one logical bin. When
the mailbox is full, the system will halt until all bins are emptied.
Collator Mode
●Mopies of a print job are automatically sent one mopy per bin
beginning with the top bin.
●If there are more mopies than bins, the delivery resumes
sequentially from the top bin until all mopies are delivered.
●If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel
message indicates which bin is full, and will display a request to
remove paper. Delivery of the mopy resumes in the same bin
when paper is removed.
●To clear a device full condition, empty all bins.
Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 221
Figure 5-22 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Block Diagram
222 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
8-bin Mailbox Components
The 8-bin Mailbox is an output unit designed for variable speeds,
ranging from 6 to 32 ppm. The 8-bin Mailbox holds up to 2,100 sheets
distributed in eight 250-sheet Face-down bins and one 100-sheet
Face-up Bin. The 8-bin Mailbox also features four intelligent and
configurable operating modes.Table 5-9 and figure 5-24 illustrate and
describe the 8-bin Mailbox sensors, switches, motors, and Controller
PCA. Figure 5-23 illustrates the components of the 8-bin Mailbox
paper path.
Figure 5-23 8-bin Mailbox Paper Path
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 223
Table 5-9. 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and
Controller PCA
Control
Device Description Location
M1 Delivery Head Motor Upper-back side
M2 Flipper Roller Motor with
Encoder Flipper Assembly (upper back)
M3 Delivery Head Roller Motor Delivery Head Assembly (upper
back)
M4 Ejector Motor Under Delivery Head Assembly
M5 Transport Belt Motor Lower-back side
PSBinEmpty Paper Bin Empty Sensor Delivery Head Assembly (upper
back)
PSBinFull/
Head
Position
Paper Bin (below) Full
Sensor Delivery Head Assembly (upper
back)
PSEject Delivery Rollers Extended
Sensor Delivery Head Assembly (upper
back)
PSEntry Paper Entry Sensor Flipper Assembly (top, center)
PSExit1 Paper Delivered to Head
Sensor Delivery Head Assembly (upper
back)
PSExit2 Paper Delivered to Bin
Sensor Delivery Head Assembly (upper
back)
PSFaceUp Reverse Stepper Motor
Sensor Flipper Assembly (top, center)
PSFaceFull Face-up Bin Full Sensor Flipper Assembly (top, center)
SW1 Interlock Switch Middle-back Side
IR LED Infrared Light-emitting
Diode (for Stapler
Assembly)
Delivery Head Assembly (left,
center)
224 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Figure 5-24 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 225
8-bin Mailbox Operation
Power-on Sequence
During the power-on sequence, the Delivery Head Assembly moves
first to the top “home” position at the Face-up Bin. From that position
the delivery head moves down, scanning to determine if all the
Mailbox bins are installed, if they contain paper, and if they are full.
Then the Delivery Head proceeds upward again to the home position
and remains there for about 7 seconds. Finally, the Delivery Head
Assembly moves to the bottom bin, where it waits for the next
command from the Paper Handling Controller.
Note If one of the bins has been removed or is not seated correctly, the
Delivery Head Assembly will not complete the scan and will send an
error message to the printer control panel.
Receiving Paper
The printer delivers paper to the 8-bin Mailbox through the left output
delivery slot (Input Paper Guide) at a rate of 107 mm per second.
Paper arrival is sensed by the PSEntry sensor, which activates the
Flipper Roller Motor (M2), causing the paper to move through the 8-
bin Mailbox transport and delivery system. See figure 5-23 on
page 222.
Delivering Paper
The Delivery Head Assembly on the 8-bin Mailbox moves or stays in
the indicated bin according to the commands coming from the Paper
Handling Controller on the printer. If paper is designated for the Face-
up Bin, the 8-bin Mailbox feeds it through the Flipper Assembly. If
paper is designated for one of the Face-down bins, the 8-bin Mailbox
feeds it through the Flipper Assembly until the trailing edge is sensed
by the PSFaceUp sensor. Then the Flipper Roller Motor (M2)
reverses and feeds the paper down between the Transport Belt and
the Metal Tape until it reaches the Delivery Head Assembly.
Configuring the Operating Modes
The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an
HP network configuration utility, such as the HP JetAdmin utility or the
HP LaserJet utility for the Macintosh. Additionally, on all workstations
that print to the printer, the printer driver might need to be set up to
reflect the chosen operating mode.
226 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Mailbox Mode
In Mailbox Mode, the network administrator can address each bin as
an output destination with a name assigned to it. The printer sends a
print job to the selected bin. If the assigned bin is full, the printer
either stops printing or sends subsequent pages to the overflow bin,
which is also defined by the network administrator.
Job Separator Mode
●Print jobs are automatically sent one job per bin to the first empty
bin beginning with the top bin. Non-empty bins are skipped. If all
bins have paper, the job will be sent to the first non-full bin
starting at the top.
●If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel
message indicates that paper needs to be removed before
delivery to that bin can continue. Delivery of the job resumes in
the same bin when paper is removed.
●To clear a device full condition, empty all bins.
Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.
Virtual Stacker Mode
In Virtual Stacker Mode, printed sheets are stacked face down in the
bins from the lowest bin to the top bin, regardless of job boundaries.
This mode of operation takes advantage of the total capacity of the
mailbox bins. The software sees the mailbox as one logical bin. When
the mailbox is full, the system will halt until all bins are emptied.
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 227
Collator Mode
●Mopies of a print job are automatically sent one mopy per bin
beginning with the top bin.
●If there are more mopies than bins, the delivery resumes
sequentially from the top bin until all mopies are delivered.
●If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel
message indicates which bin is full, and will display a request to
remove paper. Delivery of the mopy resumes in the same bin
when paper is removed.
●To clear a device full condition, empty all bins.
Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.
Finisher Components
The 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler is an output-Finisher paper-handling
device designed to work with different HP LaserJet printers. It has
both mailbox and stapling capability. The stapler unit output bin
staples up to 20 sheets (letter and A4,) 20-lb paper), and has a total
capacity of 350 stapled sheets.
In addition, this component has 5 Face-down bins with a capacity of
250 sheets each, and 1 Face-up Bin with a capacity of 100 sheets, for
a total capacity of 1350 non-stapled sheets. The 8-bin Mailbox and
the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler have similar functionality, performance,
and parts. The stapler fits into the Mailbox by removing the three
upper bins and the blind cover (see figure 8-14 on page 768 for
location of the blind cover).
228 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Figure 5-25 Finisher Paper Path
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 229
Figure 5-26 Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches
Stapler Unit Operation
All communication and control of the mailbox, the 2000-sheet Input
Tray, and the stapler unit is through the Paper Handling Controller.
These instructions are sent to the stapler controller PCA located in
the lower part of the stapler. Power is provided to the stapler by the
8-bin Mailbox/5-bin mailbox with Stapler external 24V DC power
supply through the C-link cable. It handles letter and A4 sizes of plain
paper. The stapler can staple up to a maximum of 20 sheets.
Table 5-10. Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches
Control
Device Title Location
M1 Stapler DC Motor Stapler Assembly
M2 Rack Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly
M3 Slider Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly
M4 Retainer DC Motor Stapler bed Assembly
IR Sensor Infra Red Sensor Stapler bed Assembly
STL Sensor Stapler Sensor Stapler Assembly
230 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
PSRack Rack Sensor Top Cover Assembly
PSSlider Slider Sensor Stapler bed Assembly
PSRetainer Retainer Sensor Stapler bed Assembly
PSBinFull Output Bin Full Sensor Stapler bed Assembly
PSNBinFull Next Bin Full Sensor Housing
STLout Staples Out Stapler Assembly
SW1 Top Cover Interlock Switches (2 in
serial)
Right Hinge
Table 5-10. Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches (continued)
Control
Device Title Location
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 231
Power-On or Reset Sequence
At power-on or reset, events are performed in the following sequence:
1Stapler Assembly is set to a ready state.
2Retainer Assembly is turned to its initial position.
3Rack Assembly is moved to find its home position, which is in the
left side of the Top Cover Assembly.
4Slider Assembly is moved to find its home position, which is
inside of the stapler bed.
5Slider Assembly is moved fully out from the stapler bed to the
eject position.
6Rack Assembly is moved to activate the Exit Flap Assembly.
7Slider Assembly is moved to its home position.
8Rack Assembly is returned to its home position.
232 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Main Functional Cycles of the Stapler (Internal
Paper Path)
Figure 5-27 Stapler Cycles
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
Paper Feed Cycle
The stapler bed assembly receives the paper from the 8-bin Mailbox/
5-bin Mailbox with Stapler Head assembly. The IR Sensor detects
when the paper arrives in the stapler. The Retainer (a shaft holding
two rubber flexible fingers or anti-curl fingers) rotates once to apply
pressure down and backward. This action forces the paper to register
against the rear wall of the stapler bed, as well as reduces paper curl.
The Registration Pusher (located in the right side of the Top
Assembly) registers the paper against the left wall of the stapler bed.
This cycle is repeated until the amount of sheets to be stapled is
reached (with a maximum of 20).
C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 233
Stapling Cycle
The Sliders move the stack of sheets to the stapling position. The
Registration Pusher applies slight pressure to the stack of sheets
toward the left wall of the stapler bed where the stapler is located.
Then the stack of sheets is stapled.
Eject Cycle
The stapler bed sliders offset the stacks or jobs. The Off-Set Pusher
(located in the left side of the Top Cover Assembly) pushes the stack
towards the right side of the stapler bed, whenever it applies. The
Sliders move the stack of paper from stapling position to eject
position, which is out of the stapler bed (reaching the Wire Frame
level). The Wire Frame directs the stack of paper. The Exit Flap
Assembly moves down to prevent the job from returning to the stapler
bed. The Sliders retract to home position, letting the stack of sheets
fall into the output bin. The capacity of the output bin is 350 stapled
sheets in jobs of five sheets or equivalent combinations.
Communication Link (Daisy Chain)
Communication Link (C-link) devices include:
●C-link Input Devices:
•2000-sheet Input Tray
•2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
●C-link Output Devices:
•8-bin Mailbox
•5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (Includes a Finisher)
•7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
•3,000-sheet Stacker
•3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker
Communication and control of the C-link devices is through the paper
handling controller mounted on the printer's formatter PCA. The
C-link devices (C-link protocol) have their own power supply and
controller board that receives signals and commands from the paper
handling controller. This communication is illustrated in figure 5-28.
234 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Figure 5-28 Recommended C-link Configuration (Daisy Chain)
C4265-90907 Paper Jam Detection 235
Paper Jam Detection
The PIU Sensor (PS2), the Registration Sensor (PS1), the Fuser
Delivery Sensor (PS1403), and the Face-down Delivery Sensor
(PS1402) detect paper moving through the printer (see figure 5-15 on
page 204 and table 5-1 on page 202 for a description of each sensor
and illustration of its locations). If a paper jam is detected, the DC
Controller immediately stops the printing process and causes a
13.x PAPER JAM message to be displayed on the control panel. If a
paper jam occurs in the Envelope Feeder, Duplexer, 2000-sheet Input
Tray, 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray, or 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, the 13.x Paper Jam message will
indicate the approximate location. See Chapter 7 for more details.
Printer Timing
The Formatter PCA and the DC Controller PCA share information
during printer operation. This information consists of printer status,
command, and dot-image data. Figure 5-29 shows the general timing
of the printer events. Table 5-11 lists the events that take place during
normal printer operation.
Table 5-11. Printer Timing
Period Timing Purpose
WAIT From power on to the end of Main Motor initial
rotation.
Clear the drum surface potential
and clean the Transfer Roller.
STBY
(standby)
From the end of the WAIT or the LSTR period until
the input of the PRNT signal from the Formatter
PCA. Or from the end of the LSTR period to power
off.
Maintain the printer in the READY
state.
INTR
(initial rotation)
From the input of the PRNT signal from the
Formatter PCA until the laser diode intensity has
been stabilized.
Stabilize the photosensitive drum
sensitivity in preparation for
printing. Clean the Transfer Roller.
PRNT
(print)
From the end of the initial rotation until the Scanner
Motor stops.
Form images on the photosensitive
drum based on the /VDO signal
from the Formatter PCA. Transfer
the image to the media.
LSTR
(last rotation)
From the primary voltage (DC) off until the Main
Motor stops.
If another PRNT signal is sent from the Formatter
PCA, the printer returns to the INTR period. If not,
it returns to the STBY period.
Deliver the last sheet of paper and
clean the Transfer Roller.
236 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Figure 5-29 General Timing Diagram
C4265-90907 IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information 237
IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information
This cable is IEEE 1284 compliant with A-to-C connectors. To take
advantage of its enhanced capabilities such as bidirectional
communication between the computer and printer, faster transmission
of data, and auto configuration of printer drivers, the customer must
have the following:
●Support in software applications for these features.
●A parallel cable with the correct pin configuration (see below).
Parallel Cable Pin Configuration
For best results, use the C2946A (3 meter) or C2947A (10 meter)
cable or equivalent.
CAUTION Ensure that all power and interface cables on the printer and host
computer are properly grounded in compliance with local codes.
Table 5-12. Parallel Cable Pin Assignments
Signal Name Printer Pin Number Host Pin Number
nSTROBE 15 1
DATA0 62
DATA1 73
DATA2 84
DATA3 95
DATA4 10 6
DATA5 11 7
DATA6 12 8
DATA7 13 9
nACKNLG 310
BUSY 111
CALL (PE) 512
SELECT 213
NAutoFd 17 14
O VDC (GND) 19-35 18-25
nFAULT 415
nSe/In 16 17
nINIT 14 16
PERIPHLH 36
N.C. 18
238 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Copy Module Functional Overview
Copy Module System
Figure 5-30 Copy Module System Block Diagram
Note The copy module consists of everything inside the large dotted line.
The copy engine consists of the copy module minus the Copy
Processor Board.
printer
●The printer’s hard disk stores the copy module firmware.
●The Copy Connect Extended Input/Output (EIO) Card functions
as a pass-through device.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Functional Overview 239
Copy Module
●Power Supply and Main Board Tray Assembly
•The Fan Assembly activates while the copy module is turned
on. It may run slower if Power Save is on.
•The Power Supply provides AC to DC power conversion.
•The Control PCA controls copy module electromechanical
functions, imaging system, and errors. It also has an EEPROM
which stores the default factory settings particular to each
copy module, such as serial number and calibration settings.
•When you replace the Control PCA, retain the EEPROM from
the old PCA and replace it on the new PCA in order to retain
the default settings for the HP Digital Copier.
•The Back PCA Board provides a connection between the Copy
Processor Board and the Control PCA.
•The Copy Processor Board is explained on page 240.
●ADF Unit
•The ADF Assembly provides all mechanics to move paper.
•The LED Assembly provides feedback from the paper empty
sensor to the user. If paper is loaded correctly, the LED is
green and a tone sounds.
•The ADF Motor Unit drives the ADF’s paper handling
mechanics.
•The Sensor Unit Assembly has 8 sensors (4 paper width
sensors to detect standard paper types; 1 ADF open sensor,
and 3 paper-handling sensors).
•Charge Coupled Device (CCD)/Optics convert reflected light to
electronic signals. Also includes mirrors and lenses to point
the reflected light.
•The ADF Lamp illuminates the original document.
•The Lamp Inverter PCA controls and provides power to the
ADF Lamp.
240 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
●Carrier Unit (a movable optics system under the flatbed glass,
used to copy the front side of ADF jobs and flatbed jobs)
•Charge Coupled Device (CCD)/Optics convert reflected light to
electronic signals. Also includes mirrors and lenses to point
the reflected light.
•The Carrier Unit Lamp illuminates the original document.
•The Lamp Inverter PCA controls and provides power to the
Flatbed Motor Unit with Belt.
•The Flatbed Motor Unit drives the Carrier Unit back and forth
under the flatbed glass.
●Front Panel (LC touch screen and keypad interface)
●Home Position Sensor (detects obstruction of Carrier Unit, a bad
Flatbed Motor or Belt)
●Junction PCA (a pass-through connection from the Control PCA
to the Carrier Unit, Flatbed Motor Unit, Front Panel, and Home
Position Sensor)
Function and Layout of the Copy Processor
Figure 5-31 Copy Processor and key components
C4265-90907 Copy Module Functional Overview 241
Note The Copy Processor is a replaceable unit.
Functions
●Controls the Front Panel display
●Monitors touch screen inputs
●Controls communication from the copier engine (no unsolicited
data flows from the copier engine)
●Performs image processing (grayscale to dithered black and
white)
●Initiates and controls communication to the printer
•The interface is IEEE 1394 based, 200 MB per second total
bus speed.
•Copy module firmware is downloaded from the printer’s hard
disk to the Copy Processor.
•The user inputs settings through the touch screen Front Panel
to the Copy Processor to the printer.
•The printer sends status responses to the Copy Processor.
•printer control commands go from the Copy Processor to the
printer.
•Image data is sent to the printer, essentially printer ready strip
buffer data.
Key Components
●2 PM44s [Image processing Digital Signal Processor (DSP)]
●1 16-bit Motorola 68306 micro-controller
●1 boot ROM, which provides code to start 1394 communication
and begin to download the operating system
●1 1394 interface and connector
●1 DRAM
242 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Copy Module Power Up Process
Copy Processor Board
There are 4 main stages of the power-up process of the Copy
Processor. Each of the four stages are represented by an icon
displayed on the Digital Copier's front panel. If a Digital Copier does
not successfully boot up, the icons displayed will assist the field
technician in diagnosing the failure.
While first power-up icon is displayed:
1The 16-bit Motorola 68306 microprocessor boots itself from the
ROM.
2The Copy Processor performs minimum checks (Level-1 checks)
on ROM.
3The Copy Processor polls the keypad for initial key status (to
determine whether to start up in Service Mode).
4The Copy Processor begins performing self-checks. (During
Level II checks on the Copy Processor, the user can let go of any
keys held down. This is a short phase with no animation.)
While second power-up icon is displayed:
5The connection to the printer starts over the IEEE 1394 interface
and looks for the printer. This stage may take more time if the
printer is not powered on and ready. If the printer is not available,
the Copy Processor continuously monitors the bus to find one.
Therefore, the power-on order between the printer and the Copy
Module does not matter.
While third power-up icon is displayed:
6The unit begins download of the Copy Module Firmware (CMF)
from the printer's hard disk to the Copy Processor's DRAM. This
may take up to two minutes, although 60-70 seconds is most
typical. The hourglass icon is animated during this time and a
progress bar is displayed.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Up Process 243
While fourth power-up icon is displayed:
7When the download is complete, the unit begins a checksum test
on download, initializes the system, and continues to display the
icons until it can display the HP Digital Copier Module's main
menu.
8Initial key state and Level II failure (if any) are written to the
Display Manager and are reported to the Front Panel as Boot
Error XXXX. See “Boot Errors” on page 721 for a definition of
XXXX.
9The microprocessor jumps to the code in DRAM and never
returns to the code in ROM. Then the Copy Module Operating
System starts up in Service Mode, if the user was pressing the
appropriate keys when power-up began (see Step 3), or the main
menu is displayed.
Note Icons are drawn at the start of the stage. If the stage fails, the icon will
be overdrawn with the error icon.
244 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Copy Module
▼The fan comes on.
▼The start button LED lights yellow and then goes off.
▼The Carrier Unit moves to the home position, as detected by the
Home Position Sensor. (A grinding noise indicates the shipping
lock is in place or an object is blocking the Carrier Unit.)
▼The ADF clears any paper loaded or partially in the paper path.
▼The back light on the Front Panel turns on. (Stopping here
indicates that the unit has a bad display or connection. This is
particularly true if the Copy Processor is functional.)
▼HP Digital Copier displays on the screen to confirm that the
display and connections are good and the Copy Processor is able
to boot from ROM.
▼The copy module polls for an HP LaserJet 8150. If it is not there,
the copy module will continuously monitor the bus for one. (The
power on order does not matter for the printer or copy module.)
▼The four icons and the status bar display.
▼The main menu displays.
●The copy module awaits the start command.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Up Process 245
Printer components of copy module power up
process
▼The printer performs startup procedures.
Note The Scanner Service Agent is part of the copy module firmware that
loads from the printer's hard disk drive into the printer's RAM on power
up. When this happens, you see Loading Program 1 or Loading
Program 2 on the front panel of the printer. This program runs
continuously, instructing the printer how to handle requests and
information from the copy module.
▼The printer loads the Scanner Service Agent from the printer hard
disk drive. Loading Program 1 or Loading Program 2 displays
on the printer’s Front Panel. Additional programs may be added
later for support of additional functionality.
Note The units must be power cycled once the copy module firmware is
installed.
Notes About the MFP Printer Product ID
Versions 5.32 and older firmware for the copy module stored a
product ID in NVRAM and also on the hard disk. With an older version
of firmware and no product ID in NVRAM or on the hard disk, the copy
module will hang on icon 2 of the copy module control panel when
you turn it on. If this problem occurs, download the latest version of
copy module firmware from http://www.hp.com. Version 5.40 or later
firmware will work with a LaserJet 8000, 8100, 8150, Moper 240 and
Mopier 320 and does not require a product ID.
The only way to remove the product ID is to perform an NVRAM
initialization.
CAUTION There are different methods of downloading firmware for the copy
module. There is one method for downloading when using digital
sending and one method for downloading when using the copy
functionality only. See “Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware” on
page 150
246 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
ADF Simplex Operation
▼The user inputs commands (through the touch screen and
buttons) which are then sent to the Copy Processor Board.
▼The Copy Processor displays the appropriate screens on the
copy module’s LCD based on the user’s inputs. The screens
displayed are based on the screens downloaded from the printer.
▼The user presses the START button and the copy module receives
the ADF read command. (The ADF or flatbed is determined by
the ADF paper loaded sensor.)
▼The bottom document placed face-down in the chute is fed
through the ADF. Paper size is detected by the Paper Size
Sensor (A3, A4, B4, B5). This will tell the ADF Motor when to
stop.
▼The Carrier Unit reads the white reference and then moves to the
ADF read position.
▼The ADF Motor starts to feed the paper. The top sensor detects
the edge of the page.
▼The copy module counts the number of motor pulses to reach the
end of the page. It also determines mispicks, double or misfeeds,
and end of page when the data ends.
▼The image is scanned by the copy module engine, as explained
on page 249.
▼The page is stacked in the output tray. This process repeats until
the chute is empty.
●The ADF Motor stops and the copy module awaits the next
command.
C4265-90907 ADF Duplex Operation 247
ADF Duplex Operation
▼The user inputs the duplex command from the touch screen on
the Front Panel.
▼Frontside data is the same as simplex operation.
▼Both the backside and frontside are copied simultaneously by two
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) arrays on the HP Digital Copier.
(A Charge Coupled Device is a miniature photometer that
measures light and converts the measured value to analog
voltage.)
▼Backside data is copied and stored into the backside image
buffer residing on the copy engine.
●After the frontside buffer has been sent to the Copy Processor,
the data stored in the backside buffer is then sent to the Copy
Processor.
Flatbed Operation
▼The user inputs commands (through the touch screen and
buttons) which are then sent to the Copy Processor Board.
▼The Copy Processor displays the appropriate screens on the
copy module’s LCD based on the user’s inputs. The screens
displayed are based on the screens downloaded from the printer.
▼The user presses the START button and the copy module looks
for paper loaded in the ADF. If no paper is found, the copy module
receives the flatbed read command.
Note The user interface is identical from ADF copy to flatbed copy.
▼The Carrier Unit reads the white reference and then moves to the
right to read from the flatbed glass and proceeds in steps for user
specific paper length.
▼The copy engine scans the image (see page 249).
●The Carrier Unit returns to the home position and the HP Digital
Copier awaits the next command.
248 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Checks Executed when the Start Button is Pressed
●Paper jam
●ADF open
●Lamp intensity
●Lamp fuse
●Motor fuse
●Detect paper loaded (on ADF)
C4265-90907 Copy Module Image Path 249
Copy Module Image Path
Figure 5-32 Image path (1 of 2)
Step 1: The light source illuminates a horizontal strip of the image
called the raster line.
Step 2: Reflected light is gathered and guided by lenses and a series
of mirrors and is then captured by a 4864 pixel element Charge
Coupled Device (CCD) array. The CCD converts analog voltages into
raw digital grayscale information.
Step 3: Raw digital image data is sent from the copy module’s CCD to
PM-44s. The PM-44s convert raw digital information into a printer
ready bit stream, dithered black and white with layouts such as N-up,
duplex, staple, and so forth, and sends it to the printer via the 1394
cable. Data format is strip buffer raster data. The copy module
firmware on the printer adds Printer Job Language (PJL) control
commands later.
250 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Repeat: One horizontal line or raster line of the image is captured in a
step and the Carrier Unit or ADF mechanically moves to the next
step. The distance moved determines the subscan sampling rate (1/
300 inch = 300 ppi, 1/600 = 600 ppi).
Note Pages load face down on the ADF. The backside optics are in the ADF
above the frontside optics, which are in the Carrier Unit, below the
glass.
C4265-90907 Communication with the Printer 251
Communication with the Printer
Note The Copy Connect EIO is essentially a pass through device.
▼Data is handed from the Copy Connect EIO to the Scanner
Service Agent (SSA), which is part of the copy module firmware
that runs in the printer’s RAM and shows Loading Program 1 on
the printer’s Front Panel when loaded successfully.
▼The copy module firmware adds several Printer Job Language
(PJL) control codes to set resolution, printer language and page
layout.
●The data stream goes around the printer’s normal image
processing system directly into page memory. This allows for the
high speed at which copied pages can be printed.
Communication Channels
●Image data: high speed uni-directional 1394 channel
●All other communications: bidirectional 1394 channel
Print Job Interrupt
There are two levels at which a user can interrupt a network print job
to make a copy on the copy module:
●Low priority - when you place a document in the ADF or touch
any of the buttons on the copy module, all incoming network jobs
are held until the copy module is finished copying.
●High priority - Select JOB INTERRUPT on the touch screen. The
current mopy job is interrupted at the copy boundary. For
instance, if the printer is printing copy 3 of 5, it will finish copy 3
and hold copies 4 and 5 until the copy module is finished copying.
252 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
Paper Path and Sensors
Figure 5-33 Locations of ADF Sensors
ADF cover
open sensor ADF empty
sensor
OMR sensor
Top of paper
sensor
B4 size
sensor
A3
A4
B5
C4265-90907 Communication with the Printer 253
Figure 5-34 ADF Sensors functional diagram
254 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907
C4265-90907 Chapter contents 255
6Removal and
Replacement
Chapter contents
Removal and Replacement Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
User Installable Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Hardware Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Input Devices
2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . 341
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . 372
Envelope Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Output Devices
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . 405
8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
HP Digital Copier
HP Digital Copier Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Installing the HP Digital Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Copy Module Maintenance Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Copy Module Skins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies. . . . . . . 524
Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
256 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Removal and Replacement Strategy
This chapter documents the removal and replacement of major
assemblies.
Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally,
directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included.
WARNING! Unplug the power cord from the power outlet before attempting to
service the printer. If this warning is not followed, severe injury may
result.
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed
from the Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although
invisible, can damage your eyes.
This printer has some sharp sheet metal edges that can cause injury.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions
CAUTION
The printer and accessories contain parts that are sensitive to ESD.
Always service printers at an ESD-protected workstation or wear an
anti-static wrist wrap. Watch for the ESD reminder symbol on
illustrations.
C4265-90907 Required Tools 257
Required Tools
●#2 magnetized Phillips screwdriver (6-inch shaft)
●Small flat-blade screwdriver
●Small pair needle-nose pliers
●T-10, T-15, and T-20 Torx driver (6-inch shaft)
All components in the printer, the 2000-sheet Input Tray, 7-bin
Tabletop Mailbox, and the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray use Phillips head
screws that require a #2 size Phillips screwdriver. Make sure to use a
Phillips screwdriver and not a Posidriv screwdriver. Figure 6-1 shows
the difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver. Note that
the Phillips tip has more beveled surfaces.
All screws used in the field-replaceable units of the 8-bin Mailbox and
the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler components require a T-10, T-15 or T-
20 Torx driver.
Figure 6-1 Phillips vs. Posidriv Screwdrivers
Note See table 6-1 on page 266 and Chapter 8 for a list of the screws and
other common hardware used in the printer.
CAUTION To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counter-clockwise to align it
with the existing thread pattern, then carefully turn clockwise to tighten.
Do not over-tighten. If a self-tapping screw-hold becomes stripped,
repair of the screw-hole or replacement of the affected assembly is
required.
258 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
User Installable Accessories
Memory and Personality
Upgrade
CAUTION
DIMMs and the Formatter PCA can be
damaged by small amounts of
electrostatic discharge (ESD). Wear an
anti-static wrist wrap.
Print a configuration page (page 653).
1Turn the printer off. Unplug the
power cord, and disconnect any
cables.
Loosen the two captive thumb
screws on the back of the printer.
Grasp the screws and pull the
formatter board out of the printer.
Place it on a flat, non-conductive
surface.
2Remove the DIMM from the
antistatic package. Hold the DIMM
with fingers against the side edges
and thumbs against the back edge.
Align the notches on the DIMM with
the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks
on each side of the DIMM slot are
open, or outward.)
3Press the DIMM straight into the slot
(press firmly).
4Make sure the locks on each side of
the DIMM snap inward into place.
(To remove a DIMM, the locks must
be released.)
Slide the formatter board back into
the printer, and tighten the two
screws. Plug in the power cord and
connect all cables. Turn the printer
on.
C4265-90907 User Installable Accessories 259
Disk Drive
Figure 6-2 Disk Drive
To remove the disk drive:
1Turn the printer off, and unplug it.
2Loosen the 2 captive screws, and remove the disk drive from slot
#2 (figure 6-2, callout 1).
To reinstall the disk drive:
1Turn the printer off.
2Install the disk drive in slot #2 (figure 6-2, callout 1), and tighten
the 2 captive screws.
3Print a configuration page to verify the settings.
260 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Duplexer
1With the printer turned off and
unplugged, open the Diverter door
on the left side of the printer.
2Push down the green release lever
located at the lower right of the
Duplexer and slide it straight out of
the printer.
Envelope Feeder
1With the printer turned off and
unplugged, slide the Envelope
Feeder up and out of the printer.
C4265-90907 User Installable Accessories 261
2000-sheet or
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
1With the printer turned off and the
power cable unplugged, disconnect
all C-link cables from the Formatter
Assembly and from the input device.
WARNING!
The printer weighs approximately 106
pounds (48 kg). Use four people to lift it.
2Lift the printer off of the Tray 4
assembly and place it on a smooth,
sturdy surface.
To Reinstall:
3Match the locator pins as illustrated
in step 3.
4Make sure that the printer is aligned
on all corners.
5Reconnect all power and C-link
cables.
262 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
8-bin Mailbox/5-bin
Mailbox with Stapler
1With the printer turned off and
unplugged, disconnect the power
cable and C-link cable from the input
device and power box.
2Carefully slide the 8-bin Mailbox/5-
bin Mailbox with Stapler away from
the printer until the locator tabs and
the lower guide rail are clear. See
Figure 2.
3Press in the green tabs and remove
the bracket installed underneath the
input device. See Figure 3.
To Reinstall:
1Reinstall bracket underneath input
device.Reinstall C-link and power
cables. See Figure 1.
Note
Attach and secure the C-link cable to the
lower connector on the input device.
Route the mailbox’s power cord beneath
the printer to the transfer-door side of the
printer and connect it to the bottom of
the powerbox.
C4265-90907 User Installable Accessories 263
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
1With the printer turned off and
unplugged (A), disconnect the C-link
cable from the top and bottom (B)
connectors.
2Remove the Face-up Bin (A) from
the top slot of the mailbox. Depress
the handle mechanism on the front
of the mailbox (B). Pull the mailbox
away from the printer until the tray is
fully extended (C).
3Release the plastic alignment guide
from the latching mechanism.
4Remove the wing nuts from the
studs beneath the tray extension on
the stand.
5Slide the mailbox away from the
printer. Raise the alignment guide
and tape it in place before moving
the mailbox.
264 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To Reinstall:
1Place the mailbox onto the stand by
aligning the threaded studs on the
connector plate with the two holes
on the top of the stand.
2With the tray on the stand fully
extended, lower the alignment guide
onto the locking mechanism.
3Slide the mailbox toward the printer.
Note
Use your thumbs to do this and keep the
tray on the stand fully extended.
C4265-90907 User Installable Accessories 265
4Secure the mailbox to the stand by
tightening the thumb fastener onto
the studs beneath the tray extension
on the stand.
5Push the mailbox toward the printer
until it snaps in place.
6Connect the C-Link cable. Plug the
power cord into the mailbox and an
AC power outlet.
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
266 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Hardware Table
Note The screws listed in table 6-1 are also listed in Chapter 8 with their
respective assemblies.
Table 6-1. Hardware Table
Example Reference Description Part Number Usage
CH101 and CH102 Screw, w/washer,
M3x8
XA9-0872-000CN General, Metal to
metal
CH103 Screw, M4X8 XB6-7400-807CN Main Motor
CH104 Screw, CT, M3X3 XB5-6303-007CN Fan 1, Fan 2
CH105 Screw, w/washer,
M3X20
XA9-0817-000CN Laser/Scanner
CH106 Screw, tapping,
truss head, M3X8
XB4-7401-809CN HVPS, DC
Controller
CH107 Screw, tapping, pan
head, M4X10
XB4-7401-009CN Diverter Assembly,
Face-up Solenoid
Assembly
C4265-90907 Hardware Table 267
Kit 1 Complete hardware
screw kit for
2000-sheet Input
Tray
RY7-5044-000CN 2000-sheet Input
Tray, general use
Kit 3 Complete hardware
screw kit for Mailbox
C4785-60521 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin
Mailbox with
Stapler, Elevator
Head
Table 6-1. Hardware Table (continued)
Example Reference Description Part Number Usage
268 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement
Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Delivery Unit (for Face-down Bin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Diverter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Diverter Door Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Lower Right Door Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fan 1, Laser/Scanner and Housing (Exhaust) . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply (Exhaust). . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Fan 3, Formatter Fan and Housing (Intake). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fan 4, Delivery Unit (Exhaust). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fan 5, Tray 1 (Intake). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tray 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Feeder Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Formatter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Fusing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Laser/Scanner Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Main Gear Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Main Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Paper Input Unit (PIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
PCA, DC Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Output Paper Sensor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Registration Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Tray 1 Feed Roller and Separation Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tray 2 and 3 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. . . . . . . . 330
Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Registration Sensor (PS1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Face-up Solenoid Assembly (SL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Transfer Roller Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 269
Control Panel
Figure 6-3 Control Panel (1 of 2)
1While pushing in on the center area (figure 6-3, callout), lift up on
the forward edge of the control panel to release the plastic
retaining tab.
270 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-4 Control Panel (2 of 2)
2Press down on the back while pushing up on the front of the
Control Panel to free it from the chassis.
To Reinstall:
Plug in the cable, replace the cable in its retainer, insert the rear edge
of the control panel under the top cover lip, and press down on the
forward edge to snap it into place.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 271
Covers
There are five cover assemblies in this printer:
●AC Access Cover, located at the left rear of the printer.
●Back Cover, provides access to the High Voltage Power Supply,
DC Controller, Low Voltage Power Supply, and Main Motor.
●Front Cover, including front access door.
●Left Lower Cover, located below the Diverter Access Door.
●Top Cover, provides access to the Face-down Delivery Unit and
Laser/Scanner Assembly.
272 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
AC Access Cover
Figure 6-5 AC Access Cover
1Remove the Formatter PCA.
2Remove 3 screws (figure 6-5, callout 1).
To Reinstall:
1Insert the panel edge (figure 6-5, callout 2) inside the back cover
(if installed).
2Be sure to insert the three alignment tabs (figure 6-5, callout 3)
into their slots before replacing the screws.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 273
Back Cover
Figure 6-6 Back Cover
Note Remove the metal back cover and the plastic panel at the right rear as
a single unit. The square opening at the upper rear corner on the right-
side plastic panel is the engine test access (callout 6).
1Remove 5 screws (figure 6-6, callout 1).
2Open the top cover door, and remove 1 screw (figure 6-6,
callout 2).
3Open the 2000-sheet Input Tray transfer door (if installed), Tray 1,
and the Right Lower Door Assembly (callout 7).
4Remove 2 screws (figure 6-6, callout 3) from the plastic panel to
the left of the metal back cover.
5Carefully release the cover around the AC input connector (figure
6-6, callout 4) at the lower right of the back cover, and slide the
right side of the cover slightly forward.
6Carefully release the retaining tabs (figure 6-6, callout 5) on the
plastic panel to the left of the metal back cover by gently pulling
the cover to the left while moving both pieces away from the
printer chassis.
274 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Front Cover
Figure 6-7 Front Cover (1 of 2)
1Open all access doors and remove the Duplexer if installed.
2Open the front access door, and remove 3 screws (figure 6-7,
callout 1).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 275
Figure 6-8 Front Cover (2 of 2)
3Open the Diverter Access Door and release the two plastic
retaining tabs inside the Duplexer cavity (figure 6-8, callout 2).
CAUTION Be careful; the plastic upper retaining tabs will break off if the cover is
tilted too far out.
4Carefully pull the bottom of the cover away from the chassis while
moving it to the right to release the retaining tab (figure 6-7,
callout 3).
5Carefully tilt the bottom edge of the cover away from the chassis
to release the upper retaining tabs.
276 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Left Lower Cover
Figure 6-9 Left Lower Cover
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic guides on the inside of the lower
left cover. They are part of the Duplexer paper path.
1Remove the Diverter Assembly access door (see figure 6-15).
2Remove 2 screws (figure 6-9, callout 1).
3Press down firmly on the top cover outer ends to release the
retaining tabs on the inside of the cover (figure 6-9, callout 2) and
the retaining tabs at the lower edge of the cover (figure 6-9,
callout 3).
4Pull the cover away from the chassis, left side first.
To Reinstall:
1Relocate the right side of the cover behind the plastic edge piece
first.
2Slide the cover toward the chassis and insert the two retaining
tabs into position. Lift up to snap the cover into place.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 277
Top Cover
Figure 6-10 Top Cover (1 of 2)
1Remove the Control Panel (see figure 6-3 on page 269), then
remove 1 screw (figure 6-10, callout 1).
2Open the Diverter Assembly access door, and remove 1 screw
(figure 6-10, callout 2).
278 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-11 Top Cover (2 of 2)
3Open the top cover door, and remove 1 screw (figure 6-11,
callout 3).
4Remove the clip to easily access the bin cover (figure 6-11,
callout 4.
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag (figure
6-11, callout 5) when removing the top cover.
5Lift (and hold) the top cover door up, and carefully pull out on the
cover to release the retaining tab (figure 6-10, callout 5).
6Hold the Face-down Bin (figure 6-10, callout 6) down while
carefully and slowly lifting the top cover straight up until it clears
the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag and the Delivery Unit.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 279
To Reinstall:
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag (figure
6-11, callout 4) when replacing the top cover.
1Hold the top cover door up and the Face-down Bin (figure 6-10,
callout 6) down while lowering the cover into position.
2Slide the Face-down Bin under the Face-down Bin Full sensor
flag, and make sure that the cam (figure 6-11, callout 4) at the
rear of the top cover door is properly positioned while lowering
the top cover into place.
3Make sure that the top cover is seated properly and that the
retaining tabs are in place before replacing the screws.
4Reinstall Control Panel.
280 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Delivery Unit (for Face-down Bin)
Figure 6-12 Delivery Unit (1 of 2)
1Remove the following components:
•Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 305)
•AC Access Cover (see figure 6-5 on page 272)
•Top Cover (see figure 6-10 on page 277)
•Front Cover (see figure 6-7 on page 274)
2Unplug and re-route the fan cable out of the way (figure 6-12,
callout 1).
3Remove 1 screw (figure 6-12, callout 2) to loosen the grounding
strip.
4Remove 1 screw (figure 6-12, callout 3), and remove the metal
fan shield.
5Open the Diverter Assembly access door, remove 2 screws
(figure 6-12, callout 4), release the plastic retaining tabs (figure
6-12, callout 5), and remove the metal mounting bracket (figure
6-12, callout 6).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 281
Figure 6-13 Delivery Unit (2 of 2)
6Remove 2 screws (figure 6-13, callout 5) and 1 screw (figure
6-12, callout 7).
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left
end of the Delivery Unit, as viewed from the left side.
7Lift the left end of the Delivery Unit approximately 1/8 inch to clear
the alignment pin, and carefully rock it forward and backward
while sliding it out of the chassis.
282 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To Reinstall:
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left
end of the Delivery Unit.
1Place the plastic edge on the right end of the Delivery Unit into
the chassis. Make sure that the plastic support tab on the right
end of the Delivery Unit slides on top of the chassis.
2Make sure that the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end
of the Delivery Unit can move freely.
3Replace the metal mounting bracket (figure 6-12, callout 6) before
replacing the Delivery Unit screws. Make sure that the plastic
clips (figure 6-12, callout 5) are snapped into place before
tightening the mounting screws (figure 6-12, callout 4).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 283
Diverter Assembly
Figure 6-14 Diverter Assembly
CAUTION Support the Diverter Assembly access door during this procedure to
prevent damage to the plastic hinge pins.
1Open the Diverter Assembly access door and release the support
struts (figure 6-14, callout 1) by sliding the strut ends forward and
downward.
2Remove 6 self-tapping screws (figure 6-14, callout 2).
Note The access door support struts will fall free when the Diverter Assembly
is lifted away from the access door.
3Lift the Diverter Assembly up and away from the access door.
284 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Diverter Door Assembly
Figure 6-15 Diverter Door Assembly
1Open the Diverter access door, and release the support struts
(figure 6-15, callout 1) by sliding the strut ends forward and
downward.
2Rotate the door up to align the flat sides of the right hinge pin with
the retaining slot (figure 6-15, callout 2), and lift upwards to
release it from the retaining slot.
3Continue lifting up on the right side of the door while pushing it to
the left to rotate the left hinge pin out of its locating cavity.
To Reinstall:
1Insert the left side of the door into position first, and then rotate
the right side down to snap the hinge pins into position.
2Reconnect the support struts to the chassis.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 285
Lower Right Door Assembly
Figure 6-16 Lower Right Door Assembly (1 of 3)
1Remove the back cover assembly (see figure 6-6).
2Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3.
3Open the Lower Right Door, and release the lower end of the
support strap (figure 6-16, callout 1).
286 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-17 Right Lower Door Assembly (2 of 3)
4Remove 4 screws (figure 6-17, callout 2).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 287
Figure 6-18 Right Lower Door Assembly (3 of 3)
5Release two retainer tabs from the inside of the Tray 3 cavity
(figure 6-18, callout 3).
6Slide the door assembly away from the printer chassis.
288 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Fan 1, Laser/Scanner and Housing (Exhaust)
Fan Housing
Figure 6-19 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (1 of 2)
1Remove the toner cartridge.
2Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10 on page 277).
3Remove and re-route the cables away from fan housing (figure
6-19, callout 1).
4Release the housing retainer clip located inside the toner
cartridge cavity (figure 6-19, callout 2), and lift the housing up and
out of the chassis.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 289
Fan 1 Motor
Figure 6-20 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (2 of 2)
1Unplug the fan cable from the DC Controller PCA.
2Remove 2 screws (figure 6-20, callout 3), and lift the fan and
bracket assembly out of the chassis.
3Remove 2 screws (figure 6-20, callout 4) to separate the fan
motor from the bracket.
290 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply (Exhaust)
Figure 6-21 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply
1Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273).
2Remove the fan cable from the DC Controller PCA (figure 6-21,
callout 1).
3Remove 2 screws (figure 6-21, callout 2).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 291
Fan 3, Formatter Fan and Housing (Intake)
Fan Motor
Figure 6-22 Fan 3, Formatter Fan
Note The fan motor (FM3) can be removed without removing the housing
assembly.
1Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273).
2Unplug the fan connector (figure 6-22, callout 1).
CAUTION Do not bend the fan retainer clips upward. Release them by pinching.
3Release the 2 retainer clips (figure 6-22, callout 2), and slide the
fan out of the housing assembly.
Fan Housing
4Remove 2 screws and remove housing.
To Reinstall:
Make sure that the fan cable exits from the upper left corner.
292 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Fan 4, Delivery Unit (Exhaust)
Figure 6-23 Fan 4, Delivery Unit
1Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10).
2Unplug the fan cable (figure 6-23, callout 1).
3Remove 1 screw (figure 6-23, callout 2), and remove the metal
fan shield.
4Release 4 retainer clips (figure 6-23, callout 3), and slide the fan
forward out of the Delivery Unit Assembly.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 293
Fan 5, Tray 1 (Intake)
Figure 6-24 Fan 5 Removal (1 of 2)
1Remove Tray 1 (see figure 6-26).
2Remove the Tray 1 Pickup Unit.
3Remove 1 screw (figure 6-24, callout 1).
4Disconnect the cable (figure 6-24, callout 2). Cable is shown
disconnected.
294 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-25 Fan 5 Removal (2 of 2)
5Insert the flat blade of a screwdriver along the line indicated by
callout 1.
6Turn the screwdriver counter-clockwise slightly to free the fan
housing from the fan duct. Then, slide the fan housing out of the
duct.
7Slide the fan out of the housing to replace it.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 295
Tray 1
Figure 6-26 Tray 1 Removal (1 of 3)
1To remove Tray 1, open the tray fully, then partially close it until
the distance between the retaining tab (callout 1) and the stop on
the chassis (callout 2) is 1/4”.
2Pull the right side of the tray outward to free the clip (callout 3)
from the pin (callout 4).
296 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-27 Tray 1 Removal (2 of 3)
3Raise the right side of the tray and guide the white tab around the
stop.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 297
Figure 6-28 Tray 1 Removal (3 of 3)
4Slide the tray to the right, to free the tray on the left side of the
chassis.
5Remove the tray.
298 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
Figure 6-29 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (1 of 4)
1Remove the Front Cover.
2Remove the Rear Cover.
3Remove Tray 1(see page 295).
4Open the Pickup Unit door.
5Remove 4 screws (callout 1).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 299
Figure 6-30 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (2 of 4)
6Disconnect the cables (callouts 1 and 2) on the right side of the
printer.
7Remove the cable from the cable guide (callout 3).
300 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-31 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (3 of 4)
8Tilt the Pickup Assembly out of the chassis from the top (callout
1), then lift up to free it from the chassis (callout 2).
9Remove the Pickup Assembly from the chassis.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 301
Figure 6-32 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (4 of 4)
To Reinstall:
First, seat the 3 tabs (callout 1) behind the metal rail on the chassis.
Then, pivot the Pickup Unit into place. The Pickup Unit has 4 locating
pins that will engage guide holes in the chassis wen the unit is
properly aligned.
302 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Feeder Assembly
Figure 6-33 Feeder Assembly (1 of 2)
1Open the left access door and remove the Duplexer (if installed).
2Remove the Fusing Assembly (see figure 6-36 on page 306).
3Open the Top Cover and remove the Toner Cartridge.
4Remove the Transfer Roller Assembly (see figure 6-62 on page
337).
5Remove the Registration Assembly (see figure 6-53 on page
325).
6Unplug the sensor cable at the right side of the Feeder Assembly
(figure 6-33, callout 1).
7Remove 2 screws at the front of the Feeder Assembly (figure
6-33, callout 2).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 303
Figure 6-34 Feeder Assembly (2 of 2)
8Remove 1 screw at the back of the Feeder Assembly (figure
6-34).
Note Removing the High Voltage Power Supply is recommended to ease the
removal of the Feeder Assembly, primarily because of the contact
points.
9Release 4 plastic retaining tabs by moving them in the directions
indicated in figure 6-34 while carefully lifting upwards on the
Feeder Assembly.
10 Remove the Feeder Assembly by lifting it upwards out of the
Toner Cartridge cavity.
To Reinstall:
Make sure that the plastic retaining tabs are all properly seated
before replacing the screws.
304 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Formatter Assembly
Setting Page Count, Maintenance Count,
and Serial Number
The page count, maintenance count, and printer serial number are
stored in Non-Volatile Memory. PAGECOUNT is the total number of
images printed by the printer, MAINTCOUNT is the page count when
the next preventive maintenance should be performed (every 350,000
images), and S.N. is the printer serial number (also located on the
printer back cover).
If necessary to replace the Formatter PCA, these numbers should be
set to the current values to accurately reflect the usage of the print
engine. The procedures for setting these values are listed in table
3-24 on page 141.
Before removing the old Formatter PCA, print a Configuration
Page to verify the current values.
Note If it is not possible to print a Configuration Page, try to verify the values
before replacing the Formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3,
below.
After verifying the page count, maintenance count, and printer serial
number from the old Formatter PCA, replace it with the new PCA.
1Enter Service Mode as described in “Printer Service Mode” on
page 141.
2When SERVICE MODE is displayed, press MENU to access the
Service Menu.
3Press ITEMS to display PAGECOUNT=, MAINTCOUNT=, and S.N.=.
4Enter the appropriate values for each item.
5Press GO to exit Service Mode.
Note The page count interval can be changed to a value less than 350,000
for special media situations.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 305
Removing and Replacing the Formatter Assembly
Figure 6-35 Formatter Assembly
Note The Formatter Assembly is extremely sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD).
DIMMs and the Formatter PCA can be damaged by small amounts of
ESD. Wear an anti-static wrist wrap when removing or replacing any of
these components
1If the Formatter is to be replaced, make sure to note the page
count.
2Loosen the two captive screws (figure 6-35, callout 1), and slide
the Formatter PCA out of the chassis.
3After installation of a replacement Formatter, be sure to re-enter
the serial number, page count, and maintenance count. (See
table 3-24 on page 141 for more information.)
306 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Fusing Assembly
Figure 6-36 Fusing Assembly
1Open the Diverter Assembly access door, and remove the
Duplexer if installed.
CAUTION Use the upper levers to release the Fusing Assembly, NOT the lower
levers. The lower levers set the pressure rollers inside the Fusing
Assembly for envelope printing (down for single sheets, up for
envelopes).
2To release the Fusing Assembly rotate the upper levers down
(figure 6-36, callout 1).
3To remove the Fusing Assembly lift up on the finger handles
(figure 6-36, callout 2) while pulling outward.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 307
To Reinstall:
1Make sure that the Fuser Output sensor flag (figure 6-36,
callout 3) on the upper left corner of the Fusing Assembly rotates
freely.
2Make sure that the lower levers are set down for single sheets. If
having trouble printing envelopes, move the levers up. Move the
levers back down when done.
308 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Laser/Scanner Assembly
CAUTION
The Laser/Scanner diode is extremely sensitive to ESD.
1Remove the toner cartridge.
2Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10).
Figure 6-37 Laser/Scanner Assembly
3Unplug three cable connectors (figure 6-37, callout 1).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 309
4Re-route the cable running across the top of the assembly so that
it is out of the way.
CAUTION Do not touch the laser/scanner mirror located under the forward edge
of the assembly. Use approved ESD handling procedures when
touching the Beam Detect PCA.
5Remove 4 screws (figure 6-37, callout 2).
To Reinstall:
Make sure that the locator pins are properly seated.
310 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Main Gear Assembly
1Remove the following components in the order listed:
•Toner Cartridge
•Tray 1
•Tray 2
•Transfer Roller Assembly (see figure 6-62 on page 337)
•Back Cover Assembly (see figure 6-6 on page 273)
•Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (see figure 6-26 on page 295)
•Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 285)
•Paper Input Unit (PIU) (see figure 6-42 on page 314)
•High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) (see figure 6-51 on page
323)
•Main Motor (see figure 6-41 on page 313)
Figure 6-38 Main Gear Assembly (1 of 3)
2Remove 2 screws (figure 6-38 on page 310, callout 1).
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic gears when removing the Main
Gear Assembly.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 311
Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help free the Main Gear Assembly
from the printer.
3From inside of the PIU cavity, carefully tilt the bottom of the Main
Gear Assembly away from the chassis and down to free the gear
mechanisms.
To Reinstall:
Figure 6-39 Main Gear Assembly (2 of 3)
Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help install the Main Gear Assembly
as it is rotated into place.
1Observe the gear assembly position from inside the toner
cartridge cavity (figure 6-39, callout 2).
312 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-40 Main Gear Assembly (3 of 3)
2Tilt the top of the assembly inward and insert the upper back part
of the assembly in place (figure 6-40, callout 3).
3Continue rotating the assembly upwards into place.
4Make sure that the locating pins are properly aligned and that the
gear assembly fits tightly against the chassis before replacing the
screws (figure 6-38, callout 4).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 313
Main Motor Assembly
Figure 6-41 Main Motor
1Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273).
2Remove the HVPS (see figure 6-51 on page 323).
3Unplug the connector (figure 6-41, callout 1).
CAUTION Be careful when removing the Main Motor. The steel drive shaft can
damage the plastic gears.
4Remove 4 screws (figure 6-41, callout 2).
To Reinstall:
Align the Main Motor to the chassis with the locator tab (figure 6-41,
callout 3) and the machined ring around the output shaft.
314 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Paper Input Unit (PIU)
Figure 6-42 Paper Input Unit
1Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3. Remove both trays to prevent damage
to the PIU plastic sensor flags.
2Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273).
3Remove the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (see figure 6-29 on page
298).
4Remove the Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on
page 285).
5Remove 4 screws (figure 6-42, callout 1).
6Slide the assembly out from the chassis approximately 3 inches,
and unplug the connector inside the right end (figure 6-42,
callout 2).
7Continue sliding the assembly out of the chassis.
To Reinstall:
Make sure that Trays 2 and 3 are removed when reinstalling the
Paper Input Unit.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 315
PCA, DC Controller
Figure 6-43 DC Controller PCA
1Remove the Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 305).
2Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273).
3Remove the High Voltage Power Supply (see figure 6-51 on page
323).
4Unplug 19 connectors from the PCA (figure 6-43, callout 1).
5Remove 2 screws (figure 6-43, callout 2) from the left side of the
PCA and 2 self-tapping screws (figure 6-43, callout 3) from the
right side of the PCA.
6Carefully tip the left side of the PCA outward to clear the
Formatter PCA connector from the card cage.
To Reinstall:
Make sure the retaining clip posts (figure 6-43, callout 4) and the two
locator pins (figure 6-43, callout 5) are properly aligned.
316 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Output Paper Sensor PCA
1Remove the following components in the order listed:
•Toner Cartridge
•Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 305)
•AC Access Cover (see figure 6-5 on page 272)
•Top Cover (see figure 6-10 on page 277)
•Back Cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273)
•Fan 3 and Housing Assembly (see figure 6-22 on page 291)
•High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) (see figure 6-51 on page
323)
•DC Controller PCA (see figure 6-43)
Figure 6-44 Output Paper Sensor PCA (1 of 4)
2Remove 7 screws (figure 6-44, callout 1), and remove the
Formatter PCA cage.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 317
Figure 6-45 Output Paper Sensor PCA (2 of 4)
3Remove 5 screws (figure 6-45, callout 2), and remove the
Formatter PCA grounding strip.
318 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-46 Output Paper Sensor PCA (3 of 4)
4Remove 3 screws (figure 6-46, callout 3), and remove the plastic
PCA shield. (Note the positioning of the metal grounding fingers
at the left of the shield.)
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 319
Figure 6-47 Output Paper Sensor PCA (4 of 4)
5Unplug the connector (figure 6-47, callout 4).
6Remove 2 screws (figure 6-47, callout 5), and unplug the
connector on the back side of the PCA.
To Reinstall:
Make sure that the sensor flags rotate freely and that the top cover
and Diverter doors operate the microswitch (SW1401).
320 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Paper Size PCA
Figure 6-48 Paper Size PCA (1 of 3)
1Remove the following components in the order listed:
•Toner Cartridge
•Trays 2 and 3
•Back Cover (see figure 6-6)
•Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) (see figure 6-52)
2Unplug the fan cable from the left side of the connector (figure
6-48, callout 1), remove 1 screw (figure 6-48, callout 2), and
remove the plastic shield (figure 6-48, callout 3).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 321
Figure 6-49 Paper Size PCA (2 of 3)
Note The Paper Size PCA for Tray 2 (figure 6-49, callout 4) is identical to the
PCA for Tray 3 (figure 6-49, callout 5). The removal procedure for both
PCAs is the same.
3Unplug the connector (figure 6-49, callout 6), remove 3 screws
(figure 6-49, callout 7), and remove the PCA and actuating
fingers.
322 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-50 Paper Size PCA (3 of 3)
To Reinstall:
Make sure that the actuating fingers are aligned with the locating pins
(figure 6-50, callout 8).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 323
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)
Figure 6-51 High Voltage Power Supply
1Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273).
2Unplug the cable from the LVPS to the DC Controller PCA (figure
6-51, callout 1), and move it out of the way.
3Unplug the connector from the bottom of the HVPS (figure 6-51,
callout 2).
Note Do NOT remove the screw indicated in Figure 6-51, beneath the null
symbol.
4Remove 1 self-tapping screw (figure 6-51, callout 3) and 2 screws
(figure 6-51, callout 4).
To Reinstall:
Make sure that the plastic alignment pin (figure 6-51, callout 5), the
connector pins, and the high voltage contacts are properly aligned
before replacing the screws.
324 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)
Figure 6-52 Low Voltage Power Supply
1Remove the Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 305).
2Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273).
3Remove Fan 3 and its Housing Assembly (see figure 6-22).
4Unplug 3 LVPS connectors (figure 6-52, callout 1).
5Unplug the LVPS fan (FM1) cable from the DC Controller (figure
6-52, callout 2).
6Remove 7 screws (figure 6-52, callout 3).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 325
Registration Assembly
Figure 6-53 Registration Assembly (1 of 3)
1Open the top cover door and remove the toner cartridge.
2Remove the Transfer Roller Assembly (see figure 6-62 on page
337).
3Remove the Main Gear Train Shield. Release the retainer clip
(figure 6-53, callout 1), and lift the forward end up.
4Remove 2 screws at rear of assembly (figure 6-53, callout 3).
326 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-54 Registration Assembly (2 of 3)
5Unplug the clutch cable from the clutch on the right end of the
Registration Assembly (figure 6-54, callout 2).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 327
Figure 6-55 Registration Assembly (3 of 3)
6Lift the registration guide and remove 2 screws at the front of the
assembly (figure 6-55, callout 4).
To Reinstall:
1Lift the registration guide, and place the Registration Assembly
into position.
2Lift the registration guide and make sure that the locator pin near
the right screw is properly positioned.
3Make sure that the grounding strap is under the left screw.
4Be sure to connect the clutch cable connector.
5After replacing the 4 screws, replace the Main Gear Train Shield.
Tilt the top outward, reinstall the lower tabs in place, and snap the
cover down into position.
328 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Tray 1 Feed Roller and Separation Pad
Feed Roller
Figure 6-56 Tray 1 Feed Roller
1Open the Tray 1 door, and remove the plastic shield.
2Pinch the retainer tabs together (figure 6-56, callout 1), and slide
the roller to the left off of the shaft.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 329
Tray 1 Separation Pad
Figure 6-57 Tray 1 Separation Pad
1Open the Tray 1 door, and remove the Feed Roller.
2Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into the slot (figure 6-57,
callout 2), and carefully pry the separation pad upwards out of its
retaining notches.
To Reinstall:
Make sure the metal edge of the Separation Pad faces forward.
330 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Tray 2 and 3 Pickup, Feed, and Separation
Rollers
Figure 6-58 Tray 2 and 3, Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
There are three rollers for each tray: the Pickup Roller, the Feed
Roller, and the Separation Roller. The Feed and Separation Rollers
are interchangeable with each other and between trays. The Pickup
Rollers are interchangeable between trays.
●Tray 2 Pickup Roller: figure 6-58, callout 1
●Tray 2 Feed Roller: figure 6-58, callout 2
●Tray 2 Separation Roller: figure 6-58, callout 3
●Tray 3 Pickup Roller: figure 6-58, callout 4
●Tray 3 Feed Roller: figure 6-58, callout 5
●Tray 3 Separation Roller: figure 6-58, callout 6
Note The Feed and Separation rollers have protruding tabs, and the pickup
rollers have recessed retaining tabs. Be careful not to lose the plastic
torque limiters located behind the Separation Rollers (figure 6-58,
callout 7).
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 331
1Remove trays. From inside the tray cavity, remove the rollers by
pinching the retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the
shaft.
332 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2)
1Remove the following components in the order listed:
•Toner Cartridge
•Trays 2 and 3
•Transfer Roller (see figure 6-62 on page 337)
•Registration Assembly (see figure 6-54 on page 326)
•Front Cover (see figure 6-7 on page 274)
•Tray 1 Assembly (see figure 6-26 on page 295)
•Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 285)
Note The sensor retaining tabs are released from above, and the sensor is
removed and replaced from below.
2Refer to the following page for the removal and reinstallation
procedure for the PS2 sensor.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 333
Figure 6-59 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2)
3Release the retaining tabs (figure 6-59, callout 1) on the right end
of the sensor, and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the
left end.
4Unplug the connector from the sensor.
To Reinstall:
1Plug in the connector before reinstalling.
2Holding the sensor flag out of the way, first hook the tabs on the
left end in first. Snap the right end of the sensor upward into
place.
334 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Registration Sensor (PS1)
1Remove the following components in the order listed:
•Toner Cartridge
•Trays 2 and 3
•Transfer Roller (see figure 6-62 on page 337)
•Registration Assembly (see figure 6-54 on page 326)
•Front Cover (see figure 6-7 on page 274)
•Tray 1 Assembly (see figure 6-26 on page 295)
•Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 285)
•Paper Input Unit (see figure 6-42 on page 314)
Note The sensor retaining tabs are released from above, and the sensor is
removed and replaced from inside the Paper Input Unit cavity.
2Follow the procedure on the following page to remove and
reinstall the PS1 sensor.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 335
Figure 6-60 Registration Sensor (PS1)
3Release the retaining tabs (figure 6-60, callout 1) on the right end
of the sensor and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the
left end of the sensor.
4Unplug the connector from the sensor.
To Reinstall:
1Plug in the connector.
2Holding the sensor flag out of the way, first hook the tabs on the
left end in first. Snap the right end of the sensor upward into
place.
336 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Face-up Solenoid Assembly (SL3)
Figure 6-61 Face-up Solenoid Assembly, SL3
1Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10 on page 277).
2Remove the Delivery Unit (see figure 6-12 on page 280).
3Remove 1 self-tapping screw (figure 6-61, callout 1).
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic arm when removing the assembly.
4Pull the forward end of the assembly away from the chassis to
clear the locating pin, and slide it forward to clear two retaining
tabs.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 337
Transfer Roller Assembly
Figure 6-62 Transfer Roller Assembly
CAUTION Handle the Transfer Roller from the ends only. Do not touch the surface
of the Transfer Roller. Skin oils will affect its electrical characteristics,
resulting in poor image transfer.
1Open the top cover door, and remove the toner cartridge.
2Grasp the gear (figure 6-62, callout 1) on the left end, and
carefully lift upward just enough to clear the retainer clip.
3Slide the Transfer Roller Assembly to the left to release the shaft
on the right end (figure 6-62, callout 2).
338 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To Reinstall:
1Place the right end of the shaft into its retaining cavity.
2Hold the Transfer Roller wiper up (figure 6-62, callout 3) and slide
the assembly to the right until the gear on the left end is in
position.
3Carefully press the left end of the shaft into the retainer clip.
4Press the Transfer Roller wiper down (figure 6-62, callout 3) until
the retaining clips snap into place.
C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 339
Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies
Note The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the
factory. If you are replacing Tray 2 or Tray 3 with a tray other than the
original factory installed unit, you may have to adjust the new tray. For
details, see “Adjusting Printer Input Trays” on page 169.
1Open the tray, and pull it out to the stop.
2Press the colored tab at the right side of the tray, and continue to
pull the tray slightly upwards and out of the chassis.
To Reinstall:
1Align the left rear corner of the tray and the locating track at the
lower rear center of the tray with their respective guides, and
insert the tray no more than two inches into the chassis.
2Carefully lift up on the outer end of the tray while pulling the tray
stop mechanism, located at the right rear of the tray opening, out
and over the tray roller and guide assembly.
3Carefully slide the tray into the printer until it latches into place.
340 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 341
2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement
WARNING! For the procedures in this section, the printer and all paper-handling
devices must be unplugged. Before attempting to service the 2000-
sheet Input Tray, unplug the power cord from the power source;
otherwise, severe injury may result.
The printer and paper-handling devices may have sharp edges that
could cause injury.
Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully
follow any additional instructions provided under “To R ei nstal l.”
Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Left Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Main Drive Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Main Cable Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Front LED PCA Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Pickup Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Paper Quantity Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Paper Size Switch Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Tension Springs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Locating Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Casters and Stabilizing Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Adjustable Foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Orientation
Figure 6-63 shows the orientation of the 2000-sheet Input Tray as it is
referred to in this section.
342 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-63 2000-sheet Input Tray Orientation
To remove the 2000-sheet Input Tray from the printer, see page 261.
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 343
Front Cover
Figure 6-64 2000-sheet Input Tray Front Cover
1Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the stops
(figure 6-64).
2Remove the Paper Limit Back Plate from the paper tray
(callout 1).
3Remove the 4 screws in the front of the tray: 3 screws at the top
of the tray and 1 screw on the front-right side of the tray
(callout 2).
4Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tabs
at the left- and right-front sides of the tray (callout 3).
5Carefully lift up on the Front Cover, and then pull it out to release
the plastic retaining tabs that secure the bottom of the Front
Cover to the tray chassis (callout 4).
To Reinstall:
1Replace all the plastic retaining tabs properly (callout 4).
2Reinstall the front adjustable plate, and configure it properly
(callout 1). Reinstall the tray size labels.
344 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Back Cover
1Make sure that the power cord for the 2000-sheet Input Tray is
unplugged from the power source.
2Remove the 4 screws that secure the Back Cover of the
2000-sheet Input Tray to the chassis: 1 screw on each corner
(figure 6-65, callout 1).
3Pull the Back Cover out from the chassis.
Figure 6-65 2000-sheet Input Tray Back Cover
To Reinstall:
1Insert the tab on the lower-left corner into its alignment slot.
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 345
Left Cover
1Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the
2000-sheet Input Tray.
2Remove the 2 screws that are located at the top of the
2000-sheet Input Tray’s Left Cover: 1 screw near each corner
(figure 6-66, callout 1).
3Remove the Left Cover from the unit:
a. Pull out on the top of the Left Cover, and then lift up on the Left
Cover’s right side to clear the retaining tabs that are along the
Left Cover’s bottom edge (callout 2).
b. Pull out on the Left Cover’s lower-left corner to release the
plastic retainer tab that secures that corner of the cover to the
chassis (callout 3).
To Reinstall:
Figure 6-66 2000-sheet Input Tray Left Cover
1Replace the left side of the Left Cover first (callout 3).
2Tilt the right side of the Left Cover down and toward the chassis
to place the lower retaining tabs over the chassis rail (callout 2).
346 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Right Cover
1Remove the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) from the 2000-sheet
Input Tray (see figure 6-78).
2Remove the 2 screws that are located near the middle of the
2000-sheet Input Tray’s Right Cover: 1 screw on each side
(figure 6-67, callout 1).
3Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tab
that secures the Right Cover’s upper-left corner to the chassis
(figure 6-67, callout 2).
4To remove the Right Cover, carefully pull out on the top of the
cover while lifting it upward to clear the retaining tabs that are
along the cover’s bottom edge.
To Reinstall:
1Place the retaining tabs that are along the Right Cover’s bottom
edge over the chassis rail.
2Reinstall the VTU (see figure 6-78).
Figure 6-67 2000-sheet Input Tray Right Cover
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 347
Main Drive Assembly
1Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see
figure 6-65).
Figure 6-68 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly
2Locate the cable that runs from the Main Drive Assembly on the
2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Controller PCA. Disconnect the
cable from the J206 connector on the Controller PCA
(figure 6-68, callout 1).
3Release the cable from the 2 cable clips that hold the cable to the
chassis (figure 6-68, callout 2).
4Remove the 2 screws that connect the Main Drive Assembly to
the chassis: 1 screw on top of the Main Drive Assembly and 1
screw on the bottom (figure 6-68, callout 3).
5Pull the Main Drive Assembly away from the chassis.
6Inspect the Paper Deck Drive Bushing on the Main Drive
Assembly. If the bushing is damaged, it can be replaced without
replacing the whole drive assembly.
Note Reassembly notes are on the next page.
348 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To Reinstall:
1Reroute the cable through the cable clips (figure 6-68, callout 2)
and reconnect the cable to the J206 connector on the Controller
PCA (figure 6-68, callout 1).
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 349
Paper Tray
1Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray and remove
any unused paper.
2Remove the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) from the 2000-sheet
Input Tray (see figure 6-78).
3Remove the Left and Right Covers from the 2000-sheet Input
Tray (see figure 6-66 and figure 6-67).
Figure 6-69 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray
4Remove the 2 screws and metal retaining tabs from the sides of
the unit’s chassis: 1 screw and retaining tab on each side of the
chassis (figure 6-69, callout 1).
5Slide the paper tray straight out of the chassis while carefully
supporting the rear of the paper tray.
To Reinstall:
1Make sure that the retaining tabs are tightly secured to the unit’s
chassis (figure 6-69, callout 1).
2After replacing the tray, print a test page. If the print is too close to
the paper’s edge, adjust the tray.
350 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Main Cable Harness
1Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see
figure 6-65).
2Locate and disconnect the 6 cable connectors that connect the
Main Cable Harness to the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet
Input Tray (figure 6-70, callout 1).
3Locate and disconnect the 5 cable connectors that connect the
Main Cable Harness to the unit’s chassis (callout 2).
4Release the cable harness from the 4 cable clips that hold the
harness to the unit’s chassis (callout 3).
To Reinstall:
1Properly replace all 11 cable harness connectors (callouts 1 and
2).
2Reattach the harness to the 4 cable clips that hold the harness to
the unit’s chassis (callout 3).
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 351
Figure 6-70 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Cable Harness
352 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Controller PCA
1Remove the Back and Left Covers from the 2000-sheet Input Tray
(see figure 6-65 and figure 6-66).
Figure 6-71 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA
2Disconnect the 11 cables from the Controller PCA on the
2000-sheet Input Tray (figure 6-71, callout 1).
3Remove the 4 hex screws that secure the 2 C-link cable
connectors to the metal base (callout 2).
4Remove the 2 screws that secure the right side of the Controller
PCA to the metal base (callout 3).
5Release the 2 plastic retaining posts that secure the left side of
the Controller PCA to the metal base (callout 4), and then pull the
Controller PCA out from the unit’s chassis.
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 353
To Reinstall:
1Seat the Controller PCA firmly onto the plastic retaining posts that
secure the left side of the Controller PCA to the metal plate on the
chassis (callout 4).
2Properly reconnect all 11 cables to the Controller PCA (callout 1).
3Make sure that the DIP switches on the Controller PCA are in the
normal setting (off) (callout 5). (See table 7-35 on page 683.)
354 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Front LED PCA Assembly
1Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray halfway to the
stops.
2On the upper-left corner of the front of the unit’s chassis, locate
and remove the 1 screw that secures the LED PCA Assembly to
the chassis (figure 6-72, callout 1).
3Reach behind the LED PCA Assembly and pull it away from the
chassis.
4To remove the LED PCA from the cable connector, release the 3
plastic retaining tabs that secure the LED PCA to the connector
(figure 6-72, callout 2).
5Pull the LED PCA from the connector.
To Reinstall:
1Reconnect the LED PCA to the connector (callout 2).
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 355
Figure 6-72 2000-sheet Input Tray Front LED PCA
356 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Pickup Assembly
1Remove the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) from the 2000-sheet
Input Tray (see figure 6-78).
2Remove the Right Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see
figure 6-67).
3Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the stops.
Figure 6-73 2000-sheet Input Tray Pickup Assembly
4Disconnect the 3 cables that are located at the bottom-right side
of the Pickup Assembly (figure 6-73, callout 1).
5Remove the 5 screws that secure the Pickup Assembly to the
unit’s chassis: 3 screws along the top, and 1 screw on each side
(callout 2).
6Slide the Pickup Assembly straight out of the chassis.
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 357
To Reinstall:
1Make sure that the paper tray is open to easily slide the Pickup
Assembly into the chassis.
2Make sure that the Pickup Assembly is seated properly in the
locating slots (callout 3).
3Reconnect the 3 cables that are located at the bottom-right side
of the Pickup Assembly (callout 1).
358 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Power Supply
1Remove the Back and Left Covers from the 2000-sheet Input Tray
(see figure 6-65 and figure 6-66).
Figure 6-74 2000-sheet Input Tray Power Supply
2Locate the cable that runs from the Controller PCA on the
2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Power Supply (Figure 6-74,
callout 1). Disconnect the cable from the Power Supply by
pushing on the retaining tab that is located behind the cable
connector (callout 2).
3Remove the 2 screws that secure the Power Supply to the
chassis (callout 3).
4Lift the Power Supply upward to clear the locating tabs
underneath, and then slide the Power Supply to the left to free it
from the chassis (callout 4).
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 359
To Reinstall:
1Carefully align the locating tabs so that they are positioned
correctly.
2Reconnect the cable that runs from the Power Supply to the
Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray (callout 1). The
cable connector is seated properly when it clicks.
360 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
Three rollers in the 2000-sheet Input Tray pick up paper and feed it to
the printer:
●The Pickup Roller is the upper-forward roller (Figure 6-75,
callout 1).
●The Feed Roller is the upper-rear roller (callout 2).
●The Separation Roller is the lower roller (callout 3).
Note The Feed and Separation Rollers in the 2000-sheet Input Tray are
interchangeable with each other and with the Feed and Separation
Rollers in trays 2 and 3 on the printer. Additionally, the Pickup Roller in
the 2000-sheet Input Tray is interchangeable with the Pickup Rollers in
trays 2 and 3 on the printer.
The Feed and Separation Rollers have protruding retaining tabs that
secure the rollers to their respective shafts. The retaining tab on the
Pickup Roller is recessed.
The Feed and Separation Rollers must be replaced every 350,000
images. The two rollers are included in the printer maintenance kit
C3914A (110V), C3915A (220V). The kit contains all the necessary
parts for the required user maintenance procedure.
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 361
Figure 6-75 2000-sheet Input Tray Rollers: Pickup, Feed, and Separation
To Remove the Feed and Separation Rollers
1Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) on the 2000-sheet Input
Tray.
2Locate the rollers inside the tray cavity. To remove a roller, pinch
the retainer tabs together and slide the roller off the shaft.
Remove the Feed Roller (upper-rear roller) first. Then remove the
Separation Roller (lower roller).
To Remove the Pickup Roller
1Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the stops.
2Remove the Left Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure
6-66 on page 345).
3Locate the Pickup Roller inside the tray cavity.
4Pinch the recessed retainer tab on the roller, and slide the roller
off the shaft.
Note Reassembly notes are on the next page.
362 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To Reinstall:
1If all three rollers were removed, reinstall the Pickup Roller first
(callout 1).
2When reinstalling the Feed and Separation Rollers, install the
Separation Roller (lower roller) first (callout 3). Then install the
Feed Roller (upper-rear roller) (callout 2).
3When installing a roller, listen for a click. It signals that the roller is
secured onto the shaft.
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 363
Paper Quantity Switch Assembly
1Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see
figure 6-65 on page 344).
2Locate the cable that runs from the Paper Quantity Switch
Assembly on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Controller
PCA. Disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (J205
connector), and then free the cable from the cable clips that
secure it to the chassis (Figure 6-76, callout 1).
3Remove the 1 screw (callout 2) and the metal retaining spring
(callout 3) that hold the switch assembly in place.
4Pull the switch assembly out of its cavity (Figure 6-77, callout 1).
To Reinstall:
1When reinstalling the metal retaining spring that holds the switch
assembly in place (Figure 6-76, callout 2), seat the retaining
spring onto the locating pins that are on the chassis.
2Reconnect the switch assembly’s cable to the J205 connector on
the Controller PCA (Figure 6-76, callout 1).
Paper Size Switch Assembly
1Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see
Figure 6-65).
2Locate the cable that runs from the Paper Size Switch Assembly
on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Controller PCA.
Disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (J204 connector)
(Figure 6-76, callout 4).
3Remove the 1 screw (callout 5) and the metal retaining spring
(callout 6) that hold the switch assembly in place.
4Pull the switch assembly out of its cavity (Figure 6-77, callout 2).
To Reinstall:
1When reinstalling the metal retaining spring that holds the switch
assembly in place (Figure 6-76, callout 5), seat the retaining
spring onto the locating pins on the chassis.
2Reconnect the switch assembly’s cable to the J204 connector on
the Controller PCA (Figure 6-76, callout 4).
364 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-76 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch (1 of
2)
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 365
Figure 6-77 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch
Assemblies (2 of 2)
366 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)
Figure 6-78 2000-sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)
1Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) on the 2000-sheet Input
Tray.
2Rotate the 2 plastic cams on the VTU hinges toward the
2000-sheet Input Tray to the secure position (Figure 6-78, callout
1).
WARNING! Do not release the plastic cams from the secure position while the VTU
is off. The springs on the cams are very strong and may cause injury.
3Locate the 2 cables that run from the VTU to the chassis at the
right side’s upper-back corner (Figure 6-78, callout 2) and
disconnect the 2 cables from the chassis.
4Remove the 2 screws that secure the VTU to the chassis: 1 screw
near each end of the VTU (Figure 6-78, callout 3).
5Lift the VTU straight up to clear the metal locating tabs on the
chassis.
Note Reassembly notes are on the next page.
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 367
To Reinstall:
WARNING! Release the plastic cams only after tightening the screws that secure
the VTU to the chassis.
1Before tightening the screws, make sure that the metal locating
tabs are in place.
2Reconnect the cables that run from the VTU to the chassis at the
right side’s upper-back corner (callout 2).
368 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Tension Springs
1Remove the Left Cover of the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure
6-66 on page 345).
Figure 6-79 2000-sheet Input Tray Tension Springs
2Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray all the way to
the stops.
3Inside the tray cavity, locate and remove the 2 springs on the tray
runners: 1 spring on left runner (left side of the chassis) and 1
spring on the right runner (right side of the chassis) as shown in
Figure 6-79.
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 369
Locating Pins
1Remove the printer from the 2000-sheet Input Tray.
Figure 6-80 2000-sheet Input Tray Locating Pins
2Locate the 3 Locating Pins on the top of the 2000-sheet Input
Tray (Figure 6-80, callout 1), and remove the 2 screws on each
Locating Pin.
3To remove the Locating Pins lift them straight up.
370 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Casters and Stabilizing Feet
1Remove the printer from the 2000-sheet Input Tray.
Figure 6-81 2000-sheet Input Tray Casters
2Tip the 2000-sheet Input Tray onto its left side.
3Locate the 4 Casters, 1 on each corner of the chassis (Figure
6-81, callout 1).
4Remove a Caster by removing the 2 screws that hold the Caster
to the chassis (callout 2).
Note To remove the stabilizing feet press as shown in callout 3, and release
the stabilizing feet.
To Reinstall:
1Tighten the screws securely when reinstalling each caster
(callout 2).
C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 371
Adjustable Foot
1Remove the printer from the 2000-sheet Input Tray.
Figure 6-82 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustable Foot
2Tip the 2000-sheet Input Tray onto its left side.
3Locate the Adjustable Foot (Figure 6-82, callout 1), and remove
the 2 screws that secure the Adjustable Foot to the chassis
(callout 2).
372 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and
Replacement
Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully
follow any additional instructions provided under “To R ei nstal l.”
Orientation of the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Left Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Front Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Trays 4 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Pickup Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Paper Deck Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Tray-Size Sensing PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Main Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Storage Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Front Door (Storage Area). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip (Stabilizing Feet). . . . . . . . 401
Locating Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Front LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 373
Orientation of the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
Figure 6-83 Orientation of the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
To remove the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray from the printer, see page
261.
374 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Back Cover
Figure 6-84 Back Cover
1Remove 4 screws (callout 1).
2Release and pull out the Back Cover.
Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure.
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 375
Left Cover
Figure 6-85 Left Cover
1Unplug the power cord and C-link interface cables, and remove
the Back Cover (page 374).
2Remove 2 screws (callout 1).
3Release the tab next to the power supply (callout 2).
4Tip the cover outward to release the screw holders (callout 3).
5Lift the cover up to clear the bottom tabs (callout 4).
Note Align the screw holes with their holders when you replace the cover.
376 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)
Figure 6-86 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (1 of 3)
1Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) on the 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray.
2Unplug the 3 cables that connect the VTU to the chassis
(callout 1).
WARNING! Do not release the plastic cams from the secure position while the VTU
is off. The springs on the cams are very strong and may cause injury.
3Slide the 2 plastic cams on the VTU hinges to the secure position
(callout 2).
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 377
Figure 6-87 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (2 of 3)
4Remove the 2 screws that secure the VTU to the chassis: 1 screw
near each end of the VTU (callout 1).
5Lift the VTU straight up to clear the metal tabs on the chassis.
378 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To reinstall:
Figure 6-88 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (3 of 3)
WARNING! To avoid injury, tighten the screws that secure the VTU to the chassis
before you release the plastic cams.
1Insert the metal tabs into the slots of the chassis (callout 1).
2Tighten the screws (callout 2).
3Release the cams (callout 3).
4Plug in the 3 cables that connect the VTU to the chassis
(callout 4).
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 379
Right Cover
Figure 6-89 Right Cover (1 of 3)
1Remove the Back Cover (page 374) and the Vertical Transfer Unit
(VTU) (page 376).
2Remove 3 screws (callout 1).
380 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-90 Right Cover (2 of 3)
3Release the left side of the Right Cover from the tabs, and
remove it (callout 1).
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 381
Figure 6-91 Right Cover (3 of 3)
4Release the tab from the right side of the Right Cover as shown in
figure 6-91 (callout 1).
5Lift the Right Cover up to clear the tabs at the bottom.
382 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Front Top Cover
Figure 6-92 Front Top Cover (1 of 3)
1Remove the printer from the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray.
2Remove 2 screws (callout 1).
3Remove Top Cover. The Top Cover has a label.
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 383
Figure 6-93 Front Top Cover (2 of 3)
4From inside of the unit release the central tabs, as shown in figure
6-93.
384 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-94 Front Top Cover (3 of 3)
5Push the front top cover to the left to release the remaining tabs.
Note Align the pins when you replace the Top Front Cover.
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 385
Trays 4 and 5
Figure 6-95 Trays 4 and 5 (1 of 2)
1Open the tray and pull it out to the stop (callout 1).
2As you pull out the tray, tip up the end as shown in callout 2 to
release the stop mechanism at the right rear of the tray.
386 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-96 Trays 4 and 5 (2 of 2)
To Reinstall:
1Tip the end of the tray downward. Align the guides with the left
rear corner of the tray and the arrow at the lower rear center of
the tray (callout 1).
2Insert the tray no more than 2 inches (5 centimeters) into the
chassis.
3Tip the end of the tray up to engage the tray stop mechanism
(located at the right rear of the tray opening).
4Slide the tray until it latches into place.
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 387
Pickup Assembly
Figure 6-97 Pickup Assembly (1 of 2)
1Remove trays 4 and 5 (page 385), the Right Cover (page 379),
and the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) page 376.
2Remove 6 screws (callout 1).
3Remove the cable from the bracket (callout 2).
388 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-98 Pickup Assembly (2 of 2)
4Carefully slide the Pickup Assembly straight out, supporting it
until you can reach the connector (callout 1).
5Unplug the connector (callout 2).
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 389
Paper Deck Drive Assembly
Figure 6-99 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (1 of 2)
1Remove the Back Cover (page 374), Trays 4 and 5 (page 385),
and the Pickup Assembly (page 387).
2Remove 3 screws (callout 1).
3Unplug the connector (callout 2).
390 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-100 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (2 of 2)
4Reach into the right side of the input device. Pull the paper deck
drive assembly to the left, and then pull it straight out (callout 1).
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 391
Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
There are three rollers in this assembly. The upper forward roller is
the Pickup Roller, the upper rear roller is the Feed Roller, and the
lower roller is the Separation Roller. The Feed and Separation Rollers
are interchangeable with each other and between the trays. The
Pickup Roller is interchangeable with the Pickup Rollers in Trays 2
and 3.
●Pickup Roller: figure 6-101, callout 1
●Feed Roller: figure 6-101, callout 2
●Separation Roller: figure 6-101, callout 3
Figure 6-101 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
1Remove the paper tray.
Note The Feed and Separation Rollers have protruding retaining tabs, and
the Pickup Roller has recessed retaining tabs.
2From inside the tray cavity, remove the rollers by pinching the
retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the shaft.
392 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Controller PCA
Figure 6-102 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA
1Remove the Back Cover (page 374) and the Left Cover
(page 375).
2Unplug all 7 connectors.
3Remove 4 hex screws from the C-link connectors (callout 1).
4Remove the 2 screws that hold the PCA to the metal base (callout
2).
5Release the tabs at the left side (callout 3), and remove the PCA.
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 393
Tray-Size Sensing PCA
Figure 6-103 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (1 of 2)
1Remove the Back Cover (page 374) and the Controller PCA
(page 392).
2Remove 1 screw (callout 1) from the size-sensing PCA’s holder.
3To remove the size-sensing PCA’s holder, use a flat blade
screwdriver to release the top and bottom tabs (callout 2) from
the slots in the metal.
394 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-104 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (2 of 2)
4To remove the size-sensing PCA, unplug the cable from the PCA,
remove 3 screws from each PCB, and remove the PCA (callout
1).
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 395
Power Supply
Figure 6-105 Power Supply
1Remove the Back Cover (page 374) and the Left Cover
(page 375).
2Unplug the connector (callout 1) from the power supply. (Notice
that the release tab is at the rear of the connector.)
3Remove 2 screws (callout 2).
4Lift the power supply off the locating pins, and slide it to the left to
free it from the chassis.
To Reinstall:
1Align the power supply with the locating tabs.
2Plug in the power supply connector.
396 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Main Cable
Figure 6-106 Main Cable (1 of 2)
1Remove the Back Cover (page 374), the Left Cover (page 375),
and Trays 4 and 5 (page 385).
2Unplug both size-sensing connectors inside the 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray cavity (callout 1).
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 397
Figure 6-107 Main Cable (2 of 2)
3Unplug 4 connectors from the controller PCA (callout 1), 3 from
the Vertical Transfer Unit (callout 2), 1 from the Paper Deck
Assembly (callout 3), and 2 from the size-sensing PCAs (callout
4).
4Remove the main cable from the plastic clips.
398 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Storage Paper Tray
Figure 6-108 Storage Paper Tray
1Remove Trays 4 and 5 (page 385).
2Open the storage tray door.
3Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs inside the holes
indicated in figure 6-108 (callout 1).
Note Be sure to align the door’s latch when you replace the Storage Paper
Tray.
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 399
Front Door (Storage Area)
Figure 6-109 Front Door (Storage Area)
1Remove the storage tray (page 398).
2Release the tabs on both ends (callout 1).
3Release the storage tray's door from the center tab (callout 2).
400 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Casters
Figure 6-110 Casters
1Remove the printer from the input device (page 261).
2Place the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray on its left side and locate the
casters (callout 1).
3Remove 2 screws from each caster and release the casters from
the frame.
Note Be sure to tighten the screws securely when you re-install the new
caster.
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 401
Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip (Stabilizing
Feet)
Figure 6-111 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip
1Remove the printer from the input device (page 261).
2Place the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray on its left side and locate the
Adjustable Foot Tip (callout 2).
3Press at the location of callout 1 and slide the foot out to remove
it.
4Remove 2 screws that hold the stationary Foot Tip to the frame
(callout 3). Remove the stationary Foot Tip.
402 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Locating Pins
Figure 6-112 Locating Pins
1Remove the printer from the input device (page 261).
2Remove 2 screws each from the 3 locating pins (callout 1).
C4265-90907 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 403
Front LED PCA
Figure 6-113 Front LED PCA
1Remove the printer from the input device.
2Remove the Front Top Cover. See table 6-92 on page 382.
3Remove 1 screw (callout 1).
4Release the tabs and remove the LED PCA (callout 2).
5Unplug the cable from the PCA (callout 3).
Note Guide the cable into the correct position when you replace it.
404 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Envelope Feeder
With the printer turned off
and unplugged, slide the
Envelope Feeder up and out
of the printer.
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 405
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and
Replacement
Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully
follow any additional instructions provided under “To R ei nstal l.”
Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Face-down Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Empty Bin Sensor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Face-up Sensors PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Reversing Mechanism Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Short Tray 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Solenoid Reversing Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Flipper Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Handle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Latching Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Cover Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
406 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
Figure 6-114 Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
Note Before you begin any removal or replacement procedure, turn off all
equipment and unplug the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox power supply cable.
To remove the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox from the printer, see page 263.
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 407
Front Cover
Figure 6-115 Front Cover (1 of 3)
1Remove 2 screws (callout 1).
408 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-116 Front Cover (2 of 3)
2Loosen the right side of the Front Cover and pull it toward you
approximately 0.5 inch (1.5 centimeters) to clear the tabs
(callout 1).
3Release and clear the tabs on the left side of the Front Cover
(callout 2).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 409
Figure 6-117 Front Cover (3 of 3)
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the handle as you remove or replace the
cover. The handle can easily catch on the cover.
4To clear the handle, rotate the Front Cover to the right, and
remove it as shown in figure 6-117.
To replace
Note the Caution above.
410 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Back Cover
Figure 6-118 Back Cover (1 of 2)
1Remove 2 screws (callout 1).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 411
Figure 6-119 Back Cover (2 of 2)
2Pull the Back Cover toward you to remove it. Release corner
indicated by callout 1 first.
412 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Top Cover
Figure 6-120 Top Cover (1 of 4)
1Remove the Front Cover (page 407) and the Back Cover
(page 410).
2Open the Top Cover, and remove the Top Cover's screw and
bushing (callout 1).
3Remove the grounding screw (callout 2).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 413
Figure 6-121 Top Cover (2 of 4)
4Remove the screw from the Face-up Bin-Full PCA (callout 1).
414 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-122 Top Cover (3 of 4)
5To take out the flag, push down the plastic shaft carefully, as
shown in callout 1.
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 415
Figure 6-123 Top Cover (4 of 4)
6To remove the Top Cover lift the right side first as shown.
416 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Controller PCA
Figure 6-124 Mailbox Controller PCA
1Remove the Back Cover (page 410).
2Unplug 8 connectors from the Controller PCA (callout 1).
3To unplug connector J202, pry it open with a flat blade
screwdriver (callout 2).
4Remove 1 screw from the Controller PCA below Connector J3
(callout 3).
5Remove the PCA from its 2 plastic pins (callout 4).
6Remove 1 screw from the plate (callout 5).
7Remove 4 hex screws from the connectors on the metal plate
(callout 6).
8Remove the PCA controller.
Note When you replace the Controller PCA, be sure to replace connector
J202 (callout 1 in Figure 6-125).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 417
Power Supply
Figure 6-125 Mailbox Power Supply
1Remove the Back Cover (page 410).
2Release connector J202 with a flat blade screwdriver and unplug
it (callout 1).
3At the bottom of the power supply, unplug J201 (callout 2).
4Remove 2 screws (callout 4).
5Pull the power supply from its 3 plastic pins (callout 3).
Note Be sure to replace connector J202 (callout 1) and the Power Supply
Connector (callout 2).
418 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover)
Figure 6-126 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (1 of 5)
1Remove the Front Cover (page 407) and the Back Cover
(page 410).
2Remove 1 screw from the front side and the bushing below the
handle (callout 1).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 419
Figure 6-127 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (2 of 5)
1Grasp the green handle and pull up slightly, then out, to open the
Paper Path Cover.
420 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-128 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (3 of 5)
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 421
Figure 6-129 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (4 of 5)
2Remove the screw of the holding arm (callout 1) and release the
arm from the Right Door Assembly.
422 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-130 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (5 of 5)
3Release the plastic pin on the right end, and remove the paper
path cover as shown in figure 6-130 (callout 1).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 423
Face-down Bins
Figure 6-131 Face-down Bins (1 of 3)
Note Bins 1, 3, and 5 each have one rear roller. Bins 2, 4, and 6 each have
2 rear rollers. The procedure for removing and replacing each of the
bins is the same.
1Remove the Front Cover (page 407) and the Back Cover
(page 410).
2Open the right door assembly (paper path cover) (callout 1)
Or
Remove the right door assembly to remove bin 5 or 6.
3Remove 3 screws at the right side of the unit from the bin that
needs to be replaced (callout 2).
424 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-132 Face-down Bins (2 of 3)
4From the back side of the device, push the bin as it is shown in
callout 1.
5Grasp the bin from the right side, and pull it straight out. Note the
position of the tab (callout 2).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 425
Figure 6-133 Face-down Bins (3 of 3)
To Reinstall:
1Guide the empty bin sensor in the slot at the back side (figure
6-132, callout 1).
2Make sure that the tabs are in place as shown in figure 6-133
callout 1.
3Make sure that the holes for the 3 screws align with the holes of
the tray.
4Replace 3 screws (figure 6-131, callout 2).
426 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Empty Bin Sensor PCA
Figure 6-134 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (1 of 2)
1Remove the Back Cover (page 410).
2Unplug J305 (the topmost connector) from the Empty Bin Sensor
PCA (callout 1).
3Remove 2 screws and the metal plates that hold the Empty Bin
Sensor PCA (callout 2).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 427
Figure 6-135 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (2 of 2)
4Lift up the Empty Bin Sensor PCA to free it from the sensor flags,
and pull it out as shown.
428 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA
Figure 6-136 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (1 of 2)
1Remove the Back Cover (page 410) and the Empty Bin Sensor
PCA (page 426).
2Unplug 4 connectors (J301, J302, J303, and J304). See callout 1.
3Remove 4 screws from the Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA
and one screw from the harness (callout 2).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 429
Figure 6-137 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (2 of 2)
4Rotate the PCA toward the right, and then pull it out as shown.
Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure.
430 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
LED PCA
Figure 6-138 LED PCA
1Remove the Front Cover (page 407).
2Remove 1 screw (callout 1).
3Unplug J307 from the LED PCA, and remove the LED PCA
(callout 2).
Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure.
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 431
Face-up Sensors PCA
Figure 6-139 Face-up Sensors PCA
1Remove the Front Cover (page 407).
2Remove 1 screw (callout 1).
3Unplug J306 from the Empty Bin Sensor PCA, and remove the
Empty Bin Sensor PCA (callout 2).
432 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Reversing Mechanism Motor
Figure 6-140 Reversing Mechanism Motor (1 of 2)
1Remove the Back Cover (page 410).
2Remove 1 screw from the metal plate (callout 1).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 433
Figure 6-141 Reversing Mechanism Motor (2 of 2)
3Unplug the motor's connector (callout 1).
4Remove 2 screws (callout 2) and the motor.
CAUTION Do not damage the belt as you remove the motor.
Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure.
434 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper)
Figure 6-142 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (1 of 3)
1Remove the Front Cover (page 407) and the Back Cover
(page 410).
2Open the Top Cover as shown.
3Remove the grounding screw (callout 1) at the top back side
(figure 6-142).
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 435
Figure 6-143 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (2 of 3)
4Using pliers, release the springs at each end of the assembly
(second figure on this page, callout 1).
436 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-144 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (3 of 3)
5Rotate the assembly upward, and then release side 1 (callout 1)
first and side 2 (callout 2) second. Remove the assembly as
shown.
Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure.
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 437
Short Tray 7
Figure 6-145 Short Tray 7
1Place the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox on its side as shown.
2Remove 2 screws from the bottom (callout 1).
3Remove the tray.
Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure.
438 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Solenoid Reversing Mechanism
Figure 6-146 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism
1Remove the Back Cover (page 410).
2Unplug the cable from inside the bracket (callout 1).
3Remove 1 screw and the solenoid (callout 2).
Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure.
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 439
Flipper Solenoid
Figure 6-147 Flipper Solenoid
1Remove the Front Cover (page 407).
2Unplug the cable (callout 1).
3Remove 1 screw and the solenoid (callout 2).
4Release the solenoid along with the plastic actuator.
440 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Handle
Figure 6-148 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle
1Release the left end of the spring (callout 1).
2Release the 2 tabs (callout 2), and re the handle out.
To Reinstall:
Be sure the tabs of the handle are properly in place. Push the handle
into place until it clicks.
Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure.
C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 441
Latching Mechanism
Figure 6-149 Latching Mechanism
1Remove the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle (page 440).
2Remove the E-clip in figure 6-149 (callout 1).
3Move the bushing by sliding it over the shaft, to put it closer to the
latching system (callout 2).
4Slide the Latching Mechanism to the front of the device, and
remove it.
To Reinstall:
Note Guide the pin through the hole. First slide the shaft into the hole located
at the front bottom of the device.
The tab on the bushing should be on the top during reinstallation.
442 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Cover Latch
Figure 6-150 Cover Latch
1Remove the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle (figure 6-148).
2Remove 1 screw (callout 1), and remove the Cover Latch.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 443
8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement
WARNING! For the procedures in this section, the printer and all paper-handling
devices must be unplugged. Before attempting to service an 8-bin
Mailbox, unplug the power cord from the power source; otherwise,
severe injury may result.
This printer and paper-handling devices may have sharp edges that
could cause injury.
Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully
follow any additional instructions provided under “To R ei nstal l.”
Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Front and Back Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Paper Bins and Blind Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Flipper Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Delivery Head Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Transport Belt Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Input Paper Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Metal Tape and Housing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Anticurl Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Delivery Head Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Interlock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Diagnostic LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
User Status LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Adjustable and Fixed Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Attachment Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
444 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Orientation
Figure 6-151 shows the orientation of the 8-bin Mailbox as it is
referred to in this section.
Figure 6-151 Orientation of the 8-bin Mailbox
Top
Front
Back
Bottom
Right
Left
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 445
Front and Back Covers
Note The procedures for removing the Front and Back Covers are the same.
However, before removing the Back Cover, disconnect the Power
Supply cable that connects the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply to the 8-
bin Mailbox Controller PCA.
WARNING! Unplug the power cord from the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply, and then
unplug the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply cable from the 8-bin Mailbox
Controller PCA.
1Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer (page 261).
Figure 6-152 8-bin Mailbox Covers (Front and Back)
2For each cover, using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the 3
retaining tabs that secure the cover to the right side of the 8-bin
Mailbox frame (callout 1), and rotate the cover outward to release
it from the frame.
446 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To Reinstall:
1Insert the retaining tabs that secure each cover to the left side of
the 8-bin Mailbox frame, and then snap the opposite edge of each
cover into position.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 447
Top Cover
1Remove the Front and Back Covers from the 8-bin Mailbox (see
Figure 6-152).
Figure 6-153 8-bin Mailbox Top Cover
2Remove the 2 screws closest to the upper-right side of the 8-bin
Mailbox: 1 screw on the front, next to the user LED, and the other
at the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3).
3Slide the Top Cover to the left side of the device, and lift it up.See
table 6-151 on page 444.
448 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Power Supply
Figure 6-154 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply
1Locate the cable that runs from the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply
down to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the
cable from the Controller PCA (Figure 6-154, callout 1).
2Remove the Power Supply from the Back Cover of the 8-bin
Mailbox by pressing the plastic retaining tabs that are on each
side of the Power Supply (callout 2).
To Reinstall:
1Align the Power Supply with the mounting holes that are on the
Back Cover so that the retaining tabs on the Power Supply
(callout 2) fit into their respective slots.
2Reconnect the Power Supply Cable to the 8-bin Mailbox
Controller PCA (callout 1).
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 449
Paper Bins and Blind Cover
The procedure for removing a paper bin and the Blind Cover is the
same. Each bin rests in its labeled slot.
Figure 6-155 8-bin Mailbox Paper Bins and Blind Cover
1Remove the Face-up Bin first. Lift up on the outer edge of the bin
to clear the retaining notch in the frame, and then pull the bin
away from the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 1).
2Remove the Blind Cover.
3Remove each Face-down Bin, starting at the top and working
down in sequence.
To Reinstall:
1Slide a bin into its designated slot, and then lower the bin into the
retaining notch in the frame.
2Replace the paper bins, beginning with the bottom Face-down
Bin and continuing upward in order.
3Place the Blind Cover between Face-down Bin 1 and the Face-up
Bin.
450 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Flipper Assembly
1Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin
Mailbox (see Figure 6-155).
2Remove the Front, Back, and Top Covers from the 8-bin Mailbox
(see Figure 6-152 and Figure 6-153).
Figure 6-156 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (1 of 3)
3Remove the 2 screws closest to the upper-left side of the 8-bin
Mailbox: 1 screw on the front and back sides of the 8-bin Mailbox
frame (Figure 6-156, callout 1).
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 451
Figure 6-157 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (2 of 3)
4Hold down the Jam Access Door while unplugging the ground
wire that runs from the Input Paper Guide to the Flipper Motor
(Figure 6-157, callout 2).
5Unplug the Flipper Assembly’s 3 cables from the connectors that
are located on the 8-bin Mailbox unit’s back side (Figure 6-156,
callout 3).
6Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tab
that secures the Flipper Assembly to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox
frame (Figure 6-158, callout 4).
452 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-158 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (3 of 3)
7Hold down the Jam Access Door, and pull out the Flipper
Assembly (Figure 6-158, callout 5).
To Reinstall:
1Hold down the Jam Access Door to reconnect the ground wire to
the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-157, callout 2).
2Route the Flipper Assembly’s 3 cables through the back side of
the 8-bin Mailbox frame and reconnect the 3 cables to the
connectors (Figure 6-156, callout 3).
CAUTION Do not over-tighten the screws that secure the Flipper Assembly to the
8-bin Mailbox frame. The nuts in the Flipper Assembly could rotate in
their slots.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 453
Delivery Head Motor
1Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see
Figure 6-152).
Figure 6-159 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Motor
2Locate the cable that runs from the Delivery Head Motor down to
the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from
the connector in the middle of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure
6-159, callout 1).
3Remove the 2 screws that secure the Delivery Head Motor to the
8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 2).
4Pull the Delivery Head Motor away from the 8-bin Mailbox frame.
To Reinstall:
1Position the motor in the 8-bin Mailbox frame so that the cable
grommets face down.
2Reconnect the motor’s cable to the connector in the middle of the
frame (callout 1).
454 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Transport Belt Motor
1Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure
6-152).
2Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin
Mailbox (see Figure 6-155).
3Release the Controller PCA Assembly from the bottom of the 8-
bin Mailbox frame (see figure 6-165 on page 460, steps 1 through
7).
Figure 6-160 8-bin Mailbox Transport Belt Motor
4Locate the cable that runs from the Transport Belt Motor to the 8-
bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from the J8
connector on the Controller PCA (Figure 6-160, callout 1).
5Remove the 2 screws (and washers) that secure the Transport
Belt Motor to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-160, callout 2).
CAUTION When pulling out the motor, be careful to not damage the internal drive
belt.
6Gently pull out the motor.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 455
To Reinstall:
1Reroute the cable on the Transport Belt Motor behind the flat
cable, and connect it to the J8 connector on the 8-bin Mailbox
Controller PCA (callout 1).
2Reinstall the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly (see Figure
6-165).
3Replace the internal drive belt onto the Transport Belt Motor’s
gear before replacing and tightening the screws that secure the
motor to the frame.
456 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Input Paper Guide
1Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer.
2Remove the Face-up Bin and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin
Mailbox (see Figure 6-155).
Figure 6-161 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (1 of 2)
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 457
Figure 6-162 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (2 of 2)
3Hold down the Jam Access Door while unplugging the ground
wire that runs from the Input Paper Guide to the Flipper Motor
(Figure 6-161, callout 1).
4Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the retaining tabs that
secure the Input Paper Guide to the upper-right side of the 8-bin
Mailbox (Figure 6-162, callout 2).
5Pull the Input Paper Guide free of the frame (callout 3) while
routing the ground wire that connects to the end of the paper
guide through the wire’s access hole (callout 4).
To Reinstall:
1Reroute the ground wire through its access hole (Figure 6-162,
callout 4).
2Reconnect the ground wire to the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-161,
callout 1).
3Replace the Face-up Bin and the Blind Cover (see Figure 6-155).
458 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Metal Tape and Housing Assembly
1Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin
Mailbox (see Figure 6-155).
Figure 6-163 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (1 of 2)
WARNING! The Metal Tape’s sharp edges can cause serious injury. When
rewinding the Metal Tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and
rewind it slowly.
2With the Delivery Head Assembly at the top of the 8-bin Mailbox,
hold the Metal Tape near the end, and push and release the
retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the 8-bin
Mailbox frame (Figure 6-163, callout 1). Then let the tape slowly
rewind into its housing.
3Remove the 1 screw that secures the Static Brush to the Delivery
Head Assembly (callout 2), and then move the Static Brush out of
the way.
4Lower the Delivery Head Assembly halfway to the stops.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 459
Figure 6-164 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (2 of 2)
5Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tabs
located on each side of the tape housing (Figure 6-164, callout
3).
6Gently pull on the Delivery Head Assembly to remove the end of
the tape from behind the rollers that hold the tape in its track
(callout 4). Then pull the tape housing toward you to remove it.
To Reinstall:
1Thread the end of the Metal Tape behind the rollers (callout 4),
and then pull the end of the tape to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox
and reinsert it into place (Figure 6-163, callout 1).
2Use the guide pins to reinstall the tape housing (Figure 6-164,
callout 3). When the housing is correctly positioned, it will click
into place.
3Reinstall the static brush (Figure 6-163, callout 1).
460 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Controller PCA
1Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer.
Figure 6-165 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (1 of 2)
2Locate the power cable that runs from the 8-bin Mailbox Power
Supply down to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect
the cable from the Controller PCA (Figure 6-165, callout 1).
3Disconnect the C-link cable from the 8-bin Mailbox Controller
PCA (callout 2).
4Remove all paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox
(see Figure 6-155).
5Carefully lay the 8-bin Mailbox onto its front side.
6Loosen the 1 grounding screw and the 2 self-tapping screws that
secure the Controller PCA to the bottom-right side of the 8-bin
Mailbox frame (callout 3).
7Remove the 2 self-tapping screws that secure the Controller PCA
to the bottom-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 4). One
of the screws is connected to a grounding cable.
8Open the metal box to reveal the Controller PCA.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 461
Figure 6-166 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (2 of 2)
9Disconnect the 8 cables from the Controller PCA (Figure 6-166,
callout 5).
To Reinstall:
1Reconnect the 8 cables to the connectors on the 8-bin Mailbox
Controller PCA (callout 5).
2Be sure to reinstall the grounding cable beneath its
corresponding screw.
462 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Anticurl Strings
1Remove the Back Cover, all the paper bins, and the Blind Cover
from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152 and Figure 6-155).
Figure 6-167 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (1 of 2)
2At the lower-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, locate the
Tension Springs on the Anticurl Strings, and remove the 2 screws
that secure the springs to the frame (Figure 6-167, callout 1).
3Remove the Anticurl Strings from the lower pulleys (callout 2).
4Remove the Delivery Head Assembly from the 8-bin Mailbox
frame (see Figure 6-169).
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 463
Figure 6-168 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (2 of 2)
5Release the upper ends of the Anticurl Strings from the Jam
Access Door by pushing the retaining tabs that secure the strings
to the Jam Access Door (Figure 6-168, callout 3).
To Reinstall:
1Reverse the procedure given above.
464 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Delivery Head Assembly
1Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure
6-152).
2Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin
Mailbox (see Figure 6-155).
Figure 6-169 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (1 of 4)
WARNING! The Metal Tape’s sharp edges can cause serious injury. When
rewinding the Metal Tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and
rewind it slowly.
3With the Delivery Head Assembly at the top of the 8-bin Mailbox,
hold the Metal Tape near the end, and release the retainer tab
that secures the end of the tape to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox
frame (Figure 6-169, callout 1). Then let the tape slowly rewind
into its housing.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 465
Figure 6-170 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (2 of 4)
4At the lower-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, locate the
Tension Springs on the Anticurl Strings, and remove the 2 screws
that secure the springs to the frame (Figure 6-170, callout 2).
5Remove the Anticurl Strings from the lower pulleys (callout 3).
466 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-171 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (3 of 4)
6On the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox, release the flat ribbon
cable from the cable clip that secures the cable to the 8-bin
Mailbox frame (Figure 6-171, callout 4), and gently disconnect the
flat ribbon cable from the Delivery Head Assembly (callout 5).
7Raise the Delivery Head Assembly to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox
frame.
8Hold up the Delivery Head Assembly, and remove the 2 screws
that secure it to the elevator mounts: 1 screw on each end of the
assembly (Figure 6-169, callout 6). The screw that secures the
back end is captive.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 467
Figure 6-172 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (4 of 4)
9Rotate the Delivery Head Assembly clockwise while guiding the
back end out of its access opening (see page 6-172).
10 Release the Anticurl Strings from the pulleys on each end of the
Delivery Head Assembly (Figure 6-172, callout 7).
468 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To Reinstall:
1Replace the Anticurl Strings into the pulleys on the ends of the
Delivery Head Assembly.
2Reinstall the Delivery Head Assembly onto its elevator mounts
and secure it with the screws. Make sure that the locating pins
are in place.
3Replace the Tension Springs on the Anticurl Strings at the bottom
of the frame with the T-10 Torx screws (Figure 6-170, callout 2).
4Snap the Anticurl Strings into the pulleys at the bottom of the
frame (Figure 6-170, callout 3).
5Reconnect the flat ribbon cable to the Delivery Head Assembly,
and secure the cable to the frame with the cable clip (Figure
6-171, callouts 4 and 5).
6Make sure that the Delivery Head Assembly moves up and down
freely.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 469
Interlock Switch
1Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure
6-152).
Figure 6-173 8-bin Mailbox Interlock Switch
CAUTION Before removing the wires from the 8-bin Mailbox Interlock Switch, note
the location of each wire. Replacing the wires incorrectly can damage
the Interlock Switch.
2Inside the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, disconnect the 2
wires from the Interlock Switch (Figure 6-173, callout 1).
3Remove the Interlock Switch by pressing together the 2 retaining
tabs that hold the switch in place (callout 2).
To Reinstall:
1Reconnect the wires in the correct positions (callout 1).
470 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Diagnostic LED PCA
Figure 6-174 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (1 of 2)
1Locate the Diagnostic LED that is on the back side of the 8-bin
Mailbox (Figure 6-174, callout 1).
2Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure
6-152).
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 471
Figure 6-175 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (2 of 2)
3Disconnect the 2 flat cables from the Diagnostic LED PCA
(Figure 6-175, callout 2).
4Remove the 1 screw that secures the Diagnostic LED PCA to the
8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3).
5Pull the Diagnostic LED PCA away from the 8-bin Mailbox frame.
472 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
User Status LED PCA
Figure 6-176 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (1 of 2)
1Locate the User Status LED PCA that is on the upper-front side of
the 8-bin Mailbox (Figure 6-176, callout 1).
2Remove the Front Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure
6-152).
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 473
Figure 6-177 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (2 of 2)
3Disconnect the cable from the User Status LED PCA (Figure
6-177, callout 2).
4Pull the LED PCA away from its frame.
5Remove the 1 screw that secures the LED PCA frame to the 8-bin
Mailbox frame (callout 3).
474 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Adjustable and Fixed Casters
Note The procedures for removing the Adjustable and Fixed Casters are the
same.
1Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer.
2Carefully lay the 8-bin Mailbox onto its front side.
Figure 6-178 8-bin Mailbox Adjustable and Fixed Casters
3Remove the 1 screw that secures the caster to the 8-bin Mailbox
frame (Figure 6-178, callout 1).
4Remove the Caster.
C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 475
Attachment Assembly
1Disconnect the power cable and the C-link cable from the 8-bin
Mailbox Controller PCA (see Figure 6-165, callouts 1 and 2).
2Release the Controller PCA from the 8-bin Mailbox frame, but
leave the wire cables connected to the Controller PCA (see
Figure 6-166).
Figure 6-179 8-bin Mailbox Attachment Assembly
3Set the Controller PCA on top of the 8-bin Mailbox unit (Figure
6-179, callout 1).
4Remove the E-clip (callout 2).
5Release the pivot pin that holds the Attachment Assembly’s rod to
the 8-bin Mailbox frame.
6Remove the attachment assembly.
To Reinstall:
1Replace the E-clip.
2Reconnect the C-link cable and the power cable to the Controller
PCA.
476 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement
Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully
follow any additional instructions provided under “To R ei nstal l.”
Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation . . . . . . 477
Back Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Stapler Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Top Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Stapler Bed Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 477
Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or
Installation
Figure 6-180 Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
The Stapler Assembly is mounted in the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler,
replacing the three Face-down bins and the blind cover.
1Turn off the printer.
2Make sure the Delivery Head Assembly is not in the stapler area.
It should be in the bottom portion of the mailbox. You can move
the Delivery Head Assembly downward gently with your hand.
478 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
3Disconnect the C-link cable connecting the mailbox to the stapler.
See figure 6-181.
Figure 6-181 C-link Cable on Mailbox with Stapler
4Remove the Face-up Bin (figure 1-2 on page 31). Lift the bin
gently to remove it.
5Lift up on the outer edge of the stapler to clear the retaining
notches, and pull the stapler forward out of the frame (figure
6-180).
To Reinstall:
1Slide the stapler into the 4th slot from the top, and lower it into its
retaining notches (figure 6-180).
2Replace the Face-up Bin.
3Connect the C-link cable from the mailbox to the stapler. Turn the
printer on.
C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 479
Back Plate
Figure 6-182 Back Plate (1 of 2)
1Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180).
2Remove the Scan Bar by carefully pressing the tab on the scan
bar backwards and downwards through the hole of the Stapler
Bed (see figure 6-182) with a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift the bar.
480 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-183 Back Plate (2 of 2)
3Remove the Torx screw joining the Back Plate with the Stapler
(see figure 6-183, callout 2).
4Release the ground cable that is connected to the Back Plate
(see figure 6-183, callout 1).
To Reinstall:
CAUTION Do not overtighten the screws when replacing the Back Plate.
Do not touch the metallic plate edges.
C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 481
Stapler Controller PCA
Figure 6-184 Stapler Controller PCA (1 of 3)
1Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180).
2Remove the Back Plate (see figure 6-182).
3Remove 2 screws located on the right side of the Stapler (see
figure 6-184, callout 1).
482 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-185 Stapler Controller PCA (2 of 3)
4Unplug the cables that are connected to the PCA. Identify their
color and size and the ground cables (see figure 6-185, callouts 1
and 2).
C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 483
Figure 6-186 Stapler Controller PCA (3 of 3)
5The board is supported by a hooked tab at the top of the card
(see figure 6-186, callout 1). Slide the board to the left and then
down.
To Reinstall:
1Slide the board up and then to the right.
2Reconnect all cables.
484 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Top Cover Assembly
Figure 6-187 Top Cover Assembly
1Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180 on page 477).
2Open the Top Cover Assembly, and remove the Back Plate (see
figure 6-182 on page 479).
3Unplug the ground and signal cables from the right side of the
Stapler Controller board, being careful to keep them in the cable
holder. See callout 1 and 3 on figure 6-185.
4On each side of the assembly, pull the hinge to release the 2
posts from the retaining notches (see figure 6-187).
To Reinstall:
CAUTION Keep the Top Cover Assembly open while reconnecting the cables.
Cable damage could occur the next time the cover is opened if the
cables are reinstalled too tightly.
C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 485
Stapler Bed Assembly
Figure 6-188 Stapler Bed Assembly
1Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180 on page 477).
2Remove the Back Plate (see figure 6-182 on page 479).
3Remove the Stapler Unit Controller PCA (see figure 6-188 on
page 485, callout 1).
4Remove the Top Cover Assembly (see figure 6-187 on page 484).
5Remove the wire frame by pushing both arms of the wire frame
toward the center to clear the retaining notches and lift.
6Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches and lifting
upwards.
7Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the top of the Stapler Bed
Assembly and push gently to release the latches in the front of
the stapler bed (see figure 6-188 on page 485, callout 2).
8Remove 3 Torx screws that join the stapler bed with the rest of the
unit (see figure 6-188 on page 485, callout 3).
9To remove the Stapler Bed Assembly, lift the edge of the
assembly where the stapler unit resides, then gently lift the entire
Stapler Assembly.
486 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To Reinstall:
Replace the Stapler Bed. Replace the Stapler Controller. Replace the
actuator for the paper bin empty sensor.
CAUTION Make sure that the actuator is oriented as shown in its proper place
before replacing the Stapler Bed Assembly (see figure 6-189 on page
487, callout 3).
C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 487
Hinges
Figure 6-189 Hinges
1Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180 on page 477).
2Remove the Top Cover Assembly (see figure 6-187 on page 484).
3Remove the Stapler Bed Assembly (see figure 6-188 on page
485).
4Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches, and lift
upwards.
5Remove 2 screws joining each hinge to the housing (see figure
6-189, callout 1).
6Disconnect the 2 cables in the hinge containing cables from the
Stapler Controller PCA (see figure 6-185 on page 482, callout 2).
488 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Duplexer
1With the printer turned off and
unplugged, open the Diverter door
on the left side of the printer.
2Push down the green release lever
located at the lower right of the
Duplexer and slide it straight out of
the printer.
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Removal and Replacement 489
HP Digital Copier Removal and Replacement
WARNING! Make sure the power is off and the main power to the system has been
disconnected before servicing.
Note Unplug the HP Digital Copier, separate it from its stand, and place it on
a table to perform removal and replacement procedures.
Installing the HP Digital Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Hardware Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Orientation of the HP Digital Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Copy Module Maintenance Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Copy Module Skins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies . . . . . . 524
Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
For required tools, see page 257.
490 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Installing the HP Digital Copier
Install the HP Digital
Copier on the Optional
HP Digital Copier Stand
For detailed instructions on setting up
the HP Digital Copier Stand, see the
installation guide that came with the
stand.
1Place the HP Digital Copier Stand
near the desired location.
Note
Be sure to leave space for the
installation of the accessories. See
“Space Requirements” on page 81 for
dimensions.
It is also important to leave space
between the stand and the desired
location to allow access to the cables
during installation.
WARNING!
Use caution when completing the
following steps. Once you place the HP
Digital Copier on the stand, bumping or
moving may cause it to tip. The printer
must be moved into position immediately
after installation of the HP Digital Copier
is complete.
2With one other person, lift the
HP Digital Copier and align it with
the screws on the HP Digital Copier
Stand.
3With a flathead screwdriver, screw
the HP Digital Copier onto the stand.
1
2
3
C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 491
CAUTION
Operating the HP Digital Copier with the
shipping lock in place might damage the
device. It is important that you perform
steps 4 and 5.
4Unscrew and remove the shipping
lock.
5Rotate the shipping lock and reinsert
it into the HP Digital Copier in the
unlocked position.
Note
When you replace the shipping lock, you
may need to power cycle the printer to
move the Carrier Unit into position.
6To install the output bin, hold the bin
vertically (as shown) and push down
to attach the bin to the metal guides.
7Pull the output bin down. For longer
paper, flip the bin extension out as
shown.
8Lift the input tray up to lock it into
place. For longer paper, flip the tray
extension out as shown.
6
7
8
5
4
492 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Install the printer on the
Optional Input Accessory
For detailed instructions on installing the
printer onto the optional input accessory,
see the installation guide that comes
with the accessory.
Roll the printer onto the
Optional HP Digital Copier
Stand
1Lift both sides of the printer and
gently rock the printer back and forth
as you push it onto the stand.
2When the printer is in place, lock the
wheels and rotate the levelers up or
down to stabilize the printer.
1
2
rear view
front view
C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 493
Install the Optional Output Accessory
Note For detailed information on installing the optional output accessory, see
the installation guide that came with the accessory and the online user
guide that came with the printer.
1Roll the optional output accessory onto the HP Digital Copier
Stand.
Note Be sure to properly align the mounting bracket as you roll the optional
output accessory onto the HP Digital Copier Stand.
2After the front two rollers are on the base of the HP Digital Copier
Stand, attach the mounting bracket (called out below).
3Roll the optional output accessory toward the printer until it clicks
into place.
Figure 6-190 Optional Output Accessory
Note Be sure to leave enough space to completely extend the optional output
accessory away from the printer. See “Space Requirements” on
page 81.
For cabling information, see “Communication Link (Daisy Chain)” on
page 233.
mounting bracket
494 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Install the Copy Connect EIO Board into the
Printer
CAUTION Make sure that the printer is turned off.
Insert the Copy Connect EIO Board that came with the
HP Digital Copier into slot 3 (the top slot) on the printer. (Use the
screws that are in the existing EIO cover to install the Copy Connect
EIO Board.)
Note If a cover is on slot 3, use a phillips screwdriver to remove the two
screws. Remove the cover and install the Copy Connect EIO Board.
Figure 6-191 Copy Connect EIO Board (slot 3)
C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 495
Install the Copy Connect Cable
1Plug the Copy Connect cable into the HP Digital Copier (A).
Note See the icon on the back of the HP Digital Copier for correct orientation
of the cable.
2Plug the other end of the Copy Connect cable into the
Copy Connect EIO Board (B).
3Wrap the excess cable as shown in figure 6-192(C).
Figure 6-192 View with HP Digital Copier Stand (preferred configuration)
Figure 6-193 View with HP Digital Copier on Tabletop
A
B
C
A
B
496 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Install the Y Power Cord
CAUTION
Turn off the printer and HP Digital Copier
before you install the Y power cord.
1Plug the main end of the Y power
cord into the HP Digital Copier.
2Unplug the power cord from the
printer. Plug the power cord into the
short end of the Y power cord.
3Plug the long end of the Y power
cord into the printer.
1
2
3
Y cord main
printer power
cord
Y cord short
Y cord long
main long
short
C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 497
Hardware Table
Note The numbers in the “Reference” column are used in the diagrams in
Chapter 8.
Table 6-2. Hardware Table
Example Reference Description Part Number
(for kits of 20)
B1 TP Screw m3 x 8 PA03002-C282FJ
B2 TP Screw m3 x 6 PA03002-C281FJ
B3 TP Screw m4 x 8 PA03002-C288FJ
B4 Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 6 PA03002-C283FJ
B5 Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 8 PA03002-C284FJ
B6 Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 35 PA03002-C285FJ
498 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
B10 Machine Screw w/washer m4 x 8 PA03002-C286FJ
B15 Flathead Screw
m3 x6
PA03002-C287FJ
B20 E-ring, Latch Lever (20pcs) PA03002-C254FJ
B21 E-ring, Idle Roller (20pcs) PA03002-C253FJ
B22 Retainer Ring ADF Lock Bearing (20pcs) PA03002-C255FJ
Thumb Screw for Document Cover PA03002-C290FJ
Thumb screws for Pick Roller Cover PA03002-C123FJ
Table 6-2. Hardware Table (continued)
Example Reference Description Part Number
(for kits of 20)
C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 499
Orientation of the HP Digital Copier
Figure 6-194 Orientation of the HP Digital Copier
1Front
2Left
3Back
4Right
WARNING! Remove the power cord before you begin service procedures.
500 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Copy Module Maintenance Parts
Separation Pad Assembly
Figure 6-195 Separation Pad Assembly
CAUTION Do not bend the pick spring (metal tabs) as you remove the Separation
Pad Assembly.
1Open the ADF.
2Push the Separation Pad Assembly in the direction of the
imprinted arrow (callout 1).
3Rotate the Assembly down, free of the pick spring (callout 3).
To replace
Reverse the above procedure.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Maintenance Parts 501
Pick Roller Assembly
Figure 6-196 Pick Roller Cover
CAUTION As you remove the Pick Roller Cover, do not bend the plastic parts in
the middle of the cover (callout 1).
1Remove 2 Flathead M3x6 thumb screws (callout 2) and remove
the Pick Roller Cover.
502 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-197 Pick Rollers (1 of 2)
2Lift the white tab (callout 1) and push the collar toward the black
roller (callout 2). This allows the brass bushing to slide along the
shaft.
3Slide the whole shaft and roller forward to release the shaft from
the hole in the rear (callout 3).
C4265-90907 Copy Module Maintenance Parts 503
Figure 6-198 Pick Rollers (2 of 2)
4Lift out the rear end of the roller and release the shaft from the
hole in the front. Lift out the entire roller and shaft assembly.
CAUTION Do not touch the rubber part of the new rollers. Skin oils or gear
lubricant can damage the rollers.
Note Important! Retain the brass bushings. Replacement Pick Rollers
include the white collar but not the bushings.
When you replace the brass bushings on the roller, note that they are
keyed flat on the sides to fit correctly in the holes.
5Remove the front and rear brass bushings if they are not worn
and place them on the new roller.
Note To remove the second roller, follow the steps above. Note the difference
between the rollers to replace the correct roller in its place.
504 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To replace
1Reverse the above procedure.
CAUTION Do not touch the rubber part of the new rollers. Skin oils or gear
lubricant can damage the rollers.
2Place the brass bushings on the new roller and replace the front
end first.
3Align the rear end of the Pick Roller Cover with the gears first and
then replace the cover.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 505
Copy Module Skins
Document Holding Pad
Figure 6-199 Document Holding Pad
Pull apart the Velcro pads and remove the Document Holding Pad.
506 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Paper Chute Flip-out
Figure 6-200 Paper Chute Flip-out
CAUTION Do not attempt to remove the screws that hold the paper chute onto
the FB Cover Assembly. If the screws are removed, the chute cannot
be realigned properly by field service personnel.
1Bow the tray slightly to free the pins from the hinges (callout 1).
2Lift the tray out of the slots (callout 2).
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 507
Output Tray Flip-out
1Bow the tray slightly to free the pins from the hinges.
2Lift the tray out of the slots.
Note This procedure is not shown because it is similar to removing the Paper
Chute Flip-out (above).
Output Tray
Figure 6-201 Output Tray
1To remove the Output Tray, close the Output Tray Flip-out and
raise the tray to the vertical position.
2Lift the tray straight up.
508 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Flatbed (FB) Cover Assembly
CAUTION Do not attempt to remove the screws that hold the paper chute onto
the FB Cover Assembly. If the screws are removed, the chute cannot
be realigned properly.
The Rubber Stop, Paper Chute Flip-out, and Document Holding Pad
can be replaced. Do not remove any other parts of the FB Cover
Assembly.
Figure 6-202 FB Cover Assembly
1Push in the metal support and lower the chute to the storage
position. Open the cover.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 509
Figure 6-203 Thumb Screw for Document Cover Assembly
2Remove the thumb screw.
510 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-204 Removing the Cover from the Posts
CAUTION Do not hit the glass as you remove the FB Cover Assembly.
3The FB Cover Assembly rests on two posts. Slide the assembly
to the right to release it, then lift it straight up.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 511
ADF Latch Cap
Figure 6-205 ADF Latch Cap
CAUTION A magnetic screwdriver is required to remove the ADF Latch Cap.
1Open the ADF.
2Locate the screw inside the ADF Latch Cap.
3Depress the ADF Latch Cap until you can reach the screw with a
magnetic screwdriver.
CAUTION Be careful not to drop the screw.
4Remove the TP screw (m3x8).
To replace
1Depress the lever for the ADF Latch Cap until the screw hole is
accessible.
2Use a magnetic screwdriver to place the screw in the hole.
3Replace the ADF Latch Cap and tighten the screw.
512 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
ADF Cover
Figure 6-206 ADF Cover (1 of 2)
1Open the ADF and remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) (callout 1).
2Close the ADF.
Note Note the location of the LED (callout 2). Be careful not to damage the
LED Assembly underneath when you remove the ADF Cover.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 513
Figure 6-207 ADF Cover (2 of 2)
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the LED Assembly when you remove the ADF
Cover.
3To remove the ADF Cover, pry outward to release the plastic tabs,
and then pry the cover upward with your fingers as shown.
514 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Front Panel
Figure 6-208 Front Panel (1 of 2)
1Pry up the corner of the Front Panel overlay with a flat-blade
screwdriver.
2Lift off the overlay.
Note The Front Panel can be removed while still attached to the Panel Cover.
If this assembly is being removed to access the Flatbed Assemblies,
go to “Panel Cover” on page 519.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 515
Figure 6-209 Front Panel (2 of 2)
3Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) (callout 1).
4Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the slot and push the handle to
the right (callout 2) to pry the Front Panel loose, as shown by the
arrow.
CAUTION Be careful not to pull the connecting cable when you remove the Front
Panel.
5Remove the Front Panel.
516 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-210 Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate
6Remove 3 screws. Remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and
Front Panel Frame Ground Plate in order to remove the Ribbon
Cable.
To replace
Be sure to place the top part of the Front Panel Cable Clamp on the
exposed metal.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 517
Figure 6-211 Front Panel Ribbon Cable
CAUTION Handle the Ribbon Cable with care. Always release the connector
before you pull on the cable. See the next page.
518 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-212 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable
7To release the Ribbon Cable, use your fingernail to gently pull up
each end of the connector (callout 1). Unplug the ribbon cable.
Note the orientation of the contacts on the cable so the cable is
not twisted.
To replace
1Plug the cable into the connector. When the cable is inserted in
the connector, the contacts point toward the middle of the Front
Panel as shown in Figure 6-211. This also allows the cable to lie
flat.
2Press down the upper center of the Front Panel to engage the
tabs as you push the Front Panel to the left, into place.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 519
Panel Cover
Figure 6-213 Panel Cover (bottom view)
CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copier. Slide it to the edge of the table just
far enough to access the screws.
1Slide the HP Digital Copier to the edge of the table.
2Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) underneath the Front Panel.
3Lift up and pull out the Panel Cover.
CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copier.
520 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Front Panel Brackets
Figure 6-214 Front Panel Brackets (1 of 2)
1Remove 3 (brass machine screw m4x8 with washer) screws.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 521
Figure 6-215 Front Panel Brackets (2 of 2)
CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copier. Slide it to the edge of the table to
access the bottom.
2Slide the HP Digital Copier to the edge of the table. Remove the
brackets.
CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copier.
522 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Upper Cover
Figure 6-216 Upper Cover (1 of 2)
1Remove the TP screw (m3x8) from the front right corner.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 523
Figure 6-217 Upper Cover (2 of 2)
2Remove 3 screws [two TP screws (m3x6) and one TP screw
(m3x8)].
Note For replacement, the screws in the ADF are longer.
The ADF is shown open to locate the screws. Always close the ADF to
remove the Upper Cover.
CAUTION Be careful of the LED PCA and Front Panel ribbon cable when you
remove the cover.
3Lift the Upper Cover straight up to remove it.
To replace
Carefully feed the Front Panel ribbon cable through the slot.
524 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board
Assemblies
WARNING! Make sure the power is off and the main power to the system has been
disconnected before servicing. See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Precautions” on page 256.
The Power Supply and Main Board Tray contains the Copy Processor
Board, the Power Supply, and the Control PCA.
Copy Processor Board
Figure 6-218 Copy Processor Board
CAUTION The Copy Processor Board is ESD sensitive.
1Remove 2 thumb screws.
2Slide the Copy Processor Board out.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 525
Power Supply and Main Board Tray
WARNING! Make sure the power is off and the main power to the system has been
disconnected before servicing. See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Precautions” on page 256.
Figure 6-219 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (1 of 2)
1Remove 2 brass machine screws with washers (m3x8) (callout 1).
2Pull the Assembly out by the handle (callout 2) approximately
2.5 inches (6 centimeters).
526 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-220 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (2 of 2)
3Unplug 3 connectors.
4Remove the tray.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 527
RFI Cover
Figure 6-221 RFI Cover (inside/rear view)
Remove the RFI Cover (Radio Frequency Interference shield) in order
to replace the Control PCA, the Power Supply, or the Fan Assembly.
1Remove 4 TP screws (m3x8) from the rear of the RFI Cover.
528 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-222 RFI Cover (outside/front view)
1Remove 3 TP screws (m3x8) from the front of the RFI Cover.
2Remove the RFI Cover.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 529
Control PCA
Figure 6-223 Control PCA
1Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI
Cover.
2Remove 7 TP screws (m3x8).
3Unplug 2 connectors.
4Remove the Control PCA. Retain the EEPROM (page 531), Back
PCA (page 534) and the Card Cage (page 530).
530 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Card Cage
Figure 6-224 Card Cage
Note To remove the Card Cage, flip over the Control PCA and remove 4 TP
screws (m3x8).
C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 531
EEPROM
Figure 6-225 EEPROM
When you replace the Control PCA, retain the EEPROM from the old
PCA and replace it on the new PCA in order to retain the default
settings (such as calibration) for the HP Digital Copier.
532 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Fan
Figure 6-226 Fan
1Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI
Cover.
2Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) (callout 1).
3Unplug the connector (callout 2).
C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 533
Power Supply
Figure 6-227 Power Supply
1Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI
Cover.
2Remove 4 TP screws (m3x8) (callout 1).
3Remove 2 brass machine screws m4x8 with washer (callout 2).
534 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Back PCA
Figure 6-228 Back PCA
1Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI
Cover. Remove the Control PCA (page 529).
2Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8).
3Pull out the Back PCA.
Note The board is keyed for correct insertion.
C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 535
Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies
Note To access the ADF Unit Assemblies, remove the skins down to the ADF
Cover (pages 505 to 512).
Optical Unit
Figure 6-229 Optical Unit (1 of 2)
CAUTION The Optical Unit is ESD sensitive.
1Unplug 3 connectors (callout 1). Remove the cables from their
routing guides. Note the routing of the cables in order to replace
them in the correct positions. (Routing is also shown on
page 546.)
2Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) and the Optical Unit Tie-down with
Pad (callout 2).
536 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
CAUTION Do not remove the CCD PCA or any of the screws on the Optical Unit
other than the screws mentioned. Do not disassemble the Optical Unit.
Figure 6-230 Optical Unit (2 of 2)
3Holding the Optical Unit, release the ADF lever and open the ADF
Assembly 45°. Rotate the Optical Unit as shown (the green board
is on top and level) (callout 1).
4Slide the Optical unit to the left off the slots in the metal bar
(callout 2).
Note The replacement Optical Unit includes a Back Side Lamp and Lamp
Inverter PCA, but not an Optical Unit Tie-down with Pad.
C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 537
ADF Lamp PCA
Figure 6-231 ADF Lamp PCA (1 of 2)
Note It is not necessary to remove the Optical Unit to reach the ADF Lamp
PCA.
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the PCA as you remove it.
1Use a flat-blade screwdriver to pry the tab loose.
CAUTION Do not touch the Optical Unit Mirrors. Fingerprints will affect image
quality.
538 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
To replace
Figure 6-232 ADF Lamp PCA (2 of 2)
Note the orientation of the PCA to replace it in the correct position.
The PCA fits under the tabs.
C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 539
ADF Lamp
Figure 6-233 ADF Lamp
Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8).
CAUTION Remove the Lamp carefully; it is fragile. Do not disassemble the Optical
Unit beyond removal of the Lamp and Lamp PCA; it will be irreparably
damaged!
To replace
Replace the screw nearest the Lamp cable first.
CAUTION Do not over-tighten the screws holding the Lamp in place. Over-
tightening the screws can damage the plastic.
540 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Sensor Unit Assembly
Figure 6-234 Sensor Unit Assembly (1 of 3)
1Remove the Optical Unit.
2Remove the Separation Pad (page 500).
3Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) as shown.
C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 541
Figure 6-235 Sensor Unit Assembly (2 of 3)
4Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) from each of the 2 cable holders and
remove the cables from the cable holders (callout 1).
5Unplug 1 connector from the motor (callout 2).
6Remove the cables from the wiring harness sleeve.
542 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-236 Sensor Unit Assembly (3 of 3)
7Remove the Sensor Unit Assembly.
C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 543
ADF Motor Unit
Figure 6-237 ADF Motor Unit
1Remove the ADF Latch Cap (page 511) and the ADF Cover
(page 512).
2Unplug the connector from the ADF Motor.
3Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8).
4Move the belt out of the way.
5Remove the ADF Motor.
6Remove the belt (see the next page).
544 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
ADF Belt
1Remove the ADF Latch Cap (page 511) and the ADF Cover
(page 512).
Figure 6-238 ADF Belt
2Loosen 2 screws (callout 1) and remove the ADF Belt.
To replace
1Place a new belt on pulleys 2 and 3 as shown.
2Place the belt on pulley 4.
C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 545
To adjust belt tension
1Make sure the 2 screws (callout 1 in Figure 6-238) on the ADF
Motor Unit are loose when you adjust the belt tension.
2To adjust the belt tension, pull the motor up firmly (by hand only).
Note It is very difficult to overtighten the belt tension by hand. A belt that is
too loose, however, can adversely affect image quality.
3Maintaining upward pressure on the motor, tighten the 2 screws
(callout 1) on the ADF Motor Unit.
546 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
LED Assembly PCA
Figure 6-239 LED Assembly PCA
1Remove the ADF Latch Cap (page 511) and the ADF Cover
(page 512).
2Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) (callout 1).
3Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) from each of the 2 cable holders
(callout 2) and remove the cables from the cable holders.
CAUTION Do not attempt to unplug the connector from the PCA. It is permanently
attached to the PCA on one end. Unplug the other end from the Main
Board.
4Unplug 1 connector from the Main Board.
5Remove the cable (callout 3) from the wiring harness sleeve.
To replace
Note the PCA has 2 holes, one for the screw and one for the locating
pin. Be sure to orient the PCA properly with the 2 holes.
C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 547
ADF Unit
Figure 6-240 ADF Unit (shown without Optical Unit)
Note To get to the Glass Plate assemblies, you can remove the ADF Unit
with the Optical Unit intact. (An Optical Unit is not included with a
replacement ADF Assembly.)
1Remove 4 TP screws (m3x6) (callout 1) and unplug 3 cables from
the Main Board Tray (shown in Figure 6-220 on page 526).
WARNING! Once the ADF latch is removed, if the lever is triggered the ADF can
spring open rapidly and pinch your fingers.
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the LED Assembly (callout 2) when you are
working around the ADF Unit.
2Lift off the ADF Unit.
To replace
1The ADF is keyed to the Glass Plate Assembly. Make sure it fits
properly in its place before you replace the screws.
548 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
2Always perform an offset adjustment whenever you replace the
ADF. See “Adjusting the Copy Module” on page 175.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 549
Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies
Note To access the Flatbed Assemblies, remove the skins (starting on
page 505), including the Front Panel (starting on page 514) and the
ADF Unit Assemblies (starting on page 535).
Front Panel Frame Ground Spring
Figure 6-241 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring
1Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8).
2Remove the spring.
550 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Output Tray Brackets
Figure 6-242 Output Tray Brackets
Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) from each bracket and remove the
bracket.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 551
Glass Plate Assembly
Figure 6-243 Glass Plate Assembly
1Remove the ADF Unit (page 547). Output Tray Brackets and open
the Power Supply and Main Board Tray.
2Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) as shown.
CAUTION Remove the Glass Plate Assembly carefully; it is breakable.
3Remove the Glass Plate Assembly.
552 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-244 Idle Roller Coil Spring
Remove the Idle Roller Coil Spring.
To replace
Align the Idle Roller Coil Spring on the pin and press it into place.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 553
Home Position Sensor
Figure 6-245 Home Position Sensor (1 of 2)
1Move the Carrier Unit away from the sensor.
554 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-246 Home Position Sensor (2 of 2)
2From underneath, pry the tabs to release the sensor.
3Unplug the connector. (The cable is included with the Junction
PCA.)
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 555
Carrier Unit Lamp
Figure 6-247 Dust Cover
1Remove the Carrier Unit Dust Cover.
To replace
Place the dust cover shiny side down and underneath the long metal
tab.
556 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-248 Lamp (1 of 2)
1Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8).
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 557
Figure 6-249 Lamp (2 of 2)
2Unplug 1 connector.
CAUTION When you replace the Lamp, be sure to replace the cable as far as
possible into the recess of the corner of the Carrier Unit so it will not
get pinched or cut.
Note For replacement, the rear end of the Lamp goes in first.
558 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Carrier Unit
CAUTION Do not disassemble the Carrier Unit.
Figure 6-250 Carrier Unit (1 of 2)
1Remove 1 screw from the end of the Carrier Shaft.
Note When you replace the Carrier Unit, check the alignment of the rail and
rail bushing. The metal bushing should fit into the rail instead of sitting
on top.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 559
Figure 6-251 Carrier Unit (2 of 2)
2Move the Carrier to the center (callout 1).
3Pull out the Carrier Shaft.
Cleaning and Lubricating the Carrier Unit Shaft
1If the Carrier Unit Shaft is dirty, wipe it off with a cloth, then
relubricate it (see below). Otherwise, be careful not to remove the
lubricant.
2Place an even coating of Terrace Oil 46 (light weight oil) on the
Carrier Unit Shaft as needed (for example, if paper dust or other
material interferes with movement of the Carrier Unit, or if you
have cleaned the shaft).
560 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Figure 6-252 Carrier Belt
3Slide the belt off the Carrier Unit.
CAUTION Handle the Ribbon Cable with care. Always release the connector
before you pull on the cable.
Carrier Unit
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 561
Figure 6-253 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable
4To release the Ribbon Cable, use your fingernail to gently pull up
each end of the connector (callout 1). Unplug the ribbon cable.
Note the orientation of the contacts on the cable so the cable is
not twisted.
CAUTION During reassembly, when you insert the Carrier Shaft, be careful not to
dislocate the Felt Pad in the Carrier Frame. See page 562.
5Remove the Carrier Unit.
Note The replacement Carrier Unit includes a Lamp, Dust Cover, and pre-
lubricated Felt Pad. A ribbon cable is not included.
CAUTION If the brass bushing comes off the rail, be sure to replace it so that the
rail fits into the bushing’s groove, and the bushing does not sit on top
of the rail. If the bushing sits on top of the rail, it can block the Carrier
Unit.
562 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Felt Pad
Figure 6-254 Felt Pad
1Remove the Carrier Unit Lamp.
2Insert the Felt Pad as shown.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 563
Feet
Figure 6-255 Feet
Pinch the tabs to remove the foot.
564 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Frame Ground Spring
Figure 6-256 Frame Ground Spring
1Lift out the Frame Ground Spring.
To replace
Align the spring and the grounding plate.
CAUTION Do not forget to replace the Frame Ground Spring when you
reassemble the HP Digital Copier.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 565
Front Lamp PCA
Figure 6-257 Front Lamp PCA
1Remove the Carrier Unit. The Front Lamp PCA is located on the
underside of the Carrier Unit.
2Unplug 1 connector.
3Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8).
566 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Junction PCA and Cover
Figure 6-258 Junction PCA Cover
1Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8).
2Remove the Junction PCA Cover.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 567
Figure 6-259 Junction PCA
3Unplug 2 connectors.
Note For replacement, note the routing of the cables.
568 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Front Panel Ribbon Cable
Figure 6-260 Front Panel Ribbon Cable
CAUTION Do not bend the metal Front Panel Cable Cover.
1Gently peel off one side of the Front Panel Cable Cover.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 569
Figure 6-261 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable
2Remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame
Ground Plate (figure 6-210 on page 516).
3To release the Ribbon Cable, use your fingernail to gently pull up
each end of the connector (callout 1). Unplug the ribbon cable.
Note the orientation of the contacts on the cable so the cable is
not twisted.
To replace
CAUTION You must remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame
Ground Plate in order to replace the cable. The cable will be crushed
if you place it over the top of the clear cover.
1Remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame
Ground Plate.
2Replace the Ribbon Cable and the Front Panel Cable Clamp and
Front Panel Frame Ground Plate.
3Make sure the Front Panel Cable Clamp lies as flat as possible,
allowing the Carrier Unit to pass over without touching the clear
part.
570 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
Carrier Belt and Motor
Figure 6-262 Carrier Belt and Motor (1 of 2)
1Remove 1 machine screw with washer (m3x35) to release the
pulley shaft and pulley spring.
2Remove the Carrier Belt from the pulley.
C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 571
Figure 6-263 Carrier Belt and Motor (2 of 2)
CAUTION Do not disassemble the Carrier Motor Assembly.
3Remove 2 TP screws (m3x6) from the bracket by the motor.
4Lift the motor and unplug 1 connector from underneath the motor.
Note The replacement Flatbed Motor Unit includes a replacement motor, a
short belt, and a long belt. The cable, pulley shaft, and spring are
ordered separately.
To replace
1Reverse the above procedure.
2To adjust the tension of the Carrier Belt, tighten or loosen the
screw shown in Figure 6-262.
572 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907
C4265-90907 Chapter contents 573
7Troubleshooting
Chapter contents
Troubleshooting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Troubleshooting the Print System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Troubleshooting the Printer and Paper-handling Devices. . . .594
Step 1 Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Step 2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Step 3 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages . 604
Step 4 Paper Path Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Step 5 Information Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Step 6 Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Troubleshooting the Copy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Step 1 Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Step 2 Display and Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Step 3 Error Messages and Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720
Step 4 Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Step 5 Paper Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Testing the Copy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
574 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Troubleshooting Process
The troubleshooting process is a systematic approach that addresses
the major problems first and then other problems as you identify the
causes for printer malfunctions and errors. If you know the cause of a
problem in the printer system, go directly to that area. Otherwise, use
the troubleshooting process diagrams starting on the next page. The
diagrams illustrate the major steps for troubleshooting the printing
system. In the diagrams starting on page 577, each heading depicts a
major troubleshooting step. A YES answer to the questions allows
you to proceed to the next major step.
A NO answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to
the referenced location and follow the directions for that area. After
completing the additional testing, proceed to the next major step.
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting Process 575
To avoid replacing parts that are not broken, use figure 7-1 below to
isolate the problem.
Figure 7-1 Troubleshooting Process
576 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
See the flowcharts on the following pages for each of the components
of the troubleshooting process:
●Printer System Troubleshooting Process (page 577)
●Printer/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (page 578)
●Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (page 580)
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting Process 577
Printer System Troubleshooting Process
Figure 7-2 Print System Troubleshooting Process
1Printer/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (page 578)
2Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (page 580)
1
2
578 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Printer/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Pro-
cess
Figure 7-3 Printer and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2)
1
2
2
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting Process 579
Figure 7-4 Printer and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2)
1. Power On (page 594) 3. Paper Path Troubleshooting (page 645)
2. Event Log Pages (page 598) 4. Image Quality (page 661)
32
4
580 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Copy Module Troubleshooting Process
Figure 7-5 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2)
1. Power On (page 718) 3. Error Messages and Problems (page 720)
2. Display and Communication (page 719)
123
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting Process 581
Figure 7-6 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2)
4. Information Pages (page 725) 6. Image Quality (page 727)
5. Paper Path (page 726)
45 6
582 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Troubleshooting the Print System
Preliminary Operating Checks
Prior to troubleshooting a specific printer problem, you should ensure
that:
●The printer is being maintained on a regular basis as described in
Chapter 4.
●The customer is using acceptable paper as specified in the HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.
●The printer is positioned on a solid, level surface.
●The line voltage does not vary more than 10% from the nominal
rated value as specified on the Power Rating Label.
●The operating environment for the printer and paper is within the
temperature and humidity specifications listed in Chapter 1 of this
manual.
●The printer is never exposed to ammonia fumes such as those
produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials.
●The printer is not exposed to direct sunlight.
●Non-HP components (such as refilled Toner Cartridges, font
cartridges, and memory boards) are removed from the printer.
Note When moving the printer into a warm room from a cold location such
as a warehouse, various problems can occur due to condensation in
the printer. For example, if the photosensitive drum is cold, the
resistance of the photoconductive layer will be high. This will lead to
incorrect contrast. Leave the printer running for 10 to 20 minutes.
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 583
Communication
Ask the customer to run a print job from the host system. If the print
job is successful, communication to the printer is ensured.
Interface Troubleshooting
Figure 7-7 Communications Link (C-link) Cables, Supported Daisy Chain
Connections
Note If the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox is sitting on a tabletop instead of on a
stand, it is the first device in the daisy chain.
All C-link cables have a single dot molded into the device output
connector cable end, and two dots molded into the device input
connector cable end.
Note It is important that the C-link cables are installed in the supported daisy
chain configuration as shown in figure 7-7. This is so that the devices
are recognized and correctly reported on the Event Log.
It is possible, but not recommended, to attach the C-link cables in other
configurations. This will rearrange the supported device numbering.
Keep this configuration in mind when evaluating the Event Log.
584 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration
page, verify that the C-link cabling is correctly connected and
functional (figure 7-7) and that DC power is available to the paper
handling devices. Check and reseat suspect cable connections. If any
of the cables are replaced, you must cycle the power to have the
printer recognize the device again.
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 585
Network Troubleshooting
This section provides an overview of the printer’s interface
requirements.
Note Communication problems are normally the customer’s responsibility.
Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in
troubleshooting network problems.
Test Message
After the printer is installed, verify communications between the
printer and the IBM-compatible computer. Enter the following at the
DOS prompt:
C:\DIR>LPT1 ENTER (for printing to parallel port #1)
The printer should print a directory listing of the C:\ directory.
EIO Troubleshooting
The JetDirect Configuration Page shown in figure 7-8 on page 586
contains valuable information about the current status of the EIO
accessories. Before attempting to troubleshoot a network problem or
notifying your network consultant of a problem, always print a
Configuration Page from the Control Panel’s Information Menu. If an
EIO accessory is installed, the JetDirect Configuration Page prints
too.
See the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for
detailed explanations of network issues.
586 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-8 Sample JetDirect Configuration Page
Network statistics
I/O card status
IP address
Node name
IPX/SPX status
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 587
●If the EIO JetDirect Card has successfully powered up and
completed its internal diagnostics, the I/O CARD READY message
will appear. If communication is lost, an I/O NOT READY message
appears followed by a two digit error code. Consult the HP
JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for further details
and recommended action.
●The “Network Statistics” column indicates the status of network
activity. Bad packets, framing errors, un-sendable packets, and
collisions should be minimal. If a high percentage (greater than
one percent) of these occur, contact the network administrator. All
of the statistics are set to zero when the printer is powered off.
●A “Novell Status” block should state the Novell printer server
name to which the printer is connected. If the Node Name reads
“NPIxxxxxx” (xxxxxx = last six digits of the EIO's LAN address),
the EIO card has not been configured for a Novell server (as in
figure 7-8). This could indicate that the card is operating under an
IPX protocol other than Novell. Consult with the network
administrator if the Node Name is not present.
●In the TCP/IP protocol block, the default IP address is
“192.0.0.192.” It is acceptable to operate the printer with this
default address. The error message, ARP DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS
may appear in this block. This is also an acceptable error code if
the TCP/IP protocol is not being used. Please check with the
network administrator to determine the correct IP address for the
printer.
Verify Host System Operation
Try to print to another known working printer or move the failing
printer to a known working location. Verify that the correct driver is
installed and operating properly.
Verify Network and Server Operation
●Try to print the job to the printer's parallel port.
●Try to print from the host system through the network to another
printer. Contact the network administrator for assistance.
588 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
General Troubleshooting Information
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions
The following lists symptoms and typical solutions to those problems.
Abnormal noises are evident, such as grinding or chattering
when main motor energized.
From the toner cartridge area:
1Replace the toner cartridge.
2Replace the Main Gear Assembly. See Main Gear Assembly on
page 310 for instructions.
From Tray 2 or 3:
1Verify proper paper loading, acceptable media.
2Inspect the “fingers” on the paper trays to ensure proper paper
size detection.
3Replace the Paper Input Unit. See Paper Input Unit (PIU) on page
314 for instructions.
4Replace the Main Gear Assembly. See Main Gear Assembly on
page 310 for instructions.
From 2000-sheet Input Tray:
1Check the white plastic bushing on Tray 4. The bushing is located
on the Tray 4 main drive assembly. The bushing accepts the Tray
4 pilot pin when Tray 4 is closed. Replace if broken.
2Replace 2000-sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Assembly.
3Replace the 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly.
From 8-bin Mailbox:
1Verify pawls are riding above the output rollers (see figure 7-25 on
page 703).
2Check the (small rollers in the flipper area).
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 589
Will not feed from Tray x when printing from application; paper
path test works fine.
Verify the correct paper size:
1Tray 1: From Control Panel Paper Handling Menu.
2Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5: Remove and reseat the paper fences in the
correct position in the failing tray.
Excessive Image Skew
1Remove and reseat the paper fences (front fence in paper trays).
2Image Skew Specifications:
•1 mm over 260 mm length
•First line to leading edge 5.0 +/- 2.5 mm
•Text Stretching 1% simplex 1.5% duplex
Envelope
•Skew 6.0 over 260 mm length
•First line on envelopes to leading edge/ left margin 15 +/- 4.5
mm
Loses Page Counts, Serial Number.
Print the Event Log and look for a 68 error with a page count of zero.
Using the Event Log, take the page count shown at the top of the
page and add the page count from any/all errors preceding any 68
errors. Use this number and enter it into the Control Panel from
Service Mode.
Will not print from 2000-sheet Input Tray or 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray.
1Print the Configuration Page. Make sure that the Paper Handling
Controller and 2000-sheet or 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray are listed in
the Paper Handling Options section.
2Verify that power is supplied the to the 2000-sheet or
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray.
3Run a paper path test from Tray 4 or 5. If the test is successful,
the paper size detection switches may have failed or an incorrect
size is specified in the application software.
4Replace the Paper Handling Controller if it is not shown on the
Configuration Page.
5Verify that the C-link cables are connected as shown in figure 7-7
on page 583.
6Reseat the C-link Cable, and inspect for pushed in pins.
590 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
7Replace the C-link Cable.
8Replace the 2000-sheet or 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Controller
PCA.
Jams when printing envelopes, transparencies, or labels to the
8-bin Mailbox or 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler.
The 8-bin Mailbox does not support these media. Direct these media
to the Face-up Bin (top bin of the 8-bin Mailbox).
Stops printing and hangs on certain jobs.
1Remove any non-HP Memory DIMMs and retry.
2Set to 300 DPI and retry.
Top 2/3 of portrait page is lighter.
1Replace the Toner Cartridge and retry.
2Replace the Transfer Guide.
Will not print to Mailbox.
1Print the Configuration Page. Make sure that the Paper Handling
Controller, 2000-sheet Input Tray, and 8-bin Mailbox are listed in
the Paper Handling Options section.
2Replace the Paper Handling Controller if it is not shown on the
Configuration Page.
3Inspect the C-link Cables for pushed out pins.
4Replace the C-link Cables.
5Connect the 8-bin Mailbox directly to the printer. If it is now
recognized on the Configuration Page, replace the 2000-sheet
Input Tray Controller.
6Replace the 8-bin Mailbox Controller.
7Replace the 8-bin Mailbox External Power Supply.
8Replace the entire 8-bin Mailbox.
Wrinkling Envelopes
1Place the Fusing Levers in up position and retry the envelopes.
2Try new media. Make sure that the envelopes are within
specifications. See the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide.
3Verify the Output Destination is the left Face Up Bin.
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 591
Poor Fusing
1Make sure that the Fusing Levers are in the down position for cut
sheet paper.
2Verify all packing spacers have been removed from inside the
printer.
3Try new media. Make sure that the media is within specifications.
See the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide.
4Verify that the proper fusing mode for the media is set in the
Control Panel.
5Make sure that the AC power does not fluctuate out of range
during the print cycle. See table 2-4 on page 87.
Feeds from incorrect tray when selecting different media for the
first page of the job.
First you must determine if it is a hardware or a software issue. Run a
paper path test from each paper tray to eliminate the hardware. See
page 648.
If the paper path test fails, troubleshoot the error message.
Make sure that the most current printer driver is installed. Select the
Print Quality Tab from the printer driver. Click on About. You may
find the most current driver in various electronic locations. Check with
HP Service and Support.
If the paper path test works, it may be a software or user related
issue. Perform the following steps:
1Define the media types that are loaded in each paper tray. This
can be done from either JetAdmin or the front control panel of the
printer.
From JetAdmin
1Select the Trays tab.
2Select the correct media type for each tray listed.
3Click on OK save your changes and exit JetAdmin.
From the Control Panel
Note To set the paper type for Tray 1, set TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE from the
Paper Handling Menu.
1From the Paper Handling Menu, press ITEM to select a specific
tray.
2Press + until you get to the correct type of media.
592 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
3Press SELECT.
4Repeat this step for each paper tray.
5Press GO.
6From inside your application, choose the page setup option for
that application.
7Select the paper source/type option.
8Select the correct media source/type for the first page.
9Select the correct media source/type for all other pages.
CAUTION Do not make changes to the driver unless the application does not
provide this option. Print job settings selected through your application
always override settings made through the printer driver. Printer
settings made in the application or print driver always override the
corresponding setting made on the printer Control Panel.
10 Print the document.
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 593
Paper Curl
Paper curl is inherent to the laser printing processes, as it occurs
when paper is subjected to heat. Paper curl tends to relax as the
paper cools while resting on a flat surface. The specification for
maximum paper curl when the paper is lying flat before print is 0.2
inches (5 mm).
Although paper curl cannot be totally eliminated, some steps can be
taken to lessen its impact, as suggested in the following table.
Table 7-1. Paper Curl
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Paper Path Try using Tray 1 and output the paper to the Face-up Bin.
2. Paper Surface The recommended printing surface of the page is usually marked on the end of a
ream of paper, indicated by a small arrow and the phrase “print this side first.”
Load paper in Tray 1 with the recommended printing surface facing up (facing
down in Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5).
3. Paper Storing and
Handling
Over time, paper assumes the characteristics of its storage environment (in a
humid environment, paper absorbs moisture; in a dry environment, paper loses
moisture). Paper with higher moisture content will tend to curl more. Evaluate the
storage conditions of the paper.
4. Paper Type All paper is manufactured differently (different textures, moisture content, drying
processes, composition, etc.). Change the type of paper being used and re-
evaluate the paper curl results.
594 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Troubleshooting the Printer and Paper-handling
Devices
Step 1. Power On
It is important to have the printer's Control Panel functional as soon
as possible in the troubleshooting process so that the printer's
diagnostics can assist in locating printer errors.
Table 7-2. Power On Defects or Blank Display
Problem Action
1. Is AC power available at
the printer's power
receptacle?
Verify. See table 2-4 on page 87.
2. Is the printer's on/off
switch set to on?
Push the switch to the on position.
3. Are the printer's fans on?
(See figure 7-9 on page 596
to locate the fans.)
Note: Fan operation is significant since all fans are controlled by the
printer's DC Controller PCA. When the printer is in PowerSave mode, the
fans are off. Make sure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode. Press
GO. Operational fans indicate:
1. AC power is present in the printer.
2. DC power supply is functional (both 24V DC and 5V DC are being
generated).
3. DC Controller PCA's micro-processor is functional.
NO If the fans are NOT working, turn off the printer and remove the printer's
Formatter PCA. Disconnect all the printer's paper handling options. Then
turn on the printer and check the fans again.
If the fans are still not working, perform the following steps:
1. Verify that all fans are connected to the DC Controller PCA according to
figure 7-30 on page 708.
2. Replace the low-voltage DC power supply. See Low Voltage Power
Supply (LVPS) on page 324 for instructions.
3. Replace the DC Controller PCA. See PCA, DC Controller on page 315
for instructions.
C4265-90907 Power On 595
YES
If the fans are working but the printer's Control Panel is blank, print an
engine test. See “Engine Test” on page 597.
If the engine test was successful, perform the following steps:
1. Reseat or replace the cable from the Control Panel that is connected to
J203 of the DC Controller PCA (see the main wiring diagram in the back
of the manual).
2. Replace the printer's Formatter PCA. See Formatter Assembly on page
304 for instructions.
3. Replace the Control Panel assembly. See Control Panel on page 269
for instructions.
If the engine test was not successful, verify that there is no paper in the
paper path. Retry the engine test. If the engine test is still unsuccessful,
replace the DC Controller PCA. See PCA, DC Controller on page 315 for
instructions.
Table 7-2. Power On Defects or Blank Display (continued)
Problem Action
596 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-9 Fan Location and Airflow
Note Control Panel numbers do not correspond to fan numbers (i.e., a fan
error ending in .1 does NOT refer to Fan 1).
Table 7-3. Fans
Fan Name Fan Location
Fan 1: Laser/Scanner Fan Exhaust air flows from the back of the printer, on the left-hand side of
the fusing assembly.
Fan 2: Low-voltage Power
Supply Fan
Lower right-hand corner of the printer.
Fan 3: Formatter Fan (intake) Intake fan below the formatter.
Fan 4: Standard Output
Delivery Fan
Directly above the center of the fusing assembly.
Fan 5: MP Tray (Intake)
Fan
Right side of MP (Tray 1) Assembly
C4265-90907 Power On 597
Engine Test
The engine test verifies that the print engine is functioning correctly.
This test is very useful for isolating printer problems since the
Formatter PCA is completely bypassed during an engine test. The
engine test prints a full page of horizontal lines across the entire
printable area. The engine test prints from Tray 3 ONLY and can be
activated with the Formatter PCA removed.
Note Tray 3 must be installed and loaded with paper to perform an engine
test. Also, make sure that the EP toner cartridge is installed in the
printer.
Engine Test Button Location
The engine test button is located on the DC Controller PCA. It is
accessible through a hole at the right rear of the printer. See figure
7-10.
Printing an Engine Test
To print an engine test, use a non-metallic object (such as a pencil) to
press the engine test button (see figure 7-10). A single test page will
print. The engine test will be continuous as long as the button is held
in.
Figure 7-10 Engine Test Button
598 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Step 2. Display
The Control Panel should display READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON.
For information about errors displayed, access the Event Log. If the
display is blank, see Power On Defects or Blank Display on page 594.
Event Log Pages
Use the Event Log to diagnose and troubleshoot printer errors and
intermittent failures. You can either print or display the Event Log from
the Control Panel’s Information Menu. (Select PRINT EVENT LOG or
SHOW EVENT LOG.) (The Configuration Page lists the maximum number
of entries in the Event Log.)
See figure 7-11 on page 600 for a sample page one of the Event Log.
Page one of the Event Log shows the current page count at the left
side of the page, with the printer's serial number directly to the right of
the page count. The left column is the error sequence number, with
the error listed on the right (the highest sequence number is the most
recent event logged). The next column is the page count at the time of
the error, and the last column is the Personality (PCL or PostScript)
column or the Jam Cause at the time of the error.
Note The HP LaserJet 8100 series Event Log consists of one page only. The
HP LaserJet 8150 series Event Log contains two pages.
C4265-90907 Display 599
See figure 7-12 on page 601 for a sample page two of the HP
LaserJet 8150 series Event Log. Use the following table as a key to
the troubleshooting information contained in page two:
See “Printer Message Tables” on page 607 for more information
about correcting Event Log messages in the printer and paper
handling devices.
Table 7-4. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Event Log Page 2
Symbol Explanation
L Number of images printed in Low Fusing Mode.
N Number of images printed in Normal Fusing Mode.
H1 Number of images printed in High 1.
H2 Number of images printed in High 2.
H3 Number of images printed in High 3.
E2E Number of images printed using Edge-to-Edge.
TD Toner density setting at the time this page is printed.
FM Fuser mode setting at the time this page is printed.
AJL Average job length.
MJL Maximum job length.
S Number of pages printed in simplex (one side of the paper).
D Number of pages printed in duplex (both sides of the paper).
TC Number of toner cartridges used.
PP/C Pages printed per cartridge (up to the last 20 cartridges).
PMK Number of pages per preventive maintenance kit (up to the last five
kits).
PS PowerSave setting at the time this page is printed.
600 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-11 Sample Event Log, page one
C4265-90907 Display 601
Figure 7-12 HP LaserJet 8150 Series Sample Event Log, page two
602 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Print the Event Log
The printer’s internal Event Log stores the most recent errors and can
be printed at any time. To print the Event Log:
1. Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2. Press Item until PRINT EVENT LOG appears.
3Press Select to print the Event Log.
Display the Event Log
If the printer cannot print or move any paper, follow these steps to
display the Event Log. Otherwise, print the Event Log.
1. Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2. Press Item until SHOW EVENT LOG appears. Press Select to show
the Event Log.
3. Press - Value + to scroll through the Event Log.
4. Write down the error messages. For example:
5. Check the Event Log for specific error trends in the last 10,000
printed pages.
6. Ask the customer for any observed error trends. (For example, do
paper jams tend to occur in a specific area of the printer?)
7. Record any specific error trends.
8. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 607 and follow the
recommended action.
9. If the Control Panel displays READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON, go
to the next section. If it displays any other message, repeat this
procedure starting from step 1.
13.3 PAPER JAM
CHECK RIGHT DOOR
01 13.3
0000006
Appears on display panel
Error number Error code
Page count
Appears in the Event Log
C4265-90907 Display 603
Interpret the Event Log
See figure 7-11 on page 600 for a sample Event Log.
The errors on the control panel and the Event Log codes may not be
the same. For example, 13.11 on the control panel may be 13.11 1B
in the Event Log. The 1B provides more information about the error.
Likewise, if a 50.1 FUSER ERROR is displayed on the Control Panel,
the Event Log will record a 50.02.01 error, with the 02 signifying that
2 sensors were blocked. Make sure that you refer to the correct
number in “Printer Message Tables” on page 607.
When an error is detected in an Optional Paper Handling Device, a
13.11, 11.zz, 22.zz to 13.12,13.22, or 66.xy.zz will be
displayed on the Control Panel.
Hint Whenever a 13.xx appears on the Control Panel, a good practice is to
clear the jammed paper from the printer, press GO to take the printer
offline, and print the Event Log. If you cannot print the Event Log, you
can still display it on the Control Panel. The last error is the error at the
top of the Event Log printout with the highest number in the left-most
column. Write the error next to the last error logged.
To interpret the Event Log:
●Each individual entry in the log is called an “error,” while all errors
occurring at the same page count are called an “event.” See the
Recommended Action in “Printer Message Tables” on page 607
for each error comprising an event to gain a clear picture of what
took place during that event. Events usually conclude with a time-
out or no response from the device (error 66.xy in the Event Log).
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
●Use the Event Log table in this section to associate errors in the
Event Log with the Control Panel error message. Follow the
Recommended Action listed in the Event Log Table starting on
page 607 for each error or event.
Note It is assumed that any Paper Handling Devices are connected as shown
in the C-link Cable Diagram (figure 7-7 on page 583). The errors will
be logged with different device numbers if any non-standard cabling is
installed.
604 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Step 3. Printer and Paper-Handling Devices
Messages
Be sure to read the exact text of the control panel message, including
the error message number and the text, in order to locate the error
message in the tables.
This printer has enhanced information in the control panel.
Printer messages displayed on the control panel provide five
categories of information. Each message category is assigned a
priority. If more than one condition occurs at the same time, the
highest priority message is displayed. When it has been cleared, the
next priority message will be displayed, and so on. The displayed
messages and their priorities are:
●Printer Status
●Warning messages
●Error messages
●Critical error messages
●External Paper Handling Device Messages
Control Panel and Event Log Message Format
The format of Control Panel messages is:
●13.xy PAPER JAM IN INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE
●INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE CONDITION xy.zz
●66.xy.zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE
The Event Log messages have the following format:
●13.xy zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE PAPER JAM
●65.xy.zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE CONDITION
●66.xy.zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE HARDWARE MALFUNCTION
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 605
Note The following are two examples of Control Panel messages, the
corresponding Event Log messages, and what the messages mean.
These examples do not show the recommended action to follow to fix
the problem. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 607 for the
recommended actions for these messages.
Note Be sure to print a configuration page to properly identify the input or
output device configured. Notice that the error format only identifies the
C-link device number and the device type; it does not identify which
input or output device is used in the system.
Control Panel Message Event Log Page Meaning
13.11 PAPER JAM IN INPUT
DEVICE
13.11 1B A paper jam occurred in the first C-link
device configured. It is an input device
(2000-sheet Input Tray or 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray) with an error code 1B. This is
normally a timeout at an entry or exit sensor.
66.22.09 OUTPUT DEVICE
FAILURE
66.22.09 A hardware malfunction occurred in the
second C-link device configured. It is an
output device (Mailbox) with an error code
09. This is an external memory error.
606 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-13 Error Format for Paper Handling
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 607
Printer Message Tables
Printer messages are grouped according to the device generating the
error. Within the groupings listed below, the alphabetic error
messages are listed first, followed by the numeric messages.
●“Engine Error Messages” (page 608)
●“Duplexer Error Messages” (page 643)
Input Devices
●“Envelope Feeder Error Messages” (page 627)
●“2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages” (page 620)
●“2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages” (page 624)
Output Devices
●“7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages” (page 629)
●“8-bin Mailbox Error Messages” (page 634)
●“Stapler Error Messages” (page 640)
●“Paper Handling Device Controller Messages” (page 644)
The following is an example of the format for numerical control panel
messages.
13.yy PAPER JAM
Device number in
the daisy chain Device Type:
Input or output
device
608 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Engine Error Messages
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
13.1 PAPER JAM
CHECK RIGHT
DOOR
13.1 zz Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. Paper
did not reach PS2.
Use the Paper Path Test on page
153 and page 648 to see if a
problem exists from both engine
trays. If PS2 is bad, it will fail
when printing from Tray 2 or 3.
Verify flag movement by
manually inserting paper in the
sensor path. Replace PS2 or the
Paper Input Unit (PIU)
Assembly. See Paper Input Unit
(PIU) on page 314 for
instructions.
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 609
13.3 PAPER JAM
CHECK RIGHT
DOOR
alternates with
THEN OPEN AND
CLOSE TOP
COVER
13.3 XX Paper delay jam. Paper did not reach
PS1 at the registration area.
1. Remove the toner cartridge,
lift the green handle, and verify
the sensor flag operation.
2. Make sure that the sensor is
not broken.
3. Replace the registration
assembly if necessary. See
Registration Assembly on page
325 for instructions.
13.5 FUSER
OUTPUT, PAPER
STOPPED JAM
13.5 XX Fuser output, paper late jam. Paper
never reached PS1403 at the fusing
assembly.
Remove the toner cartridge, and
check the path between the
registration and fusing
assemblies. PS1403 on the
sensor PCA may be faulty.
13.6 FUSER
OUTPUT PAPER
STOPPED JAM
13.6 XX PS1402 did not sense the paper.
Fuser output, paper stopped jam.
Paper never exited the fusing
assembly.
1. Perform the paper path test to
verify all input and output.
2. Check the fuser flag at the
sensor board area.
3. Check the fuser access door.
4. Make sure that the flag is not
broken. PS1403 on the sensor
PCA, or the delivery exit spring/
gears, may be faulty.
13.9 CHECK
LEFT DOOR
13.9 XX Face-down bin paper late jam. Paper did not arrive at PS1402
when expected. Inspect the path
between the fuser and delivery
assemblies. Check the diverter
assembly.
13.20 PAPER
JAM CHECK ...
13.20 XX The engine could not eject a page in
the printer. The front panel message
(...) will indicate the sensor closest to
the paper.
Remove the jam from the
location indicated on the control
panel.
13.A PAPER JAM
CHECK LEFT
DOOR
13.A XX Paper stopped at the Face-down bin. Check the paper path. This jam
is sensed by PS1402 on the
sensor PCA.
20
INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Error The printer received more data than
can fit in its available memory. You
might have tried to transfer too many
macros, soft fonts, or complex
graphics.
1. Press GO to print the
transferred data (some data
might be lost).
2. Simplify the print job, or install
additional memory.
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
610 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
21 PAGE TOO
COMPLEX
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Error The data (dense text, rules, raster or
vector graphics) sent to the printer
was too complex.
1. Press GO to print the
transferred data. (Some data
might be lost.)
2. To print the job without losing
data, from the Configuration
Menu in the printer control
panel, set PAGE PROTECT=ON,
print the job, and then return to
PAGE PROTECT=AUTO. Do not
leave PAGE PROTECT=ON; it
might degrade performance.
If this message appears often,
simplify the print job.
22 EIO x
BUFFER
OVERFLOW
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Error Too much data was sent to the EIO
card in the specified slot (x). An
improper communications protocol
may be in use.
1. Press GO to clear the
message. (Data will be lost.)
2. Check the host configuration.
22 PARALLEL
I/O
BUFFER
OVERFLOW
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Error Too much data was sent to the
parallel port.
This error can occur if the driver you
are using is not IEEE-1284
compliant. For best results, use an
HP driver that came with the printer.
1. Check for a loose cable
connection and be sure to use a
high-quality cable. (Some non-
HP parallel cables might be
missing pin connections or might
otherwise not conform to the
IEEE-1284 specification.)
This error can occur if the driver
you are using is not IEEE-1284
compliant. For best results, use
an HP driver that came with the
printer.
2. Press GO to clear the error
message. (Data will be lost.)
22 SERIAL I/0
BUFFER
OVERFLOW
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Error Too much data was sent to the serial
port.
1. Make sure that the correct
serial pacing option is selected
from the I/O Menu in the printer’s
control panel.
2. Print a Menu Map, and verify
that the serial pacing item (from
the I/O Menu in the printer’s
control panel) matches the
setting on the computer.
3. Press GO to clear the error
message. (Data will be lost.)
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 611
40 BAD SERIAL
TRANSMISSION
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Error The printer encountered an error
while transferring data from the
computer. The error might have
occurred for several reasons:
• The computer was powered on or
off while the printer was online.
• The printer’s serial configuration
was not the same as the computer’s.
1. Verify the cable connections.
Make sure that the printer’s
serial configuration is set the
same as the computer from the
I/O Menu in the printer’s control
panel.
2. The serial baud rate setting
can be accessed from the I/O
Menu in the printer’s control
panel.
3. Press GO to clear the error
message and continue the
printing.
4. Turn the printer off.
5. Reseat the EIO card, and turn
the printer on.
40 EIO x BAD
TRANSMISSION
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Error The connection has been broken
between the printer and the EIO card
in the specified slot.
1. Turn the printer off, and reseat
the card.
2. Press GO to clear the error
message and continue printing.
41.x
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Error A temporary printing error occurred.
X Description
1 Unknown misprint error.
2 Beam detect misprint error.
3 See error 41.3.
4 No VSYNC error.
5 Media feed error.
9 Noise VSREQ error.
Press GO. The page containing
the error will automatically be
reprinted.
If this message persists:
1. Reseat the connections to the
Laser/Scanner and the Engine
Controller Board.
2. Replace the Laser/Scanner.
See Laser/Scanner Assembly
on page 308 for instructions.
3. Replace the Engine Controller
Board.
41.3
UNEXPECTED
PAPER SIZE
Error The paper size you are trying to print
is not the same as the control panel
setting for Tray 1.
1. Make sure that the control
panel setting for Tray 1 or the
Envelope Feeder is correctly
adjusted for size. (The printer
will continue trying to print the
job until the size settings are
correct.)
2. Press GO. The page
containing the error will
automatically be reprinted. (Or,
you might want to press CANCEL
JOB to clear the job from the
printer’s memory.)
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
612 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
50.x FUSER
ERROR
Critical Error A fuser error has occurred.
X Description
1 Low Fuser temperature.
2 Fuser warm up service.
3 High Fuser temperature.
4 Faulty Fuser.
5 Inconsistent Fuser.
Turn the printer off for at least 20
minutes, and then turn the
printer on.
If the error continues:
1. Make sure that the Fusing
Assembly is installed correctly
and is fully seated into its
connectors (no bent pins or pins
outside their receptacles).
2. Reseat or replace the fuser
cable assembly.
3. Replace the DC Controller.
51.x
PRINTER ERROR
Error A temporary printing error occurred.
X Description
1 Beam detect error.
2 Laser error.
1. Press GO. The page
containing the error will
automatically be reprinted.
2. Turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on.
3. Reseat the cables. See the
wiring diagrams at the back of
this manual.
4. Replace the Laser/Scanner.
See Laser/Scanner Assembly
on page 308 for instructions.
52.x
PRINTER ERROR
Error A temporary printing error occurred.
X Description
0 Laser/scanner error.
1 Laser/scanner startup error.
2 Laser/scanner rotation error.
1. Press GO. The page
containing the error will
automatically be reprinted.
2. Turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on.
3. Reseat the cables. See the
wiring diagrams at the back of
this manual.
4. Replace the Laser/Scanner.
See Laser/Scanner Assembly
on page 308 for instructions.
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 613
53.xy.zz
PRINTER ERROR
Critical Error There is a problem with the printer’s
memory. The DIMM that caused the
error will not be used. Values of x, y,
and zz are as follows:
x = DIMM type
0 = ROM
1 = RAM
y = Device location
0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM)
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3
zz = Error number
0 = Unsupported memory (for
example, presence
detect bad)
1 = Unrecognized memory
(for example, presence
detect bad)
2 = Unsupported memory
size
3 = Failed RAM test
4 = Exceeded maximum
RAM size
5 = Exceeded maximum
ROM size
6 = Invalid DIMM speed
7 = DIMM reporting
information incorrectly
8 = DIMM RAM parity error
9 = ROM needs to be
mapped to an
unsupported address
10 = DIMM address conflict
11 = PDC XROM out of
bounds
12 = Unable to make a
temporary mapping
1. Turn the printer off, and reseat
or replace the specified DIMM.
2. Try the DIMM in another slot.
3. Replace the DIMM that
caused the error.
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
614 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
55.x
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Error A printer error has occurred.
X Description
0 NO_RESET_REPORT
1 NO_ENGINE_RESPONSE
2 EXCESSIVE_GLITCHES
3 LOST_PPRDY_SIGNAL
4 COMMUNICATION_TIMEOUT
5 BAD_TRAY_BIN_REPORTS
6 ECC7_COMMAND_ERROR
7 INCOMING_PARITY_ERROR
8 OUTGOING_PARITY_ERROR
9 MISSED_INTERRUPT
A HUNG_COMMUNICATIONS
B LOST_XISR_ERROR
C INVALID_BUS_TIMEOUT
D VERY_LATE_ECOMM_ISR
1. Press GO to clear the error
message.
2. Turn the printer off and reseat
the formatter board, all DIMMs,
EIO Cards, and the hard disk
drive.
4. Check the cable from the DC
controller and laser/scanner
assembly.
5. Replace the laser scanner
assembly.
6. Replace the DC controller
PCA.
7. Replace the formatter board.
56.x
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
Error A temporary printing error occurred.
X Description
1 Illegal input.
2 Illegal output.
1. Press GO. The page
containing the error will
automatically be reprinted.
2. Turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on.
3. Check the printer’s
configuration.
57.X
FAN FAILURE
Critical Error A fan motor failure occurred. All fans
are enabled to low speed operation
at power on. Fans will go into high
speed operation during the print
cycle.
X Description
2 Fan 3 - Formatter Fan (intake)
3 Fan 2 - Low-voltage power supply
(exhaust)
5 Fan 1 -Laser/scanner (exhaust)
Low-voltage power supply (exhaust)
6 Fan 4 - Face-down delivery
(exhaust)
9 Fan 5 - Tray 1 fan
Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on.
If the message continues, check
and reseat the cabling between
the fan motors and the DC
Controller PCA.
58.x
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
Error A temporary printing error occurred.
X Description
1 Tray 1 lifter malfunction.
2 Tray 2 lifter malfunction.
3 Tray 3 lifter malfunction.
4 Tray 4 lifter malfunction.
X Tray X lifter malfunction.
Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on.
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 615
59.x
PRINTER ERROR
Critical Error A printer error has occurred.
X Description
0 Motor error.
1 Motor startup error.
2 Motor rotation error.
Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on.
62.x
PRINTER ERROR
Critical Error There is a problem with the printer’s
memory. The x value refers to the
location of the problem:
0 = Internal memory
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3
Reseat or replace the specified
DIMM.
64
PRINTER ERROR
Critical Error A scan buffer error occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on.
If this message persists, replace
the Formatter.
68 NVRAM ERROR
CHECK SETTINGS
Error An error occurred in the printer’s
nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) and
one or more printer settings has
been reset to its factory default.
1. Print a configuration page and
check the printer settings to
determine which values have
changed.
2. Remove EIO card. It will be
reset if not removed.
3. Hold down CANCEL JOB while
turning the printer on. This will
clean up the NVRAM by
removing old areas that are not
being used.
68 NVRAM FULL
CHECK SETTINGS
Error The printer’s nonvolatile memory
(NVRAM) is full. Some settings
might have been reset to the factory
defaults.
1. Print a configuration page and
check the printer settings to
determine which values have
changed.
2. Remove EIO card. It will be
reset if not removed.
3. Hold down CANCEL JOB while
turning the printer on. This will
clean up the NVRAM by
removing old areas that are not
being used.
69.x
PRINTER ERROR
Critical Error A temporary printing error occurred.
X Description
0 The duplex mechanism has failed.
1 The duplex slide adjust has failed.
1. Turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on.
2. Reseat the duplexer.
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
616 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
79.xxxx
PRINTER ERROR
Critical Error The printer detected an error. The
numbers (xxxx) indicate the specific
type of error.
1. Turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on.
2. Try printing a job from a
different software application. If
the job prints, go back to the first
application and try printing a
different file. (If the message
only appears with a certain
software application or print job,
contact the software vendor for
assistance.)
If the message persists, try the
following:
1. Cycle power.
2. Reseat or replace the
interface cable and cycle power.
3. Remove the DIMMs one at a
time and cycle power.
4. Try using the parallel
interface, if possible.
5. With the EIO cards removed
from the printer, perform a cold
reset.
6. Remove the Hard Disk and
cycle power.
7. If the error persists, replace
the Formatter.
8X.YYYY
EIO ERROR
Critical Error The EIO accessory card in slot X
has encountered a critical error as
specified by YYYY.
1. Move the EIO card to another
slot.
2. If the error persists, replace
the EIO card.
3. If the error is corrected, reseat
the EIO card in the original slot.
BAD OPT TRAY
CONNECTION
Error The optional tray is not connected
properly.
1. Re-install the optional tray.
2. Make sure the optional tray is
connected and the connector is
not damaged.
3. Replace the optional tray.
CHECK INPUT
DEVICE
alternates with
PAPER PATH
OPEN PLEASE
CLOSE IT
Error The optional input tray cannot feed
paper to the printer because a door
or paper guide is open.
Check the doors and paper
guides.
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 617
CHECK OUTPUT
DEVICE
alternates with
CLOSE OUTPUT
DELIVERY PATH
Error The paper path between the printer
and the external paper handling
output device is open and must be
closed before printing can continue.
Close the paper path.
EXTERNAL
DEVICE
INITIALIZING
Status When an external paper handling
device is connected to the printer, it
must have 10 seconds to initialize
after boot or after coming out of
PowerSave mode.
No action required.
MANUALLY FEED
[SIZE]
Error Tray 1 does not contain the specified
size paper.
Load the specified type of paper
into Tray 1.
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
Error One of the following occurred:
• A manual feed was requested.
• There is no paper in Tray 1.
• The wrong size paper is loaded.
• The control panel is not set for the
kind of paper loaded.
1. Load the requested paper into
Tray 1.
2. Press GO if the desired paper
is already loaded in Tray 1.
3. Press - VALUE + to scroll
through the available types and
sizes.
4. Press SELECT to accept the
alternate type or size.
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] ENV
Error Tray 1 does not contain the specified
type of envelope.
Load the specified type of
envelope into Tray 1.
MANUALLY FEED
TRAY 1
ENVELOPE
Error Tray 1 does not contain an envelope. Load an envelope into Tray 1.
OUTPUT BIN
FULL
alternates with
CLEAR PAPER
FROM [BINNAME]
Error The output bin is full and needs to be
emptied.
1. Remove the media from the
Face-down bin.
2. Make sure that the sensor flag
moves freely.
TRAY X
CONTAINS
UNKNOWN MEDIA
Warning The media type in the specified tray
cannot be determined.
Load known media, or set the
correct media type.
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
618 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
TRAY X EMPTY Warning The paper tray is empty. Paper is
sensed in the tray by black plastic
flags and photosensors. If paper is
not in a tray, the flags will rotate
through an access in the upper tray.
When paper is present, the flags are
blocked from rotating through this
access.
1. Load the empty tray (x) to
clear the message.
If you do not load the specified
tray, the printer will continue
printing from the next available
tray, and the message will
continue to display.
2. Make sure that the paper out
flag is not stuck in the down
position by rough media. Do this
before opening the tray. To
check this flag without opening
Tray 2, remove the Duplexer if it
is present.
3. Open the Front Access Door.
This provides you with a clear
view of the Tray 2 paper out
sensor flag. To check this flag
without opening Tray 3, use a
flashlight to observe the paper
out flag.
If either paper flag is damaged,
replace the paper flag or the
paper input tray.
If the printer is using Tray 2 or 3
and the message is
accompanied by a clicking noise
every few seconds, replace the
Paper Input Unit Assembly. See
Paper Input Unit (PIU) on page
314 for instructions.
TRAY X LIFTING Error Displays when tray X is in the
process of lifting the paper to the top
of the tray for proper feeding.
1. If the message does not go
away, verify that the media can
be pulled from another tray.
2. The Paper Input Unit may
need to be replaced. See Paper
Input Unit (PIU) on page 314 for
instructions.
TRAY XX LOAD
[SIZE]
Error Tray X does not contain the specified
size of paper.
Load the specified size of paper
into Tray X.
TRAY XX LOAD
[SIZE]
Error Tray X does not contain the specified
size of paper.
Load the requested paper into
the indicated tray, or press
SELECT to override the message
and to print on a loaded paper
size.
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 619
TRAY xx LOAD
[TYPE] [SIZE]
Error One of the following occurred:
• There is no paper loaded in the
specified tray, or the paper is not the
size requested, or the control panel
is not set for the size of paper
loaded.
• The tray is not properly adjusted for
size.
• The default paper size is set
incorrectly.
• If this message appears and the
tray contains the correct size of
paper, a sensor could be damaged
or a paper sensor lever could be
stuck.
1. Load the requested paper into
the specified tray (x).
Make sure that the trays are
correctly adjusted for size.
The tray type settings (and size
for Tray 1) must be set from the
printer’s control panel.
If you are trying to print A4 or
letter size paper and this
message appears, make sure
that the default paper size is set
correctly from the Printing Menu
in the printer’s control panel.
2. Press GO to print from the
next available tray.
3. Press - VALUE + to scroll
through the available types and
sizes.
4. Press SELECT to accept the
alternate type or size.
5. Inspect the switches in the
tray.
6. Turn the printer on with the
tray removed and push the
switches by hand to see if they
register.
TRAY X OPEN Warning The specified tray is open. Close the tray to continue.
UNSUPPORTED
SIZE IN TRAY
[YY]
Error An external paper handling device
detected an unsupported paper size.
The printer will go offline until the
condition is corrected.
Load a supported paper size in
the tray.
USE [TYPE]
[SIZE]
INSTEAD?
Error If the requested paper size or type is
not available, the printer asks if it
should use another paper size or
type instead.
1. Press - VALUE + to scroll
through the available types and
sizes.
2. Press SELECT to accept the
alternate type or size.
Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
620 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Input Device Messages
2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages
Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
Input Device
Condition
11.01
65.11.01 The detected tray is not consistent
with the paper size specified by the
Paper Handling Controller.
1. Make sure the size, source,
and type of paper selected from
the software configuration is
correct.
2. Pull out Tray 4 to verify that
the size and type of paper
loaded matches to the size and
type specified in the software
configuration.
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 621
13.11 PAPER
JAM IN INPUT
DEVICE
13.11 11 Timeout at Entry sensor (PS31) on
the 2000-sheet Input Tray
1. Open the Vertical Transfer
Unit (VTU) and remove media.
2. Make sure that the ENTRY
Sensor (PS31) can move freely.
3. Make sure that the three feed,
separation, and pickup rollers
are properly seated.
4. If the problem persists, open
the VTU and override its Open/
Close Door Sensor (PS35),
perform a Paper Path Test
feeding from the 2000-sheet
Input Tray, and make sure the
feed rollers are advancing the
paper. If rollers do not rotate,
verify the connections at the
Pickup Assembly and the
Controller PCA in the input
device.
5. If the rollers rotate and drop
down, but do not advance the
paper, replace the feed and
separation rollers using the
maintenance kit.
6. If the rollers do not rotate or
do not drop down, replace the
Pickup Assembly.
7. If the problem persists,
replace the Vertical Transfer Unit
(VTU) where sensor (PS31) is
located.
13.11 1B Timeout at Exit sensor (PS32) on the
2000-sheet Input Tray.
13.11 21 Page stays longer at Entry sensor
(PS31) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray.
13.11 2B Page stays longer at Exit sensor
(PS32) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray.
13.11 PAPER
JAM IN INPUT
DEVICE
13.11 31 At power on, Entry sensor (PS31) at
the VTU is active.
1. Open the Vertical Transfer
Unit (VTU) and remove media.
2. Verify that sensor (PS31 and
PS32) moves freely.
3. If any of the sensors (PS31 or
PS32) are damaged, replace the
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU).
13.11 PAPER
JAM IN INPUT
DEVICE
13.11 3B At power on, Exit sensor (PS32) at
the VTU is active.
1. Open the Vertical Transfer
Unit (VTU) and remove media.
2. Verify that sensor (PS31 and
PS32) moves freely.
3. If any of the sensors (PS31 or
PS32) are damaged, replace the
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU).
Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
622 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
66.11.01 INPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
66.11.01 Lifting motor malfunction. 1. Make sure there are no
objects or fragments of paper in
the free area at the 2000-sheet
Input Tray (Tray 4).
2. Make sure that the lifting plate
lifts up freely by hand.
3. Make sure that the paper size
plates are installed correctly, and
that they are not bent.
4. Replace the Paper Deck Drive
Assembly's Bushing, if broken.
5. Replace the Paper Deck Drive
Assembly.
6. Replace the 2000-sheet Input
Tray's (Tray 4) paper tray.
66.11.02 INPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
66.11.02 Feed motor malfunction. 1. Make sure there are no
objects or fragments of paper in
the free area at the 2000-sheet
Input Tray (Tray 4).
2. Check Paper Tray Raised
Sensor (PS34) that is working
properly (perform a sensor test).
3. Check for proper installation
of the Pick up roller.
4. Check the Pickup assembly
and Paper Deck Drive Assembly
cabling.
5. Replace the Pickup assembly
or the Paper Deck Drive
Assembly, if necessary.
Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 623
66.11.03 INPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
66.11.03 Lifting and feed motor malfunction. 1. Make sure there are no
objects or fragments of paper in
the free area at the 2000-sheet
Input Tray (Tray 4).
2. Make sure that the lifting plate
lifts up freely by hand.
3. Make sure that the paper size
plates are installed correctly, and
they are not bent.
4. Check for broken Paper Deck
Drive Assembly's Bushing, if so
replace it.
5. Replace the Paper Deck Drive
Assembly.
6. Check Paper Tray Raised
Sensor (PS34) is working
properly (perform a sensor test).
7. Check for proper installation
of the Pickup roller.
8. Check Pickup Assembly
cabling.
9. Replace the Pickup Assembly.
Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
624 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages
Table 7-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
Input Device
Condition
11.01
65.11.01 The detected tray is not consistent
with the paper size specified by
Paper Handling Controller.
1. Make sure the size, source,
and type of paper selected from
the software configuration is
correct.
2. Pull out tray 4 or 5 to verify
that the size and type of paper
loaded matches to the size and
type specified in the software
configuration.
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 625
Input Device
Condition
11.04
65.11.04 Lifter malfunction. 1. Make sure that the lifting plate
lifts up freely by hand.
2. Make sure that the paper size
plate is installed correctly, and is
not bent or broken.
3. Replace the Paper Deck Drive
Assembly's Bushing, if broken.
4. Replace the Paper Deck Drive
Assembly.
5. Replace the 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray's corresponding paper
tray.
Input Device
Condition
11.06
65.11.06 Requested to feed more than 4
pages at a time.
1. Check for proper installation
of the Pickup roller.
2. Check the Pickup assembly
and the Paper Deck Drive
Assembly cabling.
3. Replace the Pickup assembly
or the Paper Deck Drive
Assembly, if necessary.
Table 7-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
626 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
13.11 PAPER
JAM IN INPUT
DEVICE
13.11 11 Page did not arrive at entry sensor. 1. Open the Vertical Transfer
Unit (VTU) and remove media.
2. Make sure that the ENTRY
Sensor (PS1) can move freely.
3. Make sure that the three feed,
separation, and pickup rollers
are properly seated.
4. If the problem persists, open
the VTU and override its Open/
Close Door Sensor (PS35),
perform a Paper Path Test
feeding from the 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray, and make sure the
feed rollers are advancing the
paper. If rollers do not rotate,
verify the connections at the
Pickup Assembly and the
Controller PCA in the input
device.
5. If the rollers rotate and drop
down, but do not advance the
paper, replace the feed and
separation rollers using the
maintenance kit.
6. If the rollers do not rotate or
do not drop down, replace the
Pickup Assembly.
7. If the problem persists,
Replace the Vertical Transfer
Unit (VTU) where sensor (PS31)
is located.
13.11 1B Page did not arrive to exit sensor.
13.11 21 Page stays longer at entry sensor.
13.11 2B Page stays longer at exit sensor.
13.11 PAPER
JAM IN INPUT
DEVICE
13.11 31 At power on, entry sensor is active. 1. Open the Vertical Transfer
Unit (VTU) and remove media.
2. Verify that sensor (PS1 and
PS2) moves freely.
3. If any of the sensors (PS1 or
PS2) are damaged, replace the
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU).
13.11 PAPER
JAM IN INPUT
DEVICE
13.11 3B At power on, exit sensor is active. 1. Open the Vertical Transfer
Unit (VTU) and remove media.
2. Verify that sensor (PS1 and
PS2) moves freely.
3. If any of the sensors (PS1 or
PS2) are damaged, replace the
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU).
Table 7-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 627
Envelope Feeder Error Messages
Table 7-8. Envelope Feeder Error Messages
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
ENVELOPE
FEEDER EMPTY
Warning The envelope feeder is empty.
Printing of the current job is not
interrupted.
Refill the envelope feeder.
ENV FEEDER
LOAD [SIZE]
Error The envelope feeder does not have
the requested paper.
Put the requested paper into the
envelope feeder.
ENV FEEDER
LOAD [TYPE]
[SIZE]
Error There is no envelope in the feeder,
the wrong size is loaded in the
feeder, or the type and size is set
incorrectly in the control panel.
1. Load the requested envelope
type and size into the envelope
feeder.
2. Make sure that the envelope
size and type are set correctly
from the Paper Handling Menu
in the printer’s control panel.
3. Press GO if the desired
envelope is already loaded in the
feeder.
4. Press - VALUE + to scroll
through the available types and
sizes.
5. Press SELECT to accept the
alternate type or size.
WRONG ENVELOPE
FEEDER
INSTALLED
Error The envelope feeder you are trying
to install will not work for this printer.
Install the correct envelope
feeder.
628 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Output Device Messages
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 629
Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
13.12 or 13.22
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
13.12 01 or
13.22 01
Unexpected page at (ES) Entry
Sensor.
1. Open the Top Cover and
remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Entry
Sensor (ES) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Entry Sensor (ES)
is working properly.
4. If a problem persists, replace
the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
controller PCA.
5. Replace the sensors PCA.
13.12.11 or
13.22.11
Page did not reach the Entry Sensor
(ES) on time.
1. Open the Top Cover and
remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Entry
Sensor (ES) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Entry Sensor (ES)
is working properly.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
5. Replace the sensors PCA.
630 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
13.12 or 13.22
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
(continued)
13.12 12 or
13.22 12
Page did not reach the Paper Path
Sensor 1 (PPS1) on time.
1. Open the Paper Path Cover
and remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Paper Path
Sensor 1 (PPS1) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Paper Path Sensor
1(PPS1) is working properly.
4. Replace the sensors PCA.
5. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
13.12 15 or
13.22 15
Page did not reach the Paper Path
Sensor 2 (PPS2) on time.
1. Open the Paper Path Cover
and remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Paper Path
Sensor 2 (PPS2) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Paper Path Sensor
2 (PPS2) is working properly.
4. Replace the sensors PCA.
5. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
13.12 17 or
13.22 17
Page did not reach the Face-up
Delivery Sensor (FUDS) on time.
1. Open the Top Cover and
remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Face-up
Delivery Sensor (FUDS) moves
freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Entry Sensor
(FUDS) is working properly.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
5. Replace the sensors PCA.
13.12 21 or
13.22 21
Page stays at Entry Sensor (ES). 1. Open the Top Cover and
remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Entry
Sensor (ES) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Entry Sensor (ES)
is working properly.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
5. Replace the sensors PCA.
Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 631
13.12 or 13.22
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
(continued)
13.12 22 or
13.22 22
Page stays at Paper Path Sensor 1
(PPS1).
1. Open the Paper Path Cover
and remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Paper Path
Sensor 1 (PPS1) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Paper Path Sensor
1(PPS1) is working properly.
4. Replace the sensors PCA
5. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
13.12 25 or
13.22 25
Page stays at Paper Path Sensor 2
(PPS2).
1. Open the Paper Path Cover
and remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Paper Path
Sensor 2 (PPS2) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Paper Path Sensor
2 (PPS2) is working properly.
4. Replace the sensors PCA.
5. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
13.12 27 or
13.22 27
Page stays at Face-up Delivery
Sensor (FUDS).
1. Open the Top Cover and
remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Face-up
Delivery Sensor (FUDS) moves
freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Entry Sensor
(FUDS) is working properly.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
5. Replace the sensors PCA.
13.12 31 or
13.22 31
Page found at Entry Sensor (ES)
during power on sequence.
1. Open the Top Cover and
remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Entry
Sensor (ES) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Entry Sensor (ES)
is working properly.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
5. Replace the sensors PCA.
Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
632 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
13.12 or 13.22
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
(continued)
13.12 32 or
13.22 32
Page found at Paper Path Sensor 1
(PPS1) during power on sequence.
1. Open the Paper Path Cover
and remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Paper Path
Sensor 1 (PPS1) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Paper Path Sensor
1(PPS1) is working properly.
4. Replace the sensors PCA.
5. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
13.12 35 or
13.22 35
Page found at Paper Path Sensor 2
(PPS2) during power on sequence.
1. Open the Paper Path Cover
and remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Paper Path
Sensor 2 (PPS2) moves freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Paper Path Sensor
2 (PPS2) is working properly.
4. Replace the sensors PCA.
5. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
13.12 37 or
13.22 37
Page found at Face-up Delivery
Sensor (FUDS) during power on
sequence.
1. Open the Top Cover and
remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Face-up
Delivery Sensor (FUDS) moves
freely.
3. Perform a sensor test to make
sure that the Entry Sensor
(FUDS) is working properly.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
5. Replace the sensors PCA.
66.12.16 or
66.22.16
OUTPUT DEVICE
FAILURE
66.12 16 or
66.22.16
Solenoid Malfunction. 1. Check that the 2 parallel black
bars that are connected to the
Diverter Solenoids (S3 and S4)
have free movement.
2. Check for proper installation
of the C-link cables.
3. Replace the C-link cables.
4. Replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 633
66.12.32 or
66.22.32
OUTPUT DEVICE
FAILURE
66.12 32 or
66.22.32
Solenoid Malfunction. 1. Check that the 2 parallel black
bars that are connected to the
Diverter Solenoids (S3 and S4)
have free movement.
2. Check for proper installation
of the C-link cables.
3. Replace the C-link cables.
4. Replace the 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox controller PCA.
Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
634 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
8-bin Mailbox Error Messages
Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
22.1 or 12.1
OUTPUT DEVICE
CONDITION
65.22.01
or
65.12.01
The Face-up Bin is too full. 1. Empty the Face-up Bin.
2. Check that sensor flag moves
freely. (PSFaceFull.)
3. Check for proper cable
connection in flipper area.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the Flipper assembly.
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 635
OUTPUT DEVICE
CONDITION 22.2
or 12.2
65.22.02
or
65.12.02
Elevator Problem (Home not Found). 1. Check that the blind cover or
scan bar is installed properly.
2. Check for jammed paper in
the delivery head assembly.
3. Check for free movement of
the delivery head assembly.
4. Check that all paper bins are
seated correctly.
5. Check that paper bins or the
blind cover are not broken.
6. Replace the delivery head
motor.
7. Replace the MBM controller
PCA.
8. Replace the delivery head
assembly.
OUTPUT DEVICE
CONDITION 22.3
or 12.3
65.22.03
or
65.12.03
Elevator Problem Scanning bins
Error.
1. Check that the blind cover or
scan bar is installed properly.
2. Check for jammed paper in
the delivery head assembly.
3. Check for free movement of
the delivery head assembly.
4. Check that all paper bins are
seated correctly.
5. Check that there is no paper
bin or blind cover broken.
6. If the error message persists,
replace the delivery head motor
(M1), the MBM controller PCA,
or the Delivery Head Assembly.
OUTPUT DEVICE
CONDITION 22.4
or 12.4
65.22.04
or
65.12.04
Slider Jam in the head assembly. 1. Perform a paper path test.
2. Check for damaged sensor
(PSExit 1) or (PSExit 2) in the
delivery head assembly.
3. Check fingers in the head
assembly, they must be over the
ejector rollers.
4. Replace the Head Assembly.
Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
636 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
13.22 or 13.12
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
13.22 01
or
13.12 01
Flipper Entry Sensor (PSEntry) Jam. 1. Open the Jam Access Door
and remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Full Bin
Sensor Flag (PSFaceFull)
moves freely.
3. Make sure that the Flipper's
shaft is not out of place.
4. If the problem persists,
replace Flipper Assembly.
5. Replace the MBM Controller
PCA.
13.22 02
or
13.12 02
Flipper Face-up Sensor (PSFaceup)
Jam.
1. Open the Jam Access Door
and remove any jammed paper.
2. Make sure that the Full Bin
Sensor Flag (PSFaceFull)
moves freely.
3. Make sure that the Flipper's
shaft is not out of place.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the Flipper Assembly.
5. Replace the MBM Controller
PCA.
13.22 03
or
13.12 03
Belt Jam (Transport Belt Motor (M5)
stop for an unexpected reason).
1. Check for jammed paper at
the double-belt system and
Delivery Head Assembly.
2. Ensure free movement of the
double belt (both belts).
3. Ensure parallel position of the
double belt system.
4. Check that the Metal Tape is
in place and in good condition.
5. Replace the Transport Belt
Motor (M5).
6. Replace the MBM Controller
PCA.
7. Replace the Delivery Head
Assembly.
Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 637
13.22 or 13.12
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
13.22 04
or
13.12 04
Jam in Head Assembly at (PSExit 1). 1. Check for jammed paper in
the Delivery Head Assembly.
2. Ensure free movement in
(PSExit 1) sensor flags on the
delivery head assembly.
3. Check the delivery roller's
fingers. They must be over the
ejector rollers on the delivery
head assembly.
4. Replace the flat ribbon cable
that connects to the delivery
head assembly to the controller
PCA.
5. Replace the MBM Controller
PCA.
6. Replace Delivery Head
Assembly.
13.22 or 13.12
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
13.22 05
or
12.12 05
Jam in Head Assembly at (PSExit 2). 1. Check for jammed paper in
the Delivery Head Assembly.
2. Ensure free movement in
(PSExit 2) sensor flags on the
delivery head assembly.
3. Check the delivery roller's
fingers. They must be over the
ejector rollers on the delivery
head assembly.
4. Replace the flat ribbon cable
that connects to the delivery
head assembly to the controller
PCA.
5. Replace the MBM Controller
PCA.
6. Replace Delivery Head
Assembly.
Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
638 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
13.22 or 13.12
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
13.22 06
or
13.12 06
Elevator (Head Assembly) Jam when
scanning and looking for home
position.
1. Check for jammed paper in
the delivery head assembly.
2. Check that the blind cover is
properly installed.
3. Check that the Scan Bar (if
stapler unit is installed) is
properly seated.
4. Check for free movement of
the delivery head assembly.
5. Check that all paper bins are
seated correctly.
6. Check for broken paper bins,
blind cover, or Scan Bar.
7. Replace the flat ribbon cable
that connects to the delivery
head assembly to the controller
PCA.
8. Replace the delivery head
motor (M1).
9. Replace the MBM controller
PCA.
10. Replace the delivery head
assembly.
13.22 or 13.12
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
13.22 0A
or
13.12 0A
Communication problem. Wrong
Page Request.
1. Make sure that all the C-link
cables are properly installed and
the connectors of this cables are
tight enough.
2. Move the 8-bin Mailbox away
from the Engine and resend the
job.
3. Replace the C-link cables.
4. Perform a Power Cycle.
5. If the error condition persists,
replace the Formatter board.
66.12.08 or
66.22.08
OUTPUT DEVICE
FAILURE
66.12.08
or
66.22 08
Flipper Motor Malfunction. 1. Check for jammed paper in
the Flipper Assembly area.
2. Replace Flipper assembly.
3. Replace the MBM controller
PCA.
66.12.09 or
66.22.09
OUTPUT DEVICE
FAILURE
66.12.09
or
66.22 09
External Memory Error. Replace the MBM Controller
PCA.
Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 639
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
66.12.zz or
66.22.zz
OUTPUT DEVICE
FAILURE
66.12.zz
or
66.12.zz
MBM C-link is not responding. 1. Check for proper installation
of the C-link cables.
2. Replace the C-link cables.
3. Replace the 8-bin Mailbox
controller PCA.
Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
640 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Finisher Devices Messages
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
Stapler Error Messages
Table 7-11. Stapler Error Messages
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
CHECK FINISHER
DEVICE
alternates with
CLEAR JAM
Error A stapler jam or a paper jam
occurred.
1. Clear the paper from the
stapler.
2. Open the top cover of the
stapler and clear the stapler jam.
3. Resend the print job.
CHECK FINISHER
DEVICE
alternates with
FINISHER ALIGN
ERROR
Error The paper is not aligned correctly in
the stapler.
1. Remove the paper from the
stapler.
2. Resend the print job.
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 641
FINISHER LOW
ON FINISHING
AGENT
Warning The finishing device is running out of
finishing material.
Refill the finishing device.
FINISHER OUT
OF BINDING
AGENT
Error The external paper handling finisher
device is out of binding agent.
Refill the finishing device.
STAPLER LOW ON
STAPLES
Warning The stapler device is running out of
staples.
Refill the stapler device.
STAPLER OUT OF
STAPLES
Warning The external paper handling stapler
device is out of staples.
Refill the stapler device.
TOO MANY PAGES
IN JOB TO
STAPLE
Warning The external paper handling stapler
device received too many pages to
staple. The pages will be ejected
unstapled.
Staple the pages manually.
13.23 or 13.33
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
13.33 0A Staple Jam. • Clear jammed staple.
• Replace staple cartridge.
• Replace Stapler Top Cover
Assembly.
• Replace Stapler Controller
PCA.
13.33 0B Rack Jam. • Remove jammed media.
• Perform a device reset cycle by
opening and closing the Stapler
Top Cover.
• Manually move the internal
parts of the stapling unit looking
for free movement.
• Replace the Stapler Top Cover
Assembly.
• Replace the Stapler Controller
PCA
13.33 0C Slider Jam. • Remove jammed media.
• Perform a device reset cycle by
opening and closing the Stapler
Top Cover.
• Manually move the sliders
looking for free movement and
observe the power on sequence.
• Replace the Stapling Bed
Assembly
• Replace the Stapler Controller
PCA.
Table 7-11. Stapler Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
642 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
13.23 or 13.33
PAPER JAM IN
OUTPUT DEVICE
13.33 0D Retainer Jam. • Remove jammed media.
• Perform a device reset cycle by
opening and closing the Stapler
Top Cover.
• If the problem persists replace
the Stapling Bed Assembly.
Table 7-11. Stapler Error Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 643
Duplexer Error Messages
Table 7-12. Duplexer Error Messages
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
13. 1 13.1 0B Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. No
page from Duplexer.
1. Open the front door, and
remove any paper.
2. Open the right door, and
remove any paper.
3. Remove any paper from the
Duplexer.
4. Perform a Paper Path Test
using the Duplexer.
5. Check that the sensors in the
Duplexer have free movement.
6. If the problem persists,
replace the entire Duplexer Unit.
13.1 16 Paper feed 1. Paper late jam.
Duplexer's 2nd sensor.
13.1 1F Paper feed 1. Paper late jam.
Duplexer's 2nd sensor.
13.10 13.10 15 Duplex turn around. Paper late jam.
Duplexer's 1st sensor.
13.11 13.11 04 Duplex turn around. Paper stopped
jam. Duplexer's 1st sensor.
13.12 13.12 0D Duplex path. Paper late jam.
Duplexer's 2nd sensor.
13.20 13.20 08 Could not automatically eject paper.
644 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Paper Handling Controller Error Messages
Table 7-13. Paper Handling Controller Error Messages
Control Panel
Message Event
Log Error
Message
Description Recommended Action
66.00.zz
SERVICE ERROR
66.00.01
through
66.00.65
A communication error occurred in
the Paper Handling Controller or in
the controller PCA of an external
paper handling device.
1. Turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on.
2. Replace or exchange C-link
cables.
3. If the problem persists,
replace the PCA controller board
for the input or output device.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the Formatter PCA.
66.00.15
SERVICE ERROR
66.00.15 The Paper Handling Controller had a
bad C-link (communication) cable.
This error could be caused by a
power failure.
1. Turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on.
2. If the problem persists, check
the C-link and power cables.
3. If the problem persists, check
the device power connector and
power supply (internal or
external). Replace if damaged.
4. If the problem persists,
replace the PCA Controller
board for the device.
5. If the problem persists,
replace the Formatter PCA.
66.00.23
SERVICE ERROR
66.00.23 Error 66.00.23 is due to a bad C-
link connection or a damaged C-link
cable.
1. Turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on.
2. If the problem persists,
replace the PCA Controller
board for the input or output
device.
3. If the problem persists,
replace the Formatter PCA.
C4265-90907 Paper Path Troubleshooting 645
Step 4. Paper Path Troubleshooting
Paper jams occur in the printer when paper either does not reach or
clear a photosensor along the printer's paper path in a specific
amount of time. If a paper jam occurs, a 13.xx PAPER JAM message
is displayed on the printer's Control Panel. The following lists general
questions you should ask and topics you should explore prior to
troubleshooting:
Table 7-14. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions
Problem Action
What is the frequency of the
paper jams (e.g.
continuous, one jam per
100 pages, one jam per
1000 pages, etc.)?
Verify with the customer. Print or display the Event Log to
determine paper jam history. See Display on page 598 and
Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages on page 604 and
evaluate the Event Log.
Do paper jams only occur
when the paper is fed from
a particular paper input
source (e.g., Tray 1, Tray 2,
Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, or
Envelope Feeder)?
See Paper Jams on page 646 and use the Paper Path Test to
isolate the problem.
Do jams only occur when
paper is output to a specific
output bin (e.g., Face-down
bin, Face-up Bin, mailbox
bin, duplex operation,
stapler)?
Use Paper Path Test on page 648 to isolate the problem.
Do paper jams occur with a
specific type of media? Try known good media. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print
Media Guide.
Where does the leading
edge of the first sheet of
paper in the printer's paper
path stop when a jam
occurs? Are any sheets of
paper physically damaged
or torn?
Attempt to duplicate. See Paper Path Test on page 648. Inspect
the paper path and all paper path mechanical assemblies prior to
the leading paper jam.
646 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Paper Jams
Paper jams occur most often when:
●Paper trays are not correctly loaded. Make sure the paper is
loaded with the arrow pointing up in Tray 1 and down in Trays 2, 3,
4, and 5.
●The print media does not meet the specifications listed in the HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.
●The media is in poor condition.
●The printer needs cleaning.
The printer monitors the timing of four sensors to determine that a
paper jam has occurred: PS2, PS1, PS1403, and PS1402.
Is the customer loading the
paper trays correctly? Observe the customer loading the paper. Do not fan the paper.
See proper paper handling procedures in the HP LaserJet Printer
Family Print Media Guide.
Is the customer overfilling
the paper trays? Make sure that the paper is NOT over the maximum fill marks in
the paper trays. Observe the customer loading paper in the trays.
Are the paper tray guides
set correctly? Make sure that the Tray 2 and 3 left-side paper fence is set
correctly at both the front and rear of the tray. Make sure that the
front fence is locked into the correct position. For Tray 4, make
sure that all adjustments are set correctly: front, back, and side at
the top and bottom of the tray.
Does the printer need
cleaning? Inspect the paper path and paper path rollers. See Cleaning the
Printer and Paper Handling Accessories on page 158.
When was the User
Maintenance performed on
the printer?
From the Configuration Page, determine the number of pages
since the last maintenance (see figure 7-17 on page 654). The
Printer Maintenance Kit should be installed every 350,000
images.
Table 7-14. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions (continued)
Problem Action
C4265-90907 Paper Path Troubleshooting 647
If a paper jam occurs, the printer will display a 13.x PAPER JAM
message on the control panel. See “Printer Message Tables” on page
607 for detailed descriptions of the 13.x messages and the
recommended actions to resolve the errors.
Figure 7-14 shows the possible locations for most of the paper jams.
Figure 7-14 Paper Path Jam Locations
1Toner cartridge area 7Tray 2 and Tray 3
2Tray 1 pickup roller and feed area 8Fusing Assembly Area
3Right door 9Left door
4Tray 4 (2000-sheet Input Tray) and
Tray 5 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray,
not shown) transfer door
10 8-bin Mailbox
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
(not shown)
5Tray 4 (2000-sheet Input Tray) and
Tray 5 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray,
not shown)
11 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler
6Front door
648 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Paper Path Test
Using the error trend information from Display on page 598, you can
verify a specific printer paper path with the paper path test. You must
first set the desired paper destination in the configuration menu and
then select the paper path test. The paper path test menu will allow
you to select the desired paper source and number.
Note Feeding paper from Tray 1 will not allow the user to send paper to the
Face-down output bins during this test.
Note If the 8-bin Mailbox is installed, in order to perform the paper path test,
the printer must be configured to mailbox mode. If the printer is not in
mailbox mode, ask the network administrator to change the
configuration to mailbox mode to complete this test.
To perform a paper path test:
1Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2Press ITEM until PRINT PAPER PATH TEST appears.
3Press SELECT.
4Press + or - until the desired input tray appears.
5Press SELECT.
6Press + or - until the desired output bin appears.
7Press SELECT.
8Press + or - until the desired duplex mode appears.
9Press SELECT.
10 Press + or - to choose the desired number of copies.
11 Press SELECT.
C4265-90907 Paper Path Troubleshooting 649
Figure 7-15 Paper Path Test Source and Output Selection
Customer Print Job
Ask the customer to send a print job from the problem source(s) to
the problem destination(s). Try to recreate the paper jam errors by
having the customer do typical print jobs and the type of print job that
has been causing the paper jams.
When verifying print jobs, make sure that all of the settings are
selected as desired. Keep in mind that application settings take
priority over driver settings, which take priority over the printer control
panel settings. If a single setting is not present in the application, but
is set in the driver, that will override the front panel settings.
Note JetAdmin does have capabilities to override paper types and sizes and
certain conditions. See the HP LaserJet 8100, 8100 N and 8100 DN
Printers User Guide for more information.
650 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Clearing Paper Jams
Note Open and close all printer covers to clear the paper jam message. After
removing a sheet of paper, you may need to check other areas to make
sure that all paper has been removed.
All portions of a jammed piece of paper must be removed or you may
run into repeated jams.
If the jam persists, try the following:
●If you have PostScript installed, use the JAM RECOVERY=ON menu
item under the PostScript Menu. The printer will attempt to
automatically recover from paper jams.
●Execute a formfeed from the computer or the printer's control
panel. A formfeed may flush any paper or envelopes left in the
printer.
●Check to make sure you have located and removed all scraps of
paper from inside the printer.
●Use the Event Log Page and Event Log Codes to aid you in
isolating where the errors are occurring.
Clearing Repeated Paper Jams
1Check to see that media is correctly loaded in trays and that all
width guides are correctly set (not skewed).
2Try turning over the stack of paper in the tray. If you are using
letterhead paper, try printing from Tray 1.
3Do not use previously printed paper or torn, worn, or irregular
paper.
4Check the media specifications. If it is outside of the
recommended specifications, problems may occur. (See the HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.)
5The printer may be dirty. Clean the printer as described in the first
section of this chapter.
6Check that paper loaded in Tray 1 is NOT longer than 17.7 inches
(450 mm) or wider than 11.7 inches (297 mm). (These are the
maximum dimensions that the printer can feed; otherwise the
printer will jam.)
7Make sure that Tray 4 and Tray 5 are set for the size of paper
installed and that the tray is not overloaded with paper.
C4265-90907 Information Pages 651
Step 5. Information Pages
From the printer’s Control Panel you can print pages that give details
about the printer and its current configuration. The following
information pages are described:
●Menu Map (below)
●Event Log Pages (page 598)
●Configuration Pages (page 653)
●File Directory Page (page 656)
●Usage Page (page 657)
For a complete list of the printer’s information pages, print a Menu
Map and see the Information Menu.
Menu Map
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the
printer Control Panel, print a Control Panel Menu Map:
1Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2Press ITEM until PRINT MENU MAP appears.
3Press SELECT to print the Menu Map.
The content of the Menu Map varies, depending on the options
currently installed in the printer. The printer driver or software
application can override many of these values. See figure 7-16 on
page 652 for a sample Menu Map.
652 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-16 Sample Menu Map
Note Items will only appear if options are installed.
Table 7-15. Key to Figure 7-16
Information Menu lets you print information pages and perform a paper path test.
Paper Handling Menu contains paper handling options.
Print Quality Menu lets you set print quality settings.
Printing Menu contains various print options.
Configuration Menu contains various printer settings.
I/O Menu contains communication settings.
Resets Menu shows options for resetting the printer.
C4265-90907 Information Pages 653
Configuration Pages
Use the configuration pages to view current printer and copy module
settings, help troubleshoot printer problems, or verify installation of
optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and
printer languages.
To print a configuration page from the printer control panel:
1Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears.
3Press SELECT to print the configuration page.
See figure 7-17 on page 654 for a sample configuration page. The
content of the configuration page varies, depending on the options
currently installed in the printer.
If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration
page, verify that the C-link cabling is correctly connected and
functional (figure 7-7 on page 583) and that DC power is available to
the paper handling devices. Check and reseat suspect cable
connections. If any of the cables are replaced, you must cycle the
power to have the printer recognize the device again.
The Menu Map shows current control panel settings. See figure 7-16
on page 652 for a sample Menu Map. See chapter 3 for information
about the default settings.
654 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-17 Sample printer Configuration Page (1 of 2)
Installed Personalities and Options
Lists all printer languages that are
installed (such as PCL and PS) and lists
the options that are installed in each
DIMM slot and EIO slot.
Paper Trays and Options
Lists the size settings for all the
trays and lists the optional paper
handling devices that are installed.
Printer Information
Lists the serial number, HP
JetSend IP addresses, page
counts, and other information
for the printer.
Memory
Lists printer memory, PCL Driver
Work Space (DWS), and I/O
buffering and resource saving
information.
Security
Lists the
status of the
printer’s
Control Pane
lock, Control
Panel
password,
and disk
drive.
Event Log
Lists the
number of
entries in
the log, the
maximum
number of
entries
viewable,
and the last
three
entries.
HP Toner Gauge
Indicates the amount of toner remaining
in the cartridge. Must be reset at the
Control Panel when a new cartridge is
installed.
C4265-90907 Information Pages 655
Figure 7-18 Sample Copy Module Configuration Page
General Information
Lists information about the EIO Copy Connect Card,
model and serial number, firmware revision, and
other information for the copy module.
Usage Count Information
Indicates total ADF and flatbed scans.
Cleaning Counter
Indicates number of scans since
last cleaning. (Reset in service
mode).
Maintenance Counter
Indicates number of scans since
the last time maintenance was
performed. (Reset in service
mode).
656 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
File Directory Page
Print a file directory page to ensure the copy module firmware is
loaded on the printer’s hard disk drive.
To print a file directory page from the printer control panel:
1Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2Press ITEM until PRINT FILE DIRECTORY appears.
3Press SELECT to print the file directory page.
Figure 7-19 Sample File Directory Page
Information about the
hard disk
Indicates device type and
location, capacity, serial
number, and other
information.
File Size
Indicates size of
each file.
Directory/File Name
Shows the names of directories
and files.
C4265-90907 Information Pages 657
Usage Page
The usage page is designed to fit into a pay-per-page (PPP) model. A
reseller can configure the usage page with instructions for a user to
send the information back to the reseller in order to prepare bills.
Print a usage page from the printer control panel (or access the
information remotely from Web JetAdmin) to determine how many
simplex or duplex pages of each paper size have been scanned on
the copy module and printed on the printer. Average toner coverage is
approximated by counting pixels. Paper jams are not counted. The
data cannot be reset manually and values such as total print and scan
impressions, toner coverage, serial number, default language and
default paper size are backed up between the printer’s NVRAM and
hard disk.
To print a usage page from the printer control panel:
1Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2Press ITEM until PRINT USAGE PAGE appears.
3Press SELECT to print the usage page.
658 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-20 Sample Usage Page
Information box
configurable by resellers
Simplex and duplex counted separately
Resellers
can specify
click values
for each
paper size
Precalcu-
lated total
prints and
scans
Average percent toner
coverage Number of toner
cartridges that have
been in the printer
C4265-90907 Information Pages 659
Verify Installed Options
In the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration
page, look for options such as hard disk information and DIMM types
RAM or ROM and sizes.
Verify that the options installed in the printer are reflected in the
configuration page. If an installed device is not shown on the
configuration page, see table 7-16 on page 660 for recommended
actions.
The Paper Tray and Options section of the configuration page
identifies two types of paper handling devices that communicate or
interact with the printer:
●Engine DC controller-driven devices
•Duplexer
•Envelope Feeder
●Communication Link Devices (C-link protocol)
•Input devices:
2000-sheet Input Tray
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
•Output devices:
8-bin Mailbox
5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (includes a finisher)
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker
While the engine DC controller-driven devices draw power (24V DC)
and control signals from the engine, the C-link devices have their own
power supply and controller board.
The information from the Paper Handling Controller is carried by the
C-link cables that connect the controller board of all the C-link
protocol supported devices. The C-link protocol supports up to 5
devices connected to the paper handling controller in a daisy chain.
Each device controller has an input or output port that provides
flexible connections in different configurations. However, it is
recommended to use the configuration shown in figure 7-7 on page
583 to avoid rearrangements in the supported device numbering and
confusions when evaluating the Event Log.
660 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Table 7-16. Printer Devices Troubleshooting
Device Action if installed and not detected
Duplexer Turn the power off, reseat the Duplexer, verify that the connector is not
broken, and turn the printer on.
If the connector is broken or turning the printer on and off does not work,
then replace the duplex cable and/or duplexer.
Envelope Feeder Turn the power off, reseat the envelope feeder, and turn the printer on.
If this does not work, replace the envelope feeder.
Device 1
2000-sheet Input
Tray
Device 2
8-bin Mailbox
Device 3
Stapler
Verify that the C-link cables are installed correctly (see figure 7-7 on page
583).
Remove all C-link connections and visually inspect for connector damage
on the cable pins and connector ends.
Try using a different cable to connect the problem device directly to the
Paper Handling Controller. All C-link cables are wired the same, but are
different lengths.
If a device is not recognized, replace the device controller or defective C-link
cable.
Device 1
2 x 500-sheet
and
2000-sheet Input
Tray
Verify that AC power is present in the 2000-sheet or 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray.
Verify that the C-link cable is connected properly to the Paper Handling
Controller or the tray will not lift.
Device 2
7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox
Verify that the DC power supply is receiving power.
Verify that the DC power supply output is connected to the 8-bin Mailbox
controller.
Verify that the C-link cables are properly installed and external power
applied. Check if Fuse F202 in the 2 x 500-sheet or 2000-sheet Input Tray's
Controller PCA is blown.
Replace the DC power supply.
Replace the 8-bin Mailbox controller.
C4265-90907 Image Quality 661
Step 6. Image Quality
When you are working with customers, obtain a print sample before
you begin troubleshooting their printer. Ask the customer to explain
the quality they expect from the printer. The print sample will also help
clarify the customer's explanation and expectations.
Table 7-17. Image Quality
Problem Action
1. Do you have a print
sample? Obtain a print sample from the customer.
2. Does the problem repeat
on the page? Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler in figure 7-21 on page 677.
3. Is the toner cartridge full
and is it manufactured by
HP?
Check the toner cartridge using the check list on page 662.
4. Is the printer clean? Perform the cleaning procedure described in Cleaning the Printer
and Paper Handling Accessories on page 158.
5. Is the customer using
print media that meets all
HP paper specification
standards?
For more information about HP's paper specification standards,
see Paper Capacities and Sizes on page 50 and the HP LaserJet
Family Paper Specification Guide.
6. Is the print sample similar
to those in the Image
Quality Tables on page
663?
Compare and perform the actions recommended in Image Quality
Tables on page 663.
7. Is the problem on the
drum or transfer roller? Perform the steps in Half Self Test Functional Check on page 678
to determine where the defect is.
If the defect is on the drum, replace the toner cartridge.
If it is not on the drum, replace the transfer roller.
662 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Check the Toner Cartridge
Image formation defects are often the result of toner cartridge
problems. If there is any doubt, always replace the toner cartridge
before troubleshooting image defects.
Use the following check list to make sure that the toner cartridge is
still operable.
●Make sure that the toner cartridge has toner.
Full toner cartridge weight = 3200 grams (114 oz)
Empty weight = 2200 grams (80.5 oz)
●Check the expiration date of the toner cartridge (stamped on the
cartridge box).
●Check the toner cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or
refilled.
●Make sure that the toner cartridge is seated properly in the printer
cavity.
●Inspect the cartridge for toner leaking through worn seals. (If the
drum has been manually rotated it may have caused internal
damage and toner spills may result.)
Note Toner cartridges are rated for 20,000 images at 5% coverage. It is
possible to wear out the gears and the cartridge seals before TONER
LOW is displayed if the 20,000 image expectancy is exceeded.
●Check the surface of the photosensitive drum in the toner
cartridge to see if it has been damaged or scratched. Touching
the drum will contaminate the photosensitive surface and may
cause spotting and defects during printing.
●White areas on the page may indicate that the drum has been
exposed to light for too long. If white areas appear, stop the
printer and wait a few minutes. This should eliminate most
defective images. If not, the toner cartridge may be placed in a
dark environment for several days, which may restore some life to
the drum.
C4265-90907 Image Quality 663
Image Quality Tables
Table 7-18. Blank (White) Page
Possible Cause Recommended Action
OCCASIONAL BLANK PAGES:
1. Software Configuration. Make sure that the application
software is not sending incorrect
page length requests, or extra page
eject commands.
2. Network Configuration. Some
sharing devices on networks may
generate a blank page as a
separator.
Check with the network administrator.
3. Multiple Feeds. The printer may be
feeding two or more pages at once
because the paper is difficult to
separate.
Remove the paper from the tray and
bend the stack to separate the pages
(see the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Print Media Guide).
ALL PAGES BLANK:
1. Sealing tape left in toner cartridge. Remove the sealing tape.
Table 7-19. Black Pages
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Defective toner cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge.
2. Light is leaking into the printer. Make sure that all covers are in place.
664 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
3. High voltage contact springs are
dirty or defective. The high voltage
contacts are mounted on the High
Voltage Power Supply PCA and
protrude into the toner cartridge
cavity.
Inspect and clean the high voltage
contacts. If damaged, replace the
High Voltage Power Supply PCA. See
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)
on page 323 for instructions.
4. High voltage power supply circuit is
defective (not supplying the correct
negative voltage).
Replace the High Voltage Power
Supply PCA. See High Voltage Power
Supply (HVPS) on page 323 for
instructions.
5. DC Controller PCA is defective. If
the DC Controller turns on the laser
beam continuously, the entire surface
of the Photosensitive drum is
neutralized causing a completely
black page.
Replace the DC Controller PCA. See
PCA, DC Controller on page 315 for
instructions.
6. Laser/Scanner Assembly is faulty
(turning laser on continuously). Replace the Laser/Scanner
Assembly. See Laser/Scanner
Assembly on page 308 for
instructions.
7. Connectors between the Laser/
Scanner unit and DC Controller are
not seated properly or are defective.
Inspect and reseat the connectors.
Replace cables as necessary.
Table 7-20. Fading Print
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Toner supply is low. Shake the cartridge gently to
redistribute the toner, or replace the
cartridge.
2. Print Density is set incorrectly. Change to a darker setting and retry
printing.
Table 7-19. Black Pages (continued)
Possible Cause Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Image Quality 665
3. EconoMode is on. EconoMode
saves toner by reducing the dot
density. This may appear to be a print
quality problem in some cases.
Turn EconoMode off. Verify that
EconoMode is not being enabled by
either the printer driver or the job
application.
4. Paper does not meet
specifications. The moisture content,
conductivity, or surface finish may not
work correctly with the
electrophotographic process.
Try a different paper lot (see HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide).
5. Transfer Roller is defective or
incorrectly installed. If the Transfer
Roller loses conductivity, it cannot
effectively pull toner from the drum to
the paper.
Inspect the Transfer Roller for proper
installation and contact. If the
Transfer Roller is damaged, replace
it. See Transfer Roller Assembly on
page 337 for instructions.
6. Laser/Scanner door is not opening
properly. 1. Remove and reseat the toner
cartridge.
2. Check the Laser/Scanner shutter
door for proper operation. If defective,
replace the Laser/Scanner Assembly.
See Laser/Scanner Assembly on
page 308 for instructions.
7. High voltage contact springs are
dirty or defective. The high voltage
contacts are mounted on the High
Voltage Power Supply PCA and
protrude into the toner cartridge
cavity.
Check the contacts for functionality. If
damaged, replace the High Voltage
Power Supply PCA. See High Voltage
Power Supply (HVPS) on page 323
for instructions.
8. High Voltage Power Supply PCA is
defective. Replace the High Voltage Power
Supply PCA. See High Voltage Power
Supply (HVPS) on page 323 for
instructions.
9. DC Controller PCA is defective.
The DC Controller supplies the
proper voltage to the High Voltage
Power Supply PCA.
Replace the DC Controller PCA. See
PCA, DC Controller on page 315 for
instructions.
Table 7-20. Fading Print (continued)
Possible Cause Recommended Action
666 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Table 7-21. Dropout
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Single sheet of paper is defective. Try reprinting the job.
2. Paper does not meet
specifications. The moisture content,
conductivity, or surface finish may not
work correctly with the
electrophotographic process.
Try a different paper lot (see HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide).
3. DC Controller is defective (low
primary voltage). Replace the DC Controller. See PCA,
DC Controller on page 315 for
instructions.
4. High Voltage Power Supply PCA is
defective. Replace the High Voltage Power
Supply PCA. See High Voltage Power
Supply (HVPS) on page 323 for
instructions.
5. Transfer Roller is defective. Replace the Transfer Roller. See
Transfer Roller Assembly on page
337 for instructions.
Table 7-22. Black Lines (parallel or perpendicular to path)
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Toner cartridge is not seated
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
2. Toner cartridge is damaged. Inspect the toner cartridge for a
scratched or streaked photosensitive
drum. Clean the printer (see Cleaning
the Printer and Paper Handling
Accessories on page 158), and
replace the cartridge.
C4265-90907 Image Quality 667
3. Fusing Assembly is contaminated
or damaged. Inspect the Fusing Assembly for
toner build-up or scratches on the
fuser rollers. Replace the Fusing
Assembly if damaged. See Fusing
Assembly on page 306 for
instructions.
4. Static Eliminator Strip teeth are
contaminated or defective. Clean using compressed air. Be
careful not to spray the Transfer
Roller.
5. Repetitive defect. If the lines are
repeated at a consistent interval
down the page, this is a repetitive
defect.
See the Repetitive Image Defect
Ruler (figure 7-21 on page 677).
Table 7-23. Toner Smear
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Paper does not meet
specifications. The moisture content,
conductivity, or surface finish of the
media being printed may not work
correctly with the electrophotographic
process.
Try a different paper lot or other
media (see HP LaserJet Printer
Family Print Media Guide).
2. Fusing Rollers are dirty. Toner
build-up can cause the print on a
page to smear.
Remove and inspect the Fusing
Assembly for excessive toner build-
up.
3. The Static Eliminator Strip is dirty
or is not grounded, allowing a static
charge to remain on the page.
Clean the Anti-Static Brush using
compressed air.
Table 7-22. Black Lines (parallel or perpendicular to path)
Possible Cause Recommended Action
668 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
4. Fusing Assembly is defective. The
print will smear if the Fusing
Assembly is not heated sufficiently to
bond the toner image to the paper.
Replace the Fusing Assembly. See
Fusing Assembly on page 306 for
instructions. Try changing fuser
modes depending on the type of
media used.
5. DC Controller is defective. The DC
Controller regulates fusing roller
temperature.
If a new Fusing Assembly does not
resolve the problem, replace the DC
Controller PCA. See PCA, DC
Controller on page 315 for
instructions.
Table 7-24. Background Scatter
Possible Cause Recommended Action
Random Background Scatter
1. Paper does not meet
specifications. The moisture content,
conductivity or surface finish may not
work correctly with the
electrophotographic process.
Try a different media or paper lot (see
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print
Media Guide).
2. Inside of printer is dirty (toner may
have leaked out of the toner
cartridge).
Clean inside of printer (see Cleaning
the Printer and Paper Handling
Accessories on page 158). Install a
new toner cartridge if leaking.
3. Printing on envelope seams.
Printing on an envelope seam can
cause a background scatter problem.
Move the text to an area without
seams. If not printing on seams, try a
higher print density setting (see item
6, below).
4. Toner cartridge is defective. Install a new toner cartridge.
Table 7-23. Toner Smear (continued)
Possible Cause Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Image Quality 669
5. Transfer Roller is dirty or worn. A
worn Transfer Roller can cause
background scatter due to improper
bias voltages.
Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry,
lint-free cloth. DO NOT touch the
Transfer Roller with your fingers. If
the problem persists, replace the
Transfer Roller Assembly. See
Transfer Roller Assembly on page
337 for instructions.
6. Print Density is set too low,
causing background scatter,
particularly with envelopes and
heavier papers.
Adjust the print density to a higher
setting.
Background Scatter at Leading Edge Only (Leading Edge Halo)
1. Toner buildup in the Fuser Inlet
Guide. Clean Fuser Inlet Guide. See
Cleaning the Printer and Paper
Handling Accessories on page 158
for instructions.
Table 7-25. Repetitive Defects
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Toner cartridge is damaged. If the
defect repeats at any of the following
intervals and in the direction of paper
movement, it is associated with a
component inside the toner cartridge.
See figure 7-21 on page 677.
Inspect the drum for scratches or
damage. Replace the toner cartridge.
Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler,
figure 7-21 on page 677.
2. Transfer Roller has toner on it. If
defects occur on the back of the page
at intervals of 54mm (2.3 inches), the
Transfer Roller may be dirty. This
problem sometimes corrects itself
after a few pages.
Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry,
lint-free cloth. DO NOT touch the
Transfer Roller with your fingers. If
the problem persists, replace the
Transfer Roller Assembly. See
Transfer Roller Assembly on page
337 for instructions.
Table 7-24. Background Scatter (continued)
Possible Cause Recommended Action
670 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
3. Rollers are dirty. Any dirty roller in
the paper path may result in a
repetitive print defect.
Examine and clean the rollers in the
paper path. See Cleaning the Printer
and Paper Handling Accessories on
page 158.
4. Fusing Assembly is dirty or
defective. Print a cleaning page. If the problem
persists, replace the Fusing
Assembly. See Fusing Assembly on
page 306 for instructions.
5. Gears are worn, causing slippage
or jumping. Inspect the gears driving the toner
cartridge and the Fuser. Replace the
Main Drive Assembly if necessary.
See Main Gear Assembly on page
310 for instructions.
6. Paper does not meet
specifications. The surface of the
paper may be too coarse, causing
repeated marks.
Try a different media or paper lot (see
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print
Media Guide).
Table 7-26. Line at Edge of Paper
Possible Cause Recommended Action
Toner cartridge is defective. The
photosensitive drum is wearing out.
The line will grow wider, with cross-
hatching. Shaking the cartridge does
not relieve the problem.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Table 7-25. Repetitive Defects (continued)
Possible Cause Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Image Quality 671
Table 7-27. Misshapen Characters, Voids
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Paper surface too rough. Toner
migrates to low spots, leaving higher
areas void.
Turn EconoMode off. Use paper with
correct finish (smoothness) (see HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide).
2. Printing on wrong side of paper.
The label on the ream of paper
indicates which side to print on. The
different surface properties of some
papers may cause problems if loaded
wrong side up.
Turn EconoMode off. Check for the
arrow on the paper wrapper. Be sure
paper is loaded with the arrow
pointing up in Tray 1 or down in Trays
2, 3, 4, and 5.
3. Paper surface is too smooth for
proper toner adhesion. Turn EconoMode off. Use paper with
correct finish (smoothness) (see HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide).
4. Transparencies are bad.
Transparencies can have this
problem because they are not
designed for proper toner adhesion.
Turn EconoMode off. Use Hewlett-
Packard approved transparencies
(see HP LaserJet Printer Family Print
Media Guide).
5. Transfer Roller is bad. If the
Transfer Roller has finger oils on its
surface, is dirty, or is worn-out, this
problem can result.
Turn EconoMode off. Clean the
Transfer Roller using a dry, lint-free
cloth. DO NOT touch the Transfer
Roller with your fingers. If the
problem persists, replace the Transfer
Roller Assembly. See Transfer Roller
Assembly on page 337 for
instructions.
6. Laser/Scanner Assembly is bad. Replace the Laser/Scanner
Assembly. See Laser/Scanner
Assembly on page 308 for
instructions.
672 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Table 7-28. Faulty Registration
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Paper tray is overloaded. If the tray
is overloaded, the Pickup Rollers may
not pick correctly.
Reload proper amount of paper
squarely in the tray. Review paper
loading with the customer.
2. Paper guide on the paper tray is
incorrectly adjusted. If the guide is
pushing too tightly against the paper,
it may be delayed in being pulled into
the printer. If the guide is too loose, it
may cause image skewing.
Make sure that the paper guide is
adjusted for the correct paper size
and is locked into position.
3. Paper does not meet
specifications. The surface of the
paper may be too smooth for the
Pickup and Feed Rollers to correctly
feed paper into the printer.
Try a different paper lot (see HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide).
4. Drive gears are worn or broken. If
any gear within the drive train or
paper path becomes excessively
worn or dirty, erratic paper movement
can result.
Replace the defective gear or Main
Drive assembly. See Main Gear
Assembly on page 310 for
instructions.
5. Worn Pickup or Registration
Rollers. Paper is not being picked up
consistently.
Inspect all paper path rollers, looking
for wear, cracks, or glazing. Replace
the worn rollers.
Table 7-29. Image Skew
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Paper is loaded incorrectly. If the
paper is not installed flush into the
paper tray, a skewing problem will
result.
Remove paper from the tray, and
install paper correctly. Position the
paper guide correctly for the paper
size being used.
2. Paper size adjustment levers are
missing or installed incorrectly. Verify and correct.
C4265-90907 Image Quality 673
3. Paper lot is bad. Paper that is
manufactured poorly or inconsistently
or that has too smooth or too rough a
surface texture can cause an image
skew problem.
Try a different paper lot (see HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide).
4. Pickup and/or Registration Rollers
are worn. Paper is not being picked
up consistently.
Inspect all paper path rollers, looking
for wear, cracks, or glazing. Replace
the worn rollers.
Table 7-30. Bubble Print
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Photosensitive drum inside toner
cartridge is not grounded. 1. Check for proper mounting of the
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPW)
and the HVPS ground contacts on
the toner cartridge.
2. Check for proper seating of toner
cartridge.
3. Replace the toner cartridge.
2. Toner cartridge is leaking. Replace the toner cartridge.
3. Paper does not meet
specifications. The moisture content,
conductivity, or surface finish may not
work correctly with the
electrophotographic process.
Try a different paper lot (see HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide).
4. High Voltage Power Supply is
defective. Replace the High Voltage Power
Supply. See High Voltage Power
Supply (HVPS) on page 323 for
instructions.
Table 7-29. Image Skew (continued)
Possible Cause Recommended Action
674 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Table 7-31. White Stripes Parallel to Path
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Toner cartridge is nearly empty.
This can cause uneven toner
distribution.
Remove the toner cartridge, and
shake it gently. The cartridge will
soon require replacement.
2. Toner cartridge has been exposed
to too much light. Store the toner cartridge in a
darkened environment for several
days. This may restore the
photosensitive potential.
3. Foreign objects in beam path. Any
foreign objects will block the light
from developing an image on the
Photosensitive drum.
Remove the toner cartridge, and
check for damage. Replace the toner
cartridge if it is damaged.
Remove the printer cover, and
inspect the path from the Laser/
Scanner to the toner cartridge drum,
looking for foreign objects in the
beam path.
Table 7-32. Partial Blank Page
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Page is too complex. The printer
cannot create the image fast enough
to keep pace with the print engine.
Set Page Protect to on or auto.
Simplify print job.
2. Not enough memory. The page is
too complex for standard printer
memory.
Add printer memory. See Memory
and Personality Upgrade on page
258 for instructions. As an alternative,
simplify the print job.
3. Printing on legal-size paper from
Tray 4 when software is specifying
letter size (this will also cause paper
jams).
Review software selection. Make
sure that printing is on selected size.
C4265-90907 Image Quality 675
Table 7-33. Compressed Print
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Toner cartridge bushings are too
tight. This may occur on refilled toner
cartridges.
Replace the toner cartridge.
2. Gear is broken or worn. Inspect and replace the worn gear or
assembly.
Table 7-34. Blank Portion in the Middle of the Page (Tray 4 Input
only)
Possible Cause Recommended Action
1. Bad clutch in vertical transfer door. Replace the Tray 4 vertical transfer
door.
2. Bad clutch in paper pickup
assembly. Replace Tray 4 paper pickup
assembly.
676 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Repetitive Defect Ruler
Repetitive print defects are usually associated with a specific roller
within the printer or the toner cartridge. Use figure 7-21 to isolate the
cause of repetitive print defects. Align the first occurrence of the
defect with the top of the “ruler” and measure to the next occurrence
of the defect to determine the roller in question. When you are certain
that your defect pattern matches the pattern of the ruler, replace the
indicated roller.
C4265-90907 Image Quality 677
Figure 7-21 Repetitive Defect Ruler
678 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Image System Troubleshooting
Half Self Test Functional Check
The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following
stages:
●Cleaning (removing excess toner from drum surface)
●Conditioning (placing a uniform electrical charge on drum)
●Writing (laser strikes surface of drum to create latent image)
●Development (formation of the toner image on drum)
●Transfer (charge to transfer the image to paper)
●Fusing (heat and pressure to produce a permanent image)
See Chapter 5 for more information.
The purpose of the Half Self Test Check is to determine which
process is malfunctioning. Perform the test as follows:
1Print a Configuration Page. See Configuration Pages on page
653 for instructions.
2Open the top cover after the paper advances half-way through the
printer (about five seconds after the Main Motor begins rotating).
The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the
toner cartridge.
3Remove the toner cartridge.
4Open the toner cartridge's drum shield to view the drum's
surface.
If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum's
surface, assume that the first four functions of the
electrophotographic process are functioning (cleaning,
conditioning, writing, and developing—see Chapter 5), and
troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem.
If NO image is present on the photosensitive drum, perform the
functional checks on the following pages.
C4265-90907 Image Quality 679
Drum Rotation Functional Check
The photosensitive drum, located in the toner cartridge, must rotate
for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its
drive from the Main Drive assembly. To verify whether the drum is
rotating:
1Open the top cover.
2Remove the toner cartridge.
3Mark the cartridge's drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the
position of the mark.
4Install the toner cartridge, and close the top cover. The start-up
sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark.
5Open the printer, and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3.
Verify that the mark moved. If the mark did not move, inspect the
Main Drive assembly to make sure that it is meshing with the
toner cartridge gears. If the drive gears appear functional, and
the drum does not move, replace the toner cartridge.
Note This test is especially important if refilled toner cartridges have been
used.
High-Voltage Power Supply Check
The High-Voltage Power Supply PCA provides the necessary
voltages for the electrophotographic processes (see figure 7-22 on
page 680). A method for verifying the high-voltage system is given
below.
Toner cartridge connection points
Visually inspect the four connection points on the inside right end of
the toner cartridge. If they are dirty or corroded, clean the
connections. If damaged, replace the toner cartridge.
High voltage contacts
The high voltage contact springs mount on the High Voltage Power
Supply PCA and protrude through the toner cartridge cavity to
contact the toner cartridge. Verify that the contacts are not dirty or
corroded and that the spring action is functional. If damaged, replace
the High Voltage Power Supply PCA (see High Voltage Power Supply
(HVPS) on page 323 for instructions).
680 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-22 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts
Drum Ground
Transfer Roller
Post Transfer Bias
Toner Registration/
Toner Sensor
Developing
Roller Bias
Primary
Charging Roller
Fuser Bias
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 681
Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices
2000-sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnostics
The 2000-sheet Input Tray can run stand-alone diagnostic tests to
test the device’s motors, functionality, and sensors. You will need one
power cord, one #2 Phillips screwdriver, and a small flat-blade
screwdriver for the DIP switches.
2000-sheet Input Tray Motor Test
This test verifies that the three motors on the 2000-sheet Input Tray
are functioning properly.
1Identify the Back Cover (opposite from the tray door). Remove the
four screws in the Back Cover. Remove the Back Cover (see Back
Cover on page 273).
2Pull open the paper tray, and open the Vertical Transfer Unit
(VTU).
3Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to Motor Test Mode.
(See Table 7-35 on page 683 for an explanation of the DIP switch
settings.)
4To turn the Power Supply switch to Diagnostic Mode pull out on
the blue handle.
•If the motors are working properly, you will hear them as they
rotate continuously.
•If the motors do not rotate, replace the corresponding field-
replaceable unit: either the Paper Pickup Assembly, the VTU,
or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly.
5To stop the test, set the power switch back to Operational Mode
(push in), and reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the
off position (see Table 7-35 on page 683).
2000-sheet Input Tray Standalone Running Test
This test verifies that the 2000-sheet Input Tray is functioning
properly. For this test, use the LED located on the Controller PCA on
the 2000-sheet Input Tray. (See Table 7-36 on page 684 for an
interpretation of the LED patterns.)
CAUTION If the 2000-sheet Input Tray is setting underneath the printer, paper
jams may occur because the printer will not pick up the paper. To
prevent excessive paper jams during this test, feed only 6 to 8 pages.
682 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
1Make sure that paper is in the tray.
2Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for stand-alone
running mode. (See Table 7-35 for an explanation of the settings).
3To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue
power supply switch outward. The motors will start. Paper should
now be lifted from the tray and fed through the VTU.
•If the unit does not work properly, the lower Service LED on
the Controller PCA flashes in a pattern that indicates the
problem. (See Table 7-36 on page 684 for an interpretation of
the LED patterns.)
4To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational
Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off
position (see Table 7-35). Open the VTU, and remove any media
from the paper path.
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 683
2000-sheet Input Tray Sensor Test
This test manually activates the sensors on the 2000-sheet Input Tray
to test if they are working properly.
1Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for sensor test mode.
(See Table 7-35 for an explanation of the settings.)
2For each paper sensor:
a. Pull open the paper tray, and open the VTU.
b. Remove the metal spring that holds the sensor unit in place
(secured by 1 screw). (See Figure 6-76, callouts 2 and 5.)
c. Pull out the sensor unit.
3To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue
power supply switch outward.
4To manually activate each sensor, press it in with your finger.
•When you activate the sensor, the bottom Service LED on the
Controller PCA comes on. When you release the sensor, the
LED goes off.
•If the LED does not come on, there is a problem with the
sensor. Replace the corresponding field-replaceable unit.
5To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational
Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off
position (see Table 7-35).
Note Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all the DIP switches to the
off position (normal settings) when you finish the diagnostics or the unit
will not work properly. Then, replace the back cover.
Table 7-35. DIP Switch Settings
DIP Switch Normal Motor Test Stand-alone
Running
Test
Sensor Test
1 Off On On Off
2 Off On Off Off
3 Off Off Off On
4 Off On On On
684 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
2000-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation
If the 2000-sheet Input Tray is working properly, it will pick up paper
from the tray and feed it through the VTU, and the bottom Service
LED will flash regularly every 0.5 seconds.
Note If the LED does not come on, replace the Paper Deck PCA or the
Universal Power Supply Assembly.
Table 7-36. 2000-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation
Long
(1 sec.) Short (.03
sec.) Error Number/
Meaning Recommended Action
3 1 66.11.01
Lifter Malfunction
Lift the tray by hand to make sure that it lifts freely.
Make sure that the paper size plates are correctly
installed (in the same corresponding slots) and are
not bent. If neither if these is the problem, replace
Tray 4.
2 1 13.11.11
Registration Sensor
Delay Jam
The media does not reach the sensor. Open the
VTU door, and remove the media. Replace the VTU
assembly or the paper pickup assembly.
2 2 13.11.3B
Registration Sensor
Station Jam/Initial
Jam
Open the VTU door, and remove the media. Check
the sensors, and replace the corresponding field-
replaceable unit.
2 3 13.11.31
Jam Sensor Delay
Jam
The media did not reach the sensor. Open the VTU
door, and remove the media. Replace the VTU or
the paper pickup assembly.
2 4 13.11.21
13.11.2B
Jam Sensor
Stationary Jam/Initial
Jam
Open the VTU door and remove the media.
1 1 VTU Door Open Close the door.
1 2 Paper Tray
Open
Wrong Size Paper
Loaded.
Close the tray.
Load the correct size of paper, or check the sensors.
1 3 No Paper in Tray Load paper, or check the sensors.
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 685
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnos-
tics
The standalone diagnostics are designed to test the 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray’s motors, functionality, and sensors. You will need a power
cord, a #2 Phillips screwdriver, and a small flatblade screwdriver for
the DIP switches.
If the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray is working properly, it picks paper up
from the tray and feeds it into the VTU, while the bottom service LED
flashes regularly every 0.5 seconds.
Note To go from one test to another or to change the DIP switch settings, set
the blue power supply switch to Operational Mode (push in). Reset the
DIP switches on the Controller PCA, and then switch the power supply
back to Diagnostic Mode (pull out) to enable the new diagnostic test.
See figure 7-38 on page 688 for DIP switch settings.
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Motor Test
This test verifies that the three motors on the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
are functioning properly.
1Identify the Back Cover (opposite side from tray door). Remove
the 4 screws in the Back Cover. Remove the Back Cover.
2Pull open Trays 4 and 5, and open the Vertical Transfer Unit
(VTU).
3Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to Motor Test Mode.
(See table 7-7 on page 624 for an explanation of the DIP switch
settings.)
4To turn the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull out on
the blue handle.
•If the motors are working properly, you will hear them as they
rotate continuously.
•If the motors do not rotate, replace the corresponding field-
replaceable unit: either the Paper Pickup Assembly, the VTU,
or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly.
5To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational
Mode (push in), and reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA
to the off position.
686 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Note The DIP switch is on if it is set to the top. The DIP switch is off if it is
set to the bottom.
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Standalone Running Test
This test verifies that the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray is functioning
properly. For this test, use the LED located on the Controller PCA.
(See table 7-38 on page 688 for an interpretation of the LED
patterns.)
CAUTION If the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray is underneath the printer, paper jams
may occur because the printer will not pick up the paper. To prevent
excessive paper jams during this test, feed only 6 to 8 pages.
1Make sure that there is paper in both trays.
2Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for standalone
running mode. (See table 7-37 on page 686 for an explanation of
the settings).
3To test Tray 5, open Tray 4. To test Tray 4, open Tray 5.
Table 7-37. DIP Switch Settings for troubleshooting test
procedures
DIP Switch Normal Motor Test Stand-alone
Running
Test
Sensor Test
1 Off On On Off
2 Off On Off Off
3 Off Off Off On
4 Off On On On
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 687
4To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue
power supply switch outward. The motors will start. Paper should
now be lifted from the tray and fed through the VTU. The service
LED flashes regularly every 0.5 seconds.
•If the unit does not work properly, the service LED on the
Controller PCA flashes in a pattern that indicates the problem.
(See table 7-38 on page 688 for an interpretation of the LED
patterns.)
5To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational
Mode. Open the VTU, and remove any media from the paper
path.
6To test Tray 4, close Tray 4 and open Tray 5. Repeat step 4.
7To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational
Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off
position (see table 7-37 on page 686). Open the VTU, and
remove any media from the paper path.
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Sensor Test
Note Be sure that trays 4 and 5 and the VTU are closed before starting the
sensor test.
This test manually activates the sensors on the 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray to test if they are working properly.
1Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for sensor test mode.
(See table 7-7 on page 624 for an explanation of the settings.)
2To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue
power supply switch outward.
3To manually activate each sensor, press it in with your finger.
•When you activate the sensor, the service LED on the
Controller PCA comes on. When you release the sensor, the
LED goes off.
•If the LED does not come on, there is a problem with the
sensor. Replace the corresponding field-replaceable unit.
4To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational
Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off
position (see table 7-7 on page 624).
Note Be sure to turn the power supply off, and set all the DIP switches to the
off position (normal settings) when you finish the diagnostics or the
printer will not work properly. Replace the back cover.
688 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation
If the 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray is working properly, it will pick up paper
from the tray and feed it though the VTU and the bottom service LED
will flash regularly every 0.5 seconds.
See page 624 for 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray error messages.
Note If the LEDs will not come on, replace the paper deck PCA or the
universal power supply assembly.
Table 7-38. Patterns of LED flashing (2-second pause between each pattern)
Long
(1 sec) Short
(0.3 sec) Error Number/
Meaning Recommended Action
3 1 65.11.04
Lifter malfunction
Verify that the tray lifts up freely by lifting it by hand.
Verify that the paper size plates are installed
correctly (in the same corresponding slots) and are
not bent. If neither of these is the problem, replace
Tray 4 or 5.
2 1 13.11.11
Registration sensor
delay jam
The media did not reach the sensor. Open the VTU
door, and remove the media. Replace the paper
feed (VTU) assembly or the paper pickup assembly.
2 2 13.11.31
Registration sensor
stationary/jam initial
jam
Open the VTU door, and remove the media. Check
the sensors, and replace the corresponding field-
replaceable unit.
2 3 13.11.1B
Jam sensor delay jam
The media did not reach the sensor. Open the VTU
door, and remove the media. Replace the paper
feed (VTU) assembly or the paper pickup assembly.
2 4 13.11.3B
Jam sensor
stationary jam/initial
jam
Open the VTU door, and remove the media.
1 1 The VTU door is open Close the door.
1 2 Trays 4/5 are open
Wrong paper size
loaded
Close the tray(s). Check the sensors.
Load the correct size of paper. Check the sensors.
1 3 No paper in trays 4/5 Load paper. Check the sensors.
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 689
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Diagnos-
tics
The standalone diagnostics are designed to test the device’s motors,
functionality, and sensors. You will need a power cord, a #2 Phillips
screwdriver, and a small flatblade screwdriver for the DIP switches.
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
Note To change from one test to another or change the DIP switch settings,
push the blue power supply switch in (off position), then set to the new
test positions.
1To remove the back cover remove 2 screws (see page 410).
2Identify the interlock switch. This black switch is set when the
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox comes into contact with the printer. (Look
on opposite side from the paper trays.) This interlock can be
defeated by holding it in with a finger or a piece of tape.
3Identify the DIP switch, SW1 (upper-right corner of the controller
PCA).
4Identify the service LED, LED1 (near the C-link connectors).
Table 7-39. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test
DIP Switch Normal
Settings Motor
Test Standalone Running Test
Mailbox Stacker Sensor Test
1 Off On On Off Off
2 Off On Off On Off
3 Off Off On Off On
4 Off On Off On On
690 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Note The DIP switch is on if it is set to the right. The DIP switch is off if it is
set to the left.
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Motor Test
This test allows you to verify the functionality of the main motor, Face-
down solenoid, and face-up diverter solenoid.
1The top cover and paper access door must be closed to perform
this test.
2Set the DIP switches for the motor test (see table 7-39).
3Pull out the power supply switch to the test position.
4Press and hold in the interlock switch. A self-test should be
performed, then the main motor will start moving continuously
until the interlock switch is released. The service LED will flash
every 0.5 seconds. If any other pattern results with the service
LED, see table 7-40 on page 691 for the possible causes.
5Push in the power supply switch to the normal position.
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Running Test
This test allows you to feed paper into the unit to test the paper path
without a connection to the printer. You can configure either the
Mailbox Mode or the Stacker Mode to ensure the paper path is
working properly.
1The top cover and paper access door must be closed to perform
this test.
2Set the DIP switches for the standalone running test in either
Mailbox Mode or the Stacker Mode (see table 7-39 on page 689).
3Pull out the power supply switch to the test position.
4Press and hold in the interlock switch. Perform a self-test. Then
manually start feeding paper.
•In Mailbox Mode, the unit will deliver paper to all bins, starting
with the Face-up Bin, then down to the bottom bin.
•In Stacker Mode, the unit will stack paper starting at the
bottom bin until the top-of-stack is reached on each bin.
5If problems are found, the possible cause will be indicated by the
Service LED (see table 7-40 on page 691).
6Push in the power supply switch to the normal position.
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 691
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensor Test
This test allows you to check if all unit sensors are working properly.
By activating any unit sensor flag, the service LED should turn on.
1Make sure that all bins are empty to perform the sensor test.
2Set the DIP switches for the sensor test (see table 7-39 on page
689).
3Do NOT press the interlock switch in at this time.
4Pull out the power supply switch to the test position.
5Make sure that the service LED is off.
6Manually activate any sensor flag. The service LED should turn
on if the sensor is functional.
Note To test the top cover or paper access door sensors, you need to press
the interlock switch and simultaneously open and close each cover. A
self-test should be performed, and the LED should remain on.
To test the bin full sensors, press the sensor in the paper tray closest
to the back of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox (on your left as you face the
bins). The test will not work if you press the sensor closest to the front
of the device.
CAUTION Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all the DIP switches to the
off position (normal settings) when you finish the diagnostics or the
printer will not work properly. Replace the back cover.
See page 629 for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox error messages.
Table 7-40. Patterns of Flashing LEDs
Long Short Error Number/
Meaning Recommended Action
3 1 66.12.16
66.22.16
Paper exit solenoid
malfunction
●Perform the motor test to check the solenoids.
●Perform the sensor test.
●Replace the sensor bin full PCA, solenoids, or
controller board.
2 1 13.12.31
13.22.31
Initial jam
●Open the top cover and paper access door to
remove any remaining paper, then perform a
sensor test.
●Replace the sensor bin full PCA or controller
PCA.
692 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
2 2 13.12.01
13.22.01
Jam without delivery
notice
●Open all covers and doors in the device, and
remove any jammed paper.
●Check for paper jammed in the printer.
●Try printing again.
2 3 13.12.11
13.22.11
Entry sensor delay
●Open all covers and doors in the device, and
remove any remaining media.
●Check each output bin.
●Perform a sensor check.
●Check the sensor flag, the optical sensor, or
cabling.
●Replace the sensor PCAs.
●Replace the controller PCA.
2 5 13.12.17
13.22.17
Face-up sensor delay
2 7 Reversing area delay
2 9 13.12.15
13.22.15
Vertical sensor delay
2 4 13.12.21
13.22.21
Entry sensor
activated too long
●Open the top and back covers, and remove
any remaining media.
●Check each output bin.
●Perform a sensor check.
●Check the sensor flag, the optical sensor, or
cabling.
●Replace the sensor PCAs.
●Replace the controller PCA.
2 6 13.12.27
13.22.27
Face-up sensor
activated too long
2 8 13.12.21
13.22.21
13.12.27
13.22.27
Reversing area
sensor activated too
long
2 10 13.12.22
13.22.22
13.12.25
13.22.25
Vertical sensor
activated too long
1 1 Door open or
interlock switch
deactivated
●Close the top cover and paper access door.
●Firmly attach the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox to
the printer.
●Perform a sensor check.
●Check the bin full and interlock sensor PCA,
cabling, and controller PCA.
Table 7-40. Patterns of Flashing LEDs (continued)
Long Short Error Number/
Meaning Recommended Action
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 693
1 2 Bin full when running
the standalone test
●Remove paper from all the bins.
Table 7-40. Patterns of Flashing LEDs (continued)
Long Short Error Number/
Meaning Recommended Action
694 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
8-bin Mailbox Standalone Diagnostics
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
The stand-alone diagnostics are designed to test the device’s motors
and functionality without connection to the printer. Note that the
diagnostics do not test the functionality of the stapler. You will need
one power cord and a small flat-blade screwdriver for the power
supply switch.
8-bin Mailbox LEDs Description
The 8-bin Mailbox has two sets of LEDs:
●User LED. The first is a single LED located on the right side of the
top cover (Figure 7-23, callout 1). This User LED provides
information to the end user about the 8-bin Mailbox power-on
status and the attachment and alignment to the printer.
●Service LEDs. The second set is formed by three independent
LEDs located in the middle of the left side cover (Figure 7-23,
callout 2). This group is called the Service LEDs, and they show
additional technical information to decode the 8-bin Mailbox
status.
Figure 7-23 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Description
8-bin Mailbox Standalone Diagnostic Test
Each time you run the stand-alone diagnostic test, proceed as
follows:
1Turn off the printer, and pull the 8-bin Mailbox away from the
printer.
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 695
2With the 8-bin Mailbox unplugged, configure the power supply
switch to the test mode by sliding the power supply switch up with
a small flat-blade screwdriver (Figure 7-24, callout 1).
Figure 7-24 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply Test Mode Switch
1Plug in the power cord. The User LED should be solid green, and
the Service LEDs should be ‘Off, Solid Red, Off’ to indicate the
test mode has been entered.
Note Be sure to reset the power supply switch to the normal operation when
you finish the diagnostics; otherwise the unit will not work properly.
Power-on Test
1Push the 8-bin Mailbox interlock switch and keep it pressed. A
sequence of tests will begin to test the device.
2The head assembly will move up and down twice, scanning that
all unit bins are properly installed and that all unit motors have
started.
3At the end of the power-on test, the flipper motor remains on and
waits for paper to be fed.
696 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
4The User LED remains solid green and the service LEDs remain
‘Off, Solid Red, Off’ as an indication that the power-on test was
successful.
5If a problem exists, an error code will be shown in the Service
LEDs. (See table 3-3 for an interpretation of the LEDs.)
8-bin Mailbox Paper Path Test
1If the power-on test is successful, then manually feed paper
through the input paper guide in the horizontal position.
2The paper will pass across the flipper assembly and move down
to the bottom bin by the double belt system through the head
assembly.
3If after feeding several pages the paper path test is successful,
then reattach the 8-bin Mailbox to the printer.
4If a problem exists, an error code will be shown in the Service
LEDs. (See table 7-41 for an interpretation of the LEDs.)
Note Be sure to reset the power supply switch to the normal operation when
you finish the diagnostics; otherwise the unit will not work properly.
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 697
8-bin Mailbox LEDs Status Interpretation
Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation
Message Description/Number User
LED
Ser-
vice
LEDs Recommended
Action
solid green
solid amber
blinking amber
solid red
blinking red
blank
MBM Ready
The 8-bin Mailbox was successfully
connected and initialized by the
printer.
No action required.
PowerSave Mode
The 8-bin Mailbox is in PowerSave
mode.
No action required.
Self-test Mode
The 8-bin Mailbox is in test mode.
●Run the power-on test.
●Run the paper path test.
MBM Unlatched from the Printer
The 8-bin Mailbox is not properly
attached to the printer.
●Check for proper alignment.
●Check the attachment clips.
●Check the Adjustable Casters.
●Check the Interlock Switch.
Face-up Bin is Too Full
The Face-up Bin has too much paper
and it has reached the PSFaceUp flat,
avoiding the flipping operation.
65.12.01
65.22.01
●Remove the paper from the
Face-up Bin.
●Check for a stuck Sensor Flag.
●Replace the Flipper Assembly.
●Check for the proper cable
connections.
698 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Jam in Flipper Area
A time-out condition occurred at the
entry area.
13.12.02
13.22.02
65.12.01
65.22.01
●Open the Jam Access Door,
and check for a paper jam or
an out-of-place Flipper
Assembly shaft.
●Check for a stuck paper
sensor.
●Replace the Flipper Assembly.
●Replace the 8-bin Mailbox
PCA.
Jam in Belt
A time-out condition occurred in the
Tran s por t Bel t.
13.12.03
13.22.03
●Check for paper jammed at the
Transport Belt System/Delivery
Head Assembly.
●Make sure that the Transport
Belt (both belts) move freely.
●Make sure that the belts are
parallel in the Transport Belt
system.
●Make sure that the Metal Tape
is in place and in good
condition.
●Replace the Transport Belt
Motor.
●Replace the 8-bin Mailbox
PCA.
●Replace the Delivery Head
Assembly.
Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued)
Message Description/Number User
LED
Ser-
vice
LEDs Recommended
Action
solid green
solid amber
blinking amber
solid red
blinking red
blank
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 699
Jam in Delivery Head Assembly
A time-out condition occurred in the
PSExit1 sensor.
13.12.05
13.22.05
●Check for paper jammed in the
Delivery Head Assembly.
●Make sure that both the
PSExit1 and PSExit2 sensors
on the Delivery Head Assembly
move freely.
●Make sure that the fingers are
over the Ejector Rollers on the
Delivery Head Assembly.
●Replace the flat ribbon cable
that connects to the Delivery
Head Assembly.
●Replace the Delivery Head
Assembly.
●Replace the 8-bin Mailbox
PCA.
Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued)
Message Description/Number User
LED
Ser-
vice
LEDs Recommended
Action
solid green
solid amber
blinking amber
solid red
blinking red
blank
700 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Jam in the Delivery Head Position
System
The elevator motor detected an invalid
window when scanning.
13.12.06
13.22.06
65.12.03
65.22.03
65.12.03
65.22.03
●Make sure that the Blind Cover
and Scan Bar are installed
properly.
●Check for paper jammed in the
Transport Belt System and the
Delivery Head Assembly.
●Make sure that the Delivery
Head Assembly (up and down)
moves freely.
●Make sure that all paper bins
are seated correctly.
●Make sure that the paper bins
and the Blind Cover are not
broken.
●Replace the Delivery Head
Position Motor.
●Replace the Delivery Head
Assembly.
●Replace the 8-bin Mailbox
PCA.
Slider Problem at the Head
Assembly
The sliders do not activate the slider
photosensor.
65.12.04
65.22.04
●Check for paper jammed in the
Delivery Head Assembly.
●Make sure that all the paper
bins are seated correctly.
●Replace the Delivery Head
Assembly.
Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued)
Message Description/Number User
LED
Ser-
vice
LEDs Recommended
Action
solid green
solid amber
blinking amber
solid red
blinking red
blank
C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 701
Wrong Page Request
A page request was received with an
invalid output bin or invalid paper size
information.
13.12.0A
13.22.0A
●Check the bin destination.
●Check the paper size
configuration.
●Turn on the printer.
Flipper Error
During the flipper calibration, an
abnormal reference voltage was
encountered.
66.12.08
66.22.08
●Check for paper jammed in the
Flipper Assembly area.
●Check the cable connections.
●Replace the Flipper Assembly.
●Replace the 8-bin Mailbox
PCA.
External Memory Error
The 8-bin Mailbox’s nonvolatile RAM
(NVRAM) is damaged.
66.12.09
66.22.09
●Replace the 8-bin Mailbox
PCA.
Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued)
Message Description/Number User
LED
Ser-
vice
LEDs Recommended
Action
solid green
solid amber
blinking amber
solid red
blinking red
blank
702 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Diagrams
This section contains the following diagrams:
●Figure 7-25, “Printer Sensors and Switches,” on page 703
●Figure 7-26, “Printer Motor, Clutches, and Solenoids,” on page
704
●Figure 7-27, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (1 of 5),” on page
705
●Figure 7-28, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (2 of 5),” on page
706
●Figure 7-29, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (3 of 5),” on page
707
●Figure 7-30, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (4 of 5),” on page
708
●Figure 7-31, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (5 of 5),” on page
709
●Figure 7-32, “Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram,” on page 710
●Figure 7-33, “2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Inputs,” on
page 711
●Figure 7-34, “2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Outputs,” on
page 712
●Figure 7-35, “2000-sheet Input Tray Main Wiring Diagram,” on
page 713
●Figure 7-36, “8-bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram,” on page 714
●The main wiring diagram is inserted inside the cover.
C4265-90907 Diagrams 703
Figure 7-25 Printer Sensors and Switches
704 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-26 Printer Motor, Clutches, and Solenoids
C4265-90907 Diagrams 705
Figure 7-27 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (1 of 5)
706 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-28 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (2 of 5)
C4265-90907 Diagrams 707
Figure 7-29 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (3 of 5)
708 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-30 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (4 of 5)
C4265-90907 Diagrams 709
Figure 7-31 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (5 of 5)
710 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-32 Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram
C4265-90907 Diagrams 711
Figure 7-33 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Inputs
712 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-34 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Outputs
C4265-90907 Diagrams 713
Figure 7-35 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Wiring Diagram
714 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Figure 7-36 8-bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
previous
device
connector
(in)
C-link
next
device
connector
(out)
C-link
power
supply
connector
(one dot)
(two dots)
M5
M1 Delivery Head
Position Motor
Red Green
Transport Belt Motor
INTERLOCK SWITCH
MULTIBIN
MAILBOX
CONTROLLER
PCA
/TX
/RX
/TERMINATE OUT
/CLOCK
/STROBE
POWER ON IN
GND
24 V
/TX
/RX
/TERMINATE IN
/CLOCK
/STROBE
POWER ON OUT
GND
24 V
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
ON/OFF
+5V
1
3
4
6
12
13
2-7-8-11
5-10
1
3
4
6
12
13
2-7-8-11
5-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
10
15
1
6
11
J8
J9
J7
J11
J12
J13
Vcc
CBA
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
16151413121110987654321
M4M3
Head Slider
Motor Ejector Motor
PS BIN EMPTY
PS EXIT 2
PS BIN FULL / HEAD POSITION
PS EXIT 1
PS EJECT
J1
Vcc 1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5PS FLIPPER 1
PS FLIPPER 2
J5
J4
M2
Flipper Roller Motor
Encoder
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Vcc
PS FUFULL
PS FACEUP
PS ENTRY
LEDs
J2
J10
C4265-90907 Diagrams 715
716 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Copy Module 717
Troubleshooting the Copy Module
This section deals with troubleshooting procedures specific to the
HP Digital Copier. For a general troubleshooting approach, see
the flowcharts starting on page 575. The steps for
troubleshooting the HP Digital Copier are as follows:
▼Step 1: Power On (page 718)
▼Step 2: Display and Communication (page 719)
▼Step 3: Error Messages and Problems (page 720)
▼Step 4: Information Pages (page 725)
▼Step 5: Paper Path (page 726)
▼Step 6: Image Quality (page 727)
718 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Step 1. Power On
Is the copy module on and displaying anything on the Front Panel?
(YES = Go to Step 2: Display and Communication)
After completing the power-on checks above, print the information
pages from the printer's Information Menu.
●Verify that the copy connect EIO appears on the printer
configuration page.
●Verify that the HP Digital Copier page prints.
Table 7-42. Power On Checks
Check Recommended Action
Is the host printer on
and functioning
correctly?
●Make sure both the printer and copy module power switches are
set to the on position.
●Ensure the printer and copy module are not in power save mode.
Press any key on the front panel.
●Eliminate paper-handling devices as a cause of the problem.
●Troubleshoot the printer. See page 594.
Is AC power available to
the printer System?
●Check power to the printer's power receptacle.
●Make sure power is cabled correctly to provide AC power to the
copy module. (See “Install the Y Power Cord” on page 496 for y
cable descriptions.)
●To test power, plug in the copy module directly.
●Plug in a known working device to test the outlet.
Is the copy module’s
fan working?
●If the fan is running, the copy module power supply and Control
PCA are probably OK.
●Disconnect the copy connect cable to the printer and plug in the
Copy Module directly to the AC outlet. The copy module should
boot to the second icon and stop.
●If the fan still does not run check its connection to the Control
PCA. If the connection is OK, suspect the power supply.
C4265-90907 Display and Communication 719
Step 2. Display and Communication
Does the copy module LCD display indicate READY TO COPY? (YES =
Go to Step 3: Error Messages and Problems)
Table 7-43. Display and Communication Checks
Problem Recommended Action
The Fan works, but the
display is blank with no
backlight.
●Re-check power availability.
●Check the front panel connections and cable.
●Reseat the ribbon cable into the connector on the front panel.
●Suspect the front panel or the cable.
The display is blank
with the backlight on.
●Check the front panel connections and cable.
●Inspect and reseat the ribbon cable into the connector on the
front panel.
●Check the connections to and reseat the Power Supply and Main
Board Assemblies.
●Reseat the copy connect EIO card and copy processor card.
●Check the connections between the copy connect EIO card and
the Copy Processor card.
●Perform an offline test (page 733) to confirm the control PCA is
good.
●Perform a Copy Processor LED test (page 730). If the Copy
Processor is okay, suspect the front panel. Replace the
suspected part.
The front panel
backlight comes on and
display shows the logo,
a boot icon, or error
message.
●Perform a Copy Processor LED test (page 730) to confirm that
the Copy Processor is okay. If necessary, replace the Copy
Processor.
●Reseat the copy connect EIO card and the copy processor card.
●Check the connections between the copy connect EIO card and
the Copy Processor card.
●Print a directory of the printer’s hard disk drive to check that the
Copy Module Firmware is installed (see page 656).
●Make sure Loading Program 1 and Loading Program 2
displays on the printer’s control panel during bootup. If it does
not, re-download the copy module firmware (see page 150).
●If the display shows an error message, see page 720 to resolve
the problem.
●If the display stops at one of the four boot icons, note which and
see page 732 to resolve the problem.
720 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Step 3. Error Messages and Problems
Have you resolved error messages? (YES = Go to Step 5: Paper
Path)
Note Show or print the event log for the copy module or printer from the
printer’s Information Menu.
●Does the copy module’s front panel report any errors? (See
page 720 and take appropriate actions.)
●Does the printer’s control panel report any copy module errors?
(See page 607 and take appropriate actions.)
●Does the printer’s event log report any errors? (See page 598
and take appropriate actions.)
Status Messages
This section shows status messages that display on the HP Digital
Copier Front Panel when there is a problem with the HP Digital
Copier. There are 3 different types of errors made by the HP Digital
Copier:
●Boot Errors (page 721)
●Equipment Errors (page 721)
●Temporary Errors (page 724)
For printer problem solving information, see the printer
troubleshooting flowchart starting on page 578. For printer and paper-
handling devices error messages see page 604.
C4265-90907 Error Messages and Problems 721
Boot Errors
Note All other numbered Boot Errors (0x00000000-0x000007FF) indicate
that the Copy Processor card failed its own diagnostics and is probably
bad. These errors will likely be seen in conjunction with and can be
confirmed by a blinking red LED on the Copy Processor LED test.
Equipment Errors
To correct an equipment error, turn the printer and HP Digital Copier
off and then turn both devices on. If the error message persists,
replace the indicated part.
Table 7-44. Boot Errors
Boot Error Description
0x00058001 Bad connection (displayed after the second icon is displayed)
This error indicates a bad physical connection between the copy
module and the printer. This could also indicate that the Scanner
Service Agent failed to load, or that the printer ID is not an HP
LaserJet 8150MFP
0x00058002 No file (displayed after the third icon is displayed)
This error indicates that a connection was established, the
Scanner Service Agent loaded, but firmware was not found on the
disk.
0x00058003 Bad file (displayed after the third icon is displayed)
This error indicates that a connection was established, the
Scanner Service Agent loaded, firmware was found on the disk,
but one or more of the files appear to be corrupt. Note that the
“bad file” error below can also indicate that the copy processor
gave up on downloading the runtime firmware after trying several
times. It can also occur sporadically if you try to print a printer
configuration page while the copy processor is downloading the
firmware
722 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Table 7-45. Equipment Errors
Error Message Description
DEVICE ERROR:
EEPROM FAILURE
Turn the printer off and then on. If the error persists, replace the
Control PCA and the EEPROM.
DEVICE ERROR:
BACKSIDE RAM BUFFER
FAILURE
An error occurred while accessing the backside RAM buffer.
Replace the Control PCA.
DEVICE ERROR:
MOTOR FUSE FAILURE
The motor has a blown fuse.
●Check connections to motors.
●Check to see if the motors turn.
●Replace the motor.
●If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
●If the problem persists, replace the Power Supply.
DEVICE ERROR:
LAMP FUSE FAILURE
A Lamp has a blown fuse.
●Check connections to Lamps.
●Replace the Control PCA.
DEVICE ERROR:
BACKSIDE OPTICAL
FAILURE
A problem occurred with the backside optical system.
●Check to see if the Lamp(s) turn on during an offline test. If
yes, then clean the glass and optics. If no, replace the Lamp.
●Check the Optical Unit cable connection.
●Replace the Lamp.
●If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
DEVICE ERROR:
FRONTSIDE OPTICAL
FAILURE
A problem occurred with the frontside optical system.
●Check to see if the Lamp(s) turn on during an offline test. If
yes, then clean the glass and optics. If no, replace the Lamp.
●Check the Optical Unit/Carrier Unit cable connection.
●If necessary, replace the Lamp.
●If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
C4265-90907 Error Messages and Problems 723
DEVICE ERROR:
MECHANICAL FAILURE
A mechanical problem occurred.
●Check that the shipping lock has been removed and
reinserted properly.
●Check that the Home Position Sensor is connected.
●Check the Carrier Belt.
●Check the Flatbed Motor.
●If the problem persists, replace the Flatbed Motor Unit.
●If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
●If the problem persists, replace the Power Supply.
Table 7-45. Equipment Errors (continued)
Error Message Description
724 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Temporary Errors
A Temporary Error displays when problems with the paper path occur.
The Front Panel will display the specific error and graphically illustrate
the actions needed to correct the error.
Automatic Document Feeder
Table 7-46. Temporary Errors
Error Message Description
ADF PAPER JAM Paper was not found on the ADF path before a READ command
was executed, or paper did not pass through the ADF within the
specified time. This error state can be reset by one of the
following operations:
●the copy module receives a CLEAR command
●or remove paper from the ADF and close the ADF cover
●visually inspect for bad alignment
●If the problem is chronic, clean or replace the ADF pick rollers
and separation pad
ADF COVER IS OPEN The ADF cover was opened during the ADF READ operation or
the ADF cover was open when the ADF read started.
ADF MISFEED A START command was received but a misfeed occurred from
the ADF input tray. Restack the pages in the ADF input tray. Press
START to continue the copy job.
●visually inspect for bad alignment
●If the problem is chronic, clean or replace the ADF pick rollers
and separation pad
C4265-90907 Information Pages 725
Step 4. Information Pages
Print information pages from the printer’s Information Menu. See
page 651.
726 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Step 5. Paper Path
Is the ADF feeding paper correctly? (YES = Go to Step 6: Image
Quality)
●Does the copy module cause damage to the original,
experiencing frequent mispicks, double-feeds, jams, or skewed
paper feeding?
●Check paper types used by customer and suggest to use the
flatbed if out of specification.
●Determine if the ADF cleaning interval has been exceeded.
(Check the configuration page. See “Sample Copy Module
Configuration Page” on page 655 for an example. Inspect and
clean the ADF assemblies as needed.)
●Determine if the maintenance interval has been exceeded.
(Check the configuration page. See “Sample Copy Module
Configuration Page” on page 655 for an example. Inspect and
replace the Pick Rollers and Separation Pad as needed.)
●Try a copy from the flatbed to isolate the problem to the ADF
mechanism or optics.
●Confirm connection to the ADF (3 cables), confirm ADF Motor
Belt, and perform a test of the ADF sensors in the copy module
service mode to ensure each sensor moves freely.
●Perform an ADF offset calibration (page 175).
●Perform the ADF test in service mode or an offline test and
inspect mechanisms for failure. Be sure to use paper that
conforms to HP recommended paper specifications for this test.
Replace implicated components.
●See “Error Conditions” on page 727.
C4265-90907 Image Quality 727
Step 6. Image Quality
Is the image quality acceptable? (YES = End)
●Does the copy module output display problems with any of the
following? Resolution, grayscale, jitter, skew, image placement,
improper image scaling, image out of position, part of image
missing, unclear image.
●Determine if the problem is isolated to the flatbed, ADF, or occurs
from both. Check to see if the suggested cleaning interval has
been exceeded and clean if necessary. (See error and symptom
tables and take recommended action.)
Table 7-47. Error Conditions
Error Condition/Symptom Remedies
Power Lamp does not light ●Check the power plug and the Front Panel connection.
●Make sure that the PCA tray is inserted.
●If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
●If the problem persists, replace the Power Supply.
No image or image scrambled ●Check interface connections.
●If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
●Check the backside or frontside (if frontside only,
replace the Carrier Unit).
Grayscale or resolution is bad on
the flatbed
●Check that the document is placed on the flatbed
correctly.
●Clean both sides of the flatbed glass.
●Clean the Carrier Unit.
●If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit.
●If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
Excessive Jitter on the flatbed ●Check to see if the cables routed in the mechanism
frame are in contact with the Carrier Frame. Reroute
the cables if necessary.
●Check for objects blocking the movement of the
Carrier Unit during scan. Clean or remove.
●Check if carrier unit belt is loose.
●Replace FB Motor Unit if necessary.
●Clean and relubricate the Carrier Unit Shaft.
●Lubricate the carrier guide rail.
●Replace the Control PCA if necessary.
728 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Image is out of position or partly
missing from the flatbed
●Run an offset adjustment.
●Make sure that the glass plate assembly has been
reseated correctly if moved.
●Replace the Carrier Unit.
Image is unclear or faded from the
flatbed
●Check that the document is placed on the flatbed
correctly.
●Inspect and clean both sides of the flatbed glass.
●Clean the Carrier Unit.
●If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit.
●If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
Magnification is incorrect from the
flatbed
●Check to see if magnification is incorrect on subscan
or mainscan direction.
●Subscan: check the Carrier Belt and tighten the
adjustment screw, and lubricate the Carrier Shaft and
Guide Rail. If the problem persists, replace the
Flatbed Motor.
●Mainscan: replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem
persists, replace the Control PCA.
Grayscale or resolution is bad on
the ADF
●Check to see that the document is placed in the ADF
paper chute correctly.
●Check to see that the document size is supported by
the ADF.
●Frontside: clean both sides of the glass and clean the
Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the
Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the
Control PCA.
●Backside: clean the glass under the ADF and clean
the Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the
Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the
Control PCA.
Excessive Jitter on the ADF ●Check for contaminants on the Feed Roller, Eject
Roller, and Idler Feed Roller.
●Check that the document size is supported by the
ADF.
●Check the ADF for objects blocking mechanical
operation.
●Clean the ADF.
●If the problem persists, replace the ADF.
Table 7-47. Error Conditions (continued)
Error Condition/Symptom Remedies
C4265-90907 Image Quality 729
Image is out of position or partly
missing from the ADF
●Check that the original document size is supported by
the ADF. If not, use the flatbed.
●Perform an offset adjustment.
●Clean the ADF.
●If the problem persists, replace the ADF.
●If frontside, replace the Carrier Unit.
●If backside, replace the Optical Unit.
Image is unclear, faded, or
streaked from the ADF
●Inspect and clean both sides of the flatbed glass.
●Clean the ADF.
●Frontside: clean the Carrier Unit. If the problem
persists, replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem
persists, replace the Control PCA.
●Backside: clean the Optical Unit and back Lamp. If the
problem persists, replace the Optical Unit. If the
problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
Magnification is incorrect on the
ADF
●Check that the original document paper type is
supported by the ADF. If not, then use the flatbed.
●Check to see if magnification is incorrect on the
subscan or mainscan direction.
●Subscan: inspect the Feed Roller, Eject Roller and
Idler Feed Roller for foreign objects and clean if
necessary. Clean the ADF. If the problem persists,
replace the Control PCA.
●Mainscan frontside: replace the Carrier Unit. If the
problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
●Mainscan backside: replace the Optical Unit. If the
problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
Frequent paper feed errors: jams,
mispicks, double-feeds, damaged
originals, skewed copies on the
ADF
●Check that the original document paper type is
supported by the ADF. If not, then use the flatbed.
●Make sure that the originals are being loaded into the
ADF correctly.
●Inspect the Pick Rollers and Separation Pad for
contamination and clean.
●Clean the ADF.
●Replace the Pick Rollers and Separation Pad.
●Perform an offset calibration.
Front panel buttons and touch
screen are not working
●Perform Front Panel tests.
●Replace the Front Panel.
●If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA.
Table 7-47. Error Conditions (continued)
Error Condition/Symptom Remedies
730 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Testing the Copy Module
Use the following tests to diagnose problems with the copy module.
●Print information pages (page 651)
●Copy Processor LED Test (below)
●Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions (page 732)
●Copy Module Offline Test (page 733)
●Other Tests (page 735)
●Service Mode Tests (page 737)
Note If the 1394 connect or firmware download fails, the display will freeze
at icon 2, 3, or 4. The display of any icon is the best indication that the
Front Panel is functioning correctly.
Copy Processor LED Test
Figure 7-37 Copy Processor LEDs
C4265-90907 Testing the Copy Module 731
Performing a Copy Processor LED Test
1From the back of the copy module, unscrew the left thumb screw
on the Copy Processor Card.
2Gently pull the loosened thumbscrew downward, moving the
bulkhead of the Copy Processor Card slightly away from the body
of the copy module. Be careful not to unseat the Copy Processor
Board.
3Look down inside the copy module near the bulkhead of the Copy
Processor Card. You should be able to see the Copy Processor
LEDs.
Note If you cannot see the LEDs you may have to temporarily remove the
Copy Processor bulkhead. To do this, remove 2 screws to temporarily
detach the bulkhead from the PCA so that the LEDs may now be seen
easily. Reinstall the Copy Processor.
Copy Processor LED Test Results
Table 7-48. Copy Processor LED Test Results
If LED is Indicates that Copy Process or is
Blinking green Good - do not replace it
Blinking red Bad and should be replaced
Blinking red and green Probably good, but firmware download was not successful
(Check the “Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions” on page 732
and the printer connections)
732 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions
Table 7-49. Icon Conditions
Icon Condition Recommended Action
No icon ●If the display is blank, or only the backlight appears, or it freezes
at the logo, see “Display and Communication” on page 719.
●Check connections and suspect the Front Panel.
(If the Copy Processor passes the LED test, the Front Panel
should not stop at Icon 1.)
Stops at Icon 1 The copy processor did not pass its power on tests.
●Perform a Copy Processor LED test and if the test indicates the
Copy Processor is bad, replace it.
Stops at Icon 2 The Copy Processor likely cannot make the connection to the printer.
●Check connections.
●Reseat cards.
●Check the printer’s configuration pages for the Copy Connect EIO
and Digital Copier Pages.
●Ensure the printer and its peripherals are working correctly.
●Make sure Loading Program 1 displays on the printer’s control
panel during bootup. If it does not, re-download the copy module
firmware (see page 150).
●Make sure the printer is an HP LaserJet 8150MFP.
Stops at Icon 3 Copy module firmware failed to download.
●Check connections.
●Reseat cards.
●Print a directory of the printer’s hard disk drive to check that the
Copy Module Firmware is installed (see page 656).
●Redownload the Copy Module Firmware (page 150).
●Make sure the printer is an HP LaserJet 8150MFP.
Stops at Icon 4 The system could not start the downloaded copy module firmware.
●Perform the recommended actions above.
●Make sure Loading Program 1 and Loading Program 2
displays on the printer’s control panel during bootup. If it does
not, re-download the copy module firmware (see page 150).
●Print a directory of the printer’s hard disk drive to check that the
Copy Module Firmware is installed (see page 656).
●Redownload the Copy Module Firmware (page 150).
●Check the printer’s configuration pages for the Copy Connect EIO
and Digital Copier Pages.
C4265-90907 Testing the Copy Module 733
Note Download is complete and successful when the main menu replaces
Icon 4.
Copy Module Offline Test
This test does not depend on a functioning Copy Processor or a
functioning Front Panel. This is a pass or fail test. If the Carrier Unit
moves, the ADF feeds paper, and the Lamps come on, then the test is
passed. If this does not happen, the copy module will appear to be
dead.
Successful completion of this test will exercise the functionality of
both Lamps, the Carrier Unit, the Optical Unit, and the Control PCA.
Figure 7-38 Locations of ADF Sensors
1Turn the copy module off.
2Open the ADF cover and pull the ADF Empty Sensor to the paper
out position, and push the B5 Paper Sensor (with respect to
portrait paper) while turning the copy module on. When you hear
the copy module begin to initialize, release the sensors.
3Close the ADF and then open the ADF.
ADF cover
open sensor ADF empty
sensor
OMR sensor
Top of paper
sensor
B4 size
sensor
A3
A4
B5
734 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
4Close the ADF. At this point you should be in the offline test
mode. If no paper is loaded within 5 seconds, the flatbed test
executes. (The Carrier Unit moves and the Lamp lights as if they
were making a flatbed copy.)
5Open the ADF to stop the flatbed test.
6Have a stack of paper ready. Close the ADF and load paper.
7The ADF will move paper and the Lamps will light as if making a
two-sided copy.
Note Successful completion of this test will exercise the functionality of both
Lamps, the Carrier Unit, the Optical Unit, and the Control PCA.
C4265-90907 Testing the Copy Module 735
Other Tests
Use the tests listed below to determine if a part is “good” or “bad”
without swapping parts.
Table 7-50. Other Tests
Possible Bad Part Tests and indicators that the part is “Good” or
“Bad”
Copy Processor Board Good if:
●the Front Panel icons display.
●the Copy Processor LED test (page 730) shows green or
green and red.
Control PCA Good if:
●there are no equipment errors.
●the fan is on.
●the Front Panel works.
●the offline test is OK.
Front Panel Good if:
●the backlight comes on (might be OK).
●logo displays (probably OK).
●the first icons display (definitely OK).
●passes the service mode tests (which catch small defects
such as bad pixels, stuck buttons, or no touch).
Power Supply Good if:
●the fan comes on.
●the start button LED lights.
●the Front Panel displays an image.
Paper handling mechanisms Good if:
●the service mode ADF test works.
●the offline test works.
●both tests work without damaging the original.
736 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
Optics Good if:
●there is no optical failure. (An optical failure may also
indicate it is time to clean the optics.)
●Lamps light during the offline test.
●a simple page is copied.
Copy Module Firmware Good if:
●the disk directory matches the standard (file names and
sizes).
●Loading Program 1 is visible on the Front Panel of the
printer.
●the printer configuration page identifies an HP LaserJet
8150MFP.
●copy module firmware is reloaded.
Copy Connect EIO Good if:
●shows up on the configuration pages.
●the fourth startup icon is passed.
ADF Sensors Good if:
●the service mode test of each sensor passes.
ADF Lamp Good if:
●resistor R3 is temporarily shorted to ground and the lamp
lights.
●lights during an offline test.
Home Position Sensor Bad if:
●the Carrier Unit bumps into the side of the copy module
for 5 seconds.
Carrier Unit Lamp Good if:
●lights during an offline test.
Table 7-50. Other Tests (continued)
Possible Bad Part Tests and indicators that the part is “Good” or
“Bad”
C4265-90907 Testing the Copy Module 737
Service Mode Tests
The following tests are available through the copy module’s Tests
Menu in service mode. Follow the prompts on the front panel to
complete the tests.
1Front panel tests
●display
●touch screen
2Keypad/LED tests
●keypad buttons
●start button LED
3Sensors Tests (ADF)
4ADF paper feed tests
738 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907
C4265-90907 Chapter contents 739
8Parts and Diagrams
Chapter contents
How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Illustrations and Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Printer and paper-handling components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Printer Parts and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 791
Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) . . 805
Numerical Parts List (Copy Module). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
740 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams
The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies and
their component parts. Each table lists the reference designator (item
number) for each part, the associated part number for the item, the
quantity, and a description of the part.
While looking for a part number, pay careful attention to the voltage
listed in the description column to ensure that the part number
selected is for the correct model of printer.
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
Note Parts that have no item or part number listed are not field-replaceable
parts and cannot be ordered.
Ordering Parts
All standard part numbers listed are stocked and may be ordered
from HP's CSSO-a or CSSO-E.
Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone
numbers.
Common Hardware
See table 6-1 in Chapter 6 for a list of the common hardware used in
the printer.
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Commercial Service and Support Organization-Americas
8050 Foothills Blvd.
Roseville, CA 95678
Parts Direct Ordering 1-800-227-8164 (U.S. Only)
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Commercial Service and Support Organization-Europe
Wolf-Hirth Strasse 33
D-7030 Böblingen, Germany
(49 7031) 14-2253
C4265-90907 Illustrations and Parts Lists 741
Illustrations and Parts Lists
The following illustrations and their associated parts tables list the
field-replaceable components for this printer. Where applicable, the
exchange part number is listed immediately following the original
equipment part numbers. This chapter also provides two cross-
reference tables of all the parts listed in this chapter: table 8-29 on
page 791 lists the parts in alphabetical order, and table 8-31 on page
805 lists the parts in numerical order. Both tables are cross-
referenced to the appropriate figure and reference designator in this
chapter.
742 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Printer and paper-handling components
Figure 8-1 HP LaserJet 8150 MFP Paper-Handling Components
Table 8-1. Printer and Paper-Handling Components
Ref Description/Product Number
8100 Part/
Exchange
Number
8150 Part/
Exchange No.
(if different) QTY
01 Formatter Assembly C4107-67901 C4265-67901)
01A Formatter Assembly, Exchange C4107-69001 (ex.) C4265-69001
not shown Firmware ROM C4214-60005 C8530-67901
not shown 8 MB Memory SDRAM DIMM C4141-67901 C7842-67901
not shown 16 MB Memory SDRAM DIMM C7843-67901 C7843-67901
not shown 32 MB Memory SDRAM DIMM C4143-67901 C7845-67901
not shown 64 MB Memory SDRAM DIMM C7846-67901 C7846-67901
05 Toner Cartridge/C4182X
06 Envelope Feeder/C3765B C3765-60501 1
C4265-90907 Printer and paper-handling components 743
07 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)/C4781A R95-3002-000CN 1
not shown 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4, 5)/C4780A R95-3003-000CN
08 Tray 2 R98-1005-000CN 1
09 Tray 3 R98-1004-000CN 1
not shown Paper Size Guide (Trays 2 and 3) RF5-1484-000CN 1
not shown Paper Size Guide Label (Trays 2 and 3) RS5-8605-000CN 1
10 Duplexer/C4782A C4782-60501
C4782-69501 (ex.)
1
12 8-bin Mailbox/C4785B 1
12 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4787A 1
12 5-bin Mailbox for Stapler (5-bin Mailbox only,
without the Stapler Unit.)
C4787-60502
C4787-69502 (ex.)
1
13 Face-up Bin RB1-6491-000CN 1
14 EIO Coverplate 5021-0349 3
15 Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 1
not shown 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4238A R95-3007-000CN 1
not shown Stand for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox C4784-60500 1
not shown Packaging Kit, printer 5041-9238
not shown Packaging Kit, duplexer C3762-60500
not shown Packaging Kit, 2000-sheet Input Tray C3763-60500
not shown Packaging Kit, 8-bin Mailbox C3764-60500
not shown Packaging Kit, Envelope Feeder C3765-60500
not shown Maintenance Kit, 100-120V/C3914A C3914-69001 (ex.)
not shown Maintenance Kit, 220-240V/C3915A C3915-69001 (ex.)
not shown C-link Cable Assembly 61 cm (printer to
2000-sheet Input Tray)
C3763-60502
not shown C-link Cable Assembly 97 cm (8-bin Mailbox
to Stapler)
C3766-60539
not shown Stapler Cartridges (3-pack)/C3772A
not shown Power Box (includes bracket clip) C4781-60500
not shown Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501
not shown Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502
Table 8-1. Printer and Paper-Handling Components (continued)
Ref Description/Product Number
8100 Part/
Exchange
Number
8150 Part/
Exchange No.
(if different) QTY
744 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Printer Parts and Diagrams
Figure 8-2 Printer Covers and Doors
C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 745
Table 8-2. Printer Covers and Doors
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No. QTY
1 Display, Control Panel RG5-4384-000CN 1
1a Overlay, Control Panel (English) C4214-40029 1
1a Overlay, Control Panel (French) C4214-40030 1
1a Overlay, Control Panel (Italian) C4214-40031 1
1a Overlay, Control Panel (Portuguese) C4214-40032 1
1a Overlay, Control Panel (German) C4214-40041 1
1a Overlay, Control Panel (Spanish) C4214-40042 1
2 Tray, Output-Face-down RB1-6490-000CN 1
3 Spring, Torsion RB1-6509-000CN 1
4 Spring, Compression RB1-6493-000CN 1
5 Label, Operation RS5-8676-000CN 1
6 Hinge Plate RB2-3641-000CN 1
7 Screw, M4 x 10 XA9-0870-000CN
8 Tray, Face-up RB1-6491-000CN 1
9 Delivery Cover ( Left Side F/U) RB2-3558-000CN 1
10 Hinge, Stopper RF5-2701-000CN 2
11 Cover, Left-Lower RB1-6480-000CN 1
12 Screw, M4 x 8 XA9-0605-000CN
13 Cover, Switch RB1-6492-000CN 1
14 Front Cover (Duplex Jam Removal) RB2-3626-000CN 1
15 Front Cover RG5-4362-000CN 1
16 Right Cover Assembly RG5-1915-000CN 1
17 Open/Close Stopper RB1-6484-000CN 1
18 Right, Lower Cover (Rear Plastic on Metal) RB2-3642-000CN 1
19 Screw, M3 x 8 XA9-0872-000CN
20 Cover, Rear RF5-1402-000CN 1
21 Electrical Cover (Rear by Formatter) RB1-6489-000CN 1
22 Diverter Assembly RG5-4325-000CN 1
22a (n/s) Gear, 20T RA9-1127-000CN 1
22b Diverter Drive Assembly RF9-1249-000CN 1
23 Top Cover Assembly RG5-4360-000CN 1
24 Tray Lock (Plastic Clip) RB2-3636-000CN 1
746 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-3 Printer Internal Components (1 of 4)
C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 747
Table 8-3. Printer Internal Components (1 of 4)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
1 Assembly, Transfer Roller RG9-1361-
000CN
1
2 Roller, Transfer RF9-1394-000CN 1
3 Transfer Guide Bushing RB1-6441-000CN 2
4 Transfer Guide Holder RF5-2676-000CN 2
5 Holder, Damper-Front RB1-6461-000CN 1
6 Holder, Damper-Rear RB1-6462-000CN 1
8 Main Motor Cable RG5-4386-000CN 1
9 Screw, M4 x 8 TP XB6-7400-807CN 1
10 Main Motor RH7-5219-000CN 1
11 Clutch Cover RB2-3631-000CN 1
12 Paper Input Unit (PIU) (See Figure 8-7 on page
754 to order)
RG5-4334-000CN 1
12 Paper Input Unit (PIU) (ex.) C4214-69004 1
13 Fusing Assembly, 110V RG5-4318-000CN 1
x Fuser Lock Lever-Right RB1-6615-020CN 1
x Fuser Lock Lever-Left RB1-6616-020CN 1
13 Fusing Assembly, 110V (ex.) C4214-69007 1
13 Fusing Assembly, 220V RG5-4317-000CN 1
13 Fusing Assembly, 220V (ex.) C4214-69008 1
14 Printer Drive Assembly RG5-4365-000CN 1
15 Registration Assembly RG5-4303-000CN 1
15A Electromagnetic Clutch RH7-5187-000CN 1
16 Feeder Assembly (see figure 8-7 on page 754
for detail)
RG5-4305-000CN 1
17 Tray 1 Assembly (see figure 8-7 on page 754 for
detail)
RG5-4330-000CN 1
17A Cover, Internal Tray RB1-6749-000CN 1
18 Tray 1 Assembly Cover RG5-4329-000CN 1
19 Face-down Delivery Assembly (see figure 8-7
on page 754 for detail)
RG5-1874-000CN 1
748 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-4 Printer Internal Components (2 of 4)
C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 749
Table 8-4. Printer Internal Components (2 of 4)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
1 Guide, Rear RF5-2726-000CN 1
2 Release, Arm RB1-6446-000CN 1
3 Arm-Pressure-front RB1-6444-000CN 1
4 Guide, Front RB2-3622-000CN 1
5 Foot RB1-6421-000CN 4
6 ROD Rail RB1-6778-000CN 2
7 Spring, Tension RS5-2499-000CN 2
8 Guide, Rail RB1-6776-000CN 2
9 Stopper, Rail, Tray RB1-6777-000CN 2
10 Stopper, Rail,Tray RB1-6783-000CN 2
11 Cable, Tray Sensor, Cassette Size RG5-1920-000CN 1
12 Cover, Upper Right RB1-6464-000CN 1
750 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-5 Printer Internal Components (3 of 4)
C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 751
Table 8-5. Printer internal Components (3 of 4)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
1 Cable, Scanner Motor RG5-4378-000CN 1
2 Assembly, Laser Scanner RG5-4344-000CN 1
2 Assembly, Laser Scanner (exchange) C4214-69003 (ex.) 1
3 Laser and Control Panel Cable RG5-4377-000CN 1
4 Stopper, CG RB1-6427-000CN 2
5 Fan, FM2/Laser Scanner RH7-1266-000CN 1
6 Shutter, White (not shown) RB1-6473-000CN 1
7 High-Voltage Power Supply RG5-4306-000CN 1
8 Shutter RB1-6458-000CN 1
752 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-6 Printer Internal Components (4 of 4)
C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 753
Table 8-6. Printer Internal Components (4 of 4)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
1 Guides, Interface RB1-6771-000CN 2
2 Shield, Formatter RF5-2678-000CN 1
3 Guide, Slide RB1-6775-000CN 1
4 Shield, Plate RF5-1464-000CN 1
5 Power Supply, Low-Voltage 110 V RG5-4300-000CN 1
5 Power Supply, Low Voltage-220 V RG5-4301-000CN 1
6 110V Fuse VD5-0246-301CN 1
7 Cable, Registration RG5-1928-000CN 1
8 Cable, Fuser 2 RG5-1850-000CN 1
9 Cable, Fuser 1 RG5-4381-000CN 1
10 Fan, FM3/Formatter RH7-1271-000CN 1
11 Cable, Fan 3 RG5-1921-000CN 1
12 Fan, FM2/Low Voltage Power Supply RH7-1396-000CN 1
754 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-7 Detail of Assemblies
C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 755
Table 8-7. Detail of Assemblies
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
A1 Feeder Assembly RG5-4305-000CN
A2 Block, Shaft Holding, Front RB2-3503-000CN 1
A3 Compression Spring, Front RS6-2072-000CN 1
A4 Sensor Cable RG5-1843-000CN 1
A5 Sensor Arm PS1 RB1-6417-000CN 1
A6 Sensor Arm Spring RB1-6409-000CN 1
A7 Compression Spring, Rear RS6-2073-000CN 1
A8 Block, Shaft Holding, Rear RB2-3504-000CN 1
B1 Assembly, Paper Pickup RG5-4334-000CN 1
B2 Plate, Guide-Upper RB1-6582-000CN
B3 Roller, Pickup RF5-2708-000CN
B4 Limiter, torque RB2-3851-000CN 2
B5 Clutch, Paper Feed RH7-5188-000CN 1
B6 PCA, PIU RG5-1860-000CN 1
B7 Photo Interrupter WG8-0291-000CN 1
B8 Arm, Sensor-PS2 RB1-6557-000CN 1
B9 Spring, Sensor Arm RB1-6558-000CN 1
B10 Cable, Sensor RG5-1859-000CN 1
B11 Motor, PIU RH7-1350-000CN 1
B12 Cable, Paper Pickup RG5-1861-000CN 1
B13 Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN 4
C1 Assembly, Tray 1 RG5-4330-000CN 1
C2 Fan, FM5 RH7-1397-000CN
C3 Tray1 Feed Roller RB1-9526-000CN 1
C4 Tray 1 Separation Pad RF5-2703-000CN 1
D1 Delivery Assembly RG5-1874-000CN 1
D3 Fan, FM4/Delivery Assembly RH7-1289-000CN 1
D5 Paper Height Lever RB1-6693-000CN 1
D6 Paper Sensing Lever RB1-6692-000CN 1
756 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-8 PCB Assembly Location Diagram
Table 8-8. PCB Assembly Locations
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
1 PCB, Switch/Sensor RG5-1846-000CN 1
2 Assembly, DC Controller PCB RG5-4375-030CN 1
2 Assembly, DC Controller PCB (exchange) C4214-69009 (ex.) 1
3 PCB, Tray, Multi-purpose RG5-1884-000CN 1
4 PCB, Tray Sensor RG5-1845-000CN 2
5 Paper P/U PCB RG5-1860-000CN 1
C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 757
Figure 8-9 Face-up Solenoid Assembly
Table 8-9. Face-up Solenoid Assembly
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
1 Face-up Solenoid Assembly RG5-1875-000CN 1
758 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams
Input Devices
2000-sheet Input Tray
Figure 8-10 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2)
77
Kit 1
82
83
75
75 Kit 1
76
72
73
Kit 1
79 74
81
Kit 1
89
87
Kit 1
78
78
80
Kit 1
71
84
85
86
88
Kit 1
Kit 1
C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 759
Table 8-10. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
71 Back Cover RB2-2519-000CN 1
72 Tray Size Labels RS5-8611-000CN 1
73 Tray Size Plate RB1-6894-000CN 1
74 Caster XZ9-0442-000CN 4
75 Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN 2
76 Front Cover (with LED window) RF5-2568-000CN 1
77 Left Cover RF5-2646-000CN 1
78 Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) RF5-2556-000CN 3
79 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray RG5-3845-000CN 1
80 Paper Deck Drive Assembly RG5-3851-000CN 1
81 Paper Deck Drive Bushing RS5-1399-000CN 1
82 Paper Pickup Assembly RG5-3843-000CN 1
83 Pickup Roller RF5-1835-000CN 1
84 Plate Paper Limit Back RG5-3850-000CN 1
85 Plate Paper Limit Middle RG5-3849-000CN 1
86 Plate Paper Reference Front RG5-4201-000CN 1
87 Right Cover RB1-7832-020CN 1
88 Top Cover (Label Included) RG5-2644-000CN 1
89 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) RG5-3854-000CN 1
Kit 1 Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN 1
760 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-11 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2)
C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 761
Table 8-11. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
90 Feet Adjustable Tip RG5-3853-000CN 1
91 Front LED PCA with holder and cable RG5-4204-000CN 1
92 Main Cable RG5-3919-000CN 1
93 Metal retaining spring (Spring Leaf) RB1-7835-000CN 1
94 Metallic Retaining Tab (Plate Stop) RB1-7677-000CN 1
95 Outrigger RG5-3852-000CN 1
96 Paper Deck PCA (2000-sheet Input Tray
Controller)
RG5-3908-000CN 1
97 Paper Quantity Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2166-000CN 1
98 Paper Size Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2168-000CN 1
99 Power Supply Cable (PSU) RG5-3909-000CN 1
100 Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A VD7-1893-151CN 1
101 Tension Spring RS5-2561-000CN 1
102 Universal Power Supply Assembly RG5-4021-000CN 1
103 2000-sheet Input Tray (whole unit) R95-3002-000CN 1
Kit 1 2K (2000-sheet Input Tray) Deck Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN 1
Not
Shown
Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 1
Not
Shown
Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 1
Not
Shown
Power Box (includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 1
Not
Shown
Tray Shipping Lock RB1-7746-000CN 1
Not
Shown
C-link Cable (engine to input device) C3763-60502 1
Not
Shown
Clutch cover for 2000-sheet input tray RB2-2509-000CN 1
762 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
Figure 8-12 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components
C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 763
Table 8-12. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
1 Back Cover RB2-3675-000CN 1
2 Tray Size Labels RS5-8611-000CN 1
3 Tray Size Plate RB1-6894-000CN 1
4 Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN 4
5 Front Top Cover RF5-2762-000CN 1
6 Left Cover RF5-2764-000CN 1
7 Main Cable RG5-4440-000CN 1
8 Front Door (Cover Storage Tray) RB2-3668-000CN 1
9 Paper Deck Drive Assembly RG5-4416-000CN 1
10 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA RG5-4442-000CN 1
11 Paper Feed Assembly (Vertical Transfer Unit) RG5-4403-000CN 1
12 Paper Pickup Assembly RG5-4410-000CN 1
13 Storage Paper Tray RB2-3669-000CN 1
14 Tray-Size Sensing PCA RG5-1845-000CN 1
15 Holder Size PCA RB2-3667-000CN 1
16 Pickup Roller RF5-2708-000CN 1
17 Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A VD7-1893-151CN 1
18 Right Cover RB2-3666-000CN 1
19 Universal Power Supply Assembly RG5-4021-000CN 1
20 Outrigger RG5-4205-000CN 1
21 Caster XZ9-0442-000CN 1
22 Power Supply Cable (PSU) RG5-3909-000CN 1
23 Front LED PCA RG5-4441-000CN 1
25 Tray 4 Assembly R98-1007-000CN 1
26 Tray 5 Assembly R98-1006-000CN 1
27 Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) RF5-2556-000CN 1
not
shown
Power Box (Includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 1
not
shown
Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 1
not
shown
Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 1
764 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Note All screws are included in the Screws Kit, and all shipping locks are
included in the Shipping Locks Kit.
not
shown
Feet Adjustable Tip RG5-3853-000CN 1
not
shown
Clutch cover for 2 x 500-sheet input tray RB2-3690-000CN 1
32 Top Cover (Includes label) RF5-2766-000CN 1
33 Spacer, latch RB2-3705-000CN 1
34 Latch XZ9-0379-000CN 1
35 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (whole unit) R95-3003-000CN 1
Table 8-12. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components (continued)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 765
Output Devices
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
Figure 8-13 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components
766 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Table 8-13. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
1 Top Cover Assembly (Upper Guide) RG1-3838-000CN 1
2 Bin Full Sensor RA2-2484-000CN 1
3 Flag, Sensor RA2-2485-000CN 1
4 Bushing RA2-2505-000CN 1
5 Front Cover RF1-4004-000CN 1
6 Back Cover RF1-4008-000CN 1
7 Power Supply RH3-2205-000CN C4783-69507 1
8 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA
Assembly
RG1-3853-000CN 1
9 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism RH7-5223-000CN 1
10 Solenoid Flipper RH7-5225-000CN 1
11 Reversing Mechanism Motor RF1-4003-000CN 1
12 Plate (Motor Cover) RA2-2541-000CN 1
13 Face-down Bin Assembly, Odd (with 1 roller) RG1-3836-000CN 1
14 Face-down Bin Assembly, Even (with 2 rollers) RG1-3837-000CN 1
15 Reversing Tray (Face-up) RA2-2487-000CN 1
16 Diverter Assembly (Flipper) RG1-3844-000CN 1
17 Face-up Bin Full and Sensor PCA RG1-3816-000CN 1
18 Right Cover Assembly RG1-3840-000CN 1
19 Plate, Stopper RA2-2527-000CN 1
20 LED PCA RG1-3817-000CN 1
21 Empty Bin Sensor PCA RG1-3815-000CN 1
22 Support Plate RA2-2500-000CN 1
23 Full Bin and Interlock sensor PCA RG1-3814-000CN 1
not
shown
C-link Cable (80 cm) C4783-70000 1
25 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, whole unit R95-3007-000CN 1
not
shown
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, Stand Assembly C4784-60500 1
27 Bottom Bin (Tray) RA2-2408-000CN 1
31 Handle Latch RA2-2512-000CN 1
32 Cover Latch RA2-2531-000CN 1
C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 767
Note All screws are included in the Screws Kit.
33 Pin Positioning Bushing RA2-2439-000CN 1
34 Spring Tension RA2-2513-000CN 1
35 Rail Assembly RG1-3842-000CN 1
36 Latching Mechanism RF1-4005-000CN 1
not
shown
Hardware Screws Kit for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RY7-5048-000CN 1
Table 8-13. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components (continued)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
768 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
8-bin Mailbox
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000-
sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling
Accessories (C4788-90904).
Figure 8-14 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3)
C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 769
Table 8-14. 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
20 User LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60515 1
21 Adjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60511 1
22 Attachment Assembly (Rod, Bracket, Cables) C4785-60516 1
23 Blind Cover C4785-60503 1
24 Standard Output Bin C4785-60502 1
25 Face-up Bin C3764-60505 1
26 Front Cover C4785-60504 1
27 8-bin Mailbox Assembly without attachment rod
(Exchange Unit)
C4785-69500 (ex.) 1
28 8-bin Mailbox Assembly with attachment rod
(Whole Unit)
C4785-60500 1
29 8-bin Mailbox Controller (with metal box) C4785-60508 1
30 Nonadjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60510 1
31 Top Cover C3764-60555 1
32 Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69500 (ex.) 1
33 Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 1
34 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler C4787-60502 1
35 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler Assembly (Exchange
Unit)
C4787-69502 (ex.) 1
Kit 1 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 1
Kit 1/
1G
Spacer, Plastic (included in Kit 1)
Kit 3 Hardware C4785-60521 1
Kit 3/
3B
Screws Torx, T20, M4X10 (included in Kit 3)
Kit 3/
3C
Screws Torx, Tapping T20, M4X10 (included in Kit 3)
Kit 3/
3E
Screw Torx, Tapping T10 (included in Kit 3)
770 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-15 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3)
C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 771
Table 8-15. 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
32 Flipper Assembly C4785-60509 1
33 Head Assembly (with Metal Tape) C4785-60506 1
34 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly C4785-60507 1
Kit 1 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 1
Kit 1/
1A
Anticurl String
Kit 1/
1B
Anticurl Spring
Kit 1/
1C
Pulley, Small Bottom
Kit 3 Hardware C4785-60521 1
Kit 3/
3D
Screws Torx, T20, M4x12
Kit 3/
3E
Screw Torx, Tapping T10
Kit 3/
3F
Caster Screws
Not
Shown
Repackaging Kit C4785-60513 1
Not
Shown
Short C-link Cable adapter (extension)1C4785-70001 1
Not
Shown
C-link Cable 5-bin 8-bin Mailbox to Stapler Unit C3766-60539 1
1. The extension is necessary when no input device is used in combination with an 8-bin mailbox or
a 5-bin mailbox with stapler.
772 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-16 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3)
C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 773
Table 8-16. 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
35 3 Diagnostic LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60514 1
36 Attachment Clip C4785-60512 1
37 Back Cover C4785-60505 1
38 Delivery Head Position Motor C3764-60507 1
39 Input Paper Guide (Nose Piece) C3764-60561 1
40 Power Supply C4785-60501 1
41 Transport Belt Motor (with Fan) C4785-60518 1
Kit 1 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 1
Kit 1/1D Cable Holder Round Gasket
Kit 1/1E Flat Cable holder Edge
Kit 1/1F Flat Cable Holder
Kit 2 Cables C4785-60520 1
Kit 2/2A Interlock Switch
Kit 2/2B Delivery Head Motor Cable
Kit 2/2C Flipper Sensors - Controller Cable
Kit 2/2D Flipper Encoder - Controller
Kit 2/2E Flipper Motor - Controller
Kit 2/2AF ESD Cable
Kit 2/2G Delivery Head Assembly Flat Cable
Kit 3 Hardware C4785-60521 1
Kit 3/3A Screws Torx
Not Shown Shipping Lock Kit for 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin
Mailbox with Stapler
C4787-60503 1
774 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Stapler
Figure 8-17 Stapler Internal Components
C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 775
Table 8-17. Stapler Internal Components
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part
No. (if
different) QTY
Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 1
Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69500 (ex.) 1
1 Top Cover Assembly C3766-60501 1
2 Stapling Bed Assembly C3766-60503 1
3 Stapler Control PCA C4787-60501 1
4 Back Plate C3766-60505 1
5 Hinges, Set of C3766-60506 1
6 Wire Frame C3766-60507 1
7 Brushes C3766-60508 1
not shown Stapler Packaging C3766-60509 1
8 Kit: Plastic staple cover; scan bar (shown)
bin full sensor, actuator, and flag (not shown)
C3766-60510 1
not shown Kit: T10 Torx screws (10) C3766-60511 1
9 C-link Cable (97 cm) C3766-60512 1
not shown Mailbox with Stapler Packaging C3766-60516 1
776 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams
Figure 8-18 Assembly Location Diagram
1Covers
2Flatbed
3Glass Plate Assembly
4Power Supply and Main Board Tray
5Carrier Unit
6ADF Unit
7Optical Unit
8Document Cover Assembly
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 777
Figure 8-19 Covers
778 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Table 8-18. Covers
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
101 Upper Cover (skin) PA03002-C107FJ 1
102 ADF Cover (skin) PA03002-C106FJ 1
103 ADF Latch Cap PA03002-C201FJ 1
105 Output Tray Assembly PA03002-C121FJ 1
105-1 Output Tray Flip-out PA03002-C263FJ 1
106 Panel Cover PA03002-C264FJ 1
107 Front Panel Bracket PA03002-C257FJ 3
108 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring PA03002-C266FJ 1
109 Front Panel 9000288TF 1
not
shown
Front Panel Frame Ground Plate PA03002-C272FJ 1
not
shown
Front Panel Cable Clamp PA03002-C273FJ 1
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 779
Figure 8-20 Flatbed
Table 8-19. Flatbed
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
202 Carrier Rail PA03002-C205FJ 1
203 FB Motor Unit (w/belt) PA03002-C116FJ 1
205 Carrier Tension Pulley Collar PA03002-C214FJ 1
206 Carrier Tension Pulley Spring PA03002-C212FJ 1
207 Carrier Tension Pulley Shaft PA03002-C211FJ 1
208 Carrier Belt Tension Pulley PA03002-C210FJ 1
209 Carrier Tension Pulley Spacer PA03002-C213FJ 2
210 Idle Roller Coil Spring PA03002-C209FJ 1
211 Carrier Unit Protector PA03002-C216FJ 1
212 Rubber Foot PA03002-C218FJ 4
213 Carrier Ribbon Cable Protector PA03002-C217FJ 1
214 Control PCA Protector PA03002-C215FJ 1
780 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
215 Junction PCA Cover PA03002-C267FJ 1
216 Junction PCA PA03002-C103FJ 1
217 Carrier Ribbon Cable Ferrite Bead PA03002-C262FJ 1
218 Front Panel Cable PA03002-C125FJ 1
219 Front Panel Cable Cover PA03002-C270FJ 1
220 Carrier Flex Cable PA03002-C204FJ 1
221 Home Position Sensor PA03002-C207FJ 1
222 Carrier Stopper (shipping lock) PA03002-C124FJ 1
223 Frame Ground Spring 1 PA03002-C208FJ 1
Table 8-19. Flatbed (continued)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 781
Figure 8-21 Glass Plate and PCA Assembly
Table 8-20. Glass Plate and PCA Assembly
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
301 Glass Plate Assembly PA03002-C219FJ 1
301-1 Output Tray Bracket, Front PA03002-C223FJ 1
301-2 Output Tray Bracket, Rear PA03002-C222FJ 1
301-4 Exit Idle Roller PA03002-C224FJ 2
301-5 HK Ring V2 PA03002-C225FJ 2
302 Main/PS Cover Bracket PA03002-C220FJ 1
304 Fan Assembly PA03002-C118FJ 1
305 Power Supply PA03002-C101FJ 1
306 Control PCA (FJ) PA03002-C102FJ 1
307 Copy Processor Card Cage PA03002-C258FJ 1
309 Back PCA Board (CP mate) PA03002-C119FJ 1
311 DC Cable PS to Main PA03002-C203FJ 1
313 RFI Cover PA03002-C202FJ 1
782 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
314 CCD Cable PA03002-C229FJ 1
315 Copy Processor Card PM-3700 1
316 Copy Connect Cable 8120-8749 1
Table 8-20. Glass Plate and PCA Assembly (continued)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 783
Figure 8-22 Carrier Unit
Table 8-21. Carrier Unit
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
401 Carrier Unit PA03002-C113FJ 1
401-1 Lower Lamp (front side) PA03002-C114FJ 1
401-2 Carrier Unit Lamp PCA PA03002-C251FJ 1
401-3 Carrier Rail Bushing PA03002-C206FJ 1
401-4 Carrier Unit Dust Cover PA03002-C256FJ 1
401-5 Carrier Unit Lubrication Felt PA03002-C259FJ 1
784 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-23 ADF Unit
Table 8-22. ADF Unit
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
501-1 ADF Latch Lever Front PA03002-C242FJ 1
501-2 ADF Latch Spring PA03002-C245FJ 2
501-3 Drive Roller Bearing PA03002-C233FJ 2
501-5 Optical Unit Tie Down w/Pad PA03002-C227FJ 1
501-6 Drive Roller Shaft PA03002-C230FJ 2
501-7 ADF Latch Shaft PA03002-C244FJ 1
501-8 Pick Spring PA03002-C240FJ 1
501-9 ADF Motor Unit PA03002-C109FJ 1
501-
11
LED Assembly (includes cable) PA03002-C126FJ 1
501-
12
Key Washer PA03002-C241FJ 1
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 785
501-
15
ADF Belt PA03002-C111FJ 1
501-
16
Bearing for Feed Roller PA03002-C265FJ 2
501-
17
ADF Latch Lever Rear PA03002-C243FJ 1
501-
18
Reduction Gear PA03002-C232FJ 2
501-
19
Drive Roller Gear PA03002-C231FJ 1
501-
20
Pad Shaft PA03002-C238FJ 2
501-
21
Pad Assembly Frame PA03002-C236FJ 1
501-
22
ADF Paper Empty Sensor Arm PA03002-C235FJ 1
501-
23
Pad Plate PA03002-C239FJ 1
501-
24
Pad Spring PA03002-C237FJ 1
501-
25
Separation Pad Assembly PA03002-C122FJ 1
501-
26
Sensor Unit Assembly PA03002-C110FJ 1
501-
26A
Top of Form Sensor Arm PA03002-C234FJ 1
501-
26B
ADF Cable PA03002-C228FJ 1
501-
27
Paper Anti Static Assembly PA03002-C246FJ 1
501-
30
Pick Roller Cover PA03002-C112FJ 1
501-
32
ADF Lift Spring Rear PA03002-C248FJ 1
501-
33
ADF Lift Spring Front PA03002-C247FJ 1
501-
34
Idle Roller Leaf Spring PA03002-C249FJ 1
501-
35
Pick Roller Assembly PA03002-C120FJ 1
Table 8-22. ADF Unit (continued)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
786 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
501-
36
Brass Bushing for Pick Roller PA03002-C269FJ 4
501-
37
Pick Roller Clutch/Gear PA03002-C250FJ 1
501-
38
Thumb Screws (paper guide) (screws for Pick
Roller Cover)
PA03002-C123FJ 2
Table 8-22. ADF Unit (continued)
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 787
Figure 8-24 Optical Unit
Table 8-23. Optical Unit
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
501 ADF Unit PA03002-C108FJ 1
601 Optical Unit PA03002-C117FJ 1
601-1 Upper Lamp (back side) PA03002-C115FJ 1
601-2 ADF Lamp PCA PA03002-C252FJ 1
788 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-25 Document Cover Assembly
Table 8-24. Document Cover Assembly
Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No.
(if different) QTY
701 FB Cover Assembly PA03002-C104FJ 1
701-1 Document Holding Pad PA03002-C105FJ 1
701-2 Rubber Stop, Document Cover PA03002-C226FJ 1
701-3 Paper Chute Flip Out PA03002-C260FJ 1
C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 789
Figure 8-26 Screws (1 of 4)
Figure 8-27 Screws (2 of 4)
Table 8-25. Screws (1 of 4)
RefABCDDescription 8100 and 8150
Part Number Qty
in kit
B1 8 mm 2.5 mm 8 mm 3 mm TP Screw m3 x 8 PA03002-C282FJ 20
B2 8 mm 2.5 mm 6 mm 3 mm TP Screw m3 x 6 PA03002-C281FJ 20
Table 8-26. Screws (2 of 4)
RefABCDDescription 8100 and 8150
Part Number Qty
in kit
B3 10 mm 3.2 mm 8 mm 4 mm TP Screw m4 x 8 PA03002-C288FJ 20
B4 7 mm 2 mm 6 mm 3 mm Machine Screw w/
washer m3 x 6
PA03002-C283FJ 20
B5 7 mm 2 mm 8 mm 3 mm Machine Screw w/
washer m3 x 8
PA03002-C284FJ 20
B6 7 mm 2 mm 35 mm 3 mm Machine Screw w/
washer m3 x 35
PA03002-C285FJ 20
B10 9 mm 2.6 mm 8 mm 4 mm Machine Screw w/
washer m4 x 8
PA03002-C286FJ 20
A
BC
D
A
BC
D
790 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Figure 8-28 Screws (3 of 4)
Figure 8-29 Screws (4 of 4)
Table 8-27. Screws (3 of 4)
RefABCDDescription 8100 and 8150
Part Number Qty
in kit
B15 6 mm 1.75 mm 6 mm 3 mm Flat Head Screw m3 x6 PA03002-C287FJ 20
Table 8-28. Screws (4 of 4)
RefABCDDescription 8100 and 8150
Part Number Qty
in kit
B20 7 mm 3 mm 2.6 mm 0.6 mm E-ring, Latch Lever
(20pcs)
PA03002-C254FJ 20
B21 9 mm 4 mm 3.5 mm 0.6 mm E-ring, Idle Roller
(20pcs)
PA03002-C253FJ 20
B22 5 mm 2 mm 1.7 mm 0.4 mm Retainer Ring ADF Lock
Bearing (20pcs)
PA03002-C255FJ 20
not
shown
Thumb screws for Pick
Roller Cover
PA03002-C123FJ
not
shown
13 5.5 10 4 Thumb screw for
Document Cover
CA03002-C290 20
A
BC
D
A
B
CD
C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 791
Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-
handling Devices)
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4 and 5)/C4780A R95-3003-000CN table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-12 on page 763
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA RG5-4442-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)/C4781A R95-3002-000CN table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761
2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray RG5-3845-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
2K (2000-sheet Input Tray) Deck Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
3 Diagnostic LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60514 table 8-16 on page 773
5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler C4787-60502 table 8-14 on page 769
5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler Assembly (Exchange
Unit)
C4787-69502 (ex.) table 8-14 on page 769
5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4787A C4787-69502 (ex.) table 8-1 on page 742
5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4787A (8-bin Mailbox
only, without the Stapler Unit.)
C4787-60502 table 8-1 on page 742
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly RG1-3853-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, Stand Assembly C4784-60500 table 8-13 on page 766
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4783A R95-3007-000CN table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-13 on page 766
8-bin Mailbox/C4785A table 8-1 on page 742
Adjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60511 table 8-14 on page 769
Arm, Sensor-PS2 RB1-6557-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Arm-Pressure-front RB1-6444-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Assembly, DC Controller PCB RG5-4375-030CN table 8-8 on page 756
Assembly, DC Controller PCB (exchange) C4214-69009 (ex.) table 8-8 on page 756
Assembly, Laser Scanner RG5-4344-000CN table 8-5 on page 751
Assembly, Laser Scanner (exchange) C4214-69003 (ex.) table 8-5 on page 751
Assembly, MP Tray (Tray 1) RG5-4330-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Assembly, Paper Pickup RG5-4334-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Assembly, Transfer Roller RG9-1361-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Attachment Assembly (Rod, Bracket, Cables) C4785-60516 table 8-14 on page 769
792 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Attachment Clip C4785-60512 table 8-16 on page 773
Back Cover, 8-bin Mailbox C4785-60505 table 8-16 on page 773
Back Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RA2-2455-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Back Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray RB2-2519-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Back Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RB2-3675-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Back Plate C3766-60505 table 8-17 on page 775
Bin Full Sensor RA2-2484-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Blind Cover C4785-60503 table 8-14 on page 769
Block, Shaft Holding, Front RB2-3503-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Block, Shaft Holding, Rear RB2-3504-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Bottom Bin (Tray) RA2-2408-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Brushes C3766-60508 table 8-17 on page 775
Bushing RA2-2505-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
C-link Cable (61 cm) (engine to input device) C3763-60502 table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761
C-link Cable (80 cm) C4783-70000 table 8-13 on page 766
C-link Cable (97 cm) C3766-60512 table 8-17 on page 775
C-link Cable Assembly 97 cm (8-bin Mailbox to
Stapler)
C3766-60539 table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-15 on page 771
Cable, Fan 3 RG5-1921-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Cable, Fuser 1 RG5-4381-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Cable, Fuser 2 RG5-1850-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Cable, Paper Pickup RG5-1861-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Cable, Registration RG5-1928-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Cable, Scanner Motor RG5-4378-000CN table 8-5 on page 751
Cable, Sensor RG5-1859-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Cable, Tray Sensor RG5-1920-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Cables C4785-60520 table 8-16 on page 773
Caster XZ9-0442-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
Clutch Cover RB2-3631-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Clutch cover for 2 x 500-sheet input tray RB2-3690-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Clutch cover for 2000-sheet input tray RB2-2509-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Clutch, Paper Feed RH7-5188-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 793
Compression Spring, Front RS6-2072-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Compression Spring, Rear RS6-2073-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Cover Latch RA2-2531-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Cover, Internal Tray RB1-6749-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Cover, Left-Lower RB1-6480-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Cover, Rear RF5-1402-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Cover, Switch RB1-6492-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Cover, Upper Right RB1-6464-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Delivery Assembly RG5-1874-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Delivery Cover (Left Side F/U) RB2-3558-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Delivery Head Position Motor C3764-60507 table 8-16 on page 773
Display, Control Panel RG5-4384-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Diverter Assembly RG5-4325-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Diverter Assembly (Flipper) RG1-3844-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Diverter Drive Assembly RF9-1249-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Duplexer/C4782A C4782-60501
C4782-69501 (ex.)
table 8-1 on page 742
EIO Coverplate 5021-0349 table 8-1 on page 742
Electrical Cover (Rear by Formatter) RB1-6489-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Electromagnetic Clutch RH7-5187-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Empty Bin Sensor PCA RG1-3815-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Envelope Feeder/C4242B C3765-60501 table 8-1 on page 742
Face-down Bin Assembly, Even (with 2 rollers) RG1-3837-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Face-down Bin Assembly, Odd (with 1 roller) RG1-3836-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Face-down Delivery Assembly RG5-1874-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Face-up Bin (8-bin Mailbox) C3764-60505 table 8-3 on page 747
Face-up Bin (engine) RB1-6491-000CN table 8-1 on page 742
Face-up Bin Full and Sensor PCA RG1-3816-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Face-up Solenoid Assembly RG5-1875-000CN table 8-9 on page 757
Fan, FM1/Laser Scanner RH7-1396-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Fan, FM2/Low Voltage Power Supply RH7-1266-000CN table 8-5 on page 751
Fan, FM3/ Formatter RH7-1271-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Fan, FM4/Delivery Assembly RH7-1289-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
794 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Fan, FM5 RH7-1397-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
Feeder Assembly RG5-4305-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Ttable 8-7 on page 755
Feet Adjustable Tip RG5-3853-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
Flag, Sensor RA2-2485-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Flipper Assembly C4785-60509 table 8-15 on page 771
Foot RB1-6421-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Formatter Assembly C4107-67901 table 8-1 on page 742
Formatter Assembly, Exchange C4107-69001 (ex.) table 8-1 on page 742
Front Cover, 8-bin Mailbox C4785-60504 table 8-14 on page 769
Front Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RF1-4004-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Front Cover, engine RG5-4362-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Front Cover (Duplex Jam Removal) RB2-3626-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Front Cover (with LED window) RF5-2568-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Front Door (Cover Storage Tray) RB2-3668-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Front LED PCA RG5-4441-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Front LED PCA with holder and cable RG5-4204-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Front Top Cover RF5-2762-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Full Bin and Interlock sensor PCA RG1-3814-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Fuser Lock Lever-Left RB1-6616-020CN table 8-3 on page 747
Fuser Lock Lever-Right RB1-6615-020CN table 8-3 on page 747
Fusing Assembly, 110V RG5-4318-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Fusing Assembly, 220V RG5-4317-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Fusing Assembly, 110V (ex.) C4214-69007 table 8-3 on page 747
Fusing Assembly, 220V (ex.) C4214-69008 table 8-3 on page 747
Gear, 20T RA9-1127-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Guide, Front RB2-3622-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Guide, Rail RB1-6776-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Guide, Rear RF5-2726-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Guide, Slide RB1-6775-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Guides, Interface RB1-6771-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 795
Handle Latch RA2-2512-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Hardware C4785-60521 table 8-14 on page 769
table 8-15 on page 771
table 8-16 on page 773
Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Hardware Screws Kit for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RY7-5048-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Head Assembly (with Metal Tape) C4785-60506 table 8-15 on page 771
High-Voltage Power Supply RG5-4306-000CN table 8-5 on page 751
Hinge Plate RB2-3641-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Hinge, Stopper RF5-2701-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Hinges, Set of C3766-60506 table 8-17 on page 775
Holder Size PCA RB2-3667-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Holder, Damper-Front RB1-6461-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Holder, Damper-Rear RB1-6462-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Input Paper Guide (Nose Piece) C3764-60561 table 8-16 on page 773
Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
Kit: Plastic staple cover; scan bar
bin full sensor, actuator, and flag
C3766-60510 table 8-17 on page 775
Kit: T10 Torx screws (10) C3766-60511 table 8-17 on page 775
Label, Operation RS5-8676-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Laser and Control Panel Cable RG5-4377-000CN table 8-5 on page 751
Latch XZ9-0379-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Latching Mechanism RF1-4005-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
LED PCA RG1-3817-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Left Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray RF5-2646-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Left Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RF5-2764-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Limiter, torque RB2-3851-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) RF5-2556-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
Mailbox with Stapler Packaging C3766-60516 table 8-17 on page 775
Main Cable, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3919-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
796 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Main Cable, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RG5-4440-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Main Motor RH7-5219-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Main Motor Cable RG5-4386-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Maintenance Kit, 100-120V/C3914A C3914-69001 (ex.) table 8-1 on page 742
Maintenance Kit, 220-240V/C3915A C3915-69001 (ex.) table 8-1 on page 742
Metal retaining spring (Spring Leaf) RB1-7835-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Metal Tape and Housing Assembly C4785-60507 table 8-15 on page 771
Metallic Retaining Tab (Plate Stop) RB1-7677-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Motor, PIU RH7-1350-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
MP Separation Pad RF5-2703-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
MP Tray Assembly Cover (Tray 1) RG5-4329-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Multi-purpose Tray Assembly (Tray 1) RG5-4330-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller (Tray 1) RB1-9526-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
8-bin Mailbox Assembly with attachment rod
(Whole Unit)
C4785-60500 table 8-14 on page 769
8-bin Mailbox Assembly without attachment rod
(Exchange Unit)
C4785-69500 (ex.) table 8-14 on page 769
8-bin Mailbox Controller (with metal box) C4785-60508 table 8-14 on page 769
Nonadjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60510 table 8-14 on page 769
Open/Close Stopper RB1-6484-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Outrigger, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RG5-3852-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Outrigger, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-4205-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Packaging Kit, 2000-sheet Input Tray C3763-60500 table 8-1 on page 742
Overlay, Control Panel (English) C4214-40029 table 8-2 on page 745
Overlay, Control Panel (French) C4214-40030 table 8-2 on page 745
Overlay, Control Panel (German) C4214-40041 table 8-2 on page 745
Overlay, Control Panel (Italian) C4214-40031 table 8-2 on page 745
Overlay, Control Panel (Portuguese) C4214-40032 table 8-2 on page 745
Overlay, Control Panel (Spanish) C4214-40042 table 8-2 on page 745
Packaging Kit, duplexer C3762-60500 table 8-1 on page 742
Packaging Kit, Envelope Feeder C3765-60500 table 8-1 on page 742
Packaging Kit, 8-bin Mailbox C3764-60500 table 8-1 on page 742
Packaging Kit, Printer 5041-9238 table 8-1 on page 742
Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3851-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 797
Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray
RG5-4416-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Paper Deck Drive Bushing RS5-1399-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Paper Deck PCA (2000-sheet Input Tray
Controller)
RG5-3908-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Paper Feed Assembly (Vertical Transfer Unit) RG5-4403-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Paper Height Lever RB1-6693-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Paper Input Unit (PIU) RG5-4334-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Paper Input Unit (PIU) (ex.) C4214-69004 table 8-3 on page 747
Paper Pickup Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3843-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Paper Pickup Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RG5-4410-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Paper Quantity Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2166-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Paper Sensing Lever RB1-6692-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Paper Size Guide (Trays 2 and 3) RF5-1484-000CN table 8-1 on page 742
Paper Size Guide Label (Trays 2 and 3) RS5-8605-000CN table 8-1 on page 742
Paper Size Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2168-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
PCA, PIU RG5-1860-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
PCB, Switch/Sensor RG5-1846-000CN table 8-8 on page 756
PCB, Tray Sensor RB5-1845-000CN table 8-8 on page 756
PCB, Tray, Multi-purpose RG5-1884-000CN table 8-8 on page 756
Photo Interrupter WG8-0291-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Pickup Roller, 2000-sheet Input Tray RF5-1835-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Pickup Roller, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RF5-2708-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Pin Positioning Bushing RA2-2439-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Plastic Parts C4785-60519 table 8-14 on page 769
table 8-15 on page 771
table 8-16 on page 773
Plate (Motor Cover) RA2-2541-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Plate Paper Limit Back RG5-4201-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Plate Paper Limit Middle RG5-3849-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Plate Paper Reference Front RG5-3850-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Plate, Guide-Upper RB1-6582-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Plate, Stopper RA2-2527-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
798 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Power Box (Includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 Ttable 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
Power Supply (8-bin Mailbox) C4785-60501 table 8-16 on page 773
Power Supply (7-bin Tabletop Mailbox) RH3-2205-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Power Supply Cable (PSU) RG5-3909-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A VD7-1893-151CN table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
Power Supply, Low Voltage-220 V RG5-4301-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Power Supply, Low-Voltage 110 V RG5-4300-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Printer Drive Assembly RG5-4365-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Rail Assembly RA2-3842-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Registration Assembly RG5-4303-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Release, Arm RB1-6446-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Repackaging Kit C4785-60513 table 8-15 on page 771
Reversing Mechanism Motor RF7-1395-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Reversing Tray (Face-up) RA2-2487-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Right Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray RB1-7832-020CN table 8-10 on page 759
Right Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RB2-3666-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Right Cover Assembly, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RG1-3840-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Right Cover Assembly, engine RG5-1915-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Right, Lower Cover (Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal) RB2-3642-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
ROD RB1-6778-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Rollers, Feed and Separation RF5-1834-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Roller, Pickup RF5-2708-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Roller, Transfer RF9-1394-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Screw, M3 x 8 XA9-0872-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Screw, M4 x 10 XA9-0870-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Screw, M4 x 8 XA9-0605-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Screw, M4 x 8 TP XB6-7400-807CN table 8-3 on page 747
Sensor Arm PS1 RB1-6417-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Sensor Arm Spring RB1-6409-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Sensor Cable RG5-1843-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 799
Shield, Formatter RF5-2678-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Shield, Plate RF5-1464-000CN table 8-6 on page 753
Shipping Lock Kit for 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox
with Stapler
C4787-60503 table 8-16 on page 773
Short C-link Cable adapter C4785-70001 table 8-15 on page 771
Shutter, White RB1-6473-000CN table 8-5 on page 751
Solenoid Flipper RH7-5225-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Solenoid Reversing Mechanism RH7-5223-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Spacer, latch RB2-3705-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Spring, Compression RB1-6493-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Spring, Torsion RB1-6509-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Spring Tension RA2-2513-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Spring, Sensor Arm RB1-6558-000CN table 8-7 on page 755
Spring, Tension RS5-2499-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Stand for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4783A C4784-60500 table 8-1 on page 742
Standard Output Bin C4785-60502 table 8-14 on page 769
Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-14 on page 769
table 8-17 on page 775
Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69500 (ex.) table 8-14 on page 769
table 8-17 on page 775
Stapler Cartridges (3-pack)/C3772A table 8-1 on page 742
Stapler Control PCA C4787-60501 table 8-17 on page 775
Stapler Packaging C3766-60509 table 8-17 on page 775
Stapling Bed Assembly C3766-60503 table 8-17 on page 775
Stopper, CG RB1-6427-000CN table 8-5 on page 751
Stopper, Rail RB1-6777-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Stopper, Rail RB1-6783-000CN table 8-4 on page 749
Storage Paper Tray RB2-3669-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Support Plate RA2-2500-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Tension Spring RS5-2561-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Toner Cartridge/C4182X table 8-1 on page 742
Top Cover, 8-bin Mailbox C3764-60555 table 8-14 on page 769
Top Cover (Includes label), 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray
RF5-2766-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
800 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Top Cover (Label Included), 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-2644-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Top Cover Assembly (Engine) RG5-4360-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Top Cover Assembly, stapler C3766-60501 table 8-17 on page 775
Top Cover Assembly (Upper Guide), 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox
RG1-3838-000CN table 8-13 on page 766
Transfer Guide RF5-2676-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Transfer Guide Bushing RB1-6441-000CN table 8-3 on page 747
Transport Belt Motor (with Fan) C4785-60518 table 8-16 on page 773
Tray 2 R98-1005-000CN table 8-1 on page 742
Tray 3 R98-1004-000CN table 8-1 on page 742
Tray 4 Assembly R98-1007-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Tray 5 Assembly R98-1006-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Tray Lock (Plastic Clip) RB2-3636-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Tray Shipping Lock RB1-7746-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
Tray Size Labels RS5-8611-000CN Ttable 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
Tray Size Plate RB1-6894-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
Tray, Face-up RB1-6491-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Tray, Output-Face-down RB1-6490-000CN table 8-2 on page 745
Tray-Size Sensing PCA RG5-1845-000CN table 8-12 on page 763
Universal Power Supply Assembly RG5-4021-000CN table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
User LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60515 table 8-14 on page 769
Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) RG5-3854-000CN table 8-10 on page 759
Wire Frame C3766-60507 table 8-17 on page 775
Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) 801
Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module)
Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
ADF Belt PA03002-C111FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Cable PA03002-C228FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Cover (skin) PA03002-C106FJ table 8-18 on page 778
ADF Lamp PCA PA03002-C252FJ table 8-23 on page 787
ADF Latch Cap PA03002-C201FJ table 8-18 on page 778
ADF Latch Lever Front PA03002-C242FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Latch Lever Rear PA03002-C243FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Latch Shaft PA03002-C244FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Latch Spring PA03002-C245FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Lift Spring Front PA03002-C247FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Lift Spring Rear PA03002-C248FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Motor Unit PA03002-C109FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Paper Empty Sensor Arm PA03002-C235FJ table 8-22 on page 784
ADF Unit PA03002-C108FJ table 8-23 on page 787
Back PCA Board (CP mate) PA03002-C119FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Bearing for Feed Roller PA03002-C265FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Brass Bushing for Pick Roller PA03002-C269FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Calibration Target Kit PA03002-C261FJ
Carrier Belt Tension Pulley PA03002-C210FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Carrier Flex Cable PA03002-C204FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Carrier Rail PA03002-C205FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Carrier Rail Bushing PA03002-C206FJ table 8-21 on page 783
Carrier Ribbon Cable Ferrite Bead PA03002-C262FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Carrier Ribbon Cable Protector PA03002-C217FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Carrier Stopper (shipping lock) PA03002-C124FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Carrier Tension Pulley Collar PA03002-C214FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Carrier Tension Pulley Shaft PA03002-C211FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Carrier Tension Pulley Spacer PA03002-C213FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Carrier Tension Pulley Spring PA03002-C212FJ table 8-19 on page 779
802 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Carrier Unit PA03002-C113FJ table 8-21 on page 783
Carrier Unit Dust Cover PA03002-C256FJ table 8-21 on page 783
Carrier Unit Lamp PCA PA03002-C251FJ table 8-21 on page 783
Carrier Unit Lubrication Felt PA03002-C259FJ table 8-21 on page 783
Carrier Unit Protector PA03002-C216FJ table 8-19 on page 779
CCD Cable PA03002-C229FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Control PCA (FJ) PA03002-C102FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Control PCA Protector PA03002-C215FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Copy Connect Cable 8120-8749 table 8-20 on page 781
Copy Processor Card PM-3700 table 8-20 on page 781
Copy Processor Card Cage PA03002-C258FJ table 8-20 on page 781
DC Cable PS to Main PA03002-C203FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Document Holding Pad PA03002-C105FJ table 8-24 on page 788
Drive Roller Bearing PA03002-C233FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Drive Roller Gear PA03002-C231FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Drive Roller Shaft PA03002-C230FJ table 8-20 on page 781
E-ring, Idle Roller (20pcs) PA03002-C253FJ table 8-28 on page 790
E-ring, Latch Lever (20pcs) PA03002-C254FJ table 8-28 on page 790
Exit Idle Roller PA03002-C224FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Fan Assembly PA03002-C118FJ table 8-20 on page 781
FB Cover Assembly PA03002-C104FJ table 8-24 on page 788
FB Motor Unit (w/belt) PA03002-C116FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Flat Head Screw m3 x6 PA03002-C287FJ table 8-27 on page 790
Frame Ground Spring 1 PA03002-C208FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Front Panel 9000288TF table 8-18 on page 778
Front Panel Bracket PA03002-C257FJ table 8-18 on page 778
Front Panel Cable PA03002-C125FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Front Panel Cable Clamp PA03002-C273FJ table 8-18 on page 778
Front Panel Cable Cover PA03002-C270FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Front Panel Frame Ground Plate PA03002-C272FJ table 8-18 on page 778
Front Panel Frame Ground Spring PA03002-C266FJ table 8-18 on page 778
Glass Plate Assembly PA03002-C219FJ table 8-20 on page 781
HK Ring V2 PA03002-C225FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module (continued)
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) 803
Home Position Sensor PA03002-C207FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Idle Roller Coil Spring PA03002-C209FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Idle Roller Leaf Spring PA03002-C249FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Junction PCA PA03002-C103FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Junction PCA Cover PA03002-C267FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Key Washer PA03002-C241FJ table 8-20 on page 781
LED Assembly (includes cable) PA03002-C126FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Lower Lamp (front side) PA03002-C114FJ table 8-21 on page 783
Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 35 PA03002-C285FJ table 8-26 on page 789
Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 6 PA03002-C283FJ table 8-26 on page 789
Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 8 PA03002-C284FJ table 8-26 on page 789
Machine Screw w/washer m4 x 8 PA03002-C286FJ table 8-26 on page 789
Main/PS Cover Bracket PA03002-C220FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Maintenance Kit: see Pick Roller Assembly and
Separation Pad Assembly
Optical Unit PA03002-C117FJ table 8-23 on page 787
Optical Unit Tie Down w/Pad PA03002-C227FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Output Tray Assembly PA03002-C121FJ table 8-18 on page 778
Output Tray Bracket, Front PA03002-C223FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Output Tray Bracket, Rear PA03002-C222FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Output Tray Flip-out PA03002-C263FJ table 8-18 on page 778
Pad Assembly Frame PA03002-C236FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Pad Plate PA03002-C239FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Pad Shaft PA03002-C238FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Pad Spring PA03002-C237FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Panel Cover PA03002-C264FJ table 8-18 on page 778
Paper Anti Static Assembly PA03002-C246FJ table 8-22 on page 784
Paper Chute Flip Out PA03002-C260FJ table 8-24 on page 788
Pick Roller Assembly PA03002-C120FJ table 8-22 on page 784
Pick Roller Clutch/Gear PA03002-C250FJ table 8-22 on page 784
Pick Roller Cover PA03002-C112FJ table 8-22 on page 784
Pick Spring PA03002-C240FJ table 8-22 on page 784
Power Supply PA03002-C101FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module (continued)
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
804 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
Reduction Gear PA03002-C232FJ table 8-22 on page 784
Retainer Ring ADF Lock Bearing (20pcs) PA03002-C255FJ table 8-28 on page 790
RFI Cover PA03002-C202FJ table 8-20 on page 781
Rubber Foot PA03002-C218FJ table 8-19 on page 779
Rubber Stop, Document Cover PA03002-C226FJ table 8-24 on page 788
Sensor Unit Assembly PA03002-C110FJ table 8-22 on page 784
Separation Pad Assembly PA03002-C122FJ table 8-22 on page 784
Thumb Screws (paper guide) (screws for Pick
Roller Cover)
PA03002-C123FJ table 8-22 on page 784
Top of Form Sensor Arm PA03002-C234FJ table 8-22 on page 784
TP Screw m3 x 6 PA03002-C281FJ table 8-25 on page 789
TP Screw m3 x 8 PA03002-C282FJ table 8-25 on page 789
Upper Cover (skin) PA03002-C107FJ table 8-18 on page 778
Upper Lamp (back side) PA03002-C115FJ table 8-23 on page 787
Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module (continued)
Description Part Number Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 805
Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling
devices)
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
Stapler Cartridges (3-pack)/C3772A table 8-1 on page 742
Toner Cartridge/C4182X table 8-1 on page 742
5021-0349 EIO Coverplate table 8-1 on page 742
5041-9238 Packaging Kit, Printer table 8-1 on page 742
C3762-60500 Packaging Kit, duplexer table 8-1 on page 742
C3763-60500 Packaging Kit, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-1 on page 742
C3763-60502 C-link Cable (61 cm) (engine to input device) table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761
C3764-60500 Packaging Kit, 8-bin Mailbox table 8-1 on page 742
C3764-60505 Face-up Bin (8-bin Mailbox) table 8-14 on page 769
C3764-60507 Delivery Head Position Motor table 8-16 on page 773
C3764-60555 Top Cover, 8-bin Mailbox table 8-14 on page 769
C3764-60561 Input Paper Guide (Nose Piece) table 8-16 on page 773
C3765-60500 Packaging Kit, Envelope Feeder table 8-1 on page 742
C3765-60501 Envelope Feeder/C3765B table 8-1 on page 742
C3766-60501 Top Cover Assembly, stapler table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60503 Stapling Bed Assembly table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60505 Back Plate table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60506 Hinges, Set of table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60507 Wire Frame table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60508 Brushes table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60509 Stapler Packaging table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60510 Kit: Plastic staple cover; scan bar
bin full sensor, actuator, and flag
table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60511 Kit: T10 Torx screws (10) table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60512 C-link Cable (97 cm) table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60516 Mailbox with Stapler Packaging table 8-17 on page 775
C3766-60539 C-link Cable Assembly 97 cm (8-bin Mailbox to
Stapler)
table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-15 on page 771
806 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
C3914-69001 (ex.) Maintenance Kit, 100-120V/C3914A table 8-1 on page 742
C3915-69001 (ex.) Maintenance Kit, 220-240V/C3915A table 8-1 on page 742
C4107-69001 (ex.) Formatter Assembly, Exchange table 8-1 on page 742
C4107-67901 Formatter Assembly table 8-1 on page 742
C4214-40029 Overlay, Control Panel (English) table 8-2 on page 745
C4214-40030 Overlay, Control Panel (French) table 8-2 on page 745
C4214-40031 Overlay, Control Panel (Italian) table 8-2 on page 745
C4214-40032 Overlay, Control Panel (Portuguese) table 8-2 on page 745
C4214-40041 Overlay, Control Panel (German) table 8-2 on page 745
C4214-40042 Overlay, Control Panel (Spanish) table 8-2 on page 745
C4214-69009 (ex.) Assembly, DC Controller PCB (exchange) table 8-8 on page 756
C4214-69003 (ex.) Assembly, Laser Scanner (exchange) table 8-5 on page 751
C4214-69004 (ex.) Paper Input Unit (PIU) (exchange) table 8-3 on page 747
C4214-69007 (ex.) Fusing Assembly, 110V (exchange) table 8-3 on page 747
C4214-69008 (ex.) Fusing Assembly, 220V (exchange) table 8-3 on page 747
C4781-60500 Power Box (Includes bracket clip) table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
C4781-60501 Jumper Cable, Short table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
C4781-60502 Jumper Cable, Long table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761)
table 8-12 on page 763
C4782-60501
C4782-69501 (ex.)
Duplexer/C4782A table 8-1 on page 742
C4783-70000 C-link Cable (80 cm) table 8-13 on page 766
C4784-60500 Stand for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4783A table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-13 on page 766
C4785-60500 8-bin Mailbox Assembly with attachment rod
(Whole Unit)
table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-60501 Power Supply (8-bin Mailbox) table 8-16 on page 773
C4785-60502 Standard Output Bin table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-60503 Blind Cover table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-60504 Front Cover, 8-bin Mailbox table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-60505 Back Cover, 8-bin Mailbox table 8-16 on page 773
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 807
C4785-60506 Head Assembly (with Metal Tape) table 8-15 on page 771
C4785-60507 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly table 8-15 on page 771
C4785-60508 8-bin Mailbox Controller (with metal box) table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-60509 Flipper Assembly table 8-15 on page 771
C4785-60510 Nonadjustable Fixed Caster table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-60511 Adjustable Fixed Caster table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-60512 Attachment Clip table 8-16 on page 773
C4785-60513 Repackaging Kit table 8-15 on page 771
C4785-60514 3 Diagnostic LED PCA (with Cable) table 8-16 on page 773
C4785-60515 User LED PCA (with Cable) table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-60516 Attachment Assembly (Rod, Bracket, Cables) table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-60518 Transport Belt Motor (with Fan) table 8-16 on page 773
C4785-60519 Plastic Parts table 8-14 on page 769
table 8-15 on page 771
table 8-16 on page 773
C4785-60520 Cables table 8-16 on page 773
C4785-60521 Hardware table 8-14 on page 769
table 8-15 on page 771
table 8-16 on page 773
C4785-69500 (ex.) 8-bin Mailbox Assembly without attachment rod
(Exchange Unit)
table 8-14 on page 769
C4785-70001 Short C-link Cable adapter table 8-15 on page 771
C4787-60500 Stapler Assembly table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-14 on page 769
table 8-17 on page 775
C4787-60501 Stapler Control PCA table 8-17 on page 775
C4787-60502 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4787A (8-bin Mailbox
only, without the Stapler Unit.)
table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-14 on page 769
C4787-60503 Shipping Lock Kit for 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox
with Stapler
table 8-16 on page 773
C4787-69500 (ex.) Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) table 8-14 on page 769
table 8-17 on page 775
C4787-69502 (ex.) 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler Assembly (Exchange
Unit)
table 8-14 on page 769
R95-3002-000CN 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)/C4781A table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-11 on page 761
R95-3003-000CN 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4 and 5)/C4780A table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-12 on page 763
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
808 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
R95-3007-000CN 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4783A table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-13 on page 766
R98-1006-000CN Tray 5 Assembly table 8-12 on page 763
R98-1007-000CN Tray 4 Assembly table 8-12 on page 763
R98-1004-000CN Tray 3 table 8-1 on page 742
R98-1005-000CN Tray 2 table 8-1 on page 742
RA2-2408-000CN Bottom Bin (Tray) table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2439-000CN Pin Positioning Bushing table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2455-000CN Back Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2484-000CN Bin Full Sensor table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2485-000CN Flag, Sensor table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2487-000CN Reversing Tray (Face-up) table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2500-000CN Support Plate table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2505-000CN Bushing table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2512-000CN Handle Latch table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2513-000CN Spring Tension table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2527-000CN Plate, Stopper table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2531-000CN Cover Latch table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-2541-000CN Plate (Motor Cover) table 8-13 on page 766
RA2-3842-000CN Rail Assembly table 8-13 on page 766
RA9-1127-000CN Gear, 20T table 8-2 on page 745
RB1-6409-000CN Sensor Arm Spring table 8-7 on page 755
RB1-6417-000CN Sensor Arm PS1 table 8-7 on page 755
RB1-6421-000CN Foot table 8-4 on page 749
RB1-6427-000CN Stopper, CG table 8-5 on page 751
RB1-6441-000CN Transfer Guide Bushing table 8-3 on page 747
RB1-6444-000CN Arm-Pressure-front table 8-4 on page 749
RB1-6446-000CN Release, Arm table 8-4 on page 749
RB1-6461-000CN Holder, Damper-Front table 8-3 on page 747
RB1-6462-000CN Holder, Damper-Rear table 8-3 on page 747
RB1-6464-000CN Cover, Upper Right table 8-4 on page 749
RB1-6473-000CN Shutter, White table 8-5 on page 751
RB1-6480-000CN Cover, Left-Lower table 8-2 on page 745
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 809
RB1-6484-000CN Open/Close Stopper table 8-2 on page 745
RB1-6489-000CN Electrical Cover (Rear by Formatter) table 8-2 on page 745
RB1-6490-000CN Tray, Output-Face-down table 8-2 on page 745
RB1-6491-000CN Face-up Bin (engine) table 8-1 on page 742
table 8-2 on page 745
RB1-6492-000CN Cover, Switch table 8-2 on page 745
RB1-6493-000CN Spring, Compression table 8-2 on page 745
RB1-6509-000CN Spring, Torsion table 8-2 on page 745
RB1-6557-000CN Arm, Sensor-PS2 table 8-7 on page 755
RB1-6558-000CN Spring, Sensor Arm table 8-7 on page 755
RB1-6582-000CN Plate, Guide-Upper table 8-7 on page 755
RB1-6615-020CN Fuser Lock Lever-Right table 8-3 on page 747
RB1-6616-020CN Fuser Lock Lever-Left table 8-3 on page 747
RB1-6692-000CN Paper Sensing Lever table 8-7 on page 755
RB1-6693-000CN Paper Height Lever table 8-7 on page 755
RB1-6749-000CN Cover, Internal Tray table 8-3 on page 747
RB1-6771-000CN Guides, Interface table 8-6 on page 753
RB1-6775-000CN Guide, Slide table 8-6 on page 753
RB1-6776-000CN Guide, Rail table 8-4 on page 749
RB1-6777-000CN Stopper, Rail table 8-4 on page 749
RB1-6778-000CN ROD table 8-4 on page 749
RB1-6783-000CN Stopper, Rail table 8-4 on page 749
RB1-6894-000CN Tray Size Plate table 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
RB1-7677-000CN Metallic Retaining Tab (Plate Stop) table 8-11 on page 761
RB1-7746-000CN Tray Shipping Lock table 8-11 on page 761
RB1-7832-020CN Right Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759
RB1-7835-000CN Metal retaining spring (Spring Leaf) table 8-11 on page 761
RB1-9526-000CN Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller table 8-7 on page 755
RB2-2509-000CN Clutch cover for 2000-sheet input tray table 8-11 on page 761
RB2-2519-000CN Back Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759
RB2-3503-000CN Block, Shaft Holding, Front table 8-7 on page 755
RB2-3504-000CN Block, Shaft Holding, Rear table 8-7 on page 755
RB2-3558-000CN Delivery Cover (Left Side F/U) table 8-2 on page 745
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
810 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
RB2-3581-000CN Limiter, torque table 8-7 on page 755
RB2-3622-000CN Guide, Front table 8-4 on page 749
RB2-3626-000CN Front Cover (Duplex Jam Removal) table 8-2 on page 745
RB2-3631-000CN Clutch Cover table 8-3 on page 747
RB2-3636-000CN Tray Lock (Plastic Clip) table 8-2 on page 745
RB2-3641-000CN Hinge Plate table 8-2 on page 745
RB2-3642-000CN Right, Lower Cover (Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal) table 8-2 on page 745
RB2-3666-000CN Right Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763
RB2-3667-000CN Holder Size PCA table 8-12 on page 763
RB2-3668-000CN Front Door (Cover Storage Tray) table 8-12 on page 763
RB2-3669-000CN Storage Paper Tray table 8-12 on page 763
RB2-3675-000CN Back Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763
RB2-3690-000CN Clutch cover for 2 x 500-sheet input tray table 8-12 on page 763
RB2-3705-000CN Spacer, latch table 8-12 on page 763
RB5-1845-000CN PCB, Tray Sensor table 8-8 on page 756
RF1-4004-000CN Front Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8-13 on page 766
RF1-4005-000CN Latching Mechanism table 8-13 on page 766
RF5-1402-000CN Cover, Rear table 8-2 on page 745
RF5-1464-000CN Shield, Plate table 8-6 on page 753
RF5-1484-000CN Paper Size Guide (Trays 2 and 3) table 8-1 on page 742
RF5-1834-000CN Feed and Separation Rollers table 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
RF5-1835-000CN Pickup Roller, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759
RF5-2556-000CN Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) table 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
RF5-2568-000CN Front Cover (with LED window) table 8-10 on page 759
RF5-2646-000CN Left Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759
RF5-2676-000CN Transfer Guide table 8-3 on page 747
RF5-2678-000CN Shield, Formatter table 8-6 on page 753
RF5-2701-000CN Hinge, Stopper table 8-2 on page 745
RF5-2703-000CN MP Separation Pad table 8-7 on page 755
RF5-2708-000CN Roller, Pickup table 8-7 on page 755
table 8-12 on page 763
RF5-2726-000CN Guide, Rear table 8-4 on page 749
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 811
RF5-2762-000CN Front Top Cover table 8-12 on page 763
RF5-2764-000CN Left Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763
RF5-2766-000CN Top Cover (Includes label), 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray
table 8-12 on page 763
RF7-1395-000CN Reversing Mechanism Motor table 8-13 on page 766
RF9-1249-000CN Top Cover Assembly table 8-2 on page 745
RF9-1394-000CN Roller, Transfer table 8-3 on page 747
RG1-3814-000CN Full Bin and Interlock sensor PCA table 8-13 on page 766
RG1-3815-000CN Empty Bin Sensor PCA table 8-13 on page 766
RG1-3816-000CN Face-up Bin Full and Sensor PCA table 8-13 on page 766
RG1-3817-000CN LED PCA table 8-13 on page 766
RG1-3836-000CN Face-down Bin Assembly, Odd (with 1 roller) table 8-13 on page 766
RG1-3837-000CN Face-down Bin Assembly, Even (with 2 rollers) table 8-13 on page 766
RG1-3838-000CN Top Cover Assembly (Upper Guide), 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox
table 8-13 on page 766
RG1-3840-000CN Right Cover Assembly, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8-13 on page 766
RG1-3844-000CN Diverter Assembly (Flipper) table 8-13 on page 766
RG1-3853-000CN 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly table 8-13 on page 766
RG5-1843-000CN Sensor Cable table 8-7 on page 755
RG5-1845-000CN Tray-Size Sensing PCA table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-1846-000CN PCB, Switch/Sensor table 8-8 on page 756
RG5-1850-000CN Cable, Fuser 2 table 8-6 on page 753
RG5-1859-000CN Cable, Sensor table 8-7 on page 755
RG5-1860-000CN PCA, PIU table 8-7 on page 755
RG5-1861-000CN Cable, Paper Pickup table 8-7 on page 755
RG5-1874-000CN Face-down Delivery Assembly table 8-3 on page 747
table 8-7 on page 755
RG5-1875-000CN Face-up Solenoid Assembly table 8-9 on page 757
RG5-1884-000CN PCB, Tray, Multi-purpose table 8-8 on page 756
RG5-1915-000CN Right Cover Assembly, engine table 8-2 on page 745
RG5-1920-000CN Cable, Tray Sensor table 8-4 on page 749
RG5-1921-000CN Cable, Fan 3 table 8-6 on page 753
RG5-1928-000CN Cable, Registration table 8-6 on page 753
RG5-2166-000CN Paper Quantity Sensor PCA Assembly table 8-11 on page 761
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
812 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
RG5-2168-000CN Paper Size Sensor PCA Assembly table 8-11 on page 761
RG5-2644-000CN Top Cover (Label Included), 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759
RG5-3843-000CN Paper Pickup Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759
RG5-3845-000CN 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray table 8-10 on page 759
RG5-3849-000CN Plate Paper Limit Middle table 8-10 on page 759
RG5-3850-000CN Plate Paper Reference Front table 8-10 on page 759
RG5-3851-000CN Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759
RG5-3852-000CN Outrigger, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-3853-000CN Feet Adjustable Tip table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-3854-000CN Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) table 8-10 on page 759
RG5-3908-000CN Paper Deck PCA (2000-sheet Input Tray
Controller)
table 8-11 on page 761
RG5-3909-000CN Power Supply Cable (PSU) table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-3919-000CN Main Cable, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-11 on page 761
RG5-4021-000CN Universal Power Supply Assembly table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-4201-000CN Plate Paper Limit Back table 8-10 on page 759
RG5-4204-000CN Front LED PCA with holder and cable table 8-11 on page 761
RG5-4205-000CN Outrigger, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-11 on page 761
RG5-4300-000CN Power Supply, Low-Voltage 110 V table 8-6 on page 753
RG5-4301-000CN Power Supply, Low Voltage-220 V table 8-6 on page 753
RG5-4303-000CN Registration Assembly table 8-3 on page 747
RG5-4305-000CN Feeder Assembly table 8-3 on page 747
table 8-7 on page 755
RG5-4306-000CN High-Voltage Power Supply table 8-5 on page 751
RG5-4318-000CN Fusing Assembly, 110V table 8-3 on page 747
RG5-4317-000CN Fusing Assembly, 220V table 8-3 on page 747
RG5-4325-000CN Diverter Assembly table 8-2 on page 745
RG5-4329-000CN MP Tray Assembly Cover (Tray 1) table 8-3 on page 747
RG5-4330-000CN Multi-purpose Tray Assembly (Tray 1) table 8-3 on page 747
table 8-7 on page 755
RG5-4334-000CN Assembly, Paper Pickup (PIU) table 8-7 on page 755
RG5-4344-000CN Assembly, Laser Scanner table 8-5 on page 751
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 813
RG5-4360-000CN Top Cover Assembly table 8-2 on page 745
RG5-4362-000CN Front Cover, engine table 8-2 on page 745
RG5-4365-000CN Printer Drive Assembly table 8-3 on page 747
RG5-4375-030CN Assembly, DC Controller PCB table 8-8 on page 756
RG5-4377-000CN Laser and Control Panel Cable table 8-5 on page 751
RG5-4378-000CN Cable, Scanner Motor table 8-5 on page 751
RG5-4381-000CN Cable, Fuser 1 table 8-6 on page 753
RG5-4384-000CN Display, Control Panel table 8-2 on page 745
RG5-4386-000CN Main Motor Cable table 8-3 on page 747
RG5-4403-000CN Paper Feed Assembly (Vertical Transfer Unit) table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-4410-000CN Paper Pickup Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-4416-000CN Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input
Tray
table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-4440-000CN Main Cable, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-4441-000CN Front LED PCA table 8-12 on page 763
RG5-4442-000CN 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA table 8-12 on page 763
RG9-1361-000CN Assembly, Transfer Roller table 8-3 on page 747
RH3-2205-000CN Power Supply (7-bin Tabletop Mailbox) table 8-13 on page 766
RH7-1266-000CN Fan, FM1/Low Voltage Power Supply table 8-5 on page 751
RH7-1271-000CN Fan, FM3/Formatter table 8-6 on page 753
RH7-1289-000CN Fan, FM4/Delivery Assembly table 8-7 on page 755
RH7-1350-000CN Motor, PIU table 8-7 on page 755
RH7-1396-000CN Fan, FM2/Laser Scanner table 8-6 on page 753
RH7-1397-000CN Fan, FM5 table 8-7 on page 755
RH7-5187-000CN Electromagnetic Clutch table 8-3 on page 747
RH7-5188-000CN Clutch, Paper Feed table 8-7 on page 755
RH7-5219-000CN Main Motor table 8-3 on page 747
RH7-5223-000CN Solenoid Reversing Mechanism table 8-13 on page 766
RH7-5225-000CN Solenoid Flipper table 8-13 on page 766
RS5-1399-000CN Paper Deck Drive Bushing table 8-10 on page 759
RS5-2499-000CN Spring, Tension table 8-4 on page 749
RS5-2561-000CN Tension Spring table 8-11 on page 761
RS5-8605-000CN Paper Size Guide Label (Trays 2 and 3) table 8-1 on page 742
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
814 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
RS5-8611-000CN Tray Size Labels table 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
RS5-8676-000CN Label, Operation table 8-2 on page 745
RS6-2072-000CN Compression Spring, Front table 8-7 on page 755
RS6-2073-000CN Compression Spring, Rear table 8-7 on page 755
RY7-5044-000CN 2K (2000-sheet Input Tray) Deck Hardware Kit table 8-10 on page 759)
table 8-11 on page 761
RY7-5048-000CN Hardware Screws Kit for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8-13 on page 766
VD7-1893-151CN Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A table 8-11 on page 761
table 8-12 on page 763
WG8-0291-000CN Photo Interrupter table 8-7 on page 755
XA9-0605-000CN Screw, M4 x 8 table 8-2 on page 745
XA9-0870-000CN Screw, M4 x 10 table 8-2 on page 745
XA9-0872-000CN Screw, M3 x 8 table 8-2 on page 745
XB6-7400-807CN Screw, M4 x 8 TP table 8-3 on page 747
XZ9-0379-000CN Latch table 8-12 on page 763
XZ9-0442-000CN Caster table 8-10 on page 759
table 8-12 on page 763
Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) 815
Numerical Parts List (Copy Module)
Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
8120-8749 Copy Connect Cable table 8-20 on page 781
9000288TF Front Panel table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C101FJ Power Supply table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C102FJ Control PCA (FJ) table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C103FJ Junction PCA table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C104FJ FB Cover Assembly table 8-24 on page 788
PA03002-C105FJ Document Holding Pad table 8-24 on page 788
PA03002-C106FJ ADF Cover (skin) table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C107FJ Upper Cover (skin) table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C108FJ ADF Unit table 8-23 on page 787
PA03002-C109FJ ADF Motor Unit table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C110FJ Sensor Unit Assembly table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C111FJ ADF Belt table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C112FJ Pick Roller Cover table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C113FJ Carrier Unit table 8-21 on page 783
PA03002-C114FJ Lower Lamp (front side) table 8-21 on page 783
PA03002-C115FJ Upper Lamp (back side) table 8-23 on page 787
PA03002-C116FJ FB Motor Unit (w/belt) table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C117FJ Optical Unit table 8-23 on page 787
PA03002-C118FJ Fan Assembly table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C119FJ Back PCA Board (CP mate) table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C120FJ Pick Roller Assembly table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C121FJ Output Tray Assembly table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C122FJ Separation Pad Assembly table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C123FJ Thumb Screws (paper guide) (screws for Pick
Roller Cover)
table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C124FJ Carrier Stopper (shipping lock) table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C125FJ Front Panel Cable table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C126FJ LED Assembly (includes cable) table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C201FJ ADF Latch Cap table 8-18 on page 778
816 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
PA03002-C202FJ RFI Cover table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C203FJ DC Cable PS to Main table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C204FJ Carrier Flex Cable table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C205FJ Carrier Rail table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C206FJ Carrier Rail Bushing table 8-21 on page 783
PA03002-C207FJ Home Position Sensor table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C208FJ Frame Ground Spring 1 table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C209FJ Idle Roller Coil Spring table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C210FJ Carrier Belt Tension Pulley table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C211FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Shaft table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C212FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Spring table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C213FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Spacer table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C214FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Collar table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C215FJ Control PCA Protector table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C216FJ Carrier Unit Protector table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C217FJ Carrier Ribbon Cable Protector table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C218FJ Rubber Foot table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C219FJ Glass Plate Assembly table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C220FJ Main/PS Cover Bracket table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C222FJ Output Tray Bracket, Rear table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C223FJ Output Tray Bracket, Front table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C224FJ Exit Idle Roller table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C225FJ HK Ring V2 table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C226FJ Rubber Stop, Document Cover table 8-24 on page 788
PA03002-C227FJ Optical Unit Tie Down w/Pad table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C228FJ ADF Cable table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C229FJ CCD Cable table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C230FJ Drive Roller Shaft table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C231FJ Drive Roller Gear table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C232FJ Reduction Gear table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C233FJ Drive Roller Bearing table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C234FJ Top of Form Sensor Arm table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C235FJ ADF Paper Empty Sensor Arm table 8-22 on page 784
Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) 817
PA03002-C236FJ Pad Assembly Frame table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C237FJ Pad Spring table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C238FJ Pad Shaft table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C239FJ Pad Plate table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C240FJ Pick Spring table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C241FJ Key Washer table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C242FJ ADF Latch Lever Front table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C243FJ ADF Latch Lever Rear table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C244FJ ADF Latch Shaft table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C245FJ ADF Latch Spring table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C246FJ Paper Anti Static Assembly table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C247FJ ADF Lift Spring Front table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C248FJ ADF Lift Spring Rear table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C249FJ Idle Roller Leaf Spring table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C250FJ Pick Roller Clutch/Gear table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C251FJ Carrier Unit Lamp PCA table 8-21 on page 783
PA03002-C252FJ ADF Lamp PCA table 8-23 on page 787
PA03002-C253FJ E-ring, Idle Roller (20pcs) table 8-28 on page 790
PA03002-C254FJ E-ring, Latch Lever (20pcs) table 8-28 on page 790
PA03002-C255FJ Retainer Ring ADF Lock Bearing (20pcs) table 8-28 on page 790
PA03002-C256FJ Carrier Unit Dust Cover table 8-21 on page 783
PA03002-C257FJ Front Panel Bracket table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C258FJ Copy Processor Card Cage table 8-20 on page 781
PA03002-C259FJ Carrier Unit Lubrication Felt table 8-21 on page 783
PA03002-C260FJ Paper Chute Flip Out table 8-24 on page 788
PA03002-C261FJ Calibration Target Kit
PA03002-C262FJ Carrier Ribbon Cable Ferrite Bead table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C263FJ Output Tray Flip-out table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C264FJ Panel Cover table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C265FJ Bearing for Feed Roller table 8-22 on page 784
PA03002-C266FJ Front Panel Frame Ground Spring table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C267FJ Junction PCA Cover table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C269FJ Brass Bushing for Pick Roller table 8-22 on page 784
Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
818 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907
PA03002-C270FJ Front Panel Cable Cover table 8-19 on page 779
PA03002-C272FJ Front Panel Frame Ground Plate table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C273FJ Front Panel Cable Clamp table 8-18 on page 778
PA03002-C281FJ TP Screw m3 x 6 table 8-25 on page 789
PA03002-C282FJ TP Screw m3 x 8 table 8-25 on page 789
PA03002-C283FJ Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 6 table 8-26 on page 789
PA03002-C284FJ Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 8 table 8-26 on page 789
PA03002-C285FJ Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 35 table 8-26 on page 789
PA03002-C286FJ Machine Screw w/washer m4 x 8 table 8-26 on page 789
PA03002-C287FJ Flat Head Screw m3 x6 table 8-27 on page 790
PM-3700 Copy Processor Card table 8-20 on page 781
Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module
Part Number Description Table No. and Page
C4265-90907 Index 819
Index
Numerics
2 x 500-sheet input tray (trays 4 & 5) 212
adjustable foot tip 393
adjustment procedure 169
casters 392
controller PCA 384
covers
back 366
front top 374
left 367
right 371
diagnostics 673
dimensions 85
electrical specifications 87
front door (storage area) 391
front LED PCA 395
identification label 37
lifter 213
locating pins 394
main cable 388
messages 612
operation 212
ordering 40
orientation 365
paper deck drive assembly 381
paper paths and components 210
paper tray 390
parts and diagrams 748
pickup and feed system 212
pickup assembly 379
power supply 213, 387
printing from 209
removing and replacing 257, 364
rollers 383
specifications 50, 85
storage paper tray 390
tray-size sensing PCA 385
troubleshooting 577, 673, 675
verifying installation 641
vertical transfer unit (VTU) 368
weight 85
2000-sheet input tray (tray 4)
adjustable foot 363
adjustment procedure 172
cable harness 344
casters 362
clutches 206
controller PCA 346
covers
back 338
front 337
left 339
right 340
diagnostics 669
diagrams 699, 701
dimensions 85
drive assembly 341
electrical specifications 87
features 205
front LED PCA assembly 348
identification label 37
LEDs 672
lifter operation 209
locating pins 361
main cable harness 344
main drive assembly 341
messages 608
motor test 669
motors 206
operation 207
ordering 40
orientation 336
paper paths and components 205
paper quantity switch assembly 356
paper size switch assembly 356
paper tray 343
pickup and feed system 207
pickup assembly 350
power supply 209, 352
printing from 209
removing and replacing 257, 335
rollers 354
sensor test 671
sensors 206
specifications 50, 85
stand-alone running test 669
switches 206
tension springs 360
troubleshooting 576, 577, 669
verifying installation 641
vertical transfer unit (VTU) 358
weight 85
wiring diagram 701
2-sided printing 204
5-bin mailbox with stapler, see mailbox with stapler
7-bin tabletop mailbox
collator mode 218, 225
controller PCA 408
820 Index C4265-90907
covers
back 402
front 399
latch 433
top 404
diagnostics 677
dimensions 86
diverter assembly 425
door assembly 410
electrical specifications 87
empty bin sensor PCA 417
face-down bins 414
face-up sensors PCA 422
face-up/diverter assembly (flipper) 425
flipper assembly 425
flipper solenoid 430
full bin and interlock sensor PCA 419
handle 431
identification label 37
interlock sensor PCA 419
latching mechanism 432
LED PCA 421
messages 616
modes 217
operation 216
ordering 40
orientation 398
paper path cover 410
paper paths and components 214
parts and diagrams 751
power supply 409
removing and replacing 259, 397
reversing mechanism motor 423
right door assembly (paper path cover) 410
short tray 7 428
solenoid reversing mechanism 429
specifications 51
stand
dimensions and weight 86
ordering 41
troubleshooting 677
verifying installation 641
virtual stacker mode 218
weight 86
8-bin mailbox
anticurl strings 452
attachment assembly 465
belt motor 444
casters 464
components 220
controller PCA 221, 450
covers
back 436
blind 439
front 436
top 437
delivery head assembly 223, 454
delivery head motor 443
diagnostic LED PCA 460
dimensions 82, 86
electrical specifications 87
face-up and down bins 439
features 220
flipper assembly 223, 440
head motor 443
identification label 37
input paper guide 446
interlock switch 459
LEDs 685
mailbox mode 224
messages 622
metal tape and housing assembly 448
motors 221
operating modes 220, 223
ordering 40
orientation 435
paper bins 439
paper jams 578
paper path 220, 684
power box 44
power supply 438
power-on sequence 223, 683
receiving paper 223
removing and replacing 258, 434
sensors 221
space requirements 82
specifications 51, 86
stand-alone diagnostics 682
stapler operation 227
status LED PCA 462
switches 221
testing 682
transport belt motor 444
troubleshooting 576, 578, 682
verifying installation 641
virtual stacker mode 224
weight 86
wiring diagram 702
A
AC access cover 268
AC power
distribution 182
troubleshooting 582
accessories
cleaning 158
locations 38
ordering 40
see also paper-handling devices
user installable 254
verifying installation 641
acoustic emissions 88
C4265-90907 Index 821
ADF (HP Digital Copy 320)
belt 534
cleaning 163
cover 502
duplex operation 244
lamp 529
lamp PCA 527
lamp, cleaning 165
latch cap 501
loading
lubricating gears 165
motor unit 533
paper path sensors 249
simplex operation 243
unit 537
adhesive labels, see labels
adjustable foot
2 x 500-sheet input tray 393
2000-sheet input tray 363
adjusting the ADF belt 535
administrator mode (HP Digital Copy 320) 147
air conditioners 80
anticurl strings (8-bin mailbox) 452
appliances 80
attachment assembly (8-bin mailbox) 465
attention light 94
automatic document feeder, see ADF
B
back PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) 524
back plate (stapler) 469
background scatter 656
bed assembly (stapler) 475
belt (HP Digital Copy 320) 534
belt motor (8-bin mailbox) 444
bin sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 417
bins
configuring
7-bin tabletop mailbox 217
8-bin mailbox 223
removing and replacing
7-bin tabletop mailbox 414
8-bin mailbox 439
specifications 50, 86
black lines 654
black page 651
blank page
entire 651
middle of page 663
partial 662
blind cover (8-bin mailbox) 439
books, copy 29
boot errors 707
brackets (HP Digital Copy 320)
front panel 510
output tray 539
bubble print 661
button functions (HP Digital Copy 320) 134
C
cable harness (2000-sheet input tray) 344
cables
c-link
input and output 230
troubleshooting 571
copy connect 485
front panel ribbon (HP Digital Copy 320) 557
main (2 x 500-sheet input tray) 388
ordering 44
parallel 234
calibrating
copy module 175
for edge-to-edge printing 169
for normal printing 170
cancel job key 93
capacity of paper trays 50
card cage (HP Digital Copy 320) 520
carrier belt and motor (HP Digital Copy 320) 559
carrier unit
cleaning 166
HP Digital Copy 320 547
lamp (HP Digital Copy 320) 544
lubricating 166
shaft (HP Digital Copy 320) 548
cartridge slots 26
cartridges 62
casters
2 x 500-sheet input tray 392
2000-sheet input tray 362
8-bin mailbox 464
CFC usage 68
cleaning
ADF 162, 163
carrier unit shaft (HP Digital Copy 320) 548
copy module 165
glass 162
HP Digital Copy 320 161
Mopier and accessories 158
optics 165
pick rollers 164
printer 159
spilled toner 160
toner cartridge drum 192
clutches
2000-sheet input tray 206
diagram 692
drive signals 187
locations 200
cold reset
paper size 95, 141, 144
performing 96
collator mode (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 218, 225
822 Index C4265-90907
common features 26
communication
channels 248
HP Digital Copy 320 705
communication (Mopier) 248
communication link 230
communications link, see cables, c-link
comparisons of features 27
compressed print 663
conditioning drum 193
configuration menu 113
configuration of MBM menu 118
configuration page
printing 153
troubleshooting 641
configuring
cold reset default paper size 144
maintenance count 300
page count 300
serial number 300
conformity 72
connections, troubleshooting 571
consumables 62
control panel
default settings 94
display 100
keys 92
language 96
layout 92
lights 93
menu map 639
message format 592
overriding settings 94
removing and replacing 265
troubleshooting 586
control panel menus 100
configuration 113
configuration of MBM 118
duplex registration 123
EIO 121
I/O 119
information 104
jobs 101
map 155, 640
paper handling 105
print quality 108
printing 110
private/stored jobs 101
quick copy 102
resets 125
service mode 141
control PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) 519
controller PCA
2 x 500-sheet input tray 384
2000-sheet input tray 346
7-bin tabletop mailbox 408
8-bin mailbox 221, 450
DC (printer) 311
diagrams 693, 699
stapler 471
copy books 29
copy connect cable, installing 485
copy connect EIO board, installing in Mopier 484
copy module, see HP Digital Copy 320
copy processor board (HP Digital Copy 320)
LED test 717
power-up 239
removing and replacing 514
covers
AC access 268
2 x 500-sheet input tray
back 366
front top 374
left 367
right 371
2000-sheet input tray
back 338
front 337
left 339
right 340
7-bin tabletop mailbox
back 402
front 399
latch 433
top 404
8-bin mailbox
back 436
blind 439
front 436
top 437
back 269
cleaning 160
front 270
HP Digital Copy 320
ADF 502
junction PCA 555
panel 509
upper 512
left lower 272
stapler 474
top 273
curl (paper) 581
customer support, see troubleshooting
customizing, see configuring
D
daisy chain 230, 571
data light 93
C4265-90907 Index 823
DC controller PCA
diagrams 693
functions 187
removing and replacing 311
DC power 181
declaration of conformity 72
default settings 94
control panel 94
restoring 125
defining, see configuring
delivery head assembly (8-bin mailbox) 223, 454
delivery head motor (8-bin mailbox) 443
delivery unit (face-down output bin)
fan 288
removing 276
density calibration adjustment (HP Digital Copy 320)
177
diagnostic LED PCA (8-bin mailbox) 460
diagnostics on paper-handling devices 669
diagrams
copier 762
how to use 726
list 690
paper-handling 744
printer 730
Digital Copy 320, see HP Digital Copy 320
digital signal processor (DSP) 238
dimensions
of Mopier and accessories 81
of printer and accessories 86
dimensions of Mopier and paper-handling devices
85
DIMM, see memory
DIP switches 671
disk, see hard disk
display checks (HP Digital Copy 320) 705
display language 96
diverter assembly
7-bin tabletop mailbox 425
printer 279, 280
document cover, cleaning 162
document feeder 29
document holder, cleaning 162
document holding pad (HP Digital Copy 320) 495
documentation 45
door assembly
7-bin tabletop mailbox 410
printer
diverter door 280
right lower door 281
dots per inch (dpi) 26
dpi (dots per inch) 26
draft mode, see EconoMode
drive assembly (2000-sheet input tray) 341
driver
overriding control panel settings 94
troubleshooting 575
dropouts 654
drum
cleaning 192
conditioning 193
photosensitive, description 191
rotation functional check 667
DSP (digital signal processor) 238
duplex registration menu 123
duplex registration, adjusting 174
duplex scanning 29
duplexer
dimensions 86
memory requirements 49
messages 631
operation 204
ordering 40
paper paths and components 200
removing and replacing 256, 478
specifications 51
speed 26
standard or optional 27, 28
verifying installation 641
weight 86
dust 80
duty cycle 26
E
EconoMode 186
edge-to-edge printing 169
EDO DIMMs, see memory
EEPROM (HP Digital Copy 320) 521
8-bin mailbox
anticurl strings 452
attachment assembly 465
belt motor 444
casters 464
components 220
controller PCA 221, 450
covers
back 436
blind 439
front 436
top 437
delivery head assembly 223, 454
delivery head motor 443
diagnostic LED PCA 460
dimensions 82, 86
electrical specifications 87
face-up and down bins 439
features 220
flipper assembly 223, 440
head motor 443
identification label 37
824 Index C4265-90907
input paper guide 446
interlock switch 459
LEDs 685
mailbox mode 224
messages 622
metal tape and housing assembly 448
motors 221
operating modes 220, 223
ordering 40
orientation 435
paper bins 439
paper jams 578
paper path 220, 684
power box 44
power supply 438
power-on sequence 223, 683
receiving paper 223
removing and replacing 258, 434
sensors 221
space requirements 82
specifications 51, 86
stand-alone diagnostics 682
stapler operation 227
status LED PCA 462
switches 221
testing 682
transport belt motor 444
troubleshooting 576, 578, 682
verifying installation 641
virtual stacker mode 224
weight 86
wiring diagram 702
EIO accessories, troubleshooting 573
EIO cards
ordering 44
standard 27, 28
status 153
EIO menu 121
electrical specifications 87
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) precautions 252
EMI statement for Korea 75
empty bin sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 417
energy consumption 68
engine error messages 596
engine test
microswitch 188
troubleshooting 585
envelope feeder
dimensions 86
messages 615
ordering 40
paper paths and components 200
printing from 204
removing and replacing 256, 396
specifications 51
verifying installation 641
weight 86
envelopes
guidelines 52
paper jams 578
troubleshooting 577, 578
environment
operating 80
requirements 84
environmental product stewardship 68
equipment errors 707
error messages, see messages
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) precautions 252
event log
clearing 141
displaying 590
error sequence numbers 586
interpreting 591
listed on configuration page 154
message format 592
printing 590
troubleshooting 586
viewing 586
exchange program 62
exhaust
fan 1 (laser/scanner) 284
fan 2 (lvps) 286
fan 4 (delivery unit) 288
exit rollers, cleaning 164
F
face-down bins
7-bin tabletop mailbox 414
8-bin mailbox 439
delivery unit 276
specifications 50
face-up sensors PCA (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 422
face-up solenoid assembly 331
face-up/diverter assembly (flipper) (7-bin tabletop
mailbox) 425
factory settings 94
fading print 578, 652
fan
fan 1 (laser/scanner) 284
fan 2 (lvps) 286
fan 3 (formatter) 287
fan 4 (delivery unit) 288
fan 5 (tray 1 intake) 289
HP Digital Copy 320 522
locations 200
motors 188
FastRes 1200 195
faulty registration 660
FCC statement 66
C4265-90907 Index 825
features
common 26
comparison 27
HP Digital Copy 320 29
feed roller
2 x 500-sheet input tray 383
2000-sheet input tray 354
cleaning 164
trays 2 & 3 326
feeder assembly (printer) 298
feet (HP Digital Copy 320) 552
felt pad (HP Digital Copy 320) 551
field replaceable units, ordering 61
file directory page 644
finding pins, see locating pins
finisher components 225
Finland laser statement 75
fire 80
Firmware, copy module, upgrade 150
Firmware, remote upgrade, printer 148
5-bin mailbox with stapler, see mailbox with stapler
flames 80
flashing light 93
flatbed
cleaning glass 162
cover assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 498
loading 140
flatbed operation (HP Digital Copy 320) 244
flipper assembly
7-bin tabletop mailbox 425
8-bin mailbox 440
flipper solenoid (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 430
fonts
internal 26
ordering 43
foot
2 x 500-sheet input tray 393
2000-sheet input tray 363
HP Digital Copy 320 552
formatter assembly
fan 287
function 184
part locations 33
removing 300, 301
retaining settings 143
frame ground spring (HP Digital Copy 320) 553
front door storage area (2 x 500-sheet input tray)
391
front lamp PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) 554
front LED PCA
2 x 500-sheet input tray 395
2000-sheet input tray 348
front panel (HP Digital Copy 320)
brackets 510
frame ground spring 538
installing overlay 126
layout 127
removing and replacing 504
ribbon cable 507, 557
using 126
FRUs, see field replaceable units
FTP technical assistance 64
full bin and interlock sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop
mailbox) 419
functional block diagram 180
functional overview (HP Digital Copy 320) 235
fusing assembly
cleaning 160
removing and replacing 302
fusing images
about 199
troubleshooting 579
G
gear assembly (printer) 306
glass plate assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 540
go key 92
H
half self test functional check 666
handle (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 431
hard disk
about 47
ordering 43
removing and replacing 255
standard or optional 27, 28
verifying installation 641
hardware table
engine 262
HP Digital Copy 320 487
Hardware Technical Support Center (HTSC) 65
head motor (8-bin mailbox) 443
help desk 64
help, see troubleshooting
high voltage power supply
check 667
contacts 183, 190
distribution 183
removing and replacing 319
hinges (stapler) 477
home position sensor (HP Digital Copy 320) 542
HP 3,000-sheet Stacker, HP 3,000-sheet Stapler/
Stacker Service Manual Supplement 46
HP 3000-sheet Stacker and HP 3000-sheet Stapler/
Stacker (C4779x and C4788x) Installation Guide
46
HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) 64
HP Digital Copier Firmware, Upgrade 150
HP Digital Copy 320
ADF belt 534
ADF cover 502
ADF duplex operation 244
826 Index C4265-90907
ADF lamp 529
ADF lamp PCA 527
ADF latch cap 501
ADF motor unit 533
ADF simplex operation 243
ADF unit 537
administrator mode 147
alphabetical parts list 787
assembly locations 762
back PCA 524
boot errors 707
Boot Up Icon Conditions 718
button functions 134
calibrating 175
card cage 520
carrier belt and motor 559
carrier unit 547
carrier unit lamp 544
cleaning 161
cleaning ADF and glass 162
complete optics cleaning 165
configurations 35
context sensitive help 133
control PCA 519
copy processor
function 237
layout 237
copy processor board
LED test 717
power-up 239
removing and replacing 514
covers
junction PCA 555
panel 509
upper 512
default configurations 133
density calibration adjustment 177
diagrams 762
display and communication troubleshooting 705
document holding pad 495
document quality 57
EEPROM 521
equipment errors 707
error messages 706
fan 522
features 29
feet 552
felt pad 551
flatbed
cover assembly 498
loading 140
operation 244
frame ground spring 553
front lamp PCA 554
front panel
brackets 510
frame ground spring 538
installing overlay 126
layout 127
removing and replacing 504
ribbon cable 507, 557
using 126
functional overview 235
glass plate assembly 540
hardware table 487
home position sensor 542
image quality 713
installing 480
LED Assembly PCA 536
LED functions 134
loading ADF
lubricating 165
main board tray 515
maintaining 168, 490
media selection guidelines 56
menu tabs 128
numerical parts list 801
offline test 719
offset adjustment 177
optical unit 525
optional stand, installing 482
orientation 489
output tray 497
brackets 539
flip-out 497
paper chute flip-out 496
paper path 712
paper path sensors 249
part tests 721
parts 34, 490, 762
pick roller assembly 491
power on checks 704
power supply 515, 523
power-up 241
RFI cover 517
ribbon cable 507, 557
sensor unit assembly 530
sensors 719
separation pad assembly 490
service mode 145
service mode tests 723
settings and defaults 136
shipping lock 481
skins 495
specifications 89
stand, installing 480, 482
start button LED 135
status bar 127
temporary errors 710
C4265-90907 Index 827
testing 716
troubleshooting 703
vertical magnification adjustment 177
y power cord 486
HP Digital Copy 320 stands 482
HP distribution center 61
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support
Technology) 64
HP JetDirect print server card, see EIO cards
HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide
45
HP JetSend IP addresses 154
HP LaserJet 8100 User Guide 45
HP LaserJet 8100/8150 Service Manual 46
HP LaserJet 8150 Getting Started Guide 46
HP LaserJet 8150, 8150N, 8150DN, 8150HN, and
8150MFP Printers User Guide 45
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification
Guide 45
HP reseller sales and service support 65
HP support line 61
HTSC, see Hardware Technical Support Center
humidifiers 80
humidity 84
hvps, see high voltage power supply
I
I/O
menu 119
troubleshooting 571
identification 37
idler rollers, cleaning 164
image formation
block diagram 189
developing 196
fusing 199
system 189
transferring 198
writing 194
image path 246
image quality
HP Digital Copy 320 713
Mopier 649
troubleshooting 651
image skew 577, 660
images per minute 29
images per month 26
indicator lights 93
information menu 104
input paper guide (8-bin mailbox) 446
input tray, see 2 x 500-sheet input tray or 2000-sheet
input tray
installing
copy connect cable 485
copy connect EIO board 484
HP Digital Copy 320 480
optional output accessory 483
y power cord 486
interface
accessories 44
standard 27, 28
interlock sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 419
interlock switch (8-bin mailbox) 459
internet technical assistance 64
interpreting event log 591
IP addresses 154
item key 93
J
jammed paper 232
JetDirect configuration page, printing 573
JetSend 154
job interrupt 29, 248
job retention 47
job separator mode 218
junction PCA and cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 555
K
keys on control panel 92
Korean EMI statement 75
L
labels
adhesive 53
paper jams 578
printer identification 37
lamps (HP Digital Copy 320)
ADF 529
ADF PCA 527
carrier unit 544
front PCA 554
language on control panel 96
languages (personalities)
removing and replacing 254
standard printer 26
status 153
verifying installation 641
laser
safety 73
statement for Finland 75
laser/scanner
drive 187
fan 284
motors 188
removing and replacing 304
latch cap, ADF (HP Digital Copy 320) 501
latching mechanism (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 432
828 Index C4265-90907
layout, copy processor 237
LED
2 x 500-sheet input tray 395
2000-sheet input tray 348, 672
7-bin tabletop mailbox 421
8-bin mailbox 685
diagnostic 460
status 462
HP Digital Copy 320 536
functions 134
start button LED 135
interpreting status 672, 676, 682, 685, 717
left output bin specifications 50
light print 578, 652
light, environment 80
lights on control panel 93
lines
black 654
edge of paper 658
white 662
LocalTalk cable 44
locating pins
2 x 500-sheet input tray 394
2000-sheet input tray 173, 361
log, see event log
low voltage power supply
distribution system 181
removing and replacing 320
lubricating
ADF gears 165
carrier unit and assemblies 166
carrier unit shaft (HP Digital Copy 320) 548
lvps, see low voltage power supply
M
Macintosh network cable kit (ordering) 44
mailbox (7-bin), see 7-bin tabletop mailbox
mailbox (8-bin), see 8-bin mailbox
mailbox mode
7-bin tabletop mailbox 217
8-bin mailbox 224
mailbox with stapler
electrical specifications 87
identification label 37
operation 227
ordering 41
paper jams 578
removing and replacing 258
specifications 51
troubleshooting 578
verifying installation 641
wiring diagram 698
main board tray (HP Digital Copy 320) 515
main cable (2 x 500-sheet input tray) 388
main cable harness (2000-sheet input tray) 344
main drive assembly (2000-sheet input tray) 341
main gear assembly (printer) 306
main motor, troubleshooting 576
maintenance
count configuring 300
HP Digital Copy 320 168, 490
kit, ordering 45
preventative 167
setting count 143
manuals 45
mass storage, see hard disk drive
MBM menu 118
mechanical assemblies, cleaning 166
media, see paper
memory
installing 254
ordering 43
requirements 48
standard 27, 28
status 153
verifying installation 641
Memory Enhancement (MEt) 27
menu key 92
menu map 639
menu map page 155, 640
menu tabs (HP Digital Copy 320) 128
menus, see control panel menus
messages
2 x 500-sheet input tray 612
2000-sheet input tray 608
7-bin tabletop mailbox 616
8-bin mailbox 622
duplexer 631
engine 596
envelope feeder 615
HP Digital Copy 320 706
paper handling controller 632
paper-handling devices 592
printer 592
stapler 628
MEt (Memory Enhancement) 27
metal tape and housing assembly (8-bin mailbox)
448
micro-controller, copier 238
microswitch, engine test 188
minus key 93
mirrors, cleaning 165
model number 37
monthly usage 26
motor
2 x 500-sheet input tray 673
2000-sheet input tray 206, 669
7-bin tabletop mailbox 423, 678
8-bin mailbox 221
delivery head 443
transport belt 444
diagram 692
C4265-90907 Index 829
fan 1(laser/scanner) 285
fan 3 (formatter) 287
HP Digital Copy 320
ADF 533
carrier 559
locating 200
operation 188
printer 309
test 669
troubleshooting 576
verifying functionality 669
mounting printer on optional stand 482
MT1 188
multi-purpose tray, see tray 1
multi-sheet printing 29
N
network cards, see EIO cards
network troubleshooting 571, 573
noise
emissions 88
troubleshooting 576
O
offline test (HP Digital Copy 320) 719
offset adjustment (HP Digital Copy 320) 177
online technical assistance 64
operating
environment 80
overview 91
optical unit (HP Digital Copy 320) 525
optics
cleaning 165
systems 29
optional output accessory (HP Digital Copy 320) 483
options, see accessories
ordering
accessories 40
parts 726
ordering parts 61
output accessory 483
output paper sensor PCA (printer) 312
output tray (HP Digital Copy 320) 497
brackets 539
flip-out 497
overcurrent/overvoltage protection 182
overhead transparencies, see transparencies
overriding control panel settings 94
ozone production 68
P
page count
configuring 300
determining 154
setting 141, 143
troubleshooting 577
page skew 577, 660
pages per minute (ppm) 26
panel cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 509
paper
components 200
delivery 223
motion 187
ordering 42
path 29
paths 200
perforated 60
selection guidelines (HP Digital Copy 320) 56
separation 198
shipping 54
size 56
sizes and memory requirements 49
specifications (HP Digital Copy 320) 56
specifications (Mopier and paper-handling
devices) 50, 52
specifications guide 45
storing 54
weight equivalence table 55
paper bins (8-bin mailbox) 439
paper chute flip-out (HP Digital Copy 320) 496
paper deck drive assembly (2 x 500-sheet input tray)
operation 208, 212
removing and replacing 381
paper feed, troubleshooting 577
paper guide
8-bin mailbox 446
cleaning 164
paper handling
controller messages 632
menu 105
troubleshooting process 566
paper input unit (PIU)
removing and replacing 310
sensor 327
paper jams
8-bin mailbox or mailbox with stapler 578
detection 232
troubleshooting 633, 634, 637
paper path
cleaning 159
cover (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 410
sensors (HP Digital Copy 320) 249
test 153, 636, 684
troubleshooting 633, 712
paper quantity switch assembly (2000-sheet input
tray) 356
paper size
cold reset 95, 141, 144
PCA 316
paper size switches
830 Index C4265-90907
2 x 500-sheet input tray 212
2000-sheet input tray 356
trays 2 & 3 203
paper source default 95
paper trays
2 x 500-sheet input tray 390
2000-sheet input tray 343
capacity 50
paper-handling devices
diagnostics 669
dimensions 85
locations 38
ordering 40
parts and diagrams 728
specifications 50, 85
verifying installation 641
paper-handling messages 592
parallel cables
ordering 44
pin configuration 234
specifications 234
part lists
copier 762
alphabetical 787
numerical 801
how to use 726
paper-handling 744
alphabetical 777
numerical 791
printer 730
alphabetical 777
numerical 791
parts
diagrams 725
ordering 61, 726
PCL
fonts 26
memory requirements 49
PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference Documentation
Package 45
PCL 5e and PCL 6 26
perforated paper 60
personalities, see languages
phone numbers
ordering parts 61
technical assistance 64
PhoneNET cable 44
photosensitive drum 191
pick roller assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 491
pick rollers, cleaning 164
pickup assembly
2 x 500-sheet input tray 379
2000-sheet input tray 350
printer 294
pickup rollers
2 x 500-sheet input tray 383
2000-sheet input tray 354
printer 326
pin configuration, parallel cable 234
pins (locating)
2 x 500-sheet input tray 394
2000-sheet input tray 173, 361
PIU, see paper input unit
plus key 93
PM kit, see preventative maintenance
PostScript Emulation, requirements 49
PostScript Level 2 emulation (PS)
fonts 26
memory requirements 49
power box 44
power control 27
power cord (y) 486
power distribution system 181
power rating 37
power save mode
description 184
electrical specifications 87
power supply
2 x 500-sheet input tray 213, 387
2000-sheet input tray 352
7-bin tabletop mailbox 409
8-bin mailbox 438
HP Digital Copy 320 515, 523
operation (2000-sheet input tray or 2 x 500-sheet
input tray 209
see also high voltage power supply
or low voltage power supply
troubleshooting 582, 704
PowerSave 27
power-up
copy module 239, 241
Mopier 242
printer components 242
testing 683
ppm, see pages per minute
precautions 252
preventative maintenance
about 167
count 143, 300
ordering kit 45
print job interrupt 248
print quality
cleaning Mopier 158
menu 108
troubleshooting 649
print settings
density adjustment 183
resolution 26
speed 26
C4265-90907 Index 831
printer
cleaning 159
communication 248
comparisons of features 27
dimensions 81, 85, 86
diverter assembly 279, 280
door assembly
diverter 280
right lower 281
driver information 94
electrical specifications 87
face-up solenoid assembly 331
features 26
feeder assembly 298
formatter assembly
fan 287
removing 300, 301
fusing assembly 302
gear assembly 306
hardware table 262
laser/scanner
fan 284
removing and replacing 304
messages 592
paper input unit (PIU)
removing and replacing 310
sensor 327
paper paths and components 200
part locations 725
power-up 242
removing and replacing 264
resetting 96
rollers
feed 324, 326
pickup 326
separation 324, 326
transfer 332
separation pad 325
solenoid 331
specifications 85
testing 153
timing 232
troubleshooting process 565
verifying communication 573
Printer firmware, remote upgrade 148
printer stand (7-bin tabletop mailbox)
dimensions and weight 86
ordering 41
printing
file directory page 644
from envelope feeder 204
from tray 1 203
from trays 2 and 3 203
JetDirect configuration page 573
menu map 639
multiple images per sheet 29
with duplexer 204
printing menu 110
printing supplies 42
Private Job 47
problems, resolving, see troubleshooting
product ID (HP Mopier 320) 242
Proof and Hold 47
PS, see PostScript Level 2 emulation
PS1, see registration sensor
PS2, see paper input unit sensor
purchasing, see ordering
Q
quality of documents 57
Quick Copy 47
R
ready light 93
recycling toner cartridges 63
refrigerators 80
registration assembly
cleaning roller 159
removing and replacing 321
sensor 329
registration roller, cleaning 160
registration, faulty 660
regulations, FCC 66
regulatory information 37
reinstalling, see replacing
remanufactured assemblies 62
Remote upgrade of Printer Firmware 148
Remote upgrade, firmware, printer 148
Remote upgrade, printer firmware 148
removing
2 x 500-sheet input tray 257, 364
2000-sheet input tray 257, 335
7-bin tabletop mailbox 259, 397
8-bin mailbox 258, 434
copy module
ADF unit assemblies 525
flatbed assemblies 538
maintenance parts 490
skins 495
duplexer 256, 478
major assemblies
overview 252
required tools 253
paper jams 638
printer assembly 264
stapler 466
user installable accessories 254
repair process 61
832 Index C4265-90907
repetitive defects
ruler 665
troubleshooting 657
replacing
2 x 500-sheet input tray 257, 364
2000-sheet input tray 257, 335
7-bin tabletop mailbox 259, 397
8-bin mailbox 258, 434
copy module
ADF unit assemblies 525
flatbed assemblies 538
maintenance parts 490
skins 495
duplexer 256, 478
major assemblies
overview 252
required tools 253
printer assembly 264
stapler 466
user installable accessories 254
requirements, memory 48
resets menu 125
resetting printer 96
resolution 26
resolution enhancement (REt) 26
description 185
resolving problems, see troubleshooting
Resource Manager 47
REt (resolution enhancement) 26
description 185
reversing mechanism (7-bin tabletop mailbox)
motor 423
solenoid 429
RFI cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 517
ribbon cable, front panel (HP Digital Copy 320) 507,
557
rollers
2 x 500-sheet input tray 383
2000-sheet input tray 208, 354
cleaning, pickup, and feed 160
HP Digital Copy 320 491
printer
feed 324, 326
pickup 326
separation 324, 326
transfer 332
separation 208
troubleshooting 664
rolling printer onto optional stand 482
S
safety precautions 70, 252
scanner
see HP Digital Copy 320
see laser/scanner
scanner drive 187
scanning, one pass duplex 29
screws hardware table
HP Digital Copy 320 487
Mopier 262
SDRAM DIMMs, ordering 43
see also memory
select key 93
selecting menu items 100
self test, see configuration page
sensor unit assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 530
sensors
2 x 500-sheet input tray 675
2000-sheet input tray 206, 671
7-bin tabletop mailbox 679
empty bin 417
face-up 422
full bin and interlock 419
8-bin mailbox 221
PSEntry 223
PSFaceUp 223
activating 671
diagram 691
HP Digital Copy 320 719
home position 542
unit assembly 530
locating 200
output paper 312
paper input unit (PIU) 327
registration 329
testing 671, 675, 679
separation pad (Mopier)
cleaning 160
tray 1 325
separation pad assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 490
separation roller
2 x 500-sheet input tray 383
2000-sheet input tray 354
printer 326
serial number
configuration page 154
configuring 300
location 37
setting 141, 143
troubleshooting 577
server, troubleshooting 575
service
approach 61
during and after the warranty 78
service mode
HP Digital Copy 320 145
Mopier 141
testing 723
setting up, see configuring
settings, control panel 94
C4265-90907 Index 833
7-bin tabletop mailbox
collator mode 218, 225
controller PCA 408
covers
back 402
front 399
latch 433
top 404
diagnostics 677
dimensions 86
diverter assembly 425
door assembly 410
electrical specifications 87
empty bin sensor PCA 417
face-down bins 414
face-up sensors PCA 422
face-up/diverter assembly (flipper) 425
flipper assembly 425
flipper solenoid 430
full bin and interlock sensor PCA 419
handle 431
identification label 37
interlock sensor PCA 419
latching mechanism 432
LED PCA 421
messages 616
modes 217
operation 216
ordering 40
orientation 398
paper path cover 410
paper paths and components 214
parts and diagrams 751
power supply 409
removing and replacing 259, 397
reversing mechanism motor 423
right door assembly (paper path cover) 410
short tray 7 428
solenoid reversing mechanism 429
specifications 51
stand
dimensions and weight 86
ordering 41
troubleshooting 677
verifying installation 641
virtual stacker mode 218
weight 86
shipping lock 481
shipping paper 54
short tray 7 (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 428
site requirements 79
sizes of paper 56
skew 577, 660
skins (HP Digital Copy 320) 495
slides, see transparencies
slots 26
SME, see Support Materials Europe
smeared toner 655
SMO, see Support Materials Organization
smoothing images 185
SMT1 188
solenoids
7-bin tabletop mailbox
flipper 430
reversing mechanism 429
diagram 692
locations 200
printer 331
solving problems, see troubleshooting
space requirements 81
specifications
acoustic emissions 88
electrical 87
ordering guide 45
paper 52
paper trays, bins, and accessories 50
printer and paper-handling devices 85
specks 656
speed (pages per minute) 26
stabilizing feet (2000-sheet input tray) 362
stacker mode
7-bin tabletop mailbox 218
8-bin mailbox 224
stand (7-bin tabletop mailbox)
dimensions and weight 86
ordering 41
stands (HP Digital Copy 320) 480, 482
stapler
back plate 469
bed assembly 475
controller PCA 471
dimensions 86
eject cycle 230
hinges 477
messages 628
non-HP cartridges 63
operation 227
paper feed cycle 229
paper jams 578
paper paths and components 225
parts and diagrams 741, 743, 761
removing and replacing 466
stapling cycle 230
top cover 474
verifying installation 641
weight 86
start button checks 245
status bar (HP Digital Copy 320) 127
storage paper tray (2 x 500-sheet input tray) 390
Stored Job 47
834 Index C4265-90907
storing
paper 54
toner 84
straight-through paper path 29
sunlight, environment 80
supplies (ordering information) 40
Support Materials Europe (SME) 61, 726
Support Materials Organization (SMO) 61, 726
support, see troubleshooting
switches
2 x 500-sheet input tray, paper size 212
2000-sheet input tray 206
8-bin mailbox 221
detecting tray 209
diagram 691
function 207, 212
paper quantity 207
paper size 207
trays 2 & 3 (paper size) 203
T
tabletop mailbox, see 7-bin tabletop mailbox
tape and housing assembly (8-bin mailbox) 448
technical assistance 64
technical support, see troubleshooting
temperature
environment 80, 84
for labels 53
for transparencies 54
temporary errors 710
tension springs (2000-sheet input tray) 360
testing
configuration page
HP Digital Copy 320 716
Mopier 153
paper path 153, 636
paper-handling devices 669
printer 641
text on control panel 96
tightening the ADF belt 535
timing (printer) 232
toner
consumption 68
storing 84
toner cartridge
cleaning spills 160
contacts 183, 190
detection 183
image formation 190
life expectancy 62
ordering 42
recycling 63
refilled 63
troubleshooting 650
warranty 63
weight 85
toner smear 655
tools 253
transfer roller assembly
cleaning 160
removing and replacing 332
transparencies
guidelines 54
paper jams 578
transport belt motor (8-bin mailbox) 444
tray 1
feed roller 324
pickup assembly 294
printing from 203
removing and replacing 291
separation pad 324, 325
specifications 50
tray 7 (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 428
tray selection
default paper source 95
troubleshooting 577, 579
trays 2 & 3
adjustment procedure 169
pickup motor 188
printing from 203
removing and replacing 334
rollers 326
specifications 50
trays 4 & 5, removing and replacing 377
tray-size sensing PCA (2 x 500-sheet input tray) 385
troubleshooting
c-link cables 571
communication 571, 705
connections 571
control panel 586
diagnostic tools 669, 682
drum rotation functional check 667
EIO accessories 573
engine 585
envelopes 577, 578
event log 586
fusing images 579
general 576
half self test functional check 666
high voltage power supply check 667
HP Digital Copy 320 703
image quality 649, 651, 713
image skew 577
interface 573
messages 592
noises 576
paper curl 581
paper feed 577
paper jams 578, 633, 634, 637
paper-handling devices 669
power-on 582, 704
preliminary check list 570
C4265-90907 Index 835
print quality 649
printer stops/hangs 578
process 562
copy module 568
printer system 565
printer/paper-handling 566
rollers 664
server 575
starting 718
toner cartridge 650
tray selection 579
2 x 500-sheet input tray (trays 4 & 5)
troubleshooting 577
adjustable foot tip 393
casters 392
controller PCA 384
covers
back 366
front top 374
left 367
right 371
diagnostics 673
dimensions 85
electrical specifications 87
front door (storage area) 391
front LED PCA 395
identification label 37
lifter 213
locating pins 394
main cable 388
messages 612
operation 212
ordering 40
orientation 365
paper deck drive assembly 381
paper paths and components 210
paper tray 390
parts and diagrams 748
pickup and feed system 212
pickup assembly 379
power supply 213, 387
printing from 209
removing and replacing 257, 364
rollers 383
specifications 50, 85
storage paper tray 390
tray-size sensing PCA 385
troubleshooting 673, 675
verifying installation 641
vertical transfer unit (VTU) 368
weight 85
2000-sheet input tray (tray 4)
diagnostics 669
diagrams 699, 701
troubleshooting 669
2-sided printing 204
2000-sheet input tray (tray 4)
adjustable foot 363
adjustment procedure 172
cable harness 344
casters 362
clutches 206
controller PCA 346
covers
back 338
front 337
left 339
right 340
dimensions 85
drive assembly 341
electrical specifications 87
features 205
front LED PCA assembly 348
identification label 37
LEDs 672
lifter operation 209
locating pins 361
main cable harness 344
main drive assembly 341
messages 608
motor test 669
motors 206
operation 207
ordering 40
orientation 336
paper paths and components 205
paper quantity switch assembly 356
paper size switch assembly 356
paper tray 343
pickup and feed system 207
pickup assembly 350
power supply 209, 352
printing from 209
removing and replacing 257, 335
rollers 354
sensor test 671
sensors 206
specifications 50, 85
stand-alone running test 669
switches 206
tension springs 360
troubleshooting 576, 577
verifying installation 641
vertical transfer unit (VTU) 358
weight 85
wiring diagram 701
typefaces, see fonts
836 Index C4265-90907
U
Upgrade, printer firmware 148
upgradung copy module firmware 150
upper cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 512
user installable accessories 254
user status LED PCA (8-bin mailbox) 462
V
vacuum for cleaning 161
value key 93
VCCI statement (Japan) 74
ventillation 80
vertical magnification adjustment (HP Digital Copy
320) 177
vertical transfer unit (VTU)
2 x 500-sheet input tray 368
2000-sheet input tray 358
virtual stacker mode
7-bin tabletop mailbox 218
8-bin mailbox 224
W
warranty 77
water 80
Web technical assistance 64
weight of paper 55
white lines 662
white page 651
windows 80
wiring diagram
2000-sheet input tray 701
8-bin mailbox 702
mailbox with stapler 698
printer, see foldout pages
words on control panel 96
world wide web technical assistance 65
Y
y power cord 486
copyright © 2000
Hewlett-Packard Company
english
service manual
hp
print systems and paper
handling devices
LaserJet
8100 and 8150
*C4265-90907*
*C4265-90907*
C4265-90907
www.s-manuals.com

Navigation menu